Request for Tender (**Insert RFT/D202x-Number**)
for
(**Insert Title of RFT**)

Appendix D, D-1 – The Deliverables

Document 4 of 5

Electronic submission required

Table of Contents

Table of Contents	2

Attachments:	5

Special Provisions – General Requirements	1

.1	Scope of work	1

.2	Standard specifications and drawings	1

.3	Approved products	3

.4	Construction schedule	3

.5	Soils and examination of site	4

.6	On-site and excess soil management	5

.7	On-site and excess soil management	19

.8	Traffic control and safety	23

.9	Penalty clauses for early closing or late opening of Street/Road name (Regional Road/Highway xx) lanes and ramps	25

.10	Surface restoration	26

.11	General	32

.12	Occupational health and safety act and Ontario regulation 213/91 – construction projects	34

.13	Designated Substances	34

.14	Private property site use agreements and releases	36

.15	Work in the vicinity of utilities	37

.16	Work within the Transcanada pipelines limited (TCPL) right-of-way	38

.17	Work within the Trans-northern pipelines incorporated (TNPL) right-of-way	38

.18	Work within the Canadian National Railway (CN) right-of-way	39

.19	Work within the Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway (CPKC) right-of-way	44

.20	Watercourse/fisheries protection	47

.21	Provisional items	48

Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications	49

.1	RMDCS Section 01450 - Quality control	49

.2	RMDCS Section 01520 – Construction facilities	49

.3	RMDCS Section 02530 - Pipe sewers	49

.4	OPSS.MUNI 102 – Weighing of materials	49

.5	OPSS.MUNI 180 – Management of excess materials	52

.6	OPSS.MUNI 206 – Construction specification for grading	52

.7	OPSS.MUNI 212 – Borrow	53

.8	OPSS.MUNI 310 – Hot mix asphalt	55

.9	OPSS.MUNI 314 – Construction specification for untreated granular subbase, base, surface, shoulder, and stockpiling	58

.10	OPSS.MUNI 330 – In-place full depth reclamation of bituminous pavement and underlying granular	58

.11	OPSS.MUNI 331 – Full depth reclamation with expanded asphalt stabilization	59

.12	OPSS.MUNI 351 – Concrete sidewalk	59

.13	OPSS.MUNI 355 – Installation of interlocking concrete pavers	60

.14	OPSS.MUNI 402 – Excavating, backfilling, and compacting for maintenance holes, catch basins, ditch inlets, and valve chambers	60

.15	OPSS.MUNI 407 – Maintenance hole, catch basin, ditch inlet, and valve chamber installation	61

.16	OPSS.MUNI 408 – Adjusting or rebuilding maintenance holes, catch basins, ditch inlets, and valve chambers	61

.17	OPSS.MUNI 410 – Pipe sewer installation in open cut	62

.18	OPSS.MUNI 421 – Pipe culvert installation in open cut	62

.19	OPSS.MUNI 710 – Pavement marking	62

.20	OPSS.MUNI 802 – Topsoil	63

.21	OPSS.MUNI 803 – Sodding	64

.22	OPSS.MUNI 804 – Seed and cover	65

.23	OPSS.MUNI 1010 – Aggregates - base, subbase, select subgrade, and backfill material	65

.24	OPSS.MUNI 1101 – Performance graded asphalt cement	67

Special Provisions – Tender Items	74

Roadworks	74

Sanitary Sewers	215

Watermains	258

Traffic Signals	330

Roadway Illumination	423

Structures	444

Landscaping	526

Environmental Measures	533

General Items	570

Microtunnelling	595

Attachment 6: Excess Soil Transportation Monthly Summary Report	638

Attachment 7: Property Owner’s Release Form for Accepting Excess Soil for Beneficial Reuse (In place of OPSF 180-2)	639

Attachments:

Attachment 6 – Excess Soil Transportation Monthly Summary Report

Attachment 7 – Property Owner’s Release Form for Accepting Excess Soil for Beneficial Reuse

SPEC. NOTE:
1. Refer to the document titled “Special Provisions Document Writing and Formatting Guidelines” for formatting of the Special Provisions.
2. For contracts involving railways or high-pressure gas pipelines, the Specifier must ensure that the clauses provided are complete and up to date.
3. Note to Specifier: Leave revision date unchanged so that the Region can compare to template current to the tendering and update as required.

Special Provisions – General Requirements

Scope of work

The work generally consists of (insert general description here).

These Special Provisions apply and are part of the Contract and take precedence over all Contract Drawings, Standard Specifications, General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions pertaining to the Contract.

Provide all labour, equipment, material, and supervision necessary to complete the work as specified and shown in the Contract Documents.

All requirements of the Contract Documents shall be performed by the Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise.

Include in Contract prices bid all costs to perform all work as required by the Contract Documents except that work explicitly noted as being performed by others.

All documents referenced in the Special Provisions or on the Contract Drawings shall be considered part of the Contract Documents and all information, recommendations and requirements in such referenced documents shall be considered in the Contract prices. Referenced documents are intended to supplement the Special Provisions and Contract Drawings and therefore where a conflict exists between a referenced document and either the Special Provisions or the Contract Drawings, then the Special Provisions and Contract Drawings shall take precedence in interpreting the requirements of the contract.

The Region will be digging test holes on xxxx xx, 20xx at 9:00 a.m. Attendance at these test holes is optional.

Standard specifications and drawings

The Regional Municipality of Durham Construction Specifications for Regional Services (RMDCS), latest revisions as of the tender advertisement date, shall apply to this contract.

All specifications in Volume 1 - Division 1 - General Specifications of the Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications shall apply to this contract.

The municipal and provincial common specifications and drawings in Ontario Provincial Standards (OPS) Volumes 1 to 4 and the municipal-oriented specifications in OPS Volumes 7 and 8 apply to this Contract. Unless specified in the Contract Documents, OPS Volumes 5 and 6 (provincial-oriented specifications) shall not apply to this contract. Applicable specified Ontario Provincial Specifications (OPSS) and Drawings (OPSD) shall be the latest revisions.

Where a conflict exists between the RMDCS and OPSS, the RMDCS shall take precedence.

All referenced Regional Municipality of Durham Standard Drawings (RMDSD) shall be latest revisions as of the tender advertisement date. Download the Standard Drawings on the Region of Durham website.

All referenced Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS) within the RMDCS and within the Contract Documents shall be the latest revisions as of the tender advertisement date. Download the OPSS’s on the Ministry of Transportation of Ontario website.

All referenced Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings (OPSD) within the RMDCS and within the Contract Documents shall be the latest revisions as of the tender advertisement date. Download the OPSD’s on the Ministry of Transportation of Ontario website.

The following other Standard Drawings shall apply to this contract.

Other Standard Drawings

Detail number	Rev. number /Date	Detail number	Rev. number /Date
OS-220	2	OS-320	3
OS-301	5	OS-321	2
OS-302	1	OS-322	1
OS-303	4	OS-323	2
OS-304	6	OS-601	2
OS-305	1	-	-

CAD files provided by the Region of Durham at the construction stage are to be used at Contractor’s own discretion/risk. These files are not to supersede the contract documents in anyway, and any discrepancies found between the CAD files and the Contract Documents, shall be brought forth to the owner immediately. CAD files are not to be used for layout purposes. Should the Contractor so choose to use the files for layout, they will do so at their own risk.

Approved products

Install only products listed on the Region of Durham Approved Manufacturers’ Products List (MPL). The up-to-date approved products list is maintained on the Road Authority (https://www.roadauthority.com) website.

Base tendered prices on the most current MPL at the time of tender closing. Products added to the MPL after the tender closing date may also be used. Do not use products which were removed from the MPL after the tender closing date but substitute other approved products.

Construction schedule

Reference:
RMDCS Section 01310

SPEC. NOTE:
For contracts requiring staging of work, see SP’s for D2019-040, D2020-24, D2021-24, and D2021-31 for sample specs. Be sure to include mobilization/ demobilization for pulverizing in the staging plan.

This project is scheduled for start of construction in xxxxx, (SPEC NOTE: Add month/year or month/day/year if required) 202x.

Upon receipt of signed contract agreement, bonds and insurance, the Region will issue an Order to Commence Work. The successful bidder shall commence work within 14 calendar days of receipt of the Region’s Commence Work Order Letter. No Work shall be started at the Place of Work until the official Order to Commence has been issued by the Region.

Substantially perform the Work within xxxx weeks of the issuance of the Contract Administrator’s Order to Commence Work.

Complete the Work in its entirety within xxxx weeks of the issuance of the Contract Administrator’s Order to Commence Work.

SPEC. NOTE: The following clause is required in road contracts where traffic detection loops will be required, and surface asphalt is proposed to be placed under the contract immediately after newly placed binder courses:

Allow a minimum of three Working Days between placement of the top lift of binder course asphalt and the first lift of surface course asphalt in order to provide time for the Region’s forces to install vehicle detection loops. Provide notice to the Contract Administrator a minimum of two weeks in advance of placement of surface course asphalt. Ensure that any changes in the paving schedule are coordinated with the Region's forces.

The Contractor shall, within 14 calendar days after bid acceptance, submit the proposed construction schedule to the Contract Administrator for approval. Reference Standard Specifications Section 01310 for Contractor's Responsibilities regarding contract scheduling. The construction schedule shall be in the form of a GANTT Chart. The construction schedule shall show clearly in weekly stages the proposed progress on the main items, structures, and sub-trades of the Contract. The construction schedule shall be reviewed and updated at each progress meeting or as requested by the Contract Administrator.

Where other work is in progress within or adjacent to the limits of the Contract, co-operate and coordinate with other Contractor(s), Utility Companies and the Region of Durham and allow reasonable, free access to their work at all times.

Soils and examination of site

Reference:
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 180
Contract Documents – Supplementary General Conditions of Contract – Appendix SGC-F
RMDCS Section 01301, Clause 1.06
OPSS.MUNI 180
Pre-Construction Dig-up Report

Geotechnical Investigation information has been included as follows:

Geotechnical and Soil Characterization:

List Reports

Geotechnical:

List Reports

Assessment of Past Uses:

List Report(s)

Hydrogeological Assessment:

List Report(s)

The Region will dig Test Holes on site during the tender period as noted on the Test Hole Notice in the Tender Documents. (Include if relevant) Test holes will include additional Soil Characterization sampling and testing. Results are available within the Pre-Construction Dig-up Report attached to the Contract documents.

SPEC NOTE: Use the following On-site and excess soil management General Requirement for projects WITH excess soil removal from Project Area

On-site and excess soil management

Reference:
O. Reg. 406/19 and Reg. 347
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Soils and examination of site Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 180
OPSS.MUNI 180

The Contractor shall comply with Ontario Regulation 406/19 On-Site and Excess Soil Management (O.Reg. 406/19, the “Excess Soil Regulation”), as amended, made under the Environmental Protection Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. E.19 (the “EPA”) and all other documents applicable to the Excess Soil Regulation including, but not limited to, the Rules for Soil Management and Excess Soil Quality Standards (the “Soil Rules”). The Contractor shall also comply with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 347 General — Waste Management (Reg. 347, the “Waste Regulation”), as amended, made under the EPA. If there are discrepancies between OPSS.MUNI 180 and either O.Reg. 406/19 or Reg. 347, the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19 and Reg. 347 take precedence.

Terms used in this Special Provision have the meanings defined in the Excess Soil Regulation, the Soil Rules, and the Waste Regulation, as applicable, including the terms project area, soil, crushed rock, liquid soil, rock, topsoil, landfill, dump, waste, soil processing, public body, and Registry. Backfill, granular, earth, material, and borrow that meets the definition of soil or crushed rock per O.Reg. 406/19 must be managed per the Excess Soil Regulation, unless the material is obtained from a licensed aggregate pit or quarry and is managed under the Aggregate Resources Act (ARA). Topsoil shall be managed in a manner consistent with the Soil Rules referenced by O.Reg. 406/19.

“Receiving sites” means sites that can accept excess soil, including reuse sites, Class 1 soil management sites, Class 2 soil management sites, local waste transfer facilities, landfilling sites and dumps, as such terms are defined in O.Reg. 406/19, only as permitted by O.Reg. 406/19. Receiving sites that are landfilling sites or dumps must be waste disposal sites under and in accordance with a current and appropriate Ontario Ministry of Environment, Conservation and Parks (MECP) Environmental Compliance Approval (ECA) under Section 27 of the EPA.

Unless otherwise approved by the Contract Administrator, the Contractor shall not remove soil from the project area until a notice is attested by Contract Administrator on the Registry in accordance with the Excess Soil Regulation.

Within 14 calendar days after Award of the Contract, and prior to removing any soil from the project area, the Contractor shall provide to the Contract Administrator for review and approval an Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan that outlines the means by which the Contractor will deliver the work in alignment with the Excess Soil Regulation. This plan shall include, but not be limited to:

Identification of the Qualified Person per O.Reg. 406/19 (QP) obtained by the Contractor to support delivery of the work in alignment with O.Reg. 406/19 (Contractor QP) and a summary of the Contractor QP’s professional qualifications, including a curriculum vitae (CV) and proof of qualifications meeting the requirements of O. Reg 406/19. The Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan needs to be reviewed, approved, and signed by the Contractor QP.

A description of the Contractor’s plan for delineating areas for the staging of temporary excess soil stockpiles within the right-of-way, or on an adjacent property(ies) as the project progresses. It is the Contractor’s sole responsibility and cost to arrange for and obtain approvals for any and all temporary storage of excess soils outside of the Municipal right-of-way/road allowance.

Describe the Contractor’s approach for deploying Erosion and Sediment Control and Dust Control measures for the control of sediment, sediment laden runoff and/or dust from migrating away from the temporary excess soil staging areas during periods when sampling and testing results are pending. These measures are above and beyond the requirements prescribed on the Contract documents for project erosion and sediment control.

Describe the Contractor’s approach for in-situ and/or ex-situ material sampling frequency, testing and reporting results back to the Contract Administrator, if additional testing is required for excess soil and earth borrow soil, as well as the Contractor’s procedure for notifying the CA when test results are such that any materials that have a verified exceedance of the conditions for "Industrial / Commercial / Community Property Use" as specified in Table 2 of the Ministry of the Environment, Conservation and Parks’ document "Soil, Ground Water and Sediment Standards for Use Under Part XV.1 of the Environmental Protection Act" or as outlined in the Geotechnical Report borehole and test hole Soil Characterization sampling recommendations.

Describe the Contractor’s approach for the compilation of documentation produced by the Contractor into a Final deliverable for the purpose of records retention.

Identify the location of the Contractor’s planned soil reuse and/or storage site, including all information required per O.Reg. 406/19. This confirmation shall itemize the volume of soil planned to be accepted by each site. Note Region sites requiring soil are to receive priority consideration for exported soil. Potential reuse sites are to be discussed with the Region during the development of the Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan to assess whether there are Region sites that can be accessed as a reuse site.

Identify the Contractor’s planned haul route for transport of excess soil to all off-site disposal locations. The planned haul route shall comply with the By-Laws of all applicable Road Authorities (Provincial, Regional and Local Municipalities). The Contractor’s planned haul route shall minimize, to the extent feasible, haulage traffic on Local Municipality roadways.

For imported soil, identify the location of the Contractor’s planned soil source sites, and indicate the soil quality information that is expected to be provided for Contract Administrator review and approval. Provide an itemized list of the volume of soil planned to be imported from each proposed source site. (SPECT NOTE: List Region specified sites known at the time of Tender as appropriate) Note Region sites producing excess soil are to receive priority consideration as source sites. Potential source sites are to be discussed with the Region during the development of the Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan to assess whether there are Region sites that can be accessed as a soil source.

The excavation approach for the project area (e.g., construction sequencing), the hauler names, the mechanism for ensuring haulers have the required regulatory information for each load, the planned routes to the receiving sites, the tracking and related documentation system that will be employed, and other, as required.

Soil shall not be removed from the project area until the Contract Administrator has approved the Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation, including, without limitation, delays or standby time resulting from review and revision of the Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Following the finalization of the Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan, the Contractor shall be responsible for inputting the project information into the RPRA Excess Soil Registry on behalf of the Contract Administrator. The Contract Administrator will delegate access to the Contractor as required. The Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator once they have input the project information into the RPRA Excess Soil Registry. Upon receiving this notification, the Contract Administrator will review the information uploaded by the Contractor, attest, and submit the Initial Submission Declaration on the Registry. The Contract Administrator will pay the registration fee due to the RPRA upon filing when the application is attested.

The Contractor’s QP shall be responsible for any and all updates to the information uploaded to the Registry and the Contractor shall expeditiously notify the Contract Administrator of any updates required and/or completed due to changes to the Contractor’s means and/or methods for excess soil management in accordance O. Reg 406/19.

Excavation and reuse of existing on-site suitable material shall be in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19 and as per OPSS.MUNI 206 and 501. The Contractor shall be responsible for the management of all soil and crushed rock (including both dry and liquid soil, and topsoil) associated with this project, including but not limited to excavation, handling, storage, transportation, placement, disposal, and documentation, including when it is reused on-site. The Contractor shall refer to available environmental and/or geotechnical investigation reports and recommendations regarding the quality of in-situ materials within the project area and be responsible for completing additional soil characterization and documentation, if needed, in accordance with O. Reg 406/19. This could include additional sampling in areas of suspected contamination, as identified within investigation reports and as encountered during excavation.

The Contractor QP shall be approved by the Contract Administrator and shall undertake appropriate soil testing, if required. Soil samples shall be collected and analyzed in accordance with the requirements specified in O.Reg. 406/19, including analysis by an accredited environmental testing laboratory. Sampling frequency and analytical parameters shall be determined by the Contractor QP in consideration of the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19 and Reg. 347, and in consultation with the Contract Administrator.

The results obtained from excavation and sampling will be used to classify soils for the purposes of reuse or, if unsuitable for on-site reuse, disposal off-site. The Contractor QP will receive the laboratory analytical results for the soil to be classified and make a recommendation regarding management options to the CA for their review and acceptance. The Contractor QP will provide documentation regarding the laboratory analytical results (e.g., laboratory certificates of analysis, accompanying data summary tables, and sampling location figures) for review by the Contract Administrator.

During construction of the works, the Contractor QP or their representative shall complete visual inspection, on a daily basis, of material excavated within the project area to confirm that the material is free of contaminant staining, free product, unusual odours, contaminant sheen, or deleterious materials of anthropogenic origin (e.g., debris). A contingency procedure shall be established prior to the start of construction works that provides actions to be taken should soil be encountered that is suspected to be contaminated. Such actions shall include those indicated in O.Reg. 406/19, including but not limited to:

Stopping all excavations in the project area immediately upon observing potential contamination.

Notifying the Contract Administrator and Contractor QP immediately.

Putting steps in place to identify and segregate the affected soil from other soil in the project area, determine the portion of the project area that is affected, and manage the affected soil according to O.Reg. 406/19.

The Contractor shall comply with any orders issued by a provincial officer.

The Contractor is solely responsible for the location and management of stockpiles on-site as they relate to traffic management, construction staging, and the effective management of construction productivity. The Contractor is responsible for the management and handling of excess soil in temporary stockpile areas, including all temporary erosion and sediment control and dust control measures. With the exception of such variances as may be allowed under O.Reg. 406/19, the Soil Rules, and/or site-specific instruments that may be in effect for the project, such as Environmental Compliance Approvals (ECAs) or municipal permits, stockpiling and storage of soil shall be according to the Soil Rules referenced by O.Reg. 406/19, including, but not limited to, the following:

Managed in such a way as to prevent adverse effects relating to noise, dust, mud tracking, leaching, run-off and erosion, and odour or other air impacts.

Stored in stockpiles with total volume of less than 2,500 m3.

Soil of different quality, or from different areas, or that has not yet been sampled is segregated.

Stored more than 30 m away from a waterbody, and more than 10 m away from property boundaries.

Stored in a manner that prevents leaching of contaminants into the groundwater.

SPEC NOTE: Applicable to management of liquid soil. Delete if not relevant Liquid soil that is stored at the project area shall be managed in accordance with the following:

All storage and processing locations of liquid soil shall be readily accessible for inspection by a provincial officer.

All liquid soil shall be stored in a leakproof container on an impermeable surface in a manner sufficient to contain and prevent the material from escaping into the natural environment.

No more than 10,000 cubic metres of liquid soil, processed or dewatered or solidified soil and process residues may be present at the site at any one time.

(SPEC NOTE: Applicable to management of liquid soil. Delete if not relevant, consider potential and/or specified use of hydro-vac excavation in Contract, saturated soils upon excavation) Soil that has a slump of more than 150 mm using the slump test described in Reg. 347 is considered to be liquid soil. Liquid soil shall not be removed from a site unless it is managed as liquid waste according to a waste ECA, managed as liquid soil for beneficial reuse under another instrument described in O.Reg. 406/19, or has been processed such that it can be managed as dry soil. If excess soil is removed from the site as liquid soil, the valves that are part of the vehicle shall have a locking system and shall be locked when the vehicle contains the liquid soil and the owner or operator of the vehicle is not in attendance, and whenever liquid soil is being transferred to or from the vehicle, the owner or operator of the vehicle must be present.

In accordance with O.Reg. 406/19 and the Soil Rules, processing of liquid soil may proceed at the source site or at a local waste transfer facility without waste approvals if processing is done by passive aeration, passive or mechanical dewatering, mixing with similar quality material (but not for the purposes of dilution), turning, sorting for size or removing debris, or mixing with a dewatering/solidification material. Storage and processing locations shall be readily accessible for inspection by MECP. The liquid soil shall be contained in a leakproof container or on an impermeable surface in a manner sufficient to contain and prevent the material from escaping into the natural environment, and the amount of liquid soil processed shall be limited to no more than 10,000 m3.

If additives are used for soil mixing, the amount of additive (e.g., untreated woodchips/sawdust, bentonite, or polymer) shall be limited to the amount required to enable transportation or reuse of the soil, and shall not exceed the amount recommended by the product manufacturer or distributor. If a polymer is used for mixing, controls shall be implemented as per O.Reg. 406/19, including written documentation of processing procedures, and the Contractor QP shall provide a statement that they are of the opinion that the additive will not result in an adverse effect or change the characterization of soil quality.

The Contractor QP will provide justification for the selected processing method, the soil sampling methodology and timing (e.g., whether before or after mixing), and related documentation, including laboratory analytical results (e.g., laboratory certificates of analysis, accompanying data summary tables, and sampling location figures) and information on additives (if relevant) to the Contract Administrator for their review and acceptance.

Processing of soil on or off-site shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Excess Soil Regulation, the Soil Rules, and the Waste Regulation. If processing using natural polymer or synthetic polymer additives is proposed, further discussion with the Contract Administrator is required.

Excavation and off-site management of soil and crushed rock which is excess to the requirements for backfill or fill, or unsuitable for on-site reuse, shall be in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19. When possible, Region sites requiring soil are to receive priority consideration for exported soil. The Contractor shall be responsible for the management of all soil and crushed rock (including both dry and liquid soil, and topsoil) associated with this project, including but not limited to characterization, documentation, excavation, handling, storage, transportation, placement, and disposal. The Contractor shall be responsible for finding appropriate receiving sites for all excess soil and crushed rock associated with the project, developing all required documentation per O.Reg. 406/19, and for obtaining all required permissions from the owners and/or operators of the receiving sites in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19.

The Contractor shall refer to Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause 5, Soils and examination of site, for information included with the Request for Tender for the Contractor’s information and recommendations regarding the quality of in-situ materials within the project area and be responsible for completing additional soil characterization and documentation in accordance with O.Reg 406/19. Soil and crushed rock to be managed off-site shall be managed efficiently by the Contractor in order to permit reasonable progress of the work. Early sampling, analysis and reporting is recommended prior to extensive excavation so as to avoid unnecessary stockpiling and double handling of materials on-site.

The Contractor shall undertake testing of soil and crushed rock that are excess and required to be removed from the project area for disposal or reuse, in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and receiving site requirements, and as described in Item .3, to determine management options. The Contractor QP shall determine the sampling frequency and analytical parameters in consultation with the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor shall provide access into the project area to a representative of the Contract Administrator’s QP for the purpose of independent quality assurance soil sampling and testing, as requested.

The results obtained from excavation and sampling will be used to classify soils for the purposes of identifying appropriate receiving sites. The Contractor QP will receive the laboratory analytical results for the soil to be classified and make a recommendation regarding management options to the Contract Administrator for their review and acceptance. The Contractor QP will provide documentation regarding the laboratory analytical results (e.g., laboratory certificates of analysis, accompanying data summary tables, and sampling location figures) for review by the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor QP shall be responsible for the production of all required documentation per O.Reg. 406/19. This may include, but is not limited to:

SPEC NOTE: Modify to reflect desired documentation.

Assessment of Past Uses Report.

Sampling and Analysis Plan.

Soil Characterization Report.

Excess Soil Destination Assessment Report.

Written consent from receiving sites provided in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19

Other documentation as required by the Contractor’s receiving site(s).

The excess soil documentation is to be submitted to the Contract Administrator, for their review and acceptance a minimum of 10 Working Days prior to removing excess soil from the project area. The Contractor shall not remove soil from the project area until the Contractor has received approval from the Contract Administrator. If the owner or operator of the receiving site(s) require additional soil sampling and analysis, beyond what is required per O.Reg. 406/19 or in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall carry out all additional sampling, analysis and reporting required. All costs associated with the additional sampling analysis shall be borne by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall comply with any orders issued by a Provincial Officer. Within two business days of receipt, the Contractor shall provide to the Contract Administrator details and a copy of any draft or final Provincial Officer’s orders issued under O.Reg. 406/19 that are related to excess soil from the project.

Any materials that have a verified exceedance of the conditions for “Industrial / Commercial / Community Property Use” as specified in Table 2 of the Ministry of the Environment’s document “Soil, Ground Water and Sediment Standards for Use Under Part XV.1 of the Environmental Protection Act” or as outlined in the Geotechnical Report borehole and test hole Soil Characterization sampling recommendations, shall be excavated, stockpiled and isolated on-site outside of the work area but within the Project Area. Where Contract Items do not already address the contamination parameters of the material requiring disposal, the excavated, stockpiled and isolated material will be identified for further discussion with the Contract Administrator in terms of determining the appropriate management of the material. Note that salt-impacted excess soil, as identified by concentrations of electrical conductivity (EC) and sodium adsorption ratio (SAR), may be handled differently than other impacted soil, but shall be managed in accordance with the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19.

Topsoil shall be managed in a manner consistent with the Soil Rules referenced by O.Reg. 406/19.

The Contractor shall employ a tracking system in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19 that includes documenting each load of excess soil during transportation and deposit at a receiving site and provide all information as required by O.Reg. 406/19 to the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor shall ensure that hauling of excess soil is completed in a vehicle that can transfer it safely and without nuisance, and is constructed to withstand abrasion and corrosion, is leakproof, and is covered where necessary, in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19. The Contractor shall ensure that haulers of excess soil maintain a written record that is always available during the transportation of excess soil that includes the following information:

The location, date, and time that the soil was loaded.

The quantity and quality of soil in the load.

The name of a contact person for inquiries regarding the load.

The name of the corporation, partnership or firm transporting the soil, the name of the driver, and the vehicle and license plate numbers.

The destination for the soil.

Following arrival at the receiving site, the date and time the load of excess soil was deposited at the receiving site, the name and phone number of the individual at the receiving site who acknowledged the receipt of the excess soil, and a declaration by this same individual stating that the individual acknowledges the deposit of the excess soil.

The hauler must provide a copy of this record to the individual at the receiving site who acknowledged the receipt of the excess soil.

Haulers of excess soil shall retain these records for at least two years after the day the excess soil was loaded for transportation.

The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that haulers of excess soil fully complete the record provided in (SPEC NOTE: Insert Appendix/Reference) for each load of excess soil and provide copies of these reports as well as a log using the form in (SPEC NOTE: Insert Appendix/Reference) on a (SPEC NOTE: insert frequency - e.g., weekly) basis.

The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that, for each reuse site, the Property Owner's Release Form for Accepting Excess Soil for Beneficial Reuse (SPEC NOTE: Insert Appendix/Reference) is fully completed and signed by all required parties and provided to the CA for review and approval prior to any movements of excess soil. The Contractor is also responsible to ensure that, if required, appropriate permits are in place prior to the movement of any excess soil. Such permits shall be appended to the Property Owner's Release Form for Accepting Excess Soil for Beneficial Reuse.

For soil taken to a licensed waste facility, a copy of Waste Management System or Waste Disposal Site Environmental Compliance Approvals (ECAs), as applicable, shall be supplied to the Contract Administrator prior to transport. The Contractor shall summarize, on a daily basis, the applicable weigh tickets in a tabular form including the Project Name and Contract Number, location, stage or phase, as applicable, for each applicable item, listing the ticket number and net weight of material, and summary total of material hauled from the project area on the applicable item. The Contractor shall submit the summary table(s) and weigh tickets to the Contract Administrator within 48 hours of loading and disposal of material. An example of an Excess Soil Transportation Monthly Summary Report is included at the end of this document.

The Contractor shall notify immediately and provide all required information (SPEC NOTE, Use if available: Excess Soil Destination Assessment Report) and documents prepared by the Contractor QP, to the Contract Administrator within five business days if the following occurs:

The Contractor becomes aware that the soil characterization tests does not accurately reflect the quality of the excess soil.

The Contractor identifies a new area of potential environmental concern.

The Contractor becomes aware of any information provided to the Contract Administrator under the Excess Soil Regulation that is no longer complete or accurate.

Prior to substantial completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor under the Contract, the Contractor shall provide every document and record created or acquired under O.Reg. 406/19 to the Contract Administrator, including, but not limited to, hauling records and any contracts the Contractor entered into relating to the management of excess soil from the project area including transportation of excess soil. The Contractor shall also retain all documents and records associated with the project for a period of at least seven years after substantial performance of the Contract and provide these documents and records to the Contract Administrator as requested at any time during this retention period.

Imported fill can be granular aggregate material obtained from appropriately licensed aggregate pits or quarries, and meeting all specifications as outlined in the Contract Documents.

If fill is not imported from a licensed aggregate pit or quarry, it shall be soil meeting the conditions as noted in Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x, OPSS.MUNI 212 - Borrow, that is acceptably dry, free from organics, topsoil, debris, rubble and containing cobble sizes no larger than 100 mm. The source of supply and the quality of material shall be reviewed by the Contractor QP and subject to review and acceptance of the Contract Administrator. When possible, Region sites producing excess soil are to receive priority consideration as source sites. Borrow will not be delivered to the project area without prior approval of the source by the Contract Administrator. The quality of soil used for backfilling or grading, if not sourced from a facility licensed under the Aggregate Resources Act, must be tested and confirmed to be acceptable prior to placement in consideration of the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19. The Contractor shall be responsible to the provide (SPEC NOTE: Choose applicable documents which of the following documents are applicable: Assessment of Past Uses Report, Sampling and Analysis Plan, and Soil Characterization Report or similar documentation) supporting the suitability of the soil, including but not limited to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator. If the Contractor QP completes additional supplemental sampling and analysis, the Contractor QP will provide justification for the sampling and analysis completed, as well as related documentation, including laboratory analytical results (e.g., laboratory certificates of analysis, accompanying data summary tables, and sampling location figures) to the Contract Administrator for their review and acceptance. All reports related to soil quality for incoming soil are to be submitted to the Contract Administrator for their review and acceptance a minimum of 10 Working Days prior to the planned importation to the project area. Other criteria for imported fill (e.g., geotechnical suitability, etc.) as may be specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents must also be met.

The importation of topsoil to the project area must be done in alignment with the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19. Information relating to the past use of the topsoil source site and the reason for which the source site is being excavated must be provided to the Contract Administrator for their review and acceptance a minimum of 10 Working Days prior to the planned importation to the project area. If the source site is a current or historical “enhanced investigation project area” as defined by O.Reg. 406/19, if the source site is being excavated for the purpose of remediating contaminated land, or if any other conditions specific to topsoil in O.Reg. 406/19 are not satisfied, then the assessment of topsoil quality shall be according to the requirements for excess soil as indicated above. Other criteria for topsoil (e.g., organic content, fertility indicators, etc.) as may be specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents must also be met.

The Contractor QP shall provide the Contract Administrator with documentation for each fill source verifying that the imported fill is in accordance with Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x, Revision to OPSS.MUNI 212 prior to acceptance and use in the project area. If the imported fill, testing shall be performed at a frequency and for parameters established in consideration of the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19, and in consultation with the Contract Administrator. If soil quality testing results are more than 18 months old, the Contractor QP shall provide a letter confirming the results remain representative of the soil quality. If the soil results are no longer applicable to the project, soil quality testing shall be undertaken by the Contractor QP in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19.

SPEC NOTE: Include paragraph below if and as appropriate for project

An Assessment of Past Uses Report included with the Contract Documents or to be provided via addendum has been completed and is provided to Bidders for the purpose of scoping the chemical characterization parameters for all excess soil that is required to be removed from site and deposited at a reuse site, as required by O.Reg. 406/19 and Soil Rules. If excess earth will be deposited at a reuse site, forward copies of the Assessment of Past Uses Report included with Contract Documents or to be issued in future addendum to the Property Owner and/or reuse site Operator in advance in addition to form OPSF 180-1 or OPSF 180-2.

(SPEC NOTE: Applicable to management of large reuse sites that are not infrastructure projects. Delete if not relevant) For the importation of more than 10,000 m3 of excess soil at a site that is not an infrastructure project, the Contractor shall develop procedures and practices for tracking, managing, and accounting for each load of excess soil that is brought onto the project area, in accordance with the requirements set out in O.Reg. 406/19. The Contractor shall develop a Soil Management Plan outlining these procedures and practices and submit the Soil Management Plan to the Contract Administrator for their review and acceptance a minimum of 30 days prior to the importation of excess soil to the project area.

SPEC NOTE: Use the following On-site and excess soil management General Requirement for projects WITH NO excess soil removal from Project Area

On-site and excess soil management

Reference:
O. Reg. 406/19 and Reg. 347
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Soils and examination of site Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 180
OPSS.MUNI 180

This project does not include excess soils to be removed from project area. However, the Contractor shall comply with Ontario Regulation 406/19 On-Site and Excess Soil Management (O.Reg. 406/19, the “Excess Soil Regulation”), as amended, made under the Environmental Protection Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. E.19 (the “EPA”) and all other documents applicable to the Excess Soil Regulation including, but not limited to, the Rules for Soil Management and Excess Soil Quality Standards (the “Soil Rules”). The Contractor shall also comply with R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 347 General — Waste Management (Reg. 347, the “Waste Regulation”), as amended, made under the EPA. If there are discrepancies between OPSS.MUNI 180 and either O.Reg. 406/19 or Reg. 347, the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19 and Reg. 347 take precedence.

Terms used in this Special Provision have the meanings defined in the Excess Soil Regulation, the Soil Rules, and the Waste Regulation, as applicable, including the terms project area, soil, crushed rock, liquid soil, rock, topsoil, landfill, dump, waste, soil processing, public body, and Registry. Backfill, granular, earth, material, and borrow that meets the definition of soil or crushed rock per O.Reg. 406/19 must be managed per the Excess Soil Regulation, unless the material is obtained from a licensed aggregate pit or quarry and is managed under the Aggregate Resources Act (ARA). Topsoil shall be managed in a manner consistent with the Soil Rules referenced by O.Reg. 406/19.

Excavation and reuse of existing on-site suitable material shall be in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19 and as per OPSS.MUNI 206 and 501. The Contractor shall be responsible for the management of all soil and crushed rock (including both dry and liquid soil, and topsoil) associated with this project, including but not limited to excavation, handling, storage, transportation, placement, disposal, and documentation, including when it is reused on-site.

The Contractor is solely responsible for the location and management of stockpiles on-site as they relate to traffic management, construction staging, and the effective management of construction productivity. The Contractor is responsible for the management and handling of excess soil in temporary stockpile areas, including all temporary erosion and sediment control and dust control measures. With the exception of such variances as may be allowed under O.Reg. 406/19, the Soil Rules, and/or site-specific instruments that may be in effect for the project, such as Environmental Compliance Approvals (ECAs) or municipal permits, stockpiling and storage of soil shall be according to the Soil Rules referenced by O.Reg. 406/19, including, but not limited to, the following:

Managed in such a way as to prevent adverse effects relating to noise, dust, mud tracking, leaching, run-off and erosion, and odour or other air impacts.

Stored in stockpiles with total volume of less than 2,500 m3.

Soil of different quality, or from different areas, or that has not yet been sampled is segregated.

Stored more than 30 m away from a waterbody, and more than 10 m away from property boundaries.

Stored in a manner that prevents leaching of contaminants into the groundwater.

Prior to substantial completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor under the Contract, the Contractor shall provide every document and record created or acquired under O.Reg. 406/19 to the Contract Administrator, including, but not limited to, hauling records and any contracts the Contractor entered into relating to the management of excess soil from the project area including transportation of excess soil. The Contractor shall also retain all documents and records associated with the project for a period of at least seven years after substantial performance of the Contract and provide these documents and records to the Contract Administrator as requested at any time during this retention period.

(SPEC NOTE: This paragraph can be included on projects which will utilize imported fill) Imported fill can be granular aggregate material obtained from appropriately licensed aggregate pits or quarries, and meeting all specifications as outlined in the Contract Documents.

If fill is not imported from a licensed aggregate pit or quarry, it shall be soil meeting the conditions as noted in Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x, OPSS.MUNI 212 - Borrow, that is acceptably dry, free from organics, topsoil, debris, rubble and containing cobble sizes no larger than 100 mm. The source of supply and the quality of material shall be reviewed by the Contractor QP and subject to review and acceptance of the Contract Administrator. When possible, Region sites producing excess soil are to receive priority consideration as source sites. Borrow will not be delivered to the project area without prior approval of the source by the Contract Administrator. The quality of soil used for backfilling or grading, if not sourced from a facility licensed under the Aggregate Resources Act, must be tested and confirmed to be acceptable prior to placement in consideration of the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19. The Contractor shall be responsible to the provide (Assessment of Past Uses Report, Sampling and Analysis Plan, and Soil Characterization Report or similar documentation) supporting the suitability of the soil, including but not limited to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator. If the Contractor QP completes additional supplemental sampling and analysis, the Contractor QP will provide justification for the sampling and analysis completed, as well as related documentation, including laboratory analytical results (i.e., laboratory certificates of analysis, accompanying data summary tables, and sampling location figures) to the Contract Administrator for their review and acceptance. All reports related to soil quality for incoming soil are to be submitted to the Contract Administrator for their review and acceptance a minimum of 10 Working Days prior to the planned importation to the project area. Other criteria for imported fill (e.g., geotechnical suitability, etc.) as may be specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents must also be met.

The importation of topsoil to the project area must be done in alignment with the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19. Information relating to the past use of the topsoil source site and the reason for which the source site is being excavated must be provided to the Contract Administrator for their review and acceptance a minimum of 10 Working Days prior to the planned importation to the project area. If the source site is a current or historical “enhanced investigation project area” as defined by O.Reg. 406/19, if the source site is being excavated for the purpose of remediating contaminated land, or if any other conditions specific to topsoil in O.Reg. 406/19 are not satisfied, then the assessment of topsoil quality shall be according to the requirements for excess soil as indicated above. Other criteria for topsoil (e.g., organic content, fertility indicators, etc.) as may be specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents must also be met.

The Contractor QP shall provide the Contract Administrator with documentation for each fill source verifying that the imported fill is in accordance with Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x, Revision to OPSS.MUNI 212 prior to acceptance and use in the project area. If the imported fill, testing shall be performed at a frequency and for parameters established in consideration of the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19, and in consultation with the Contract Administrator. If soil quality testing results are more than 18 months old, the Contractor QP shall provide a letter confirming the results remain representative of the soil quality. If the soil results are no longer applicable to the project, soil quality testing shall be undertaken by the Contractor QP in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19.

SPEC NOTE: Include paragraph below if and as appropriate for project

An Assessment of Past Uses Report included with the Contract Documents or to be provided via addendum has been completed and is provided to Bidders for the purpose of scoping the chemical characterization parameters for all excess soil that is required to be removed from site and deposited at a reuse site, as required by O.Reg. 406/19 and Soil Rules. If excess earth will be deposited at a reuse site, forward copies of the Assessment of Past Uses Report to the Property Owner and/or reuse site Operator in advance in addition to form OPSF 180-1 or OPSF 180-2.

Traffic control and safety

Reference:
General Conditions of Contract Clause GC 7.01.05.02
RMDCS Section 01550
Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7 – Latest edition
OPSS.MUNI 706
Occupational Health and Safety Act – O.Reg. 213/91, Sections 65 through 69.1

Road Closure
________________ may be closed for a xxx period of time between ___________ and ____________ (local traffic only).

Coordinate all road closures and re-openings with the Contract Administrator. Provide Contract Administrator three weeks notice prior to road closures.

The Region shall notify interested parties of the proposed road closure and shall coordinate with the City/Town of __________.

SPEC. NOTE: For contracts requiring staging of road closures, see SP’s for D2019-040/D2021-31 (Brock Street) and D2021-35 (Westney Road) for sample specs. For contracts with a limited road closure period, use both the road closure clause above and the lane restrictions clause below.

--- OR ---

Lane Restrictions
Road closures are not permitted. Maintain all streets open to traffic for the duration of the Contract.
….except between ___ a.m. and ___ p.m. During these hours, maintain at least one lane of traffic. Obtain approval from the Contract Administrator for any temporary deviations from the above.

SPEC NOTE:

1. Consider lane widths, rush hour restrictions, as well as Friday afternoon, weekday evening and weekend restrictions in determining requirements under this Clause.
2. For longer traffic diversions, consider adding a requirement that both lanes be paved.
3. Obtain comments from Traffic on AADT and peak hours and include in this Clause.
4. In rural areas and poorly lighted areas, always maintain 2 lanes overnight and on weekends.
5. Consider a requirement for a "Construction Management Plan" which must be accepted by the Contract Administrator prior to issuance of the Commence Work Order.

Submit a traffic control and staging plan as required in paragraph 1.04 of RMDCS Section 01550.

Design, installation, operation and maintenance of the Traffic Control and Staging Plan for work on xxxx Street/ Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) to be performed by a traffic specialist/subject matter expert (SME) or employee trained by “Infrastructure Health and Safety Association” with “Traffic Control – Temporary Work Zones” or equivalent training.

The Contractor’s Traffic Control and Staging Plan and their Traffic Protection Plan shall be subject to the review of the Contract Administrator and the (SPEC NOTE: add local municipality).

Submit detailed Traffic Control and Staging Plan, Traffic Protection Plan and the name of the specialist(s)/subject matter expert(s) (SME) or trained employee(s) no later than two weeks prior to the commencement of construction activities and material deliveries.

Implement a Traffic Protection Plan for worker safety as required by Section 67 (4) of the Ontario Regulation for Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91. The Traffic Protection Plan may be an integral or separate part of the Traffic Control and Staging Plan. Should the traffic protection setup be altered from the Traffic Protection Plan, immediately revise the Traffic Protection Plan to suit the alteration. The revised Traffic Protection Plan shall be signed by a person of authority on behalf of the Contractor.

When an entrance to an abutting property is located within the work zone and traffic movements have been reduced to a single direction, provide separate Traffic Control Person(s) for each entrance to facilitate the safe movement of vehicular and pedestrian traffic from the property onto and along the roadway and to protect the safety of the workers on the project.

Where traffic control is required either within a signalized intersection or adjacent to a signalized intersection, such that traffic flow through the intersection will be impacted, provide a paid duty police officer as required by law. The Contractor may request the Region to alter timing of traffic signal light cycles, but the Region cannot guarantee that such alteration will be possible.

Materials or Equipment shall not be stored adjacent to the edge of lanes carrying traffic within:

4.0 m on roadways with a design speed equal to or greater than 70 km/h.

3.0 m on roadways with a design speed of less than 70 km/h.

Temporary reductions in material storage offsets must be approved in advance by the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Owner, remove any vehicle, equipment, or material which, in the opinion of the Contract Administrator, constitutes a traffic hazard or obstruction to maintenance operations.

Surface restoration

Reference:
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 310
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 802
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 803
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 804
RMDCS Section 02700, 02749, and 01450
OPSS.PROV 308 and OPSS.MUNI 310, 405, 492, 802, 803, 804, 1004, 1150, 1840, and 1860
RMDSD S-200.020
OPSD 216.021 and 802.010

SPEC. NOTE:
For roadwork contracts with sanitary sewers and/or watermains extending slightly beyond the limits of roadwork and grading, give consideration to adding granular, asphalt, sodding, etc. quantities (for extended sewer/watermain restoration) to the roadwork items.

For roadwork contracts where sewer and watermain does not extend beyond grading limits, use:

Include permanent surface restoration of all sanitary sewers, watermains and house service connections in applicable Roadworks items. Include restoration of trenches up to the sub-grade or bottom topsoil in the unit price bid for the appropriate pipe/maintenance hole item.

--- OR ---

SPEC NOTE: For roadwork contracts where sewer and/or watermain extends beyond grading limits, use:

Include permanent surface restoration of all sanitary sewers, watermains and house service connections within the limits of roadwork and grading in appropriate Roadworks items. Include costs of restoration of trenches up to the sub-grade or bottom topsoil in unit prices bid for the appropriate sanitary sewer/watermain item.

Include costs of permanent surface restoration of all sanitary sewers, watermains and house service connections outside the limits of roadwork and grading in unit prices bid for the appropriate “extra over” sanitary sewer/watermain trench restoration item.

--- OR ---

SPEC NOTE: For sewer and/or watermain contracts without roadwork, use:

Include costs of permanent surface restoration of all sanitary sewers, watermains and house service connections in unit prices bid for the appropriate “extra over” restoration item.

Topsoil, granular material, or other backfill material imported to the project area, that is not virgin material from a licensed aggregate pit or quarry, is to be managed in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19.

Restore all disturbed areas to at least a condition equivalent to that which existed prior to commencement of construction as determined by the Contract Administrator.

Complete temporary restoration according to RMDSD S-200.020 and Contract Drawings. Complete temporary restoration work as sewer and watermain installation proceeds. In no case shall the Contractor be allowed to have more than 50 metres of the site in a disturbed condition at any one time.

SPEC. NOTE:
Consider whether longer term temporary asphalt restoration is required. Temporary asphalt restoration that will be removed and replaced during the life of the contract shall be paid using a separate tender item.
Payment for temporary granular materials is included in the pipe items which is stated in the SP - General Requirements “General” clause following Permanent Surface Restoration. Payment for permanent road base granular materials is included in either the road items (for road contracts) or the Permanent Surface Restoration item (for sewer and watermain only contracts).

Include all costs associated with temporary restoration in the tendered items. No additional or separate payment shall be made for any temporary restoration work.

Where the Contractor is required to re-excavate in an area previously restored to correct defective work, restore all disturbed areas at the Contractor’s expense.

Restore all road crossings and excavations within the travelled portion of the roadway, or along the shoulder, according to RMDSD S-200.020 and the Contract Drawings. Granular base and asphalt depths indicated on Contract Drawings are minimum compacted depths.

Restore plastic subdrains according to OPSS.MUNI 405 and OPSD 216.021 (unwrapped trench). Subdrain pipe shall be 150 mm diameter perforated, corrugated HDPE pipe according to OPSS.MUNI 1840 with knitted sock geotextile according to OPSS.MUNI 1860 with a maximum Filtration Opening Size of 500µm. Granular embedment shall be Mortar Sand, as per OPSS.MUNI 1004.
---OR--- when working in City of Oshawa
Restore plastic subdrains according to City of Oshawa Standard Drawing OS-220.

Restore roadways and driveways according to RMDCS Section 02749. All hot mix asphalt shall be produced with asphalt cement of Performance Grade PGAC xx-28.

SPEC. NOTE:
Designer shall specify asphalt cement with a performance grade of 64-28 (PGAC 64-28) for roadway restoration on all Regional Roads and any commercial/industrial roads.
PGAC 58-28 will be adequate for driveway mixes and most local, residential roads.

Prepare disturbed asphalt roadways and shoulders for restoration as follows:

Sawcut existing asphalt full depth in neat, straight, parallel lines at a minimum of 450 mm from the edge of the trench according to RMDSD S-200.020. Sawcuts shall, without exception, encompass any asphalt overbreak, trench wall sloughing, asphalt undermining and variations in trench width such that sawcuts are straight and parallel for the full length of the trench restoration. No extra or additional payment shall be made for multiple sawcuts.

Note: Trench width shall be as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations and existing soils conditions.

Where the proposed edge of the asphalt restoration according to RMDSD S-200.020 falls within 1.0 m of the existing edge of pavement, remove all asphalt to the said edge of pavement. Similarly, if the proposed edge of the asphalt restoration falls within the travelling wheel path, remove all asphalt to the centre of the lane or to the edge of the lane marking.

Remove existing asphalt full depth to 450 mm beyond the longitudinal ends of trenches.

Compact granular road base materials to 100 per cent Standard Proctor Density.

Sweep all sawcut asphalt edges to ensure a clean vertical face.

Tack coat all asphalt faces with SS-1 emulsion.

Place all binder and surface asphalt using an asphalt paver in lifts of specified depths (maximum 50 mm depth per lift).

The Contract Administrator shall perform Quality Assurance inspection and testing as detailed in RMDCS Section 01450.

In addition to the above requirements, repair at the Contractor’s expense all areas of the existing roadway and asphalt shoulder surface which are damaged by the Contractor's operations, as follows:

Grind off existing surface to 40 mm minimum depth.

Remove full depth of surface lift where surface is not completely bonded to base course.

Tack coat milled surface according to 308.07.01 of OPSS.PROV 308. No other requirements of OPSS.PROV 308 shall be applicable to this contract.

Supply, place and compact 40 mm compacted depth of HL x Hot Mix Asphalt according to OPSS.MUNI 310 and OPSS.MUNI 1150 as amended.

SPEC. NOTE:
Designer shall specify grade of hot mix asphalt above. Generally, for all Regional Roads and any commercial/industrial roads, use HL 1. For most local, residential roads, use HL 3.

Make repairs such that the longitudinal edge of the new asphalt shall be parallel to the existing edge of pavement.

Restore all disturbed asphalt driveways or asphalt boulevards as per the Contract Drawings or, if not shown, with the following as a minimum:

150 mm Granular A compacted depth, 100 per cent Standard Proctor Dry Density.

50 mm HL 3 Hot Mix Asphalt surface course compacted depth.

Restore all disturbed gravel driveways as per the Contract Drawings or, if not shown, with the following as a minimum:

150 mm of Granular A or 19 mm diameter Crusher Run Limestone, 100 per cent Standard Proctor Dry Density.

Restore all disturbed concrete or asphalt sidewalks to the standards of the lower municipality, restore all disturbed concrete curb and gutter to Regional standards (on Regional roads) and to the standards of the lower tier municipality (on local municipal roads) and to match existing sections and joint patterns or as shown in the Contract Drawings.

Restore all disturbed lawns, boulevards, ditches, easements, and other maintained grassed areas with 150 mm compacted depth of screened topsoil and sod according to OPSS.MUNI 802 and OPSS.MUNI 803, as amended.

All topsoil and sod placement shall be performed by an acceptable professional landscaper using experienced workers.

Restore all disturbed grassed areas not presently maintained or not scheduled for maintenance with 150 mm compacted depth of screened topsoil and seed and mulch according to OPSS.MUNI 802 and OPSS.MUNI 804, as amended. Seed shall be Standard Roadside Mix. Mulch shall be hydraulic mulch.

If the onset of winter weather conditions prohibits the final surface restoration of hot mix asphalt areas at the time of backfilling trenches, the Contractor may be ordered to restore the granular road base and temporarily surface the asphalt areas with a 50 mm or 60 mm depth (50 mm for local road and 60mm for Regional Road) of HL 8 Hot Mix Asphalt. Where temporary asphalt restoration is ordered, maintain the surface throughout the winter months and subsequently remove the temporary asphalt prior to completion of permanent asphalt restoration as soon as reasonably possible the following Spring.

Where circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor have caused the Contract Administrator to order placement of temporary asphalt as specified above, such temporary asphalt and winter maintenance shall be at the Region’s expense and paid according to the General Conditions of Contract as modified by the Supplementary General Conditions of Contract. If the Contract Administrator deems that temporary asphalt is required due to the Contractor’s lack of reasonable progress, the temporary asphalt shall be supplied, placed, maintained, and removed at the Contractor’s expense. The Contract Administrator’s decision as to the reason for the delay and the assessment of costs shall be final.

If the onset of winter weather conditions prohibits the final surface restoration of sodded areas, fine grade, and place topsoil on these areas to allow for proper drainage. Undertake final surface restoration of these areas as soon as reasonably possible the following Spring.

If the onset of winter weather conditions prohibits the final surface restoration of seeded and mulched areas, fine grade, and place topsoil on these areas to allow for proper drainage. Undertake final surface restoration of these areas as soon as reasonably possible the following Spring.

Replace all shrubs, trees, rockeries, and guide posts damaged during construction except where marked for removal.

Replace all fences removed to permit construction.

Replace all existing culverts, headwalls and/or sewers damaged during construction with a new culvert, headwall or sewer of equal size and quality including granular bedding and cover according to OPSD 802.010. Granular embedment shall be Granular A.

Take extreme caution not to damage any trees not marked for removal. Trim all tree limbs and roots damaged during construction. Where the Contractor causes damage to significant tree limbs, as determined solely by the Contract Administrator, the Contractor may be ordered to provide the services of a Subcontractor specializing in tree trimming and maintenance. Such specialist Subcontractor shall have an on-staff certified arborist and the services of such Subcontractor shall be entirely at the Contractor’s expense.

The Region reserves the right to withhold sufficient funds from any or all Contractor's payments to cover restoration costs for all areas not permanently restored regardless of the bid unit price for such restoration.

General

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Soils and examination of site
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and excess soils management
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Work in the vicinity of utilities
Geotechnical Investigation Report
Pre-Construction Test Hole Report

Include the following, where applicable, in all unit prices bid:

Environmental considerations including protection of existing trees according to OPSS.MUNI 801.

Protection and temporary/permanent support of all inground and above ground services and utilities. Reference Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Work in the vicinity of utilities.

Removal, temporary erection and re-installation of roadside mailboxes and newspaper boxes where applicable. Notify affected residents and advise of temporary location. Contact Canada Post to confirm that the temporary mailbox locations are acceptable for delivery of mail. At the end of construction re-erect all removed mailboxes and newspaper boxes on new supports at their original location or at a location as near as possible to their original location which will meet requirements of Canada Post.

Sawcutting of existing asphalt in parallel straight lines according to Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration, and disposal off-site.

Vertical trenching as required to minimize road restoration and as indicated on Contract Drawings.

Trench support systems according to OPSS.MUNI 404 and as required by the Ministry of Labour, Immigration, Training and Skills Development for the soil conditions encountered.

Note: Prefabricated and hydraulic support systems are not permitted where Type 4 soil is encountered.

Design and implementation of an "engineered support system" where trench exceeds 6 m in depth or 3.6 m in width. This shall also include submission of two copies of the design drawings and specifications for such support system to the Ministry of Labour, Immigration, Training and Skills Development nearest to this project and two copies of same to the Contract Administrator.

Maintenance of existing ditch flows, sewage flows and residential water supply. Reference RMDCS Section 01510, Subsections 3.02 and 3.03.

Dewatering both inside and outside trenches according to RMDCS Section 02240 and OPSS.MUNI 517.

Note: Place all pipe in dry conditions. Dewater to 1.0 metre below pipe invert.

All water ordered by the Contract Administrator for dust control. Bulk water can be accessed at the Bulk Water Filling Station located at the Region of Durham Oshawa/Whitby Depot located at 825 Conlin Road, Whitby, Ontario L1N 6A3. Contractor is responsible for all fees related to water usage.

Temporary surface restoration as per RMDSD S-200.020.

(SPEC NOTE: Include this clause where Contract pay items with on-site excess soil management scope is to be priced as part of respective pay items (e.g. for sewer and/or watermain Contracts without roadworks) With the exception of the costs associated with the preparation and submission of the “Excavating, Hauling and Tracking Plan” pre-construction submittals, all costs associated with General Requirement Clause x, and for sourcing of a Receiving site for the deposit of excess soils as reported in the Pre-Construction Test Hole Report (SPEC NOTE: Add the correct report if Pre-Construction Test Holes are not done or required) provided to Contractors. Schedule delays associated with receiving stockpiled excess soil sample analytical results are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

Occupational health and safety act and Ontario regulation 213/91 – construction projects

Contractor shall refer to the current Act.

Designated Substances

In accordance with the requirements of Section 30 (1) of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, the Bidder is hereby advised that the designated substances as listed hereunder are or may be present on the site and within the limits of this Contract:

Designated Substance	Identified on this Site	Location
Acrylonitrile	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable
Arsenic	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable
Asbestos	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable
Benzene	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable
Coke Oven Emissions	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable
Ethylene Oxide	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable
Isocyanate	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable
Lead	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable
Mercury	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable
Silica	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable
Vinyl Chloride	Yes/No/Not Identified	Add location if applicable

Comply with the governing Ministry of Labour Immigration, Training and Skills Development Regulations respecting protection of workers, removal, handling and disposition of any Designated Substances encountered in carrying out the Work proposed on this contract.

Reference RMDCS Section 01350 - Special Procedures for requirements for working with asbestos-cement pipe.

Comply with Region of Durham Corporate Healthy Workplace Policy. Ensure all Subcontractors and suppliers are aware of and comply with all Region of Durham Health and Safety programs. When requested, provide copies of all Subcontractors’ Health and Safety Policies and Programs prior to such Subcontractors commencing work on site.

Prior to commencement of the Work, provide written notification to the Ministry of the Environment, Conservation and Parks at their York-Durham District Office, 230 Westney Road South, 5th floor, Ajax, Ontario L1S 7J5, of the location(s) proposed for disposal of Designated Substances. Provide a copy of the notification to the Contract Administrator a minimum of two weeks in advance of work starting.

In the event that the Ministry of the Environment, Conservation and Parks (MECP) has concerns with any proposed disposal location, provide further notification until the MECP’s concerns have been addressed.

Submit a Waste Quantity Report (Form OPSF 180-5) for all Solid Non-Hazardous Waste as required by OPSS.MUNI 180.

Include all costs associated with the removal and disposition of the Designated Substances herein identified in the appropriate tender items requiring such work.

Should a Designated Substance not herein identified be encountered in the work, then management of such substance shall be treated as Extra Work.

Private property site use agreements and releases

Reference:
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 180
OPSS.MUNI 180
Contract Documents – Supplementary General Conditions of Contract – Appendix SGC-F

Enter into a written agreement with each of the respective private property owners for the use of any private lands outside the limits of the contract for the purpose of stockpiling materials, locating field offices and trailers, and disposing of excess material. Provide a copy of all such written agreements to the Contract Administrator before the use of such sites is commenced. Use OPSF Forms 180-1 and 180-2 to notify the Contract Administrator of all agreements for stockpiling material and for material managed as excess soil.

Upon termination of the use of such sites, obtain a written release from the respective private property owners and provide one copy of the release to the Contract Administrator. Use the form provided in the Supplementary General Conditions of Contract, Appendix SGC-F for such releases.

The Contract Administrator reserves the right to withhold an appropriate amount from the Contractor’s Progress Payments if the Contractor fails to provide such releases and fails to reasonably satisfy their obligations to the private property owner.

Comply with O.Reg. 406/19 and the Soil Rules.

Comply with all municipal or conservation authority site alteration by-laws and procure site alteration permits or haul route permits as required to allow for disposal of topsoil or fill on private properties.

SPEC NOTE:
Consider adding “Item 8.05.02 – Vibration monitoring (provisional)” when constructing near a large or critical gas main. Such monitoring is mentioned in Enbridge’s “Third-Party Requirements In the Vicinity of Natural Gas Facilities Standard” document.

Work in the vicinity of utilities

Work in the vicinity of utilities includes, but is not limited to, activities associated with mechanical excavation, hydro excavation, directional drilling, blasting, piling, compaction, boring, ploughing, grading, backfilling, planting, and hand digging.

Comply with “Guideline for Excavation in the Vicinity of Utility Lines” from Electrical Safety Authority (ESA)/ Technical Standards and Safety Authority (TSSA) latest version, “Third-Party Requirements In the Vicinity of Natural Gas Facilities Standard” from Enbridge Gas Incorporated latest version, and “Canadian Guidelines for Safe Excavation in the Vicinity of the Bell Network” from Bell Canada latest version.

Contractors are responsible for obtaining and maintaining all utility locates in accordance with the Ontario Underground Infrastructure Notification System Act (latest version).

Expose all buried utilities prior to excavating or boring in the vicinity of the utility.

When required by the utility owner, the Region shall enter into an agreement with the utility owner for support of hydro poles or other facilities and make payments directly to the utility owner for their services. Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all utility pole supports required by the utility pole Owner(s) when working in the vicinity of the utility. The Contractor is solely responsible for all costs associated with schedule delays for not coordinating the work by the utility pole Owner to meet the schedule needs of the Contractor. The Region will pay all invoices for temporary pole supports directly to the utility pole Owner.

Support utilities perpendicular and parallel to excavations as required by the utility owner.

Provide daylight holes when horizontal directional drilling or directional boring in the vicinity of utilities as required by the utility owner.

Ensure backfilling is performed in such a manner as to prevent any rocks or construction debris being placed at or near the surface of any utility. Where native material is unsuitable, 150 mm of sand padding must be placed over the utility as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Work within the Transcanada pipelines limited (TCPL) right-of-way

Complete all work within the TransCanada PipeLines Limited (TCPL) right-of-way in strict accordance with TCPL and National Energy Board requirements and additional notes included on Contract Drawing x-xx.

No construction shall take place within 30 metres of the pipeline without a TCPL representative on site. Give advance notice to TCPL at least 72 hours before working within 30 metres of the TransCanada pipeline to assist the call-in of the appropriate inspection services. Reference the TCPL Crossing Agreement for further details.

Construct the proposed works according to the Region’s TCPL Crossing Agreement, including Schedule ‘A’ - “Conditions to the Agreement for the Construction of Foreign Crossings” and Schedule ‘B’ - “Guidelines for the Construction of Foreign Crossings” attached thereto. A copy of the agreement and Schedules is provided with these Special Provisions.

After construction has been completed, restore the right-of-way to its original condition or better, to the satisfaction of TCPL. Restore all fencing and markers removed to facilitate construction to original condition or better to the satisfaction of TCPL.

Provide a copy of the Contractor’s Certificate of Insurance to TCPL before construction begins. This policy shall be a minimum of $5 million for each occurrence and shall name TCPL as an additional insured against public liability and property damage.

Comply with the guide “Pipeline Damage Prevention – Ground Disturbance, Construction and Vehicle Crossings” by the National Energy Board when working near TCPL plant.

SPEC NOTE: Designer/Spec Writer shall revise the following General Requirement to address TNPL’s requirements.

Work within the Trans-northern pipelines incorporated (TNPL) right-of-way

Complete all work within the Trans-Northern PipeLines Incorporated (TNPL) right-of-way in strict accordance with TNPL and National Energy Board requirements and additional notes included on Contract Drawing x-xx.

No construction shall take place within 30 metres of the pipeline without a TNPL representative on site. Give advance notice to TNPL at least 72 hours before working within 30 metres of the TransCanada pipeline to assist the call-in of the appropriate inspection services. Reference the TNPL Crossing Agreement for further details.

Construct the proposed works according to the Region’s TNPL Crossing Agreement, including Schedule ‘A’ - “Conditions to the Agreement for the Construction of Foreign Crossings” and Schedule ‘B’ - “Guidelines for the Construction of Foreign Crossings” attached thereto. A copy of the agreement and Schedules is provided with these Special Provisions.

After construction has been completed, restore the right-of-way to its original condition or better, to the satisfaction of TNPL Restore all fencing and markers removed to facilitate construction to original condition or better to the satisfaction of TNPL

Provide a copy of the Contractor’s Certificate of Insurance to TNPL before construction begins. This policy shall be a minimum of $5 million for each occurrence and shall name TNPL as an additional insured against public liability and property damage.

Comply with the guide “Pipeline Damage Prevention – Ground Disturbance, Construction and Vehicle Crossings” by the National Energy Board when working near TNPL plant.

Work within the Canadian National Railway (CN) right-of-way

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall ensure the below specification reflects the agreement between the Region and CN, on project-by-project basis.

Complete all work within the CN right-of-way in strict accordance with the following:

General Order E-10 "Pipe Crossings Under Railways" of the National Transportation Act, Railway Act. (https://tc.canada.ca/en/rail-transportation/standards/standards-respecting-pipeline-crossings-under-railways)

CN Work Permit Application Utility Permit (2023).

Contractor is solely responsible for ensuring that all Contractor staff, as well as Subcontractor staff are trained as per the CN Work Permit Application forms.

Contractor is solely responsible for completing the CN Work Permit Application forms and obtaining approvals for completing the Work, including submitting all supporting documents identified in the Contract documents as well as the CN Work Permit Application. The Contractor is advised that CN and the Region have executed a Crossing Agreement for this proposed work.

Prior to commencement of work, contact CN to have all underground cables verified for location and depth.

Prior to commencement of work, contact (insert utility i.e. Bell Canada, Rogers, etc.) to have all underground (SPEC NOTE: insert type of underground plant i.e. telecommunication, fibre optic cables, etc.) within the CN corridor verified for location and depth.

Provide a minimum of three months prior notice to the Railway of expected timing for the commencement of work within the Railway right-of-way. Coordinate al work requiring CN approval, scheduling of flagging resources, etc. immediately following issuance of the Commence Work Order.

Provide a minimum of ten days’ prior notice to the Railway before commencing any work within the Railway right-of-way.

The Region shall arrange for flagging by CN forces during the course of work within the CN right-of-way. All workers on the site shall follow directions from the CN Flagperson without question and be trained as pe CN’s requirements. Workers who violate directives from the Flagperson shall be removed from the site.

The Region shall pay for flagging by CN forces during the course of the work within the CN right-of-way, however, it shall be coordinated by the Contractor. The Region will issue a purchase order directly to CN for all CN related costs for the project, including but not limited to flagging services. The Region will pay CN directly all owed costs. Should the Contractor receive invoices from CN, the invoices shall be forwarded to the Contract Administrator immediately.

The Region will not be responsible for flagging fees where CN flagging is obtained, and no work was completed by the Contractor. The Region is not responsible for any flagging cancellation fees incurred by the Contractor. In the event that the Region is invoiced for flagging not used by the Contractor, and/or for cancellation fees, the Region will debit incurred costs from the Contractor's monthly payment certificates accordingly.

The Contractor shall, throughout the term of the agreement, maintain in force the following coverage:

The insurance limits may be met by a combination of primary and umbrella insurance policies.

Commercial General Liability Insurance - occurrence based - in an amount no less than $10 million per occurrence, or such greater amount as may from time to time reasonably be required, covering liability for bodily injury, including death, property damage or destruction of property (including loss of use), contingent employers liability, sudden and accidental pollution, product and completed operations, broad form property damage, non-owned automobile, blanket contractual liability, and unlicensed vehicles on and off premises owned or controlled by the owner.

Contractor shall provide to the Region and CN a certificate of insurance evidencing the above and include:

A waiver of subrogation in favour of the Region and CN and its subsidiaries.

Name the Region and CN and its subsidiaries as additional insureds.

Contain a cross liability and severability of interest clause.

Specifically include liability for operations within or around railroads and railway tracks.

Contain a clause stating that the Region and CN’s interests will not be prejudiced in the event the First named insured breaches any warranty of the policy.

Provide a 30 days written notice of cancellation, modification or material change in coverage.

Automobile Liability Insurance on all licensed vehicles owned, hired, leased to or operated by or on behalf of the Contractor in the amount of not less than $5 million per occurrence. The certificate of insurance must include a waiver of subrogation in favour of the Region and CN and its subsidiaries.

Workers’ Compensation - Contractor must be compliant with statutory Worker’s Compensation and hold the relevant clearance letter(s).

Professional Liability Insurance/Errors and Omissions with a limit of no less than $5 million.

Environmental liability insurance with a limit of no less than $5 million.

All Risks Contractor’s Equipment Insurance covering construction machinery and equipment used by the Contractor for the performance of the Work and shall not allow subrogation claims by the Insurers against the Region and CN The policy shall be endorsed to provide the Region and CN with no less than 30 days written notice in advance of cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage.

Project Wrap-Up Liability Insurance subject to limits of not less than $25 million per occurrence. Such insurance shall be in the joint names of the owner and contractor and name as additional insures all subcontractors and consultants. The Wrap-Up Liability insurance shall include, but is not limited to: bodily injury including death and property damage including loss of use; personal injury; contractual liability; premises and operations; products and completed operations liability coverage extension of twenty-four months; contingent employers liability; shoring, blasting, excavation, underpinning, demolition, pile driving, caisson work and work below ground surface including tunnelling and grading; non-owned automobile; limited pollution coverage (Insurance Bureau of Canada Form 2313); non-cancellable or at least 120 days notice of cancellation, contingent medical malpractice; and fire fighting expense. This insurance policy shall be the primary insurance coverage in all cases for all risks of liability associated with the operations of this project. The policy shall be in force from commencement of work until substantial completion and include coverage for unfinished construction, maintenance, and repair for a period of 12 months following substantial completion.

Where a Subcontractor is retained for work, the Contractor must ensure the necessary insurance at the limits above is obtained, as applicable for the work being performed by the Subcontractor.

The Contractor shall provide Certificate(s) of Insurance on the Region’s standard form or on a form acceptable by the Region. The Contractor shall also obtain and provide Certificates(s) of Insurance from its subcontractors, as applicable, evidencing insurance as required by the Region and CN, the Region’s Consultants (list name of RMD's Geotechnical Consultant/Consultants) and CN’s Consultant (list name of CNR Geotechnical Consultant/Consultants) including any of their employees, servants or agents, agreeing to pay on behalf of the Insureds all sums which the Insureds shall become obligated to pay by reason of the liability imposed by law upon the Insureds for damages, including damages for care and loss of services arising out of or in connection with the contract, because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, including death at any time resulting therefrom, sustained by any person or persons or damage to or destruction of property including loss of use thereof, caused by accident and occurring during the policy period.

Locate tunnelling and receiving pits as shown on the Contract Drawings.

The Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings (which are stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario) to the Contract Administrator a minimum 10 weeks before start of construction, which will be circulated to CN and (insert CN's Geotechnical Consultant, if applicable) for their review. A recovery plan outlining steps to be implemented in the event of failure of tunneling, in scenarios such as excessive ground loss or settlement/collapse, heaving, etc. shall also be supplied to the Contract Administrator, CN and (SPEC NOTE: Insert name of CN’s Geotechnical Consultant).

Tunnelling shall not be scheduled between January 1 and March 31 unless otherwise approved by CN.

Maintain a minimum horizontal clearance during construction of 3.2 metres from centreline of each existing track, or as directed by CN.

Maintain a minimum vertical clearance during construction of 6.7 metres above each track, or as directed by CN.

Avoid any over-excavation along the tunnel liner during the installation to prevent any track settlement. Pressure grout all outside voids within 24 hours.

Tunnelling at the rail crossing shall proceed non-stop, 24 hours per day, once started until the tunnel liner installation is completed. The Contractor is responsible for applying for a Noise By-Law exemption from the (SPEC NOTE: insert name of lower tier municipality). The Contractor shall assume that at least two calendar months of lead time will be required to procure this approval from the (SPEC NOTE: insert name of lower tier municipality).

After construction has been completed, restore the Railway right-of-way to its original condition or better, to the satisfaction of the Railway. Restore any fencing removed to facilitate construction to equivalent original condition to the satisfaction of the Railway.

Include in all bid prices costs for delays up to 25 hours due to train traffic on the rail lines. The Contract Administrator shall reimburse the Contractor only for costs of labour and equipment, at standby rates according to OPSS.PROV 127, for any delay time in excess of 25 hours.

Work within the Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway (CPKC) right-of-way

Complete all work within the CPKC right-of-way in strict accordance with the following:

General Order E-10 "Pipe Crossings Under Railways" of the National Transportation Act, Railway Act.

Note: Avoid any over-excavation along the tunnel liner during the installation to prevent track settlement. Pressure grout all outside voids within 24 hours.

Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway document “Operational Restraint for Work on, Above or Below Railway Right Of Way”.

Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway document “Insurance Requirements for Road Authorities for Works Performed On and/or In Proximity to the Railway or Within Railway Right of Way”.

Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway document “Minimum Safety Requirements for Contractors Working on Railway Property”.

The documents referenced above are appended to these specifications and form an integral part of the Contract requirements.

Prior to commencement of work, contact CPKC to have all underground cables verified for location and depth.

The Region shall arrange for flagging by CPKC forces during the course of work within the CPKC right-of-way. All workers on the site shall follow directions from the CPKC Flag person without question. Workers who violate directives from the Flag person shall be removed from the site.

Insurance Policy

Provide liability insurance with the following coverages in addition to requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents:

Provide an insurance policy naming as Insureds the Contractor, the Region of Durham, the Region’s consultant and the Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway including any of their employees, servants or agents, agreeing to pay on behalf of the Insureds all sums which the Insureds shall become obligated to pay by reason of the liability imposed by law upon the Insureds for damages, including damages for care and loss of services arising out of or in connection with the contract, because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, including death at any time resulting therefrom, sustained by any person or persons or damage to or destruction of property including loss of use thereof, caused by accident and occurring during the policy period, with limits of not less than:

for bodily injury, $2 million per person and $5 million per accident or occurrence and for property damage $5 million per accident or occurrence

– or –

for bodily injury and property damage $5 million inclusive in any one accident or occurrence.

Ensure that all Subcontractors carry equivalent insurance coverage.

The policy shall include the following clause or one to like effect:

Cross Liability – This policy shall insure each person, firm or Corporation insured hereunder in the same manner and to the same extent as if a separate policy had been issued to each, but the inclusion herein of more than one Insured shall not operate to increase the limits of the Insurance Company’s liability.

The policy shall be written so as to provide coverage for blasting and other special hazards, where such hazards will be incidental to the works and shall include coverage for the clean-up of pollutants or the actual, alleged or threatened discharge, dispersal, release or escape of pollutants as a result of a collision or the overturning of any vehicle.

The policy shall also include “Environmental Impairment Insurance” in respect to the operations of the Region and its agents against claims for personal injury, death or property damage, indemnifying and protecting the Canadian Pacific Railway and the Contractor, their respective employees, servants, agents, contractors, invitees or licensees, to the inclusive limit of not less than $5 million for each occurrence and $10 million annual aggregate or such higher limits as the Railway may from time to time reasonably require and shall:

Name the Railway as an additional insured.

Contain a cross liability clause which shall have the effect of insuring each person, firm or corporation named in the policy as an insured in the same manner and to the same extent as if a separate policy had been issued to each.

Maintain a minimum horizontal clearance during construction of 3.2 metres from centreline of each existing track.

Maintain a minimum vertical clearance during construction of 6.7 metres above each track.

CPKC shall review detailed shop drawings provided by the Contractor. Falsework shall be designed and stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario. Design falsework to capture all debris resulting from the demolition and removal of the existing curb, railings, and concrete deck. Provide vertical facing of falsework sufficiently high to prevent any debris from falling onto the track.

For work over the tracks, employ a “cherry picker” type unit to permit quick set up and removal in order to permit passage of trains.

The services of the CPKC public works consultant shall be required on this project to coordinate flagging protection and times when track(s) may be made available for overhead work as well as to attend any meetings and address any concerns during the construction period. The Region of Durham shall arrange and pay for the CPKC public works consultant.

Coordinate flagging through the CPKC public works consultant anytime the Contractor, the Region, the Region’s consultant, or the Contract Administrator are required to work on or over the railway tracks.

After construction has been completed, restore the Railway's right-of-way to its original condition or better, to the satisfaction of the Railway. Restore any fencing removed to facilitate construction to equivalent original condition or better, to the satisfaction of the Railway.

Include in all bid prices costs for delays up to 25 hours due to train traffic on the rail lines. The Contract Administrator shall reimburse the Contractor only for costs of labour and equipment, at standby rates according to OPSS.PROV 127, for any delay time in excess of 25 hours.

Watercourse/fisheries protection

Reference:
RMDCS Sections 01570, 01890, and 02240
xxxxx Conservation Authority Permit number xxxx (SPEC NOTE: Insert the Conservation Authority’s name and the permit number)
Fisheries and Oceans Canada (DFO) Permit number xxxx (SPEC NOTE: If DFO permit is applicable, then keep this reference and add the permit number)

Control operations so as to prevent the entry of deleterious materials into watercourses.

Provide erosion and sedimentation controls, and protection of environmentally sensitive areas downstream, as specified in the Contract Documents.

Do not operate Equipment in watercourses or on watercourse banks unless required under the Contract.

Where the Contract requires work in watercourses or on watercourse banks:

Keep the operation of Equipment within such areas to the minimum necessary to perform the specified work.

Comply with operational constraints that may be specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

Otherwise proceed in a continuous fashion to minimize the duration of such work.

Store construction material, excess material, construction debris, and empty containers away from watercourses and watercourse banks.

Where an area enclosed by cofferdams is being dewatered, release any stranded fish to the watercourse without harm. Discharge dewatering effluent so as to prevent the entry of sediment to the watercourse.

If the Contract Administrator determines that controls are unacceptable, cease those operations as identified by the Contract Administrator that are causing the entry of deleterious material into watercourses. Such operations shall remain suspended until otherwise directed by the Contract Administrator in writing. Such suspension shall not require the cessation of work required for such essential operations as continuous concrete pours for structures, unless otherwise instructed by the Contract Administrator.

Provide acceptable means to allow water flow in the original watercourse to continue downstream at all times.

Do not stockpile fill materials immediately adjacent to the watercourse.

Remove all earth, stones, boulders, topsoil, and organic materials in excess of Contract requirements to disposal sites outside Contract limits.

Provisional items

Tender items noted as being “Provisional” may or may not be required in the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall not be entitled to payment of any quantity under such “Provisional” tender items except for the actual quantity used, if any, and only where prior approval for such work and use of such tender items is explicitly given by the Contract Administrator in advance of such work.

Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications

RMDCS Section 01310 – Project management and coordination

Add the following to Clause 1.05.1:

Contractor to provide a list of senior staff responsible for coordinating and managing the project two days in advance of the Pre-construction meeting. This list should include the Contractor’s project manager, site superintendent, site foreman and quality control personnel.

RMDCS Section 01450 - Quality control

Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection by the Region

Clause 1.07 of RMDCS Section 01450 is deleted. All CCTV inspections of new sewer pipelines shall be performed by the Region. Clean and flush pipe sewers according to RMDCS Section 02530 prior to the CCTV inspection.

Coordinate the timing of CCTV camera inspection with the Region. The initial CCTV inspection shall be performed after maintenance holes are raised to grade and prior to base asphalt being placed. Provide minimum one week notice to Contract Administrator of the expected date when maintenance holes shall be completed to allow for the Region to arrange for the CCTV camera inspection.

Allow a minimum of one week for completion of CCTV camera inspection by the Region’s CCTV inspection contractor and provide adequate time and space separation from the Contractor’s operations while the Region’s CCTV inspection contractor is on site performing the CCTV inspection.

All costs for the further CCTV inspections due to deficiencies in the Contractor’s work shall be borne by the Contractor.

RMDCS Section 01520 – Construction facilities

Subclause 2.01.10 is amended by the addition of “including continuous supply of potable water” to the hot and cold water cooler item.

RMDCS Section 02530 - Pipe sewers

Clause 1.04.1.16 is deleted. Refer to the revision to RMDCS Section 01450.

OPSS.MUNI 102 – Weighing of materials

SPEC NOTE:
This OPSS.MUNI 102 amendment is to be used for all road reconstruction and road rehab contracts where asphalt or granular quantities exceed 500 tonnes.

Bar Coding on Material Delivery Invoices

OPSS.MUNI 102 is amended as follows for all hot mix asphalt and all granular materials supplied under this contract which are measured by mass, in tonnes:

Section 102.02 of OPSS.MUNI 102 is amended by the addition of the following:

American National Standard for Materials Handling - Linear Bar Code and Two-Dimensional Symbols Used in Shipping, Receiving, and Transport Applications (ANSI MH10.8.1-2005)

Subsection 102.06.02 of OPSS.MUNI 102 is amended by the addition of the following:

The platform scale shall be equipped with a direct cable connection to the computer for the purpose of sending mass measurements.

A printing device connected by direct cable connection to the computer shall be capable of electronically producing, in black print only, tickets conforming to the requirements specified in the Contract Documents.

Subsection 102.07.01 of OPSS.MUNI 102 is deleted and replaced by the following:

The Contractor shall provide personnel to conduct the mass measurements. The mass measurements shall be sent to the printing device using a print command on the computer. Any form of override of the printing process, except total transaction rejection, will not be allowed.

The system shall be capable of detecting vehicle overloads, and of automatically signalling overload occurrence to the system operator.

Tickets shall be supplied by the Contractor. Bar codes shall be printed directly onto the weigh ticket or onto labels. Bar coded labels shall be affixed to the Owner's copy of the ticket before it leaves the weigh scale building.

The following information shall be displayed as bar code groups printed in a column or left to right configuration:

Truck Number.

Tare Weight.

Net Weight.

Ticket Number.

The words "Truck", "Tare", "Net", and "Ticket" must appear beneath each appropriate bar code group.

Conventional alphanumeric shall be used elsewhere on the ticket to express the exact information contained in the bar codes.

Automated reading failure rates greater than one reading failure in 20 tickets scanned and attributable to the density or configuration of the bar codes are not acceptable. Where such rates of reading failure occur, the Contractor must take corrective action to enhance the bar code symbology to an acceptable level immediately following notification of the problem.

The bar code symbols shall conform to the American National Standard for Materials Handling - Linear Bar Code and Two-Dimensional Symbols Used in Shipping, Receiving, and Transport Applications (ANSI MH10.8.1-2005) for 3 of 9 bar code (Code 39).

The minimum bar code height shall be 6.4 mm or 15 per cent of the bar code length, whichever is greater.

In addition to the bar code group information, each weigh ticket shall contain the following:

Licence plate number of unit(s).

Time and date of transaction.

Truck owner.

Contract number

Type of material.

Source of material.

Gross weight.

Overload notation.

Running total of each material.

A place for the checker to sign.

For each contract, the following reports shall be produced daily:

Truck register, including allowable gross weight for all vehicles.

Truck tare report for all vehicles, including old and new tares, and time recorded.

Summaries for each type of material.

Summaries for all cancelled loads.

The above reports shall be available for the Contract Administrator to pick-up at the end of daily operations or before start-up the following day.

A sample weigh ticket from each source must be supplied to the Owner two weeks prior to delivery of the material.

OPSS.MUNI 180 – Management of excess materials

Comply with Ontario Regulation 406/19 (On-site and Excess Soil Management) made under the Environmental Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. E.19 and the MECP Rules for Soil Management and Excess Soil Quality Standards as amended.

Make all arrangements for reuse or disposal of excess materials off-site except as noted otherwise in the Contract Documents.

The second paragraph of Subsection 180.04.01.01 of OPSS.MUNI 180 is deleted and replaced with the following:

At the completion of such work, the Contractor shall obtain a written release from the respective private property owners and/or receiving sites and shall provide two copies of each release to the Contract Administrator. The release shall be in the form provided in the Supplementary General Conditions of Contract, Appendix SGC-F.

Form OPSF 180-3 is deleted and replaced with the form provided in Appendix SGC-F to the Supplementary General Conditions of Contract.

OPSS.MUNI 206 – Construction specification for grading

Subsection 206.07.01.04.01 of OPSS.MUNI 206 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Tolerances for Earth

Upon completion, all earth grade surfaces, excluding swamp excavations, shall be shaped to the grades and cross-sections as specified in the Contract Documents within the following tolerances:

a) Vertical grading tolerances for the finished earth subgrade within the limit of the roadway:

+ 10 mm

- 10 mm

b) Horizontal grading tolerances for the vertical faces of excavations to be backfilled:

+ 10 mm

- 0 mm

c) Horizontal grading tolerances for ditch slopes, excluding roadside ditches:

+ 300 mm

- 0 mm

Sideslopes beyond the plus tolerance may be accepted by the Contract Administrator when they are not detrimental to the work.

d) Vertical grading tolerances for all ditching in earth:

+ 30 mm

- 30 mm

e) Horizontal grading tolerances for the backslopes in earth cut sections:

+ 300 mm

- 300 mm

Backslopes beyond the plus tolerance may be accepted by the Contract Administrator when they are not detrimental to the work.

f) Horizontal grading tolerances for each sideslope in earth embankment construction:

+ 50 mm

- 0 mm

g) Horizontal grading tolerances for roadside ditch frontslopes in earth cut sections:

+ 30 mm

- 0 mm

Irrespective of compliance with the above tolerances, the completed slopes shall present a uniform appearance.

OPSS.MUNI 212 – Borrow

Subsection 212.04.01 of OPSS.MUNI 212 is amended by the addition of the following to the second paragraph:

Geotechnical information relating to the borrow material’s physical properties including soil type (USCS), gradation analysis and moisture content. This information could be included in a factual geotechnical report or technical memorandum authored by a qualified person. The Contract Administrator shall, at its sole discretion, determine if the author of any submission required above is a “qualified person”.

Environmental, chemical, and analytical test results obtained from samples which are representative of the proposed borrow material.

A description of the proposed borrow source(s) with survey coordinates, location map and approximate volume of borrow material(s).

Subsection 212.04.01 of OPSS.MUNI 212 is amended by the addition of the following:

No change in the Contract Time shall be permitted due to delays in the project schedule caused by insufficient information, or a lack of information regarding a potential borrow site. The Contractor shall be responsible for any costs, including but not limited to delay costs, associated with providing the required information to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Subsection 212.05.01 of OPSS.MUNI 212 is amended by the addition of the following:

All earth borrow material must, at a minimum, meet conditions for “Industrial/Commercial/Community Property Use” as specified in Table 2 of the Ministry of the Environment, Conservation and Park’s document “Soil, Ground Water and Sediment Standards for Use Under Part XV.1 of the Environmental Protection Act" latest revision at the time of tender closing.

All earth borrow material must also, at a minimum, meet the applicable Excess Soil Standards for the project area, as referenced by O.Reg. 406/19 made under the Environmental Protection Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. E.19, as amended.

Section 212.05 of OPSS.MUNI 212 is amended by the addition of the following:

212.05.03 Acceptance of Borrow Material

Acceptance of borrow material by the Contract Administrator may be based upon any or all of the following criteria:

A review by the Contract Administrator of the location, quantity, quality, and suitability for intended purposes.

A site visit to the proposed borrow source and analysis by the Contract Administrator.

Laboratory test results of physical, chemical and/or analytical tests from a designated laboratory retained by the Contract Administrator.

Soils having a pH of less than 5.5 or an organic content more than 4.0 per cent may be rejected.

The first paragraph of Subsection 212.07.01 of OPSS.MUNI 212 is deleted and replaced with the following:

The work required for borrow shall include clearing, grubbing, and stripping of borrow source; construction and maintenance of access roads; excavating, hauling, placing, and compacting the borrow; borrow source rehabilitation; stockpiling and weathering.

Borrow material shall not be transported to the site until the Contract Administrator has given written acceptance of the Contractor’s proposed borrow material. Should material arrive on site without having acceptable test results, the Contract Administrator may refuse the material until the Contractor can satisfy the Contract Administrator that the material meets the specified criteria.

The Contractor shall, when ordered by the Contract Administrator, remove any borrow material not meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents.

OPSS.MUNI 310 – Hot mix asphalt

OPSS.MUNI 310 is amended by the addition of the following revised Sections:

310.04 Design And Submission Requirements

310.04.01 Asphalt Pre-Placement Meeting

An Asphalt Pre-Placement Meeting shall be conducted one week prior to placement of any hot mix asphalt to review granular material grades, mix designs, quality control and quality assurance, proposed scheduling, construction methods and any other issues either the Contractor or the Contract Administrator may wish to discuss related to supply and placement of hot mix asphalt. As a minimum, attendance at the Asphalt Pre-Placement Meeting shall include the Contract Administrator, the Contractor’s Site Superintendent, and a representative of the Contractor’s Asphalt Subcontractor, if applicable.

Subsection 310.07.11.01 of OPSS.MUNI 310 is amended by the addition of the following:

The Contractor shall use an approved method of reheating, reworking, and compacting all centreline longitudinal cold joints. Contractor shall use an infrared heating system, capable of maintaining a minimum temperature of 93°C to produce a welded joint, without scorching or burning the mix. The density of the asphalt at any longitudinal joint measured within 0.3 m of the joint shall be within 1.5 per cent of the mainline mat density.

Subsection 310.08.01 of OPSS.MUNI 310 is amended by the addition of the following:

The Region shall conduct quality assurance testing at a frequency deemed necessary by the Region for the purpose of verification of mix compliance. Where there is variance between the QC and QA results, the Contract Administrator shall initiate referee plate sample testing for the purpose of dispute resolution. Results of the referee testing shall be used to assess the degree of remedial action required if applicable. All costs associated with conducting the referee testing shall be borne by the party whose results do not concur with those of the referee test results.

Where the hot mix asphalt supplier fails to consistently produce asphalt that meets the specifications, the Region shall have the right to refuse further material from the supplier until mix specifications are verified for compliance. Alternatively, the Contractor may be required to obtain hot mix asphalt material from another supplier.

Subsection 310.08.06.03.01 of OPSS.MUNI 310 is deleted and replaced with the following:

The Contractor shall conduct cores (150 mm diameter) of the pavement to verify the results of the nuclear density testing. A minimum of three cores shall be required at a specific test location. One core shall be tested by the Contractor; one by the Region and one shall be used for a potential referee testing. Cores shall be extracted, no later than 24 hours after placement of the asphalt, from a location adjacent to each area where Marshall plate samples were previously taken. All core locations must be accurately identified as to field location and corresponding Marshall plate sample. The frequency of cores shall be a minimum of one set per 500 tonnes of mix type. The Region may reduce the frequency of core extractions to a minimum of one set of three cores per 1,000 tonnes of mix type per location if results indicate compactive effort is consistently meeting specifications. Compaction testing of the cores shall be according to the most current version of the Ministry of Transportation of Ontario’s Laboratory Testing Manual, Test LS-287. Acceptance for per cent compaction shall be determined by comparing the core Bulk Relative Density (BRD) to the core Maximum Relative Density (MRD).

OPSS.MUNI 310, Construction Specification for Hot Mix Asphalt, Table 7 - Tolerances for the Job-Mix Formula Aggregate Gradation and Asphalt Cement Content, Row 3 is deleted in its entirety and replace with the following table:

Tolerances on the Job-Mix Formula (per cent)
Mix	Attribute	Acceptable	Rejectable
HL1 SP 12.5	AC Content	Between 5.2 and 5.6	less than 5.2, greater than 5.6
HDBC SP 19 SP 25	AC Content	Between 4.8 and 5.3	less than 4.8 or greater than 5.3
HL 1 SP 12.5 HDBC SP 19 SP 25	Dust to Effective AC Content Ratio	Between 0.6 and 1.2	less than 0.6 or greater than 1.2

* Based on actual field test results. Plus and minus tolerances have been deleted.

Subsection 310.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 310 is amended by the addition of the following:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall not proceed until Quality Assurance tests have verified compliance with the asphalt specifications identified in the Contract documents.

OPSS.MUNI 314 – Construction specification for untreated granular subbase, base, surface, shoulder, and stockpiling

Subsection 314.07.06.02 – Granular courses is deleted and replaced by the following:

The finished granular courses shall not deviate more than 10 mm from the specified grade and cross-section and the surface shall not deviate more than 10 mm at any place as measured in any direction with a 3 m straight edge.

Subsection 314.07.06.03 – Bituminous Courses, Sidewalk, Curb, and Gutter is deleted and replaced by the following:

The finished granular surface shall not deviate more than 10 mm from the specified grade and cross-section, except when the finished bituminous grade is controlled by fixed components such as existing pavements and curbs, in which case the finished granular surface shall not deviate more than 10 mm from the specified grade. Granular surfaces shall not deviate more than 10 mm at any place as measured in any direction with a 3 m straight edge.

Subsection 314.07.06.04 – Concrete Courses, Sidewalk, Curb, and Gutter is deleted and replaced by the following:

The finished granular surface shall not deviate more than 10 mm from the specified grade and cross-section and the surface shall not deviate more than 10 mm at any place as measured in any direction with a 3 m straight edge.

OPSS.MUNI 314 is amended by the addition of the following new Sub-section:

Subsection 314.07.06.05 – Asphalt courses

The finished asphalt surface shall not deviate more than 5 mm greater than the specified grade and cross-section and the surface shall not deviate more than 5 mm at any place as measured in any direction with a 3 m straight edge. The finished asphalt surface shall not deviate below the specified grade and cross-section.

OPSS.MUNI 330 – In-place full depth reclamation of bituminous pavement and underlying granular

OPSS.MUNI 330 is amended by the addition of the following:

330.06 - Equipment
330.06.01 - Pulverizing

Equipment used for this work shall be a CMI RS-500 Pulverizer or reviewed equivalent.

The third paragraph of Subsection 330.07.03 of OPSS.MUNI 330 is deleted and replaced with the following:

The operation of full depth reclamation shall ensure that 100 per cent of the mixed material by mass passes the 26.5 mm sieve and 0 to 75 per cent passes the 4.75 mm sieve.

Oversize pulverized material shall be removed from the road base surface and cast to the outer rounding of the shoulder by grading, raking or by hand.

The pulverized materials shall be spread across the entire roadway platform to the shoulder roundings and compacted.

Subsection 330.07.04 of OPSS.MUNI 330 is amended by the addition of the following requirement:

The Contractor shall supply all water for dust control and compaction.

OPSS.MUNI 331 – Full depth reclamation with expanded asphalt stabilization

The second paragraph of Subsection 331.04.01 of OPSS.MUNI 331 is deleted and replaced with the following:

The mix design shall be carried out according to the Wirtgen Cold Recycling Technology Manual, Appendix A1.3. Mix design work shall be completed by a laboratory with CCIL Type A certification or equivalent equipped to carry out expanded asphalt mix design. When the existing pavement significantly changes composition, a separate mix design shall be completed.

OPSS.MUNI 351 – Concrete sidewalk

Subsection 351.07.11 of OPSS.MUNI 351 is revised by the deletion of the requirement for the use of a tool to provide a rounded edge and smooth surface on all joints. All joints shall be broom finished. All dummy joints and contraction joints shall be saw cut.

OPSS.MUNI 355 – Installation of interlocking concrete pavers

The second paragraph of Subsection 355.05.03 of OPSS.MUNI 355 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Joint sand shall be dry, commercially produced, polymeric jointing sand which shall be a mix of graded sand and binder specifically formulated for the filling of narrow or wide joints between pavers and inhibiting weed growth and migration of ants. Sand shall meet the gradation requirements of mortar sand according to either OPSS.MUNI 1004 or ASTM C144.

Clause 355.07.08.02 of OPSS.MUNI 355 is amended by the addition of the following:

After removing excess joint sand, the surface of the pavers shall be wetted according to the polymeric sand manufacturer’s instructions to moisten the joint sand and activate the constituent binder.

OPSS.MUNI 402 – Excavating, backfilling, and compacting for maintenance holes, catch basins, ditch inlets, and valve chambers

Clause 402.07.08.03 of OPSS.MUNI 402 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Corrective measures ordered by the Contract Administrator to rectify deficiencies caused by over-excavation shall be performed. Soil that has become disturbed by construction methods or procedures shall be removed and replaced with granular material compacted to 100 per cent maximum dry density where the excavated surface is below or beside the proposed structure.

Clause 402.07.09.01 of OPSS.MUNI 402 is deleted and replaced with the following:

A 150 mm layer of granular bedding material shall be placed on the bottom of the excavation and compacted to 100 per cent of the maximum dry density prior to the placing of a structure.

The first paragraph of Clause 402.07.09.02 of OPSS.MUNI 402 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Backfill material shall be placed simultaneously on all sides of the structure in layers not exceeding 300 mm in thickness, loose measurement, and compacted to 100 per cent of the maximum dry density prior to the placement of a subsequent layer.

OPSS.MUNI 407 – Maintenance hole, catch basin, ditch inlet, and valve chamber installation

The third paragraph of Subsection 407.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 407 is deleted and replaced with the following:

When the Owner raises or lowers the depth of a maintenance hole by up to and including 300 mm, it shall not constitute a Change in the Work and adjustment shall not be made to the payment. Where the depth of a maintenance hole is raised or lowered by more than 300 mm, then this shall constitute a Change in the Work for the full extent of the change from the original grade.

When the Owner raises or lowers a pipe invert in a maintenance hole by up to and including 300 mm, it shall not constitute a Change in the Work and no adjustment shall be made to the payment. Where a pipe invert in a maintenance hole is raised or lowered by more than 300 mm, then this shall constitute a Change in the Work for the full extent of the change from the original grade.

SPEC NOTE: The revision for OPSS.MUNI 408 does not apply to Integrated Frame and Cover MH’s

OPSS.MUNI 408 – Adjusting or rebuilding maintenance holes, catch basins, ditch inlets, and valve chambers

Subsection 408.07.01 of OPSS.MUNI 408 is amended by the addition of the following:

After the addition or removal of brick or adjustment units, the existing bricks and adjustment units shall be cleaned and patched/parged to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Where existing valve chambers include slide-type valve boxes, the valve box shall be adjusted to a maximum height of 300 mm. Additional new sections or total replacement shall be paid using the appropriate Schedule of Contingency Unit Prices item.

Subsection 408.09.01 of OPSS.MUNI 408 is amended by the addition of the following:

408.09.01.01 Rebuilding Maintenance Holes, Catch Basins, Ditch Inlets, and Valve Chambers

Measurement of rebuilt structures is in metres and shall be:

For raised structures or structures with finished cover elevation unchanged: the actual difference in elevation from the lowest elevation of the removed portion of the structure to the new finished cover elevation, or

For lowered structures: the actual difference in elevation from the existing finished cover elevation to the lowest elevation of the removed portion of the structure.

OPSS.MUNI 410 – Pipe sewer installation in open cut

The fifth paragraph of Subsection 410.07.12.01 of OPSS.MUNI 410 is deleted and replaced with the following:

When the Owner raises or lowers the invert of a pipe sewer by 300 mm or less, it shall not constitute a Change in the Work and no adjustment shall be made to the payment. When the invert of a pipe sewer is raised or lowered by more than 300 mm, it shall constitute a Change in the Work for the full extent of the change from the original grade.

OPSS.MUNI 421 – Pipe culvert installation in open cut

The fifth paragraph of Subsection 421.07.12.01 of OPSS.MUNI 421 is deleted and replaced with the following:

When the Owner raises or lowers the invert of a pipe culvert by 300 mm or less, it shall not constitute a Change in the Work and no adjustment shall be made to the payment. When the invert of a pipe culvert is raised or lowered by more than 300 mm, then this shall constitute a Change in the Work for the full extent of the change from the original grade.

OPSS.MUNI 710 – Pavement marking

The second paragraph of Subsection 710.07.07 of OPSS.MUNI 710 is amended by the deletion of “Division C of the MUTCD” and its replacement with “the latest edition of the Ontario Traffic Manual Book 11”.

OPSS.MUNI 710 is amended by the deletion of all other references to “MUTCD” and its replacement with “the latest edition of the Ontario Traffic Manual”.

OPSS.MUNI 802 – Topsoil

Reference:
RMDCS Sections 02700 and 02905

SPEC. NOTE:
The following Clause (.1) will only be required in roadwork contracts. Pre-Placement Meetings for topsoil will only be required on roadwork contracts.

Subsection 802.07.03 of OPSS.MUNI 802 is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

Prior to placement of topsoil, the Contractor shall schedule a Pre-Placement Meeting with the Contract Administrator to discuss the condition of the subgrade upon which topsoil and sod are to be placed. Other items to be discussed include quality of materials and placement procedures (topsoil, fertilizer, sod, rolling, watering, maintenance). As a minimum, attendance at the Pre-Placement Meeting shall include the Contractor’s representative, a representative of the Contractor’s sodding subcontractor, and the Contract Administrator.

Topsoil shall be spread on prepared subgrade to a uniform, minimum compacted depth of 150 mm.

Topsoil shall be compacted by means of a mechanical compactor. The top 25 mm shall be loosened and levelled with a rake, prior to the placement of sod.

Section 802.09 of OPSS.MUNI 802 is deleted in its entirety.

Subsections 802.10.04 and 802.10.05 of OPSS.MUNI 802 are deleted and replaced with the following:

802.10.04 Topsoil from Stockpiles

Payment at the Contract price for the appropriate tender items for excavation and grading shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

802.10.05 Topsoil, Imported

Payment at the Contract price for the appropriate tender items for sod, seed and mulch or trench restoration shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

OPSS.MUNI 803 – Sodding

Reference:
RMDCS Section 02700

SPEC NOTE:
1. The following clause (.1) will only be required in contracts with a roadwork item for sod.
2. If a roadwork contract includes trench restoration items for trenches extending beyond the limits of grading, this clause will not apply to such trenches, so an exception will need to be stated in those cases under the appropriate trench restoration tender item.

Subsection 803.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 803 is amended by the addition of the following:

Progress payments for sod shall be made as follows:

50 per cent upon successful supply and placement.

50 per cent upon meeting the Performance Measure.

SPEC NOTE:
The following clauses will only be required in contracts without a roadwork item for sod except where there are trench restoration items for trenches extending beyond the limits of grading work for the road.

Subsection 803.09 of OPSS.MUNI 803 is deleted in its entirety.

Subsection 803.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 803 is deleted and replaced with the following:

803.10.01 Sod

Payment at the Contract price for the appropriate tender items for trench restoration shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

OPSS.MUNI 804 – Seed and cover

Subsection 804.08.03 of OPSS.MUNI 804 is deleted in its entirety. The Contract Administrator’s decision as to whether or not the seeded areas meet the specified Performance Measure at the 90-Day inspection shall be final.

SPEC NOTE:
1. The following clause (.2) will only be required in contracts with a roadwork item for seed and mulch.
2. If a roadwork contract includes trench restoration items for trenches extending beyond the limits of grading, this clause will not apply to such trenches, so an exception will need to be stated in those cases under the appropriate trench restoration tender item .

Subsection 804.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 804 is amended by the addition of the following:

Progress payments for seed and mulch shall be made as follows:

50 per cent upon successful supply and placement.

25 per cent upon meeting the 60-Day Performance Measure.

25 per cent upon meeting the 90-Day Performance Measure.

SPEC NOTE:
The following clauses (.3 and .4) will be required only in contracts without a roadwork item for seed and mulch except where there are trench restoration items for trenches extending beyond the limits of grading work for the road.

Subsection 804.09 of OPSS.MUNI 804 is deleted in its entirety.

Subsection 804.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 804 is deleted and replaced with the following:

804.10.01 Seed and Mulch

Payment at the Contract price for the appropriate tender items for trench restoration shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

OPSS.MUNI 1010 – Aggregates - base, subbase, select subgrade, and backfill material

Subsection 1010.08.01 of OPSS.MUNI 1010 is amended by addition of the following:

Stockpile samples shall be tested by the Contract Administrator or their designated agent at least seven days prior to the expected delivery of such materials to the site. Where the stockpile samples fail to pass the required tests, two more samples shall be taken from the same stockpile by the Contract Administrator or their designated agent. Both of these samples must pass the required tests prior to use of the stockpiled materials. Any further testing shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

The Contractor shall only supply granular materials from pre-approved sources and stockpiles. If unapproved materials are delivered to the site, the Contractor shall immediately remove such materials from the site at the Contractor’s expense.

Stockpile samples passing an initial testing shall not be taken as final acceptance of materials for incorporation into the Work. Sampling and test results from these tests shall only determine acceptability of materials for delivery to the site. Final testing of delivered materials shall be the determining factor for acceptance of materials into the Work.

If backfill material is not virgin material from a licensed aggregate pit or quarry, the material is required to be assessed and managed in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19.

The “duplicate samples” required according to Subsection 1010.08.03 of OPSS.MUNI 1010 shall both be given to the Contract Administrator. One sample shall be used for QA testing by the Contract Administrator as specified in the Contract Documents and the second sample shall be reserved for referee testing if the Contractor chooses to invoke their right under Subsection 1010.08.06.

Table 1 of OPSS.MUNI 1010 is revised as follows:

Note 3 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Granular A, B Type I (Modified), B Type III or M shall not contain any crushed glass or ceramic material. Granular A, B Type I (Modified), B Type II, B Type III, M, O, S and SSM shall not contain any deleterious material (wood, clay brick, clay tile, gypsum, gypsum wall board and plaster).

Note 3 on the Aggregate Test Data Form in Appendix 1010-D of OPSS.MUNI 1010 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Granular A, B Type I (Modified), B Type III or M shall not contain any crushed glass or ceramic material. Granular A, B Type I (Modified), B Type II, B Type III, M, O, S and SSM shall not contain any deleterious material (wood, clay brick, clay tile, gypsum, gypsum wall board and plaster)

OPSS.MUNI 1101 – Performance graded asphalt cement

Subsection 1101.02 of OPSS.MUNI 1101 is amended by the addition of the following:

Ontario Ministry of Transportation of Ontario Publications:

Laboratory Testing Manual:

LS-284 Recovery of Asphalt from Solution by Abson or Rotavapor

ASTM International

D7906-14 Standard Practice for Recovery of Asphalt from Solution Using Toluene and the Rotary Evaporator

In Subsection 1101.03 of OPSS.MUNI 1101, the existing definition of Low Temperature Performance Grade is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

Low Temperature Performance Grade (-YY) means the low temperature performance grade specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and also referred to as the -YY specified for the performance graded asphalt cement where the PGAC (Performance Graded Asphalt Cement) Grade specified is PGAC XX-YY, and equal to the minimum design pavement temperature.

In Subsection 1101.03 of OPSS.MUNI 1101, the existing definition of PGAC is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

Performance Graded Asphalt Cement (PGAC) means an asphalt binder that is an asphalt-based cement produced from petroleum residue, modified using polymers, according to the latest version of AASHTO M 320 or M 332 (at the time of tendering).

Subsection 1101.03 of OPSS.MUNI 1101 is amended by the addition of the following:

Recovered Performance Graded Asphalt Cement (Recovered PGAC) means an asphalt binder that has been extracted and recovered from the hot mix asphalt. Extraction shall use reagent grade dichloromethylene (DCM), trichloroethylene (TCE) or toluene. Fines shall be removed from the solution using a high-speed centrifuge method. Recovery shall be under a nitrogen gas atmosphere according to the Rotavapor methods in LS-284 or ASTM D7906-14.

The following recovered PGAC samples are designated by the Owner for acceptance of the hot mix asphalt (HMA):

PGAC extracted and recovered from loose HMA plate samples taken during construction of the pavement; or

PGAC extracted and recovered from samples saw cut from the finished pavement and tested within a period of 90 days following substantial performance of the contract. Recovered samples shall be used in place of rolling thin-film oven (RTFO) residues and only further aged in the pressurized aging vessel (PAV) for the purpose of AASHTO M 320, LS-299, and LS-308 grading.

Subsection 1101.04.01.01 of OPSS.MUNI 1101 is amended by the addition of the following:

Test results for the product demonstrating compliance to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Grade and grade loss according to LS-308 along with a copy of all LS-308 documentation demonstrating that the product complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Average of the critical crack tip opening displacement (t) as determined according to LS-299 along with a copy of all LS-299 documentation demonstrating that the product complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

The Contract Administrator shall review the test results submitted. The mix shall not be placed until the Contract Administrator gives a written confirmation of conformance of the PGAC based on the submitted test results and owner testing to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Within 10 Business Days, commencing after the day of delivery of the samples and test documentation, the Contract Administrator shall provide the above confirmation or advise the Contractor of any non-conformance to the Contract requirements. Confirmation of conformance to Contract requirements of the submitted PGAC properties does not constitute any guarantee that the mix can be produced or constructed or both to Contract requirements and does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for ensuring the specified quality of materials and workmanship.

Subsection 1101.08.03 of OPSS.MUNI 1101 is deleted and replaced with the following:

The Contract Administrator shall determine the frequency of sampling and testing based on the HMA tender quantity for each grade of PGAC. A minimum of one sample shall be taken for each 500 tonnes of HMA placed. The QA and referee samples for possible Owner testing shall be taken at the same time.

PGAC and HMA samples shall be obtained by the Contractor when notified by the Contract Administrator. Sample containers shall be supplied by the Contractor. Sample quantities, labelling, and delivery requirements shall be as shown in Table 2. Samples shall be delivered in a condition suitable for testing.

All loose HMA plate samples shall be obtained directly from the paving equipment during the construction of the pavement.

All test samples shall be obtained by the Contractor in the presence of the Contract Administrator according to AASHTO T 40, ASTM D 3665, and the asphalt plant’s health and safety plan. The asphalt plant’s health and safety plan and procedure for sampling shall be reviewed at the pre-pave meeting.

Subsection 1101.08.04 of OPSS.MUNI 1101 is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

When the Contract Administrator elects to carry out QA testing, one of the samples shall be randomly selected for testing by the QA laboratory and the remaining sealed sample shall be retained by the QA laboratory for possible referee testing. QA testing will be evaluated against the requirements as specified herein.

Test results for samples that do not comply with the performance grading requirements shall be categorized as borderline or rejectable as defined below. PGAC shall be categorized based on its test result’s deviation from:

The individual design maximum or minimum pavement temperature and the sum of the deviations from the design maximum or minimum pavement temperatures.

The LS-299 CTOD design value.

The LS-308 grade and grade loss designs given in Table 1.

AASHTO M320

Borderline: Individual XX and YY deviations are less than or equal to 3°C and the sum of deviations is less than or equal to 3C for actual performance grading that is either lower than the design maximum pavement temperature or higher than the design minimum pavement temperature.

Individual XX and YY deviations are less than or equal to 6°C and the sum of deviations is less than or equal to 8C for actual performance grading that is either higher than the design maximum pavement temperature or lower than the design minimum pavement temperature.

Rejectable: Not complying with the above.

LS-299

Borderline: The CTOD value is less than 10.00 mm but greater than or equal to 8.00 mm.

Rejectable: Not complying with the above.

LS-308 and Form B of LS-308

Borderline: The maximum grade loss is between 6.0C and 7.0C with reference to the one hour results at -YY + 10; or the maximum grade loss is between 4.0°C and 6.0°C at -YY + 20 with reference to the one hour results at -YY + 10; or the LS-308 grade after three days of conditioning is between negative 25C and negative 28C.

Rejectable: Not complying with the above.

When a sample does not comply with more than one property, attribute, and PG grading, acceptance of the HMA shall be dealt with using the property, attribute, or PG grading selected by the Owner.

The Owner may conduct elemental testing according to ASTM D7343 or other tests to determine if the asphalt cement meets the material requirements as specified in the Materials section.

If a test result for any sample indicates non-compliance to the specification, the Contract Administrator shall advise the Contractor of the test results and may arrange for additional sampling and testing. The Contract Administrator shall have 30 days from the time of sample delivery by the Contractor to complete and provide each set of test results to the Contractor.

For any single day of paving with more than two borderline results for AASHTO M320, LS-299 or LS-308, the production for the entire day shall be rejectable.

In the third paragraph of Subsection 1101.08.05 of OPSS.MUNI 1101, the second sentence is deleted and replaced by the following:

The Contract Administrator shall notify the Contractor in writing within 10 business days of receipt of the non-conforming data.

Subsection 1101.08.05 of OPSS.MUNI 1101 is amended by the addition of the following:

The Owner’s review of the test results to determine disposition of the HMA produced shall include all additional testing requirements for which acceptance requirements have been specified.

Table 1 of OPSS.MUNI 1101 is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

Table 1
Additional Testing Requirements and Acceptance Criteria for All PGAC Grades

PGAC Grade	Property and Attributes (Unit)	Test Method	Acceptance Criteria	Borderline	Rejectable
All PGAC tank samples	Ash Content, per cent by mass of residue (per cent)	LS-227	Less than or equal to 0.6	N/A	Greater than 0.6
All PGAC tank and recovered samples	Continuous Grade Span (XX + |YY|)	AASHTO M320	Greater than 92.0 and less than 98.0	89.0 to 92.0 or 98.0 to 100.0	Less than 89.0 or greater than 100.0
All recovered PGAC samples	Non-recoverable creep compliance at 3.2 kPa (Jnr-3.2) (kPa-1 )	Multiple Stress Creep and Recovery (MSCR) testing according to AASHTO TP 70 testing conducted at a temperature of 58°C (Zone 3)	Less than 4.0	N/A	Greater than or equal to 4.0
Average per cent recovery at 3.2 kPa (R3.2) (per cent)	Multiple Stress Creep and Recovery (MSCR) testing according to AASHTO TP 70 testing conducted at a temperature of 58°C (Zone 3)	Greater than the lesser of [(29.371)	Greater than the less than or equal to the lesser of [(29.371)
(Jnr-3.2)-0.2633]	(Jnr-3.2)-0.2633 -10]
or 55	or 50
Average critical crack tip opening displacement (dt) (mm)	LS-299	Greater than 10.0	Less than 10.0 and greater than or equal to 8.0	Less than 8.0
Maximum Grade Loss with reference to the 1-hour results at -YY + 10(C)	LS-308, 72-hour results at -YY + 10	Less than or equal to 6.0	Greater than 6.0 and less than or equal to 7.0	Greater than 7.0
Maximum Grade Loss with reference to the 1-hour results at -YY + 10(C)	LS-308, 72-hour results at -YY + 20	Less than or equal to 4.0	Greater than 4.0 and less than or equal to 6.0	Greater than 6.0
Limiting Grade (C)	LS-308	Less than or equal to negative 28.0	Greater than negative 28.0 and less than or equal to negative 25.0	Greater than negative 25.0

Notes for Table 1:

Continuous Grade Span (XX + |YY|) is the sum of the absolute values of XX and YY as determined by rounding to the nearest degree Celsius for temperatures where the limits in AASHTO M320 are reached.

For non-recoverable creep compliance, report results rounded to the nearest 0.01. For all others, report results rounded to the nearest 0.1.

Note:

Acceptance shall be based on the following:

PGAC extracted and recovered from the loose HMA samples taken during construction of the pavement; or

PGAC extracted and recovered from the samples saw cut from the finished pavement and tested within a period of 90 Days following substantial performance of the Contract. Recovered samples shall be used in place of rolling thin film oven (RTFO) residues and only further aged in the pressure aging vessel (PAV) for the purpose of AASHTO M320, LS-299 and LS-308 grading.

All recovered PGAC samples shall be obtained by extraction using reagent grade dichloromethylene (DCM), trichloroethylene (TCE), or toluene, from loose hot mix asphalt or from saw cut samples from the finished pavement. Fines shall be removed from the solution prior to recovery using a high-speed centrifuge method. Recovery shall be under a nitrogen atmosphere according to the Rotavapor method in LS-284 or ASTM D7906.

Borderline results allow for testing variability. Acceptance shall be a “simple acceptance” also known as “shared risk” acceptance and measurement uncertainty shall play no role in accept/reject decisions (American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ASME B89.7.3.1:2001 Guidelines for decision rules: Considering measurement uncertainty in determining conformance to specifications. New York, NY, 2001; and International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation. ILAC-G8:1996 Guidelines on assessment and reporting of compliance with specification. Silverwater, Australia, 1996).

Special Provisions – Tender Items

Roadworks

Item 1.01.01 – Clearing and grubbing

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 01890
OPSS.MUNI 201 and 510

Subsection 201.07.01 of OPSS.MUNI 201 is amended by the addition of the following:

The Contractor shall not commence clearing operations until approval is received from the Contract Administrator.

All trees that interfere with new construction shall be trimmed according to RMDCS Section 01890 and OPSS.MUNI 801.

Subsection 201.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 201 is amended by the addition of the following:

Clearing and Grubbing – Item

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for clearing and grubbing shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Areas designated for removal of piled boulders that lie within areas specified in the Contract Documents for either grubbing or removal of surface boulders shall be paid separately with no deduction from the grubbing or surface boulder removal item.

Removal of individual boulders that are 1 m3 and greater in volume, shall be paid as rock excavation according to OPSS.MUNI 206.

Item 1.02.01 – Earth excavation, grading

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Soils and examination of site
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and excess soil management
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 206
RMDSD S-301.010
OPSS.MUNI 206, 501, and 510

Also include:

Remove and dispose off-site all boulders, rock slabs, and concrete up to and including one cubic metre in size.

Remove and dispose off-site of all wood, abandoned services and utilities, and other debris.

Saw cut all asphalt pavement in order to provide a clean joint in accordance with RMDSD 301.010.

Excavate for curb and gutter, sidewalks, and multi-use paths.

Stripping, stockpiling, placement and grading of topsoil.

Haul all materials including excess topsoil not incorporated into the project off-site and dispose.

Removal and disposal of subdrains and field tile drains up to 200 mm diameter.

Note:

This item only applies to roadwork related excavations.

The subgrade shall be inspected and approved by the Contract Administrator prior to the placement of granular materials.

The contract quantities for the earth excavation have been determined from existing ground cross-sections and theoretical design sections.

The quantity shown in Appendix C, Pricing Forms shall be considered as a Plan Quantity (denoted by “(P)” beside the units of measure in the Form of Tender) and no further measurement for payment shall be made unless a change in grade or removal/replacement of additional material is required by the Contract Administrator.

Excess material quantities noted below do not include bulk-up of excavated materials or blow-up from sewer, conduit and watermain trenches which must also be disposed of off-site.

The Owner has undertaken assessments of the environmental quality of the soils to provide a general measure with respect to on-site reuse or off-site disposal of excess earth material. Soils were subject to analyses of the parameters as described in the Geotechnical Investigation Reports prepared by (SPEC NOTE: insert author(s)). For reference, the investigations are included within the Contract Documents.

Soil investigations completed by the Owner have found concentrations of Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) and Electrical Conductivity (EC) exceeding Table 1 and 2 Criteria which are a result of winter road maintenance salting operations.

Soil investigations completed by the Owner have found concentrations of (SPEC NOTE: insert parameters) exceeding Table x Criteria.

Excavated earth shall be managed to eliminate disposal of reusable material off-site and reduce material imported. The Contractor shall be responsible for timing operations such that suitable excavated material can be reused onsite as earth fill, this includes excess material from storm sewer, sanitary sewer and watermain excavations. The Contractor is responsible for temporary material storage onsite and additional handling if excavated material cannot be immediately placed as earth fill, no additional payment will be made.

All excess materials shall be managed, handled, and deposited off-site at suitable locations, in accordance with applicable Municipal, Provincial, Federal, and locally governing Conservation Authority jurisdictions, policies and legislations.

Frozen soil shall not be incorporated into the work.

All existing topsoil and organic material within the grading limits is to be removed by an approved process. The Contractor shall note the stripping depths are anticipated to vary throughout the project limits and shall be removed, regardless of depth. The following are the anticipated average depths. Contract Administrator to approve any greater depths:

SPEC NOTE: List Street Name:

xxx mm depth.

Earth Summary- Theoretical Quantities

Location	Drawing number	Earth Exc. (m3)	Earth Fill (m3)	Ditching (m3)	Stripping (m3)
Totals	0	0	0	0
A	B	C	D

SPEC NOTE: Delete letters A, B, C, D in above table. These letters are used to guide the Spec Writer in calculating the numbers below.

Total excavation (Rounded)	A+C+D m3
Earth Fill Required	B m3
Earth Fill Available	A+C m3
Excess Earth (waste) OR	XXX m3

Earth Fill to be Imported

Topsoil Available	½ D m3
Topsoil Required	x,xxx m3
Excess Topsoil	x,xxx m3
Excess Unusable Topsoil	½ D m3
Additional Earth Fill Available (storm, San, WM excavation)	x,xxx m3

Total material to be exported off-site: x,xxx + x,xxx + x,xxx + x,xxx = x,xxx m3.

SPEC NOTE:

1. The Specifier should be careful not to overstate the quantity of “Topsoil Available”.

2. To calculate the Total material to be exported off-site, use the values for Excess Earth (waste) OR Earth fill to be Imported + Excess Topsoil + Excess Unusable Topsoil (Stripping) + Additional Earth Fill Available (storm, San, WM excavation)

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for earth excavation, grading, shall be the in-place volume of earth in cubic metres computed from field measurements of cross-sections taken both prior to grubbing and upon completion of the work.

When benching is required to key-in new fills into existing slopes, the quantity of materials that are excavated as part of that operation shall not be included in the measurement for payment.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for earth grade checks, including provision of all labour, equipment, and material to conduct quality control testing shall be included in the Contract price as part of the work of earth excavation, grading.

Item 1.02.04 – Additional earth excavation below subgrade and replacement with Granular B (provisional)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provision for Item 1.02.01
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 206
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 212
OPSS.MUNI 206, 212, 501, and 1010

Also include:

Excavate, remove, and dispose of additional unsuitable excavated materials from below proposed subgrade in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply, place, and compact Granular B material to proposed subgrade.

Note:

The requirements of the Special Provision for Item 1.02.01 shall also apply to this tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of additional excavation shall be by volume in cubic metres, calculated by the end area method, measured in place.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for earth grade checks, including provision of all labour, equipment, and material to conduct quality control testing shall be included in the Contract price as part of the work of earth excavation, grading.

Item 1.02.05 – Earth borrow

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and Excess Soil Management
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 212
OPSS.MUNI 212

Also include:

Provide documentation reviewed by the Contractor QP supporting the suitability of the soil, including but not limited to the Assessment of Past Uses Report and Soil Characterization Report, along with a written statement by the Contractor QP regarding the suitability of the soil for importation.

If soil quality testing results for the proposed source site are more than 18 months old, the Contractor QP shall provide a letter confirming the results remain representative of the soil quality.

If soil results for the proposed source site are no longer applicable to the project, updated soil quality testing shall be documented and provided by the Contractor QP in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19. Such documentation is to include a rationale for the sampling and analysis completed, clear description of the results of the sampling program, laboratory analytical results (e.g., laboratory certificates of analysis), accompanying data summary tables, and sampling location figures.

Testing of proposed imported soil shall be performed at a frequency and for parameters established in consideration of the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19, and in consultation with the CA or project leader.

Note:

The material source shall be identified by the Contractor and tested and accepted by the Contract Administrator prior to placement, all according to Clause 212.08.02 of OPSS.MUNI 212.

The estimated quantity in the Form of Tender has been determined from the calculation shown in the Special Provision for Item 1.02.01.

The quantity shown in the Form of Tender shall be considered as a Plan Quantity and no further measurement for payment shall be made unless a change in grade or removal/replacement of additional material is required by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of earth borrow shall be by volume in cubic metres using the End Area Method, In Place, according to Clause 212.09.01.01 a) ii) of OPSS.MUNI 212.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Removal and replacement of localized soft spots identified by the Contract Administrator or removal of unacceptable material or both shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.02.20 – Surface shaping and compaction of pulverized sections

Reference:
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 206
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 310
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 330
OPSS.MUNI 206, 301, 310, 330, and 501
Geotechnical Investigation Report

For the purposes of this tender item, Clause 501.06.01.01 of OPSS.MUNI 501 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Equipment used for shaping and compaction of the pulverized, mixed material shall include:

One grader, tandem drive 125 HP minimum.

One roller, self-propelled steel drum vibratory, Class S2 (reference Table 2 in OPSS.MUNI 310).

One water truck, for compaction purposes.

Also include:

Grade and compact previously pulverized road surface including water required for compaction.

Perform Traffic Control during operations.

Note:

Existing pavement and granular depths are as follows:

Existing Pavement Depth – xxx mm to xxx mm (xxx mm average).

Existing Granular Depth – xxx mm to xxx mm (xxx mm average).

SPEC NOTE: Item 1.02.21 is to be included in projects with roadwork scope, otherwise, Section 7 as Item 7.02.41. Item 1.02.23 to be applied at Specification writer’s discretion for projects without roadwork scope (water and sewer), if and as warranted by earthwork quantities.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of surface shaping and compaction of pulverized sections shall be by actual area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work of compacting, including the water used for compaction, unless the Contract contains a separate tender item for Water for Compaction.

Any work required to repair or remove and replace damaged QC lots accepted using Method B shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

Replacement of unsuitable equipment to obtain an appropriate target density using Method B shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

Replacement of a gauge shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

Any work required to recompact or retest material as a result of QA compaction testing or QC records inspection shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.02.21 – Excavate by hydro vacuum

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 206 and 501

SPEC NOTE:

Include the following Clause (1.) if deemed necessary:
1. This item is provided for use at the direction / approval of the Contract Administrator only. This item is not to be utilized to compensate the Contractor for advance daylighting of known subsurface utilities or other activities required to complete the work. For example, the Contract Administrator may direct the Contractor to daylight a previously unknown subsurface utility that was not identified at all on the Contract Drawings but became apparent after the Contractor’s locates were completed.

2. This item shall not be provisional. Specify the use for this item either by utilizing “Also include Clause 5” or by removing “Also include Clause 5” and adding a new clause to the “Note” subsection.

Also include:

Supply, with operator(s), a truck mounted combo vacuum excavator (hereunto known as a “Hydrovac”) as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Associated labour, equipment, and materials (including water) to complete the work as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Excavate test pits, prior to any construction, to determine the exact field location and elevation of the existing telecommunications/gasmain/watermain/sanitary/hydro at station x+xxx. Expose the utility and field measure the location, orientation, depth, and pipe OD.

Excess soil and/or liquid soil generated during hydro excavation activities are required to be managed and disposed off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules, as applicable.

Supply, place, backfill and compact excavated site with approved granular materials as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Provide Contract Administrator with signed release form, in accordance with Appendix SGC-G to the Supplementary General Conditions of Contract for off-site disposal of excess materials upon completion of all disposal activities.

Note:

This item to be used only as directed in writing by the Contract Administrator.

Truck shall be supplied with following features and equipment:

Variable and regulated high pressure water pump rated at approximately 204 LPM (54 GPM) at 13,789.5 kPa (2000 psi).

Approximately 9 cubic metres (12 cu. yd.) debris body.

Approximately 4921 litres (1300 US gallons) capacity water tanks.

Hydraulic boom with large variable degree rotation and reach of 5.8 metres (19 feet) minimum.

High pressure handheld operated gun.

Lighting to meet Ministry of Transportation of Ontario (MTO) specifications.

Traffic arrow board mounted on rear of the truck.

Large debris house.

Debris body shall be equipped with a working drain port and valve assembly to drain liquids.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, time shall be recorded and be paid in accordance with the number of hours the Hydro Vacuum Truck and crew was on site completing the work described above. Payment will not include travel time to and from the site. Minimum time of four hours shall be paid for each time the Vacuum Truck is called to site.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC. NOTE:
Item 1.02.22,.23 and .24 are to be considered for projects with roadwork scope with earth cut/fill management by Contractor.
Item 1.02.22 to be included as Item 7.02.41 for sewer/watermain Contracts without Roadworks excavation item sections.

Item 1.02.22 – Excavation, hauling, and tracking plan

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and excess soil management
Excess Soil Transportation Monthly Summary Report Example

Include:

Preparation of the pre-construction submittal of the Excavating, Hauling and Tracking Plan as prescribed by the Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and excess soil management by the Contractor’s QP.

Note:

The Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan needs to be reviewed, approved, and signed by the Contractor QP.

Potential reuse sites are to be discussed with the Region during the development of the Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan to assess whether there are Region sites that can be accessed as a reuse site.

Potential soil source sites are to be discussed with the Region during the development of the Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan to assess whether there are Region sites that can be accessed as a soil source.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the excavation, hauling, and tracking plan shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work. The Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan needs to be reviewed, approved, and signed by the Contractor QP and submitted to the CA and reviewed by the CA and CA QP.

Progress payments for the excavation, hauling, and tracking plan shall be based on the following percentage of the Contract price:

60 per cent upon satisfactory submission to CA and review by the CA QP.

40 per cent of the lump sum stated in the Tender Form for this item shall be paid on a pro-rated basis as work progress.

Item 1.02.23 – Testing, documentation, tracking, hauler information for excess soil by QP

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Soils and examination of site
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and excess soil management
Excess Soil Transportation Monthly Summary Report
Property Owner’s Release Form for Accepting Excess Soil for Beneficial Reuse.

Also include:

Review of all Geotechnical, Soil Characterization and Assessment of Past Uses Reports included in Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Soils and examination of site.

Development of Sampling and Analysis Plan (SAP), or other, depending on documentation requested by receiving sites to establish process for assessing soil quality.

Implementation of SAP and development of Soil Characterization Report (SCR), or other depending on documentation requested and required by excess soil receiving sites.

Identification of appropriate receiving sites, based on the results in the SCR, and development of documentation requested and required by the excess soil receiving sites.

Obtain written consent from reuse site via completion of Property Owner’s Release Form for Accepting Excess Soil for Beneficial Reuse included as Property Owner’s Release Form for Accepting Excess Soil for Beneficial Reuse which is in place of using OPSF 180-2.

Note:

The Contractor shall refer to available environmental and/or geotechnical investigation reports and recommendations regarding the quality of in-situ materials within the project area and be responsible for completing additional soil characterization and documentation in accordance with O.Reg 406/19.

When possible, Region sites requiring excess soil are to receive priority consideration as reuse sites.

Volume assumed to require off-site management is x,xxx m3 of topsoil and x,xxx m3 of excess unusable stripping in accordance with Specification Item 1.02.01 – Earth excavation, grading.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the testing, documentation, tracking, hauling information for excess soil by QP shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments shall be made pro-rata based on the volume of Excess Topsoil and Excess Unusable Stripping material removed from site.

SPEC NOTE: The following item is usually covered under 1.02.05 – Earth Borrow.

Item 1.02.24 – Testing and documentation for imported soil by QP

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Soils and examination of site
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and excess soil management
Excess Soil Transportation Monthly Summary Report
Property Owner’s Release Form for Accepting Excess Soil for Beneficial Reuse.

Also include:

Provide documentation reviewed by the Contractor QP supporting the suitability of the soil, including but not limited to the (SPEC NOTE: Choose the applicable documentation: Assessment of Past Uses Report, Soil Characterization Report, or similar), along with a written statement by the Contractor QP regarding the suitability of the soil for importation.

If soil quality testing results for the proposed source site are more than 18 months old, the Contractor QP shall provide a letter confirming the results remain representative of the soil quality.

If soil results for the proposed source site are no longer applicable to the project, updated soil quality testing shall be documented and provided by the Contractor QP in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19. Such documentation is to include a rationale for the sampling and analysis completed, clear description of the results of the sampling program, laboratory analytical results (e.g., laboratory certificates of analysis), accompanying data summary tables, and sampling location figures.

Testing of proposed imported soil shall be performed at a frequency and for parameters established in consideration of the requirements of O.Reg. 406/19, and in consultation with the CA or project leader.

Note:

When possible, Region sites producing excess soil are to receive priority consideration as source sites.

Soil will not be delivered to the project area without prior approval of the source by the Contract Administrator.

For imported material obtained from appropriately licensed aggregate pits or quarries, and meeting all specifications as outlined in the Contract Documents, (Assessment of Past Uses Report and Soil Characterization Report, or similar) are not required.

Volume assumed to require off-site management is x,xxx m3 of topsoil and x,xxx m3 of excess unusable stripping in accordance with Specification Item 1.02.01 – Earth excavation, grading.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the testing, documentation for import of soil by QP shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments shall be made pro-rata based on the volume of Imported Soil material brought to the site.

Item 1.02.30 – Removal and disposal of contaminated soil (provisional)

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Soils and examination of site
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and excess soil management
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x – Occupational health and safety act and Ontario regulation 213/91 – construction projects
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 206
OPSS.MUNI 206 and 510
Geotechnical Investigation Report

Also include:

Test the contaminated soils.

Dispose of contaminated materials using a licensed hauler to a Ministry of Environment, Conservation and Parks approved waste disposal site.

Apply for and obtain approval of an Industrial Hygiene plan.

Implement the Industrial Hygiene plan.

Note:

Should the Contractor find designated substances within the area of excavation, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Ministry of Environment, Conservation and Parks (MECP), the Ministry of Labour, Immigration, Training and Skills Development (MLITSD) and the Contract Administrator of the findings. The Contractor shall strictly follow the cleanup guidelines as outlined by the MECP and MLITSD, including all testing of the contaminated soils; disposal of the materials by a licensed hauler to a MECP approved waste disposal site; and application, approval, and implementation of an Industrial Hygiene plan.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of removed and disposed contaminated soil shall be by actual volume in cubic metres, by truck box measurement, of contaminated material excavated and disposed off-site.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.02.31 – Replace contaminated soil with select native materials (provisional)

Reference:
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 206
OPSS.MUNI 206 and 401

Also include:

Supply, place, and compact Select Native Material in trench excavations that have been over-excavated to remove contaminated soils.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of replaced contaminated soil shall be by compacted volume in cubic metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.02.32 – Replace contaminated soil with imported fill (provisional)

Reference:
RMDCS Section 02315
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 206
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 212
OPSS.MUNI 206, 212, and 401

Also include:

Import acceptable, clean fill materials to the site that meets the applicable excess soil quality standards under Ontario Regulation 406/19 (On-site and Excess Soil Management) made under the Environmental Protection Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. E.19 (EPA) and the MECP Rules for Soil Management and Excess Soil Quality Standards, as amended.

Supply, place, and compact imported fill material in trench excavations that have been over-excavated to remove contaminated soils.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of replaced contaminated soil shall be by compacted volume, in cubic metres, of imported materials placed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Removal and replacement of localized soft spots identified by the Contract Administrator or removal of unacceptable material or both shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.03.01 – Removal of existing storm sewer maintenance holes – total removal

Item 1.03.02 – Abandonment of storm sewer maintenance holes – partial removal

Item 1.03.03 – Removal of catch basins – single, double, and ditch inlet

Item 1.03.05 – Removal of storm sewer pipes and culverts – 450 mm diameter and under

Item 1.03.06 – Removal of storm sewer pipes and culverts – over 450 mm diameter

Item 1.03.08 – Removal of concrete sidewalks

Item 1.03.09 – Removal of curb and gutter

Item 1.03.10 – Removal of concrete – headwalls, retaining walls, wingwalls

Item 1.03.11 – Removal of gabion headwalls

Item 1.03.12 – Removal of concrete barrier

Item 1.03.13 – Removal of guide rail – steel beam or cable

Item 1.03.14 – Removal of concrete footings for signal and lighting poles

Item 1.03.15 – Removal of electrical handholes and junction boxes

Item 1.03.16 – Removal of fencing (all types)

Item 1.03.20 – Removal of concrete footings for traffic controller cabinet

Item 1.03.30 – Removal of asphalt pavement

Item 1.03.31 – Removal of driveways and sundry asphalt pavements

Item 1.03.36 – Removal of concrete bus pad

Item 1.03.46 – Removal of granular material in temporary staging lanes

Item 1.03.47 – Removal of asphalt in temporary staging lanes

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 510

Also include:

Dispose of all removed materials off-site to a location arranged for by the Contractor. Existing frames and covers/grates removed shall become property of the Contractor and disposed of at the Contractor’s expense.

Provide Contract Administrator with evidence of acceptance of excess materials by property owner of disposal or reuse site and a signed release from the property owner upon completion of all disposal activities at the disposal or reuse site. The release form shall be according to Appendix SGC-F to the Supplementary General Conditions of Contract.

Fill all maintenance hole and catch basin excavations in the travelled roadway and which extend below the existing or proposed subgrade, as the case may be, with Granular B Type I (Modified) and compact.

Supply and place 15 megapascals (MPa) concrete to plug the ends of abandoned storm sewer pipes subsequent to removal of catch basins and/or maintenance holes, if required.

Item 1.03.08 shall include the removal and disposal of existing tactile walking surface indicator plates off-site, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of maintenance holes totally removed regardless of type, depth, or size.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of partially removed, abandoned maintenance holes regardless of type or size.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of catch basins and ditch inlets removed regardless of type, depth, or size. (SPEC NOTE: Ensure to indicate if only catch basins, ditch inlets, or both apply)

Measurement of removal of storm sewer pipes and culverts shall be by length in metres horizontally along the pipe and culvert, from one end or end section to the other end or the other end section. Where the grade of the pipe or culvert is 10 per cent or greater, then the above measurement is the slope length. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Clause for Items 1.03.05 and 1.03.06, indicate if pipes, culverts, or both apply, and include or remove the last (10 per cent grade) sentence)

Measurement of removal of concrete sidewalks shall be by horizontal area in square metres. No deductions shall be made from the area for the space occupied by maintenance holes and valve chambers.

Measurement of removal of curb and gutter shall be by length in metres horizontally along the flow lines of the curb and gutter removed, whether straight or circular, without separation into types. When the slope of the curb and gutter is 4H:1V or steeper, then the above measurement is of the slope length. No deduction shall be made from the measured length for spaces occupied by maintenance holes and catch basin castings. (SPEC NOTE: Remove 4H:1V or steeper sentence if it does not apply)

Measurement of removal of concrete headwalls, retaining walls, and wingwalls shall be by volume in cubic metres. (SPEC NOTE: Indicate if headwalls, retaining walls or wingwalls are applicable)

Measurement of removal of gabion headwalls shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Measurement of removal of concrete barriers shall be by length in metres along the centreline of the barrier, from end to end.

Measurement of removal of steel beam and cable guide rails shall be by length in metres horizontally along each type of guide rail removed, excluding/including energy attenuators. Where cable guide rail is anchored to concrete anchor blocks, measurement shall be made between the end anchor points with no additional measurement made of overlapping sections at intermediate anchorages. (SPEC NOTE: Indicate if steel beam, cable, or both apply. For steel beam guide rail, ensure to indicate if the removal will include or not include the energy attenuators; OPSS.MUNI 510 excludes the energy attenuators. If energy attenuators are excluded, then a separate tender item will be required for them. For cable guide rails, ensure to include or remove the last sentence regarding concrete anchors)

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete footings for signal and lighting poles removed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of electrical boxes and junction boxes removed. (SPEC NOTE: Ensure to indicate if electrical boxes or junction boxes apply; remove the item that does not apply)

Measurement of removal of all types of fencing shall be by length in metres, horizontally along each fence removed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete footings for traffic controller cabinets removed.

Measurement of removal of asphalt pavement shall be by area in square metres. No deductions shall be made form the area for the space occupied by maintenance holes, catch basins, and valve chambers.

Measurement of removal of driveways and sundry asphalt pavements shall be by horizontal area in square metres. (SPEC NOTE: Also use this item for all miscellaneous asphalt removals, such as asphalt sidewalk/MUP removals)

Measurement of removal of concrete bus pads shall be by horizontal area in square metres.

Measurement of removal of granular material in temporary staging lanes shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Measurement of removal of asphalt in temporary staging lanes shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Imported backfill shall be paid for separately according to the tender item of the material specified in the Contract Documents.

Material designated for salvage but damaged by Contractor operations or lost by the Contractor shall be replaced with new material at no additional cost to the Owner.

If the Contractor elects to remove maintenance holes, catch basins, ditch inlets, and valve chambers in their entirety rather than as a partial removal, the removal shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

When the Contract does not contain a separate item for the removal of pipe subdrain, pipes, culverts, forcemains, or watermains, that interfere with the execution of the work, the contract price for the items requiring the removal of the pipe subdrain, pipes, culverts, force mains or water mains shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials required to do the work described in this specification.

Disturbed or damaged portions not designated for removal or salvage that result from the Contractor's operations shall be corrected or repaired at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.03.17 – Removal of asphalt pavement, partial depth (up to 50 mm depth)

Item 1.03.18 – Removal of asphalt pavement, partial depth (50 mm to 100 mm depth)

Item 1.03.19 – Removal of asphalt pavement, partial depth (over 100mm depth)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 310 and 510
RMDSD S-301.010

Also include:

Cold plane existing asphalt where indicated on Contract Drawings using a milling unit capable of milling a minimum 2.3 m width pass as well as accurately and automatically establishing profile grades and automatic control of cross-fall.

Remove asphalt millings from the site and dispose of.

Construct a straight, clean, vertical joint in the existing pavement so that the vertical depth of the joint is according to RMDSD S-301.010 on transverse and/or longitudinal joints where new pavement commences at or intersects an existing paved surface, or along existing curb and gutter.

Saw cut longitudinal and/or transverse joints where rounding has occurred prior to placement of the adjacent mat (surface lift).

Perform sweeping and cleanup of milled areas to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator prior to placement of new paving material.

Apply tack coat to the vertical faces of joints by mechanically spraying a thin, uniform, and continuous coating. The tack coat shall be applied sufficiently ahead of paving operations to allow for curing to a proper condition of tackiness.

Perform traffic control, unless paid under a separate tender item.

Supply, place and maintain bump signs at all transverse, longitudinal and full width grind location end joints, prior to the paving occurring.

Note:

Full width grinding of pavement locations should occur no more than one week in advance of the paving operation.

Asphalt pavement removal shall not be permitted during inclement weather (e.g., rain).

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of partial pavement removal shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Imported backfill shall be paid for separately according to the tender item of the material specified in the Contract Documents.

All costs associated with temporary ramping, including ramping material, shall be included in the item price for Removal of Asphalt Pavement, Partial-Depth.

Item 1.03.21 – Concrete plug in abandoned storm sewer pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – General
OPSS.MUNI 510

Also include:

Excavate to expose pipe.

Saw cut, remove, and dispose of existing pipe off-site.

Supply and place 15 megapascals (MPa) concrete plug in the ends of abandoned storm sewer pipes.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Permanently/temporary restore disturbed area according to RMDSD S-200.020, Contract Drawings, Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx, and RMDCS Sections 02700 and 02749.

Note:

Minimum length of concrete plug shall be 300 mm.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete plugs installed in abandoned storm sewer pipe.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.03.24 – Abandon monitoring well

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 510

All work to be completed in accordance with the Ontario Water Resources Act, R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 903 (as amended) requirements for well abandonment.

Also include:

Work to be performed by person(s) licensed by the Ministry of the Environment, Conservation and Parks (MECP) for the installation and abandonment of water wells.

Purging and chlorination of the well.

Placement of plugging material from the bottom of the well upward to approximately one metre below ground surface. Material must be capable of creating a proper seal in various types of well construction and in different geological and hydrological conditions.

Placement of at least one metre of bentonite chips or pellets.

Preparation and submission of well abandonment records to the MECP and the Region.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of wells abandoned.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.03.32 – Removal of asphalt pavement - saw cut and removal of asphalt for traffic islands/medians

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 510

Also include:

Saw cut previously placed base asphalt as required to permit construction of concrete curbs for traffic islands and medians.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Items 1.03.40 and 1.03.41 are for use only where the pulverized material is to be moved and reused under item 1.06.40 - Granular B - Reclaimed pulverized asphalt.
2. Where the pulverized material is to be left in place and compacted, use Item 1.03.42.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of asphalt pavement removal for traffic islands/medians shall be by area in square metres. No deductions shall be made from the area for the space occupied by maintenance holes and catch basins.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Disturbed or damaged portions not designated for removal or salvage that result from the Contractor's operations shall be corrected or repaired at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.03.40 – Pulverize existing asphalt

Item 1.03.41 – Pulverize existing primed shoulder

Reference:
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 330
OPSS.MUNI 330
Geotechnical Investigation Report

Also include:

Mobilize and demobilize pulverizing equipment for each lane or stage of construction.

Note:

The existing asphalt surface and granular base shall be pulverized and blended to a depth of at least 300 mm into the existing granular base material.

Only one lane of roadway or stage of construction shall be in a pulverized state at any time.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pulverized asphalt and primed shoulder shall be by horizontal area processed in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.03.42 – In-place full depth reclamation of bituminous pavement and underlying granular

Reference:
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 310
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 330
OPSS.MUNI 310, 330, and 501
Geotechnical Investigation Report

For the purposes of this tender item, Clause 501.06.01.01 of OPSS.MUNI 501 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Equipment used for shaping and compaction of the pulverized, mixed material shall include:

One grader, tandem drive 125 HP minimum.

One roller, self-propelled steel drum vibratory, Class S2 (reference Table 2 in OPSS.MUNI 310)

One roller, self-propelled pneumatic tired, Class R2 (reference Table 3 in OPSS.MUNI 310).

One water truck, for compaction purposes.

Also include:

Mobilize and demobilize pulverizing equipment for each lane or stage of construction.

Note:

The existing pavement depths were determined by advancing boreholes at random locations throughout the length of the respective locations. Asphalt depths may vary somewhat from those indicated.

The existing asphalt surface and granular base shall be pulverized and blended to a depth of at least 300 mm into the existing granular base material.

Only one lane of roadway or stage of construction shall be in a pulverized state at any time.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of in-place full depth reclamation of bituminous pavement and underlying granular shall be by horizontal area processed in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

No additional compensation will be made for asphalt encountered in excess of depths indicated.

Item 1.03.43 – Small cold planer

SPEC NOTE: This item will be required for all roadwork contracts where lap joints or end joints as per RMDSD S-301.010 are required, except where such joints are to be paid under Item 1.03.44 - Large cold planer.

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 310 and 510
RMDSD S-301.010

Also include:

Supply and operate a small cold milling unit capable of milling asphalt to a minimum 0.45 m width.

Sweep and cleanup millings to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Remove asphalt millings from the site and dispose. Provide adequate trucks on site for the removal of the millings as they are produced.

Control traffic during milling operations and supply and place "bump" signs.

Ramp all end joints that will be left for more than one day. This ramping is required to protect the edge of pavement and minimize complaints from the travelling public.

Note:

Small milling unit shall be used to mill lap joints according to RMDSD S-301.010.

Acceptable models are:

Wirtgen W50DC.

Reviewed equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of small cold planer shall be by actual hours of operation of the small cold planer, with a minimum of four hours.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work including all other reasonable associated costs related to the work.

Travel time to and from the site and idle time shall be at the Contractor's expense.

Item 1.03.44 – Large cold planer

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 310 and 510
RMDSD S-301.010

Also include:

Supply and operate a large cold milling unit capable of milling asphalt to a minimum 2.3 metre width as well as accurately and automatically establishing profile grades and automatic control of cross-fall.

Perform sweeping and cleanup to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Remove asphalt millings from the site. Provide adequate trucks on site for the removal of the millings as they are produced.

Control traffic during milling operations.

Supply, place and maintain bump signs at all transverse, longitudinal and full width grind location end joints, prior to the paving occurring.

Saw-cut longitudinal and/or transverse joints where rounding has occurred prior to placement of the adjacent mat (surface lift).

On transverse and/or longitudinal joints where new pavement commences at or intersects an existing paved surface, or along existing curb and gutter, construct a straight, clean, vertical joint in the existing pavement so that the vertical depth of the joint is 40 mm tapering to 0 mm at the specified width.

Note:

Milling depths range from xx mm to full depth.

Full width grinding of pavement locations should occur no more than one week in advance of the paving operation.

Work under this tender item shall not be permitted during inclement weather (e.g. rain).

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of small cold planer shall be by actual hours of operation of the large cold planer, with a minimum of four hours.

Travel time to and from the site and idle time shall be at the Contractor's expense.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work including all other reasonable associated costs related to the work.

Travel time to and from the site and idle time shall be at the Contractor's expense.

SPEC NOTE: Designer/Spec Writer shall ensure dust control Item 1.04.01 is used for large construction projects.

Item 1.04.01 – Calcium chloride (solid)

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 506 and 2501

Also include:

Supply and apply calcium chloride as required and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for solid calcium chloride shall be by mass in tonnes.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.05.01 – Geogrid reinforcement on subgrade

Include:

Supply and place geogrid base reinforcement fabric on subgrade or sub-excavation grade as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Acceptable geogrid base reinforcement products are:

Tensar Biaxial Geogrid BX1100.

Reviewed equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of geogrid fabric shall be by area in square metres following the contour of the ground, with no allowance made for overlaps.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.05.02 – Proof rolling

Include:

Proof roll subgrade within the footprint limits of the proposed road subbase prior to placing fill or granular material, as applicable.

Compact with heavy 130 to 220 kilonewtons (kN) (15 to 25 tons) equipment with high contact wheel pressures on independent axles.

Make sufficient passes with proof roller to subject every point on the subgrade surface to four separate passes of loaded wheel with two complete passes in one direction and then a second series of two passes made at right angles to the first series.

Notify the Contract Administrator where proof rolling reveals areas of defective subgrade and proceed as directed.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of proof rolling shall be based on actual time, in hours, required for proof rolling of subgrade as ordered by the Contract Administrator.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

SPEC NOTE for Staging Granular Items: When staging items are being used, then “Item 1.03.46 – Removal of granular materials in temporary staging lanes” must also be added to the tender.

Item 1.06.01 – Granular B, type 1 modified

Item 1.06.02 – Granular A

Reference:
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 102
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 314
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 1010
RMDCS Section 02749
OPSS.MUNI 102, 314, 506, 1001, and 1010 (including Appendices 1010-D and 1010-E)
OPSD 200.010

Also include:

Supply, place, grade and compact all Granular A for road base, driveways, sidewalks, multi-use paths, boulevard, and median and island treatments.

Supply, place, grade and compact all Granular B, Type I (Modified) for road base and driveways.

Supply all water for dust control and compaction according to OPSS.MUNI 506.

Provide bar-coded weigh tickets according to OPSS.MUNI 102 and the Standard Revision to OPSS.MUNI 102.

Provide signed Certificate of Grade Elevation/Crossfall for OPSF 314-1 as specified in OPSS.MUNI 314.

Note:

The Contractor shall complete and submit forms 1010-D and 1010-E for all QC testing performed.

Subsection 1001.05.01.02 of OPSS.MUNI 1001 is amended by the deletion of Quarried Limestone as acceptable Fine Aggregate material for Item 1.06.02 only.

Weight tickets shall be received on site for all Granular A applications including Granular A base for sidewalks, multi-use paths, boulevard, and median and island treatments.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of Granular B shall be by mass in tonnes.

Measurement of Granular A shall be by mass in tonnes.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The cost of any additional QA grade checks on the recertified area shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All grading carried out by the Contractor as a result of QA grade checks to ensure tolerances shall be carried out at no additional charge to the Owner.

SPEC NOTE: For Contracts where we are not doing full depth excavation, but still doing “roadworks”, like pulverizing, include quantities for restoration of the Granular A and B within trenches crossing the road.

Item 1.06.03 – Granular A - shouldering

SPEC NOTE: This item is generally only used for the Hot Mix Overlay (maintenance) contracts.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 102
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 314
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 1010
RMDCS Section 02749
OPSS.MUNI 102, 314 and 1010 (including Appendices 1010-D and 1010-E)

Also include:

Supply, place, grade, and compact Granular A for roadway shoulders. Shoulder widths will vary.

Supply all water necessary for compaction and dust control.

Provide a Power Broom and Water Truck to clear excess granular materials from the pavement surface and reduce dust caused by traffic.

Provide bar-coded weigh tickets according to OPSS.MUNI 102 and the Standard Revision to OPSS.MUNI 102.

Provide signed Certificate of Grade Elevation/Crossfall for OPSF 314-1 as specified in OPSS.MUNI 314.

Note:

The Contractor shall complete and submit forms 1010-D and 1010-E for all QC testing performed.

Weight tickets shall be received on site for all Granular A shouldering operation.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of Granular A for shouldering shall be by mass in tonnes.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The cost of any additional QA grade checks on the recertified area shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All grading carried out by the Contractor as a result of QA grade checks to ensure tolerances shall be carried out at no additional charge to the Owner.

Item 1.06.40 – Granular B - reclaimed pulverized asphalt

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 314
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 1010
OPSS.MUNI 314 and 1010
RMDCS Section 02749

Where the existing road profile is not low enough to permit pulverized asphalt material to be graded and compacted in place (under Item 1.02.20) and still facilitate the placement of 150 mm minimum depth virgin Granular A over the pulverized asphalt material, then such pulverized asphalt material shall be reclaimed for use as Granular B within the proposed road widenings.

Also include:

Uniformly place, grade and compact reclaimed pulverized asphalt as Granular B on the new subgrade of the widenings to a maximum depth of 150 mm.

Where “blading” of pulverized asphalt into an adjacent road base excavation is not practical, load reclaimed pulverized asphalt into dump trucks and end-dump the reclaimed pulverized asphalt into place as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Supply all water for dust control and compaction according to OPSS.MUNI 506.

Ensure that Contractor’s operations do not contaminate the pulverized material. Contaminated material shall be deemed unacceptable for reuse as Granular B and shall be used as fill or disposed of off-site and replaced with virgin Granular B at the Contractor’s expense.

Provide signed Certificate of Grade Elevation/Crossfall For OPSF 314-1 as specified in OPSS.MUNI 314.

Note:

Reclaimed pulverized asphalt shall not be placed until the subgrade for the new widening has been approved by the Contract Administrator.

Crawler dozer and vibratory drum compactor (BW-210 or reviewed equivalent) shall be used for spreading and compacting the pulverized material in the road sub-base according to OPSS.MUNI 314.

For the purposes of Item 1.06.40 only, Table 2 of OPSS.MUNI 1010 is revised as follows:

For Granular B Type I (Modified), Type II and Type III, per cent passing the 26.5 mm sieve is revised to 100.

Measurement for Payment

Measurement of reclaimed pulverized asphalt shall be by Plan Quantity volume in cubic metres according to Clause 314.09.02 of OPSS.MUNI 314.

The Plan Quantity stated in the Form of Tender is based on the following:

Drawing number	Location	Qty. (m3)
xx	Station x+xx to station x+xx	xx
xx	Station x+xx to station x+xx	xx
xx	Station x+xx to station x+xx	xx
xx	Station x+xx to station x+xx	xx
xx	Station x+xx to station x+xx	xx
xx	Station x+xx to station x+xx	xx
xx	Station x+xx to station x+xx	xx
xx	Station x+xx to station x+xx	xx
xx	Station x+xx to station x+xx	xx
Total	xx
Equivalent Tonnage of Granular B using a Conversion Factor of 2.5/ m3

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the Work.

Payment for pulverizing of existing asphalt shall be made under the appropriate tender item.

Removal and disposal of contaminated pulverized asphalt and replacement with virgin Granular B shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

Item 1.07.01 – Interlocking concrete pavers

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 355
OPSS.MUNI 355
OPSD 561.010

Also include:

Install concrete pavers in a Running Bond pattern, placed perpendicular to the centreline of road.

Install pavers in sequence according to manufacturer's recommendations.

Polymeric sand shall be grey in colour and installed as per manufacturer’s instructions.

Supply and install edge restraints according to manufacturer's specifications.

Thoroughly wash surface and seal with two coats of acrylic sealer applied according to the manufacturer's specifications with regard to condition of surface of pavers, rate and method of application.

Note:

Concrete pavers shall be 200 x 200 x 60 mm Double Traditional (Holland) by Armtec/Brooklin Concrete Products Limited (Terra Cotta colour) or equivalent supplied by Hanson Building Products or Unilock.

Edge restraints shall be Pave Tech edging or reviewed equivalent.

All work specified for this item shall be performed by a specialist paving stone/landscaping firm using workers experienced in interlocking concrete paver installations.

Measurement for Payment

Measurement of interlocking concrete pavers shall be made for the area placed in square metres without deduction for maintenance holes cover, Utility poles, and other appurtenances.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Removal and replacement of damaged concrete pavers shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

Granular A for granular base shall be supplied under the Granular A tender item.

Item 1.07.02 – Remove, salvage, and reinstate interlocking concrete pavers

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 355
OPSS.MUNI 355
OPSD 561.010

Also include:

Remove, salvage, clean and store existing interlocking concrete pavers.

Supply and install edge restraints in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

Thoroughly wash surface of restored pavers and seal with two coats of acrylic sealer applied in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications with regard to condition of surface of pavers, rate and method of application.

Note:

Edge restraints shall be Pave Tech edging or reviewed equivalent.

All work specified for this item shall be performed by a specialist paving stone/landscaping firm using workers experienced in interlocking concrete paver installations.

Measurement for Payment

Measurement of reinstated concrete pavers shall be made for the area placed in square metres without deduction for maintenance holes cover, Utility poles, and other appurtenances.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Removal and reinstallation of loose concrete pavers or concrete pavers not meeting surface tolerances shall be at no extra cost to the Owner.

Removal and replacement of damaged concrete pavers shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

Granular A for granular base shall be supplied under the Granular A tender item.

Item 1.07.05 – Coloured, impressed concrete on medians, islands, and splash pads

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02700
Revisions to Standard Specifications Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 351
OPSS.MUNI 351 and 1350
RMDSD S-300.080
OPSD 504.010 (Concrete Surface)

Also include:

Submission of a jobsite mock-up sample for approval by the Contract Administrator prior to proceeding with the placement.

Excavate and dispose of excess excavated materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place welded wire mesh reinforcement (152 x 152 MW 18.7 x MW 18.7) at all commercial and industrial driveways.

Supply and place concrete in medians and islands according to OPSS.MUNI 351 and OPSD 504.010 (Concrete Surface). Minimum thickness of concrete shall be 125 mm for medians and islands. Minimum thickness of concrete shall be 150 mm in boulevards and increased to 200 mm at all commercial and industrial driveways. Minimum thickness of concrete shall be 200 mm for truck aprons.

Follow proper concreting precautions, according to OPSS.MUNI 351, including wetting of granular base.

Adjacent to curbs, place a sheet of poly over the curb prior to the pour. Make a saw cut along the back of curb to the depth of the impressed concrete to create a joint and remove the poly.

Excluding monolithic pours, construct expansion joints according to OPSS.MUNI 351 and place at intervals not exceeding 6.0 m, excluding the termination points of a run, place an additional expansion joint within 2 m from the end.

Construct expansion joints where impressed concrete abuts a rigid object (e.g., other concrete structures, sidewalks, utility poles/bases, hydrants, maintenance holes) and any other location specified by the Contract Administrator.

Construct contraction joints according to OPSS.MUNI 351 and place at intervals not exceeding 2.0 m. Where the impressed concrete width is 2.5 m or greater, saw longitudinal contraction joints at a maximum spacing interval of 1.5 m. Saw contraction joints four to 12 hours after placing concrete.

Supply and place colour hardener. Apply the colour hardener at a minimum coverage rate of 30 kg/10 m2 (60 lbs/100 sq. ft.) unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer. Colour hardener shall be applied by top shake on site. Colour shall not be integral.

Supply and place surface release agent.

Place 200 mm x 200 mm running bond (Unilock Unigranite A pattern) impression style perpendicular to the centreline of the road. For Roundabouts – place a Random Field Stone pattern impression style on the splitter islands and truck apron.

Apply one coat of sealer at the time and at a coverage rate as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Construct a jobsite mock-up sample for approval by the Contract Administrator prior to proceeding with the placement.

Note:

Use the following colouring materials manufactured by Concreation Canada Inc. or approved equivalent:

Colour: A-01 Terra Cotta.

Colour hardener: CCI-100.

Surface release agent: C-04 Light Grey CCI-300.

Sealer: WB GreenSil WSR.

Prior to pouring of concrete, the Contractor shall pickup and install two-piece Telespar sign support sleeves as per RMDSD S-300.080 where shown on Contract Drawings. Reference Special Provision for Item 1.38.10.

Steel trowels, steel floats and power trowels are not permitted for use on exterior concrete.

Granular A for granular base shall be supplied under the Granular A tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of coloured, impressed concrete shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Repair or removal and replacement of an unacceptable concrete shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner.

Item 1.07.06 – Coloured, impressed concrete on medians islands and splash pads – monolithic pour complete with concrete curb and gutter

SPEC NOTE: This item shall only be used where the curb and gutter is to be constructed in a monolithic pour with an adjacent impressed concrete surface. In such cases, the designer must provide a detail drawing showing the design and dimensions of the proposed monolithic pour.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02700
Revisions to Standard Specifications Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 351
OPSS.MUNI 351 and 1350
RMDSD S-300.080
OPSD 504.010 (Concrete Surface)

Also include:

Submission of a jobsite mock-up sample for approval by the Contract Administrator prior to proceeding with the placement.

Excavate and dispose of excess excavated materials.

Supply and place welded wire mesh reinforcement (152 x 152 MW18.7 x MW18.7) at all commercial and industrial driveways.

Supply and place concrete as per Detail xx on Contract Drawing x-xx, including concrete curb and gutter in a monolithic pour. Minimum thickness of concrete shall be 125 mm for medians and islands. Minimum thickness of concrete shall be 150 mm in boulevards and increased to 200 mm at all commercial and industrial driveways. Minimum thickness of concrete shall be 200 mm for truck aprons.

Follow proper concreting precautions, according to OPSS.MUNI 351, including wetting of granular base.

Adjacent to curbs, place a sheet of poly over the curb prior to the pour. Make a saw cut along the back of curb to the depth of the impressed concrete to create a joint and remove the poly.

Construct expansion joints according to OPSS.MUNI 351 and place at intervals not exceeding 6.0 m, excluding the termination points of a run, place an additional expansion joint within 2 m from the end.

Construct expansion joints where impressed concrete abuts a rigid object (e.g., other concrete structures, sidewalks, utility poles/bases, hydrants, maintenance holes) and any other location specified by the Contract Administrator.

Construct contraction joints according to OPSS.MUNI 351 and place at intervals not exceeding 2.0 m. Where the impressed concrete width is 2.5 m or greater, saw longitudinal contraction joints at a maximum spacing interval of 1.5 m. Saw contraction joints 4 to 12 hours after placing concrete.

Supply and place colour hardener. Apply the colour hardener at a minimum coverage rate of 30 kg/10 m2 (60 lbs/100 sq. ft.) unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer. Colour hardener shall be applied by top shake on site. Colour shall not be integral.

Supply and place surface release agent.

Place 200 mm x 200 mm running bond (Unilock Unigranite A pattern) impression style perpendicular to the centreline of the road. For Roundabouts – place a Random Field Stone pattern impression style on the splitter islands and truck apron.

Apply one coat of sealer at the time and at a coverage rate as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Construct a jobsite mock-up sample for approval by the Contract Administrator prior to proceeding with the placement.

Note:

Use the following colouring materials manufactured by Concreation Canada Inc. or approved equivalent:

Colour: A-01 Terra Cotta.

Colour hardener: CCI-100.

Surface release agent: C-04 Light Grey CCI-300.

Sealer: WB GreenSil WSR.

Prior to pouring of concrete, the Contractor shall pickup and install two-piece Telespar sign support sleeves as per RMDSD S-300.080 where shown on Contract Drawings. Reference Special Provision for Item 1.38.10.

Steel trowels, steel floats and power trowels are not permitted for use on exterior concrete.

Granular A for granular base shall be supplied under the Granular A tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of coloured, impressed concrete shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Repair or removal and replacement of an unacceptable concrete shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner.

Item 1.07.10 – Crushed asphalt surface for driveways

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Revisions to Standard Specifications Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 102
Revisions to Standard Specifications Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 310
OPSS.MUNI 102, 310, and 501

Also include:

Supply and place 300 mm depth of crushed (recycled) hot mix asphalt conforming to the following gradation specifications:

Sieve Size	Per cent Passing
26.5 mm	100
19.0 mm	100
13.2 mm	65 - 100
9.5 mm	50 - 97
4.75 mm	30 - 60
1.18 mm	15 - 47
300 μm	5 - 22
75 μm	0 - 10

Compact according to OPSS.MUNI 310 and OPSS.MUNI 501 in maximum 150 mm lifts.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of crushed asphalt surface shall be by mass in tonnes.

Provide bar-coded weigh tickets according to OPSS.MUNI 102 and the Standard Revision to OPSS.MUNI 102.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.07.20 – Crusher run limestone surface for driveways

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 102
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 1010
OPSS.MUNI 102, 310, 314, 501, and 1010

SPEC NOTE: The depth of CRL may be changed to 150 mm if this item is to be used for light industrial, commercial and apartment driveways. Refer to Design Specifications for Roads and Entranceways for specific

Also include:

Supply and place 300 mm depth of 19 mm diameter Crusher Run Limestone conforming to the gradation requirements of Granular A in Table 2 of OPSS.MUNI 1010.

Compact according to OPSS.MUNI 310 and OPSS.MUNI 501.

Provide bar-coded weigh tickets according to OPSS.MUNI 102 and the Standard Revision to OPSS.MUNI 102.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of crusher run limestone for driveways shall be by mass in tonnes.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The cost of any additional QA grade checks on the recertified area shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All grading carried out by the Contractor as a result of QA grade checks to ensure tolerances shall be carried out at no additional charge to the Owner.

SPEC NOTE for Hot Mix Asphalt:

1. Driveways, paved boulevards and paved medians do not require a PGAC designation. This will be determined by design staff.

SPEC NOTE for Staging HMA items: When staging items are being used, then “Item 1.03.47 – Removal of asphalt in temporary staging lanes” must also be added to the tender.

Item 1.08.01 – HL 1 - surface (PGAC 58-28)

Item 1.08.02 – HL 3 - surface (PGAC 58-28)

Item 1.08.03 – HL 3F - surface for driveways, boulevards, and traffic islands/medians (PGAC 58-28)

Item 1.08.04 – HL 4 - binder/surface (PGAC 64-28)

Item 1.08.05 – HL 8 - binder (PGAC 58-28)

Item 1.08.06 – Heavy-duty binder course (HDBC) (PGAC 58-28)

Item 1.08.07 – HL 8 – binder for commercial and industrial driveways (PGAC 64-28)

Item 1.08.09 – HL 1 - surface (PGAC 64-28)

Item 1.08.10 – Heavy-duty binder course (HDBC) (PGAC 64-28)

Item 1.08.16 – Medium duty binder course (MDBC) (PGAC 64-28)

Item 1.08.17 – HL 3 – surface for commercial and industrial driveways (PGAC 64-28)

Item 1.08.54 – HL 8 - binder (PGAC 64-28)

Item 1.08.90 – Superpave 19.0 mm binder course (PGAC 64-28)

Item 1.08.91 – Superpave 12.5 mm FC1 surface course (PGAC 64-28)

Item 1.08.92 – Superpave 12.5 mm FC2 surface course (PGAC 70-28)

Item 1.08.93 – Superpave 25.0 mm binder course (PGAC 64-28)

Item 1.08.94 – Superpave 12.5 mm FC1 surface course (PGAC 64-28), including aramid fibre reinforcement

Item 1.08.95 – Superpave 12.5 mm FC2 surface course (PGAC 70-28), including aramid fibre reinforcement

Item 1.08.96 – Superpave 12.5 mm FC2 surface course (PGAC 70-34) – red asphalt

Item 1.08.97 – Stone mastic asphalt (SMA) 12.5 mm surface course (PGAC 70-34) – red asphalt

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 102
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 310
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 1101
RMDCS Section 02749
RMDSD S-301.010
OPSS.MUNI 102, 310, 311, 510, 1003, 1101, 1150, and 1151 (for Superpave)

Also include:

Provide bar-coded weigh tickets according to OPSS.MUNI 102 and the Standard Revision to OPSS.MUNI 102.

The natural sand contents in the mix design must meet the following requirements:

Table 1
Natural Sand Contents in Hot Mix Asphalt Design

Mix Type and Category	Natural Sand
HL 1	15 per cent Maximum by Weight
HL 3	25 per cent Maximum by Weight
HL 8	25 per cent Maximum by Weight

The uncompacted void content of the fine aggregate as determined according to AASHTO T 304 must be reported with all mix design submissions.

Self-propelled Material Transfer Vehicle required for all mainline paving operations.

Echelon paving with two asphalt pavers shall be used when paving four-lane arterial roads (first lift of base asphalt exempt).

Echelon paving with three asphalt pavers shall be used when paving xxxxxx Street/ Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) (first lift of base asphalt exempt).

Item 1.08.xx includes all adjustments to final grade.

Supply and apply aramid fibre reinforcement additive to asphalt as per manufacturer’s specifications.

SPEC NOTE:

1. Designer to determine if multiple MH, CB, VCH, etc. adjustments are required to accommodate the works in each stage. If so, then use Also include Clause .5.

2. Also include Clause .6 shall be included when using Item 1.08.94 and/or Item 1.08.95.

Note:

For Superpave HMA, xxxx Road/Street (Regional Road/Highway xx) shall be considered as an Ontario Traffic Category A/B/C/D/E road according to Table 1 of OPSS.MUNI 1151.

Restoration and Repairs to Hot Mix Asphalt:

A 100 m section means any full lane, 100 m in length, commencing at any point in the new HMA pavement.

Where areas requiring repair or restoration are separated by less than 15 m longitudinally, or more than three areas requiring repair fall within any 100 m section, repair the entire section between the furthest limits of the areas.

Where the sum of the lengths of repair/restoration areas in any 100 m section exceeds 50 per cent of that section, repair the entire section.

The previous requirement may be relaxed at the sole discretion of the Contract Administrator where only two repair areas form parts of the 100 m section and the individual length of either of the repair/restoration areas is less than 50 m.

Where a repair/restoration area is greater than 7 m in length, the repair/restoration shall encompass the entire lane width.

Should the edges of the repair/restoration areas be within 1 m of the edge of pavement or an existing longitudinal joint, the repair area shall extend to the edge of pavement or existing joint, as applicable. For transverse joints, the minimum separation shall be 3 m.

Joints of repair/restoration areas shall not be located on, or be in the vicinity of, wheel paths. The Contract Administrator’s decision on the joint location shall be final.

Coat the entire repair/restoration area with tack coat.

The asphalt used for the cycle track construction shall be placed using a spreader. A shuttle buggy to deliver the asphalt from the roadway to the spreader on the cycle track.

For Item 1.08.96/108.97, the surface course asphalt shall be red in colour as shown on Contract Drawings x-xx. Contractor shall provide colour samples to the Engineer and Region. The proposed colour and finish shall then be approved by the Engineer and Region in advance of the placement. Region reserves the right to reject the red asphalt placed which differs from the approved shade and finish of the red asphalt.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Substitution of Specified Mix:
The Region reserves the right to require substitution of major surface asphalt item with HL 2, HL 3, HL 3F or HL 8 for the purposes of crack and base repairs, padding, driveways and other minor handwork at locations where no provision has otherwise been made for those specific items. If applicable, Item 1.08.15 - Extra-Over Hand Asphalt shall apply.

2. Driveways and Miscellaneous Handwork:
HL 1 Surface - This item includes paving of large entrances and driveways where HL 3F asphalt is considered inappropriate by the Contract Administrator. Driveways requiring over 5 tonnes of surface shall be asphalt spreader placed. Item 1.08.15 - Extra-Over Hand Asphalt shall apply for driveways less than 5 tonnes and any miscellaneous handwork associated with paving driveways.
HDBC - This item includes paving a base course for large entrances or driveways where more than one lift is required, as determined by the Contract Administrator. Driveways requiring over 5 tonnes of binder shall be asphalt spreader placed.

SPEC NOTE: The following requirement for use of a Shuttle Buggy should be considered for all hot mix asphalt courses (surface and binder) - particularly 19 mm Superpave, MDBC and HDBC - to prevent segregation of the mix, where:

1. Hot mix may be placed in temperatures cooler than 7°C.

2. Volumes exceed 500 tonnes in any single Stage of construction.

3. The Designer/Spec Writer shall discuss this requirement with the Region’s Construction Division for a final decision on the inclusion of this requirement.

Material Transfer Vehicle ("Shuttle Buggy"):

Employ the use of a self-propelled Material Transfer Vehicle for binder and surface (SPEC NOTE: Specify if the Material Transfer Vehicle will be used for binder course, surface course or both) asphalt. The Material Transfer Vehicle shall not be mechanically attached to the asphalt spreader.

If any segregation is found in the final, placed HMA pavement, as determined by the Contract Administrator, cease all operations until the cause of the defective work has been remedied.

All associated costs to supply, operate and maintain the Material Transfer Vehicle shall be included in the Contract price for the appropriate hot mix asphalt tender items.

Mainline Paving:

Mainline paving shall be conducted in consecutive adjacent passes in the same direction unless otherwise permitted by the Contract Administrator.

SPEC NOTE:
Consider whether or not to require the Contractor to pave in echelon to improve longitudinal joints. Note that this clause does not actually require the Contractor to pave in echelon - it only specifies the requirements if he does.

Paving in Echelon:

Where paving in echelon, as defined in OPSS.MUNI 310, is specified, or where the Contractor elects to pave in echelon, employ two or three asphalt pavers each with a minimum standard paving width of 3.05 m, and each equipped with a mass flow paver hopper insert (“buggy bin”). All associated costs to supply, operate and maintain this unit shall be included in the Contract price for the appropriate hot mix asphalt items.

Paver Screed Auger Extensions:

Where the standard paving width exceeds 4.0 m, the use of paver screed auger extensions is required. The auger ends must be no greater than 0.3 m from the edges of the paving width.

SPEC NOTE: The following Clause is to be used for asphalt overlay contracts only.

Site Cleanup:

Complete general site cleanup within one week of completion of paving to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Aramid Fibre Reinforcement:

Furnish all materials, equipment, labour, and incidentals for mixing aramid fibre into asphalt. Aramid fibres must be treated to prevent them from becoming airborne during the mixing process, and the treatment must become soluble in the asphalt.

Aromatic, polyamide fibre (shortened, aramid in non-treated form) is designed for use in asphalt concrete whereby the aramid fiber is treated, and the final product form is used in asphalt mixtures. The purpose of adding aramid fiber is to improve the asphalt mixtures mechanical performance. Aramid fibre may provide structural properties to the mixture and thus is different than fibers such as cellulose fibre that are used to prevent drain down. The para-aramid fibre may be coated (i.e. “treated”) with a binder such as wax, emulsion, or similar; or blended with plastic fibre (polyolefin). Either method is intended to reduce loss of aramid fibre into the airstream during mixing due to the lightweight nature of aramid. The mechanical properties listed in the standard specification are for the non-treated aramid fibre since it is difficult to test shortened fibers for properties such as linear density, tensile strength, and Young’s Modulus.

The Contractor shall develop a plan to use equipment capable of continuously feeding of the reinforcing dry polymer fibres in a constant stream-like manner into the HMA at the specified dosage rate for the aramid fibres, such that no balls of reinforcing fibres are observed. Treated aramid fibres shall be metered by either a manual or automated metering system developed by the manufacturer so that the aramid is continuously fed in a constant stream-like manner based on the speed of operation of the drum or batch plant. It shall be mixed with the heated aggregates before injection of the liquid asphalt during the asphalt mixing process. Individual unit packages shall not be an acceptable method of feeding the aramid fibre reinforcement into the asphalt plant.

A certified QA/QC mixing technician shall perform continuous stream like feeding of the treated aramid fibres into the asphalt during plant mixing operations for all the Fibre Reinforced HMA/WMA quantities required for the project. Daily fibre mixing logs and a final project certification report from the manufacturer of the aramid fibre reinforcement must be submitted to the owner upon project completion.

Definitions:

HMA is hot mix asphalt, without aramid fibre.

Fibre Reinforced HMA is hot mix asphalt including aramid fibres.

WMA is warm mix asphalt, without aramid fibre.

Fibre Reinforced WMA is warm mix asphalt including aramid fibres.

Aramid fibre is pure aramid fibre meeting the material properties of this specification, without additive materials.

Treatment is the binder material used to facilitate the proper amount of the aramid fibre into the HMA or WMA so that the aramid fibre does not become airborne.

Dosage rate is the minimum weight of treated aramid per tonne of asphalt that is to be continuously fed into HMA/WMA.

Continuous feeding is metering and delivering in a constant stream-like manner the dosage rate of treated aramid into the HMA/WMA during the asphalt mixing process at the plant.

Manufacturer is the company that produces the aramid fibre from raw materials.

Supplier is the company that offers an aramid product.

Aramid and treatment material properties:

Aramid Properties	Measure	Standard
Linear Density	Greater than 3200 dtex	ASTM D1907/1907M-12 (2018) Opt. 6
Tensile Strength	Greater than 2,700 MPa	ASTM D2256, D7269
Decomposition	Greater than 426°C	ASTM E1131
Length	19mm plus or minus 10 per cent or 38 mm plus or minus 10 per cent	Inspection (refer to Notes below)
Young’s Modulus	Greater than 80 GPa	ASTM D2256 and D7269

Treatment Properties
Treatment Type	Sasobit® Wax (max 50 per cent by weight) or approved equivalent	Manufacturer Certification
Treatment Melting Temperature	Greater than 79C	ASTM D3954
Appearance/Handling	Free Flowing Coated Fibre Bundles (visual)	Manufacturer Certification

Note:

Length is determined by measurement with a measuring device capable of reading to the nearest millimeter.

Measure five samples and average.

Minimum dosage must be 65 grams aramid fibre per tonne of asphalt mixture. This amount can be increased as needed such as 1.5x (99g/t) or 2x (130g/t) dosage for additional mixture performance. The weight applied is for aramid fibers only. The weight of any delivery or packaging materials must not be considered.

Laboratory produced mixtures must be prepared using the Supplier’s strictly required batching and mixing procedures.

Submittals:

Provide the following from the product supplier at least two weeks prior to asphalt production:

Identify the mixing plant and type (Batch or Continuous Drum).

Material data sheet for the treated aramid fibre describing aramid fibre and treatment properties, including the type, weight, and flash point of treatment material.

A certified QA/QC mixing plan including procedures for continuously feeding the aramid fibre into the asphalt. The fibre supplier must approve the QA/QC mixing plan and provide certification of the QA/QC mixing technician at the asphalt mixing plant who is responsible for continuous feeding of the fibre into the HMA or WMA. The continuous feeding can be accomplished by using either manual or machine operated equipment for the entire fibre mixing process.

Job mix formula (JMF):

When treated aramid fibre is required as a mixture ingredient, modification to the job mix formula is not required.

Storage requirements:

Store treated aramid product in a dry environment and do not allow it to be in contact with moisture.

Asphalt concrete production:

Introduce the aramid product as follows:

Batch Plant - Aramid product must be added to aggregate in the weigh hopper or pugmill and metered separately from aggregates, binder, and other additives. Control the aramid product metering system with a proportioning device to meet the dosing requirements.

Drum Mixing Plant - Aramid product must be added at the RAP collar or to the RAP belt in a continuous manner to uniformly disperse with the aggregate and metered separately from aggregates, binder, and other additives. Control the aramid product metering system with a proportioning device to meet the dosing requirements.

Visual inspection shall be performed during the mixing process to verify uniform distribution of aramid fibre. Dry mix time for the aggregate and aramid fibres shall be adjusted to allow for sufficient melting and mixing of the fibre treatment material.

When WMA is used, a feeder system will be required for both Drum and Batch plants to ensure correct distribution and coating of the aramid fibers. It will be necessary to mix the aramid fiber with the aggregate longer to allow thorough distribution of aramid fibers at the end of the mixing process and to promote asphalt coating of individual strands of aramid fiber.

Quality control:

Metering equipment must be calibrated prior to initial use, recalibrated after any malfunction, and recalibrated monthly.

Plant personnel operating metering equipment must be trained and certified by the supplier.

The aramid fiber supplier’s representative must be on site during the first day of production mixing. This requirement can be waived if fiber supplier and HMA producer can supply evidence of supplier’s brand of fiber product being successfully produced by the HMA producer. The fiber supplier’s representative may be on-site for additional days as requested by the Region’s Engineer.

At the start of any fiber mixing, visually observe the reinforced asphalt mixture at the plant and in first three trucks at the point of discharge and prior to delivery to the job site. Observation must include using a shovel or other tool to inspect the mixture by allowing it to slightly cool and fall from the shovel or tool’s edge. Further inspection can be performed by allowing the loose mixture to cool and pulling apart to inspect for strands of aramid. Adjust mixing time and temperature if needed to ensure aramid fiber distribution.

If recorded aramid fiber dosage data results indicate a deviation of more than 10 per cent below the authorized JMF aramid fiber dosage or metering device malfunctions:

Stop production.

Take corrective action.

Demonstrate compliance with the authorized JMF dosage before resuming production and placement.

Fibre reinforced HMA/WMA placement:

All construction, mixture and density requirements of the asphalt as detailed in the Standard Specifications shall apply.

Pre-approved products, manufacturers, and QA/QC mixing:

Product: ACE XP Polymer Fiber™.

Manufacturer: Surface Tech.

Contact:	Michael J. Simons, P. Eng.
Phone: 647-613-6988
Email: michael.simons@surface-tech.com

Alternatives:

Alternative aramid fibre reinforcement shall satisfy the aramid fibre physical properties listed above, inclusive of pure aramid fibre content and fibre length. Alternative fibre treatment only may be considered, provided all other physical properties are satisfied. No other variations are permitted.

The alternative aramid fibre product, manufacturer and QA/QC mix shall be reviewed and approved by the Region or by the Region’s Consultant.

Acceptance:

Acceptance of the reinforced HMA/WMA will include the following factors:

The owner/specifier shall receive from the contractor a Certification Report from the fibre manufacturer which certifies that the metering and continuous feeding was performed per the Dosage rate and all other requirements of this specification by a certified technician, and that visual inspection was performed during the mixing process to certify that no clumping of aramid fibre or treatment product occurred.

All other construction, mixture and density requirements of the asphalt as detailed in the Standard Specifications shall apply.

Red Asphalt:

Use the following parameters for the red asphalt colouring:

Asphalt: PGAC 70-34 Polymer Modified Asphalt Binder (P).

Product: RW Colour Red or approved equivalent.

Manufacturer: Roadway Solutions (https://www.roadwaysolutions.fr/en/our-products/rwcolor-red/) or approved equivalent.

Red pigment: Red iron oxide pigment shall be Bayferrox® 130 from Lanxess or approved equivalent. Bayferrox® 130 is a fine spherically shaped red powder (approximately 0.17 μm particle size) with an iron oxide content exceeding 99.2 per cent.

Red Iron Pigment Specification:

Property	Result	Method
Iron Oxide (α-Fe2O3) Content	Less than 99.2 per cent
Particle Shape	Spherical	Electron Micrograph
Predominant Particle Size	0.17 µm	Electron Micrograph
Loss on Ignition at 1000oC, 0.5 hr	Less than 0.6 per cent	DIN 55913-2:1972
Specific Gravity	5.0	DIN EN ISO 787-10:1995
Water Soluble Content	Less than 0.4 per cent	Similar to DIN EN ISO 787-3:200

Dosage: Pigment agent dosage should be selected according to additive supplier recommendation and has to be confirmed with Region’s consultant for approval. A typical dosage of 0.5 to 6 per cent pigment loading is expected to meet the properties of the binder, desired mix colour, and mix performance requirements.

Asphalt Binder Properties:

Refer to Table 1 in the Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – OPSS.MUNI 1101.

Aggregates:

Pink traprock aggregate blend shall be used in the red asphalt mix. The aggregate blend shall meet the physical requirements of SP12.5 FC2 mixture type, OPSS.MUNI.1151.

RAP in Superpave mixes are not permitted.

Special Considerations:

Contractor shall ensure the paver, trucks carrying asphalt to the site are properly cleaned before and after the placing of red asphalt to prevent color contamination.

Contractors must be diligent to ensure all phases of the plant are cleaned thoroughly since the slightest remnant will appear in consecutive mixes of red asphalt.

Tack coat staining on the red asphalt must be prevented.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of asphalt shall be by mass in tonnes.

All asphalt that is delivered to the Work site shall be accompanied by a truck weigh ticket showing the truck number, type of hot mix, Contract number, truck time in and out of the hot mix plant, tare mass to the nearest 50 kg, gross mass to the nearest 50 kg, net mass in kg, and the driver’s signature.

The truck weigh ticket shall be printed by an electronic printer interfaced with the truck scale readout and capable of recording the tare mass, gross mass, and net mass. The tare mass for the truck shall include the vehicle, operator, fuel, spare tire, etc. The tare mass of the truck shall be taken at least once per shift.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the truck weigh ticket or delivery ticket for each load is handed to the Contract Administrator inspecting the asphalt paving operation at the time the delivery truck unloads at the paving site. The Contract Administrator may not accept delivery tickets that are not submitted at the proper time or are submitted in groups after the delivery trucks have left the paving site.

The Contractor shall permit the Contract Administrator to make random checks of the gross mass and tare mass of trucks hauling asphalt by requiring them to be driven over an independent certified scale.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Removal and replacement of the following shall be at no extra cost to the Owner:

Defective areas of asphalt, including but not limited to those due to flushing, bleeding, segregation, fat spots, surface damage, and surface contamination.

Asphalt that does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Referee testing undertaken to resolve a dispute shall be at no extra cost to the Owner if the referee test results confirm that the asphalt does not meet the minimum requirements of Table 8 or is deemed borderline or rejectable according to Table 9. The Referee Lab will be chosen at the sole discretion of the Owner and will be CCIL Certified in the testing associated with the disputed results.

A coring, testing, and traffic control program undertaken to resolve a dispute shall be at no extra cost to the Owner if the mix compaction is confirmed to be below the minimum specified compaction.

No additional payment shall be made for any delays or costs attributed to verification of the gross mass and tare mass of trucks requested by the Contract Administrator.

SPEC NOTE: The following “Basis of Payment” clause may be used for asphalt overlay contracts:

Subsection 310.10.01 is amended by the addition of the following:

The Contract price for hot mix asphalt shall include the supply and placement of temporary line markings when two lifts of asphalt are being placed and there shall be.

Item 1.08.45 – Temporary asphalt sidewalk, hot mix HL 3

Reference:
Contract Drawings

Note:

This item shall be used for hand-placed temporary asphalt sidewalk.

Include:

Excavation and disposal of existing boulevard materials as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Compaction of subgrade to 95 per cent Standard Proctor Dry Density (SPDD).

Installation of 150 mm Granular A compacted to 95 per cent SPDD.

Supply and installation of 50 mm HL 3 compacted to 95 per cent Standard Proctor Density.

Removal and disposal of temporary asphalt sidewalk (including granular A) as directed by the contract administrator.

Restoration of the area with topsoil and sod.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of temporary asphalt sidewalks shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do to the work.

Granular A for granular base shall be supplied under the Granular A tender item.

Item 1.08.50 – Extra over item 1.08.03 - coloured, impressed asphalt

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 310

Also include:

Stamp pattern into asphalt according to the latest revision of the StreetPrint Genuine Stamped Asphalt Specification as issued by HUB Surface Systems.

Supply and place three layers of StreetBond150 with StreetBond Colourant according to the latest version of the StreetBond150 High Performance Coated Asphalt Specification as issued by HUB Surface Systems.

Note:

Pattern for the coloured, impressed asphalt shall be 200 mm (eight inches) Tile 20-61-500 (200 x 200 mm with running bond pattern perpendicular to the road) as per the Template Catalog as issued by HUB Surface Systems (https://hubss.com).

Colour shall be Traditional “Taupe”.

Hot mix asphalt shall be supplied, placed, and compacted under Item 1.08.03.

A Stamped Asphalt Manufacturer Certified Installer, proven by letter confirming certification from HUB Surface Systems. Names of installers can be obtained by contacting HUB Surface Systems.

Granular A for granular base shall be supplied under the Granular A tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of impressed asphalt shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Removal and replacement of the following shall be at no extra cost to the Owner:

Defective areas of HMA, including but not limited to those due to flushing, bleeding, segregation, fat spots, surface damage, and surface contamination.

HMA that does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Referee testing undertaken to resolve a dispute shall be at no extra cost to the Owner if the referee test results confirm that the HMA does not meet the minimum requirements of Table 8 or is deemed borderline or rejectable according to Table 9.

A coring, testing, and traffic control program undertaken to resolve a dispute shall be at no extra cost to the Owner if the mix compaction is confirmed to be below the minimum specified compaction.

No additional payment shall be made for any delays or costs attributed to verification of the gross mass and tare mass of trucks requested by the Contract Administrator.

Item 1.08.60 – Asphalt curb and gutter, HL 3F (PGAC 58-28)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 312
OPSD 601.010 “Asphalt Curb”

Note:

This item shall be used for placement of permanent machine-placed hot mix asphalt curb and gutter.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of asphalt curb and gutter shall be by length in metres along the top of the curb.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do to the work.

For the purpose of this item, Subsection 312.10.02 of OPSS.MUNI 312 is deleted. Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall include supply of HMA.

Item 1.08.61 – Temporary asphalt curb at catch basins, HL 3F (PGAC 58-28)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 312
OPSD 601.010 “Asphalt Curb”

Note:

This item shall be used for hand-placed temporary asphalt curbs behind new catch basins (CB) to allow for CB frame adjustments by others prior to placement of the final surface lift of hot mix asphalt HMA. Asphalt curb lengths shall be approximately one metre for single catch basins and two metres for double catch basins.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of asphalt curb and gutter shall be by length in metres along the top of the curb installed and removed. (SPEC NOTE: Remove or include the “or removed” text

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do to the work.

For the purpose of this tender item, Subsection 312.10.02 of OPSS.MUNI 312 is deleted. Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall include supply of HMA.

Item 1.08.62 – Temporary asphalt curb and gutter outlet, HL 3F (PGAC 58-28), 45 degrees

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 312
OPSD 605.020

Note:

This item shall be used for hand-placed temporary hot mix asphalt (HMA) curb and gutter outlets within and at the end of run of concrete curb and gutter prior to placement of the final surface lift of HMA by others.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the temporary asphalt curb and gutter outlets installed and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do to the work.

For the purpose of this tender item, Subsection 312.10.02 of OPSS.MUNI 312 is deleted. Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall include supply of HMA.

Item 1.08.63 – Asphalt spillways, HL 3F (PGAC 58-28)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 312
OPSD 605.040

Note:

Asphalt spillways shall be placed to an average width of 0.75 m and depth of 50 mm of hot mix asphalt.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of asphalt spillways shall be by length in metres along the flow line from end of gutter outlet to the spillway termination.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do to the work.

For the purpose of this tender item, Subsection 312.10.02 of OPSS.MUNI 312 is deleted. Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall include supply of HMA.

Item 1.08.64 – Asphalt multi-use/sidewalk, HL 3 (PGAC 58-28), 50 mm depth

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02749
OPSS.MUNI 311

Note:

Asphalt for multi-use paths shall be placed to a width of xx m and depth of 50 mm of hot mix asphalt.

Asphalt for sidewalks shall be placed to a width of xx m and depth of 50 mm of hot mix asphalt.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of asphalt multi-use paths and sidewalks shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do to the work.

For the purpose of this tender item, Subsection 311.10.02 of OPSS.MUNI 311 is deleted. Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall include supply of HMA.

Granular A for granular base shall be supplied under the Granular A tender item.

Item 1.08.73 – Tack coat

Reference:
OPSS.PROV 308
OPSS.MUNI 310 and 1103

Subsection 310.07.03 of OPSS.MUNI 310 is amended by the addition of the following:

Tack coat shall be applied using self-propelled or tow-along pressure distributors capable of applying the product at the specified rate and in a continuous and uniform manner both longitudinally and transversely for the full lane width. The distributors shall be equipped with a volume-determining device of sufficient sensitivity to measure the quantity of tack coat dispensed, measurable to the nearest five litres.

Also include:

Apply tack coat to milled pavement and previously paved surfaces prior to new paving.

Apply tack coat according to OPSS.MUNI 310 and Subsection 308.07.01 of OPSS.PROV 308.

Note:

The use of a hand-held pressure wand is acceptable only for tack coating small irregularly shaped areas such as tapers.

The Contractor shall consider the use of alternative products for nighttime operations and cold temperatures. The use of any alternative product requires the approval of the Contract Administrator.

Contract Administrator may require, at any time, testing of the diluted emulsion.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of tack coat shall be by area applied in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for the tack coating of protection board shall be included under the Tack Coat tender item.

Payment for the tack coating of concrete surfaces completed in association with bridge deck waterproofing shall be included in the bridge deck waterproofing item according to OPSS.MUNI 914.

Item 1.08.74 – Crack repair by milling and filling cracks

Reference:
Contract Drawings

Include:

Mill cracks in the existing asphalt to a section 150 mm wide x 75 mm deep

Remove and dispose of the milled materials off-site.

Supply, place and compact HL 3 hot mix asphalt in two separate lifts and compact each lift to 97 per cent of the Standard Proctor Density.

Maintain grade to within 6 mm tolerance with existing adjacent asphalt pavement surface.

Spray the walls and invert of the milled area with RS-1 (tack coat) prior to placing the HL 3 hot mix.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of crack treatment shall be in metres along the milled cracks.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.08.75 – GlasGrid TF pavement reinforcement

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)

Include:

Thoroughly clean the exposed surface to ensure a clean surface free of loose material upon completion of asphaltic concrete milling and base repairs. Use power-broom and/or wash as necessary.

Lay Glasgrid TF on prepared asphalt surface in areas shown on Contract Drawings and specified by the Contract Administrator. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.

Provide a minimum transverse overlay of 50 mm and a minimum longitudinal overlay of 150 mm.

Note:

Glasgrid TF is a self-adhesive pavement reinforcement mesh manufactured by Tensar (St. Gobain).

Paving equipment may travel over the GlasGrid TF mat; however, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs to repair any resultant damage to the GlasGrid TF material.

General public shall not be permitted to travel directly upon the GlasGrid TF.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of GlasGrid TF pavement reinforcement shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.08.77/78 – Granular sealing

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 305
OPSD 210.070

Section 305.05 of OPSS.MUNI 305 is amended by the deletion of Type I-B Emulsified asphalt primer.

In subsection 305.07.03 of OPSS.MUNI 305, delete the second paragraph and replace with the following:

Only Type I-A sealer may be used in any areas where Type I sealers have been specified.

Note:

Granular sealing shall be applied to shoulders, including rounding, within the contract limits.

Areas to be sealed may include full shoulder width, shoulder rounding and behind guide rails.

Measurement for Payment:

SPEC NOTE: For Item 1.08.77, use the following:

Subsection 305.09.01.01 of OPSS.MUNI 305 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Measurement shall be by volume in litres of sealer used.

SPEC NOTE: For Item 1.08.78, use the following:

Subsection 305.09.01.01 of OPSS.MUNI 305 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Measurement shall be by the area sealed in square metres with no deduction for guide rail posts and other roadside objects.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Sprayed areas damaged by the Contractor’s operations or identified by the Contract Administrator as being inadequately treated shall be repaired and resprayed, at no additional cost to the Owner.

Sprayed areas damaged by others shall be repaired and resprayed and administered as a Change in the Work.

Item 1.08.81 – Routing, cleaning, and sealing cracks in hot mix asphalt pavement

SPEC NOTE: This item would typically be used on road rehabilitation contracts as rubberized sealant is not normally overlaid.

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 341, 706, and 1212
OPSD 508.010
Contract Location Map at back of documents.
Various Locations Breakdown chart inserted below.

Subsection 341.05.01 of OPSS.MUNI 341 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Crack sealing material shall be hot-poured rubberized sealant conforming to OPSS.MUNI 341 and OPSS.MUNI 1212 and in compliance with ASTM designation D1190. Hot-poured rubberized sealant compound shall be obtained from a supplier listed on the Ministry of Transportation of Ontario Designated Sources for Materials (DSM number 3.05.40).

In Subsection 341.07.01 of OPSS.MUNI 341, the first paragraph is deleted and replaced with the following:

Cracks up to 20 mm in width shall be routed to provide a rout width between 40 mm and 50 mm and a minimum depth of 8 mm.

In Subsection 341.07.04 of OPSS.MUNI 341, the third paragraph is deleted and replaced with the following:

For all other pavements, the liquid sealing compound shall be placed into the prepared cracks in a neat and workmanlike manner so that upon cooling, the sealant is flush with the adjacent pavement surface.

Also include:

Remove and dispose of all dust and debris resulting from Contractor’s operations, by means of a mechanical sweeper and/or flusher as required immediately after the routing and sealing has been completed, or at least on a daily basis. The use of air powered blowers to clean the debris from urban roads or rural roads exceeding two lanes is prohibited.

Provide all traffic control according to OPSS.MUNI 706 and according to the Contract Documents during the crack treatment operation.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of cracks routed and sealed shall be by linear metres along the routed, cleaned, and sealed crack.

Any portion of the sealed crack where the rout migrates away from the crack shall not be included in the measurement.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

No additional payment shall be made for mobilization/demobilization and travelling between site locations.

Item 1.09.02 – 150 mm diameter perforated HDPE subdrain

Item 1.09.04 – 150 mm diameter non-perforated CSP outlet pipe

Item 1.09.05 – 150 mm diameter perforated CSP

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 405, 1004, 1840, and 1860
RMDSD S-100.090
OPSD 216.021

Also include:

Excavate separate 300 mm x 300 mm trench below subgrade according to OPSD 216.021 (unwrapped) and the Contract Drawings.

Supply and install 150 mm diameter perforated, open profile (dual wall), HDPE pipe with a geotextile sock.

Supply and install 150 mm diameter non-perforated, open profile (dual wall) HDPE pipe with a minimum of 2 m length at each catch basin and catch basin maintenance hole on the downstream end to the subdrain run and at ditch outlets.

Supply and install grate according to RMDSD S-100.090 on all subdrain ditch inlets and outfalls when ordered by the Contract Administrator.

Supply and install mortar sand around subdrain pipe with a minimum 50 mm bedding. Ensure subdrain pipe is not allowed to float out of position.

Connect to new or existing storm drainage structures.

Note:

HDPE open profile (dual wall) subdrain shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 1840.

Mortar sand shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 1004.

Geotextile sock shall be a knitted sock, or sewn on wrap, geotextile according to OPSS.MUNI 1860 with a maximum filtration Opening Size of 500 µm.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pipe subdrain shall be by length in metres horizontally along the centreline of the pipe between the ends of the pipe subdrain, including outlets, or between the upstream end of the pipe subdrain and the centre of a maintenance hole, catch basin, or ditch inlet.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When excavation and backfilling of subdrain and outlet pipe overlaps the excavation and backfilling required for other work, payment for overlapping excavation and backfilling shall be made in accordance with the specifications for such other work as though no excavation and backfilling were required for pipe subdrain.

When subdrain and outlet pipe are placed below subgrade and the embedment and backfill material are the same material used in the road base or subbase, the embedment and backfill material shall be paid for with the road base or subbase item. When embedment or backfill material or both are different than the material used for the road base or subbase, payment for the embedment and backfill material shall be included in the Contract price for the pipe subdrain.

When unstable foundations are encountered, payment for stabilization shall be as Extra Work.

Maintenance of the stability of the trench shall be at no extra cost to the Owner.

Correction of any defective workmanship and defective or damaged material shall be at no extra cost to the Owner.

Granular A for granular base shall be supplied under the Granular A tender item.

SPEC NOTE: The following item is to be used only on local streets in the City of Oshawa. Ensure the required quantity of Granular A is included in the total quantity for Item 1.06.02.

Item 1.09.11 – 150 mm diameter subdrain as per Oshawa standard OS-220

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 405
City of Oshawa Standard Drawing OS-220

Also include:

Excavate separate 300 mm wide trench below subgrade according to OS-220 and Contract Drawings.

Supply and install 150 mm diameter perforated dual wall polyethylene pipe according to OS-220.

Connect to new or existing storm drainage structures.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pipe subdrain shall be by length in metres horizontally along the centreline of the pipe between the ends of the pipe subdrain, including outlets, or between the upstream end of the pipe subdrain and the centre of a maintenance hole, catch basin, or ditch inlet.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When excavation and backfilling of subdrain and outlet pipe overlaps the excavation and backfilling required for other work, payment for overlapping excavation and backfilling shall be made in accordance with the specifications for such other work as though no excavation and backfilling were required for pipe subdrain.

When subdrain and outlet pipe are placed below subgrade and the embedment and backfill material are the same material used in the road base or subbase, the embedment and backfill material shall be paid for with the road base or subbase item. When embedment or backfill material or both are different than the material used for the road base or subbase, payment for the embedment and backfill material shall be included in the Contract price for the pipe subdrain.

When unstable foundations are encountered, payment for stabilization shall be as Extra Work.

Maintenance of the stability of the trench shall be at no extra cost to the Owner.

Correction of any defective workmanship and defective or damaged material shall be at no extra cost to the Owner.

Granular A for granular base shall be supplied under the Granular A tender item.

Item 1.10.xx – xxx mm diameter storm drains

Item 1.10.xx – xxx mm diameter storm drains

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to RMDCS 02530
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Section 01450 and 02530
OPSS.MUNI 410, 1820, 1840, and 1841
RMDSD S-200.010

Also include:

Construct storm drains according to RMDCS Section 02530, the Standard Revision to RMDCS 02530, OPSS.MUNI 410 and RMDSD S-200.010 including crusher run limestone bedding and sand cover.

Note:

Storm drains are to be used to restore drainage pipes either damaged or interfered with by the proposed construction.

Reference Region of Durham Approved Manufacturers' Products List on the Road Authority website (https://www.roadauthority.com) for acceptable pipe products. Acceptable pipe materials for this Item are:

SDR 28 PVC gravity sewer pipe to OPSS.MUNI 1841.

HDPE gravity sewer pipe to OPSS.MUNI 1840. HDPE pipe must utilize bell and spigot joints with gaskets.

Circular Concrete Pipe to OPSS.MUNI 1820, of the appropriate class.

Reviewed equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of storm drains shall be by length in metres along its horizontal centreline from the centreline of the main pipe sewer to the end of the storm drain.

Connections to existing or proposed storm sewer pipes, structures and storm drains shall be paid under Item 1.10.10.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.10.10 – Connect storm drains to existing storm sewer

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to RMDCS 02530
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Section 02530
OPSS.MUNI 410

Also include:

Connect to existing storm sewer pipes or maintenance holes using manufactured tees or core-drilled openings, with concrete collars complete to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of connections made.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Storm Sewer SPEC NOTE:
1. List each pipe diameter separately using item number and description found in item catalog/Builterra.

2. Consider if “permanent restoration” or “temporary asphalt” items are required.

Item 1.11.xx – xxx mm diameter storm sewer pipe

Item 1.11.xx – xxx mm diameter storm sewer pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx – General
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to RMDCS 02530
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Section 02530
OPSS.MUNI 401, 410, 1840, and 1841
RMDSD S-200.010

Note:

Reference Region of Durham Approved Manufacturers' Products List on the Road Authority website (https://www.roadauthority.com) for acceptable storm sewer pipe products for each material type.

SPEC NOTE: Use the following Clauses when pipe material is not specified:

Pipe materials are not specified on the Contract Drawings. The following pipe materials as specified on the Region’s Approved Manufacturers’ Products List may be used:

SDR 35 PVC solid wall gravity sewer pipe (up to maximum 900 mm diameter) to OPSS.MUNI 1841.

HDPE gravity sewer pipe (up to maximum 900 mm diameter) to OPSS.MUNI 1840.

Concrete pipe for 300 mm to 450 mm diameter pipe, Class 140D.

Concrete pipe for 525 mm to 900 mm diameter pipe, Class 65D.

Concrete pipe for 975 mm to 3600 mm diameter pipe, Class 50D.

SPEC NOTE: Use the following Clauses when pipe material is specified:

Pipe materials are note specified on the Contract Drawings are generally concrete/HDPE/PVC sewer pipe; however, the following materials as specified on the Region’s Approved Manufacturers’ Products List may be substituted for round concrete/HDPE/PVC pipe unless noted otherwise:

SDR 35 PVC solid wall gravity sewer pipe (up to maximum 900 mm diameter) to OPSS.MUNI 1841.

HDPE gravity sewer pipe (up to maximum 900 mm diameter) to OPSS.MUNI 1840.

Concrete pipe for 300 mm to 450 mm diameter pipe, Class 140D.

Concrete pipe for 525 mm to 900 mm diameter pipe, Class 65D.

Concrete pipe for 975 mm to 3600 mm diameter pipe, Class 50D.

Where an existing pipe sewer was constructed using concrete sewer pipe, use concrete pipe for any pipe repairs and extensions of such pipe including cut-in tees. For pipe sewers extending from cut-in concrete tees, other approved materials may be used.

Pipe bedding and cover shall be according to RMDSD S-200.010.

Any expenses for remedial work resulting from unauthorized over-excavation of the trench width and depth shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Trench width shall be in accordance with RMDSD S-200.010.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of storm sewer pipe shall be by length in metres along the horizontal centreline length of the pipe from the centre of one drainage structure to the centre of another drainage structure or outlet end of the storm sewer pipe sewer and shall include excavation and backfill in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 401 and 410. When the grade of the pipe sewer is 10 per cent or greater, the above measurement is then of the slope length.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Culvert SPEC NOTE:
1. List each pipe diameter separately using item number and description found in item catalog/Builterra.
2. For culvert extensions, insert the following: “Contractor shall verify size and type of existing culvert pipe prior to ordering.

Item 1.12.xx – xxx mm diameter culvert pipe

Item 1.12.xx – xxx mm diameter culvert pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx – General
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 421
OPSS.MUNI 421 and 1801
OPSD 802.010

Also include:

Pipe bedding and cover shall be according to OPSD 802.010.

Note: Granular embedment material shall be Granular A. Embedment material shall be placed and compacted in maximum 300 mm lifts up to the bottom of the roadway/driveway granular base as specified on the Contract Drawings.

Pipe couplers, where required, shall be watertight.

Backfill with select native materials and compaction.

Note:

Acceptable pipe materials for this Item are:

Corrugated Steel Pipe, Aluminized Type 2 to CSA G401.

Reviewed equivalent.

Contractor shall verify size and type of existing culvert pipe prior to ordering. SPEC NOTE: Only use this Clause for culvert extensions.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pipe culverts, non-circular pipe culverts, pipe culvert extensions, and non-circular pipe culvert extensions shall be along the horizontal length of the pipe in metres, from one end of the pipe to the other end of the pipe. When the grade of the pipe culvert is 10 per cent or greater, the above measurement shall then be of the slope length.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

When the Contract requires swamp excavation to place a pipe culvert, payment for the swamp excavation shall be under the tender item covering the swamp excavation for earth embankment construction. No alterations shall be made to the tender item for the pipe culvert so affected.

Item 1.13.01 – Adjust watermain valve box

Reference:
Contract Drawings

Include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess material in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Adjust sliding-type valve box to finished grade.

Backfill and compact excavated area.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of valves adjusted.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Payment for additional new sections or total replacement shall be made using the appropriate Contingency Unit Price items.

Item 1.13.02 – Salvage and relocate hydrant and secondary valve

SPEC NOTE: This SP is written for situations where hydrants are moved back towards property line at the same location in order to widen the travelled roadway. Where the hydrant is to be relocated to another station along the same road/street, use Item 3.04.04.

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-201.030 and S-210.010

Also include:

Excavate to expose existing hydrant, valve and connecting piping.

Remove, salvage and clean existing hydrant, valve, and piping. Return salvaged hydrants to the Region’s Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono, Scugog, Sunderland Depot.

Supply and install required length of new PVC C900, SDR18 watermain pipe restrained to existing watermain pipe.

Reconnect salvaged hydrant and valve with restrained joints and all new hardware (gaskets, bolts, etc.).

Install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030.

Backfill with Select Native Materials and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrants relocated.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

If a new hydrant and/or valve is deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator such hydrant and/or valve shall be paid extra to this tender item based on Contractor’s paid invoice (less HST) plus 20 per cent mark up and the existing materials shall be delivered to the Region’s Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono, Scugog, Sunderland Depot.

All vertical extensions for the hydrant and valve box shall be paid using the appropriate Contingency Unit Price items.

Item 1.13.xx – Hydrant and secondary valve extension (xx mm height) (station xx)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-210.010

Also include:

Excavate to bottom of hydrant barrel and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install hydrant extensions and/or valve box and rod extensions as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Install extensions at the bottom of the hydrant barrel/valve box.

Supply and install mechanical restrainers.

Extend tracer wires according to RMDSD S-210.010.

Backfill with Select Native Materials and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrants and corresponding secondary valves extended.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.13.15 – Hydrant and secondary valve lowering (station x+xxx)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-210.010

Also include:

Excavate to bottom of hydrant barrel and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Remove and dispose of hydrant extensions and/or valve box and rod extensions as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

Supply and install new mechanical restrainers.

Backfill with Select Native Materials and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrants and corresponding secondary valves lowered.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.14.xx – xxxx mm diameter precast concrete maintenance hole

Item 1.14.09/10 – 1200 mm x 1200 mm precast concrete ditch inlet maintenance hole (Type A/Type B) (SPEC NOTE: Use Item 1.14.06 for Type A; use Item 1.14.10 for Type B)

Item 1.14.11 – 600 mm x 600 mm precast concrete single catch basin

Item 1.14.12 – 600 mm x 1450 mm precast concrete double catch basin

Item 1.14.xx – xxx mm x xxx mm precast concrete ditch inlet

Item 1.14.xx – xxx mm x xxxx mm precast concrete ditch inlet maintenance hole with xxxx mm flat cap

Item 1.14.18 – xxxx mm diameter precast concrete maintenance hole tee

SPEC NOTE:
1. List each MH and CB separately with the number and description found in item catalog/Builterra.
2. Item 1.14.09 use OPSD 702.040; Item 1.14.10 use OPSD 702.050.

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx – General
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Section 02631
RMDSD S-100.071
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 408
OPSD 400.020, 400.080, 400.082, 401.010, 401.020, 403.010, 404.020, 405.020, 701.010, 701.011, 701.012, 701.013, 701.014, 701.015, 702.040, 702.050, 704.010, 705.010, 705.020, 705.030, 705.040, 706.010, 706.020, 706.030, and 707.010

Also include:

Supply, place, and compact 75 mm depth of 19 mm diameter crusher run limestone base.

Provide sump in all catch basin maintenance holes.

Provide steps according to OPSD 405.020.

Provide safety platforms according to OPSD 404.020, where required.

Reconnect existing pipes as required complete with 30 MPa concrete supplied in place.

Supply, place, and compact 300 mm wide Granular B backfill all around structure, full height, above granular base material.

Backfill with Select Native Materials outside the Granular B envelope, and compact.

Note:

All new maintenance holes placed within existing, proposed, or future road surface locations shall be integrated frame and cover (IFC) maintenance hole system, unless directed otherwise by the Contract Administrator. The IFC system shall be installed according to the manufactures’ specifications and shall be paid under 1.14.19. (SPEC NOTE: When applicable, ensure to include all 1.14.19 item numbers)

The use of precast modular adjustment units will not be permitted within the roadway unless the specific circumstances does not allow the use of an integrated frame and cover maintenance hole system or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Maintenance hole cover shall be according to OPSD 401.010. Type A maintenance hole covers shall be used in all locations. Frame and cover shall be placed to final/base course asphalt level or final grade in grassed areas.

Catch basin grates shall be according to OPSD 400.020.

Ditch inlet grates shall be according to OPSD 403.010.

Side inlet grates shall be according to OPSD 400.082.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of precast concrete maintenance holes installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of 1200 mm x 1200 mm precast concrete ditch inlet maintenance holes installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of precast concrete single catch basin installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of precast concrete double catch basin installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of precast concrete ditch inlets installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of precast concrete ditch inlet holes with xxxx mm flat cap installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of precast concrete maintenance hole tees installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.14.19 – Integrated frame and cover system for storm sewer maintenance hole

SPEC NOTE: When different MH diameters are used, use letters to differentiate between the items. For example, Item 1.14.19.A, 1.14.19.B, etc.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add the applicable drawing numbers)
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx – General
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Section 02631
RMDSD S-100.071
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 408
OPSD 401.010, 401.020, 405.020, 701.010, 701.011, 701.012, 701.013, 701.014, and 701.015

Also include:

Supply and install the integrated frame and cover (IFC) system.

Determine adjustment unit size by:

Measuring height from top of precast structure to final road surface.

Take measured height and subtract 150 mm. Round this value down to the nearest 50 mm.

Supply and place HDPE shims (25 mm minimum; 100 mm maximum) on top of the structure (IFC tapered top, chamber, etc.) to match the subbase height and required crossfall. The top of the adjustment unit shall be a minimum of 70 mm lower than the specified base course asphalt layer (50 mm for asphalt and 20 mm for the frame thickness).

Supply, install, and inflate inflatable form to 10 pounds per square inch (psi) into IFC System opening, creating a watertight seal. This shall be done prior to any grout installation.

Supply and place King In-Pakt Precision FS (Fast Setting) grout or an approved manufacturer’s equivalent into areas between the adjustment units and IFC tapered top.

Supply and install the telescopic ductile iron IFC frame.

Supply and install the maintenance hole cover according to OPSD 401.010, Type A.

Supply, place, and compact Granular B backfill all around the structure in accordance with Contract Drawings.

Supply, place, and compact Granular A to the top of the adjustment units. Ensure to leave a 50 mm minimum gap between the top of Granular A and the bottom of the IFC frame to accommodate the base course asphalt.

Base course asphalt stage:

Ensure there is no dirt or debris between the concrete adjustment unit and the frame.

After base course asphalt is placed, dig out and lift frame using a pick or prybar and fill the void with asphalt such that the top of the frame is sitting at road grade and ensure adequate compaction of asphalt.

Ensure there is no dirt or debris between the frame and the cover.

Surface course asphalt stage:

Adjust frame and cover by using pry bars to lift frame and place additional 40 mm of surface asphalt between the frame flange and the base course asphalt.

Ensure frame is embedded in surface course asphalt and level with the final road grade after compaction.

Provide steps according to OPSD 405.020.

Note:

The integrated frame and cover (IFC) system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s approved installation guide. Only Contractors/companies who have completed the manufacturer’s IFC training and certification program are permitted to install the IFC MH System. The IFC system used with precast concrete maintenance hole tender items and is only applicable for maintenance hole installations within existing, proposed, or future road surface locations.

The use of precast modular adjustment units shall not be permitted to be used with IFC systems.

Base and surface course asphalt shall be compacted with the IFC frame in place.

No saw cutting of the asphalt is required for final setting of the frame and cover.

The Granular B shall be paid under 1.06.01.

The Granular A shall be paid under Item 1.06.02.

The base course asphalt shall be paid under Item 1.08.xx.

The final course asphalt shall be paid under Item 1.08.xx.

Item 1.14.xx.A applies to the xxxx mm diameter precast concrete maintenance holes. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Clause only when there is more than one MH diameter in same tender. Add the appropriate letter (A, B, C, etc.) and MH diameter)

Item 1.14.xx.B applies to the xxxx mm diameter precast concrete maintenance holes. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Clause only when there is more than one MH diameter in same tender. Add the appropriate letter (A, B, C, etc. and MH diameter)

Contractor forces shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer’s personnel on the installation and construction of the IFC system.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of the concrete integrated frame and cover system for storm sewer maintenance holes installed.

This item shall be extra over the cost of each storm sewer maintenance hole Contract item.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.14.20 – Breaking into existing storm sewer maintenance holes and rebenching

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Section 02631
OPSS.MUNI 410
OPSD 701.021

Also include:

Provide temporary pumping and/or bypass arrangements required for existing sewage flows, to allow for benching in maintenance holes to be completed.

Rebench including:

Remove existing benching complete and dispose off-site.

Cleanout the structure thoroughly.

Supply and install new benching according to OPSD 701.021.

Note:

This item shall only be used for breaking into existing structures which require new benching or rebenching. Payment for breaking into existing structures which do not require new benching or rebenching or for breaking into existing reinforced concrete sewer pipes shall be made under Item 1.14.21.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of openings made in maintenance holes and rebenching installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.14.21 – Breaking into existing storm sewer maintenance holes, catch basins, ditch inlets, pipe culverts, and pipe sewers

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Section 02631
OPSS.MUNI 410

Note:

This item shall be used only for breaking into existing structures or large (450 mm diameter and up) pipe culverts and reinforced concrete sewer pipes. Breaking into existing plastic or smaller CSP pipes and connections to the existing pipe shall be included in the Contract price for the appropriate pipe item.

Payment for connections to maintenance holes and restoration of structures shall be included in the Contract price for the appropriate pipe item.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of openings made in maintenance holes, catch basins, ditch inlets, pipe culverts and pipe sewers.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.14.22 – Rebench existing storm sewer maintenance holes

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
RMDCS Section 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407
OPSD 701.021

Also include:

Provide temporary pumping and/or bypass arrangements required for existing sewage flows, to allow for benching in maintenance holes to be completed.

Remove existing benching complete and dispose off-site.

Cleanout maintenance hole thoroughly.

Construct new benching according to OPSD 701.021.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of maintenance holes rebenched.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.14.23 – Rebuilding existing storm/sanitary sewer maintenance holes

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 408
RMDSD S-100.071

Rebuilding Maintenance Hole Details

Structure Number	Station	Adjustment Required	Existing Structures	Action Required	Measurement for Payment
SAN MH G23-014	3+039	+ 0.80 m	320 mm Brickwork Precast cone	Remove and dispose frame and grate Remove and dispose of Brickwork Remove and salvage precast cone Supply and install one precast riser section Place salvaged cone Place new frame and grate and adjust frame to final grade (top of mid-binder asphalt) Place new integrated frame and cover system	2.21 m
STM MH	3+885 LT	+ 0.69 m	150 mm Moduloc Flat top	Remove and dispose of existing frame and grate Remove and dispose of Moduloc Remove and salvage flat top Supply and install one precast riser section Place Salvaged top Place new frame and grate and adjust frame to final grade (boulevard) Place new integrated frame and cover system	1.29 m

Also include:

Remove and dispose of existing frame and grate.

Supply and place new frame and grate and adjust frame to grade.

For integrated frame and cover (IFC) system installations on existing maintenance hole structures or rehabilitation of maintenance holes, the Contractor shall:

Sawcut square perimeter and excavate to the conventional tapered top, flat top, or chamber.

Remove existing adjustment units.

Dispose of existing frame and cover as directed by the Contract Administrator or as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

Determine the correct concrete adjustment unit by following instructions set out in the manufacturer’s installation guide.

Supply and install a 1016 mm diameter cardboard sonotube around the tapered top, flat top, or chamber as per manufacturer’s installation guide.

Drill four sets of 15 mm diameter holes at a 90 mm depth spaced 130 mm apart for each set to install the curb stirrups. Any deviation shall be under the direction of manufacturer.

Supply and install 10M rebar curb stirrups.

Supply and install HDPE shims (25 mm minimum; 100 mm maximum) between the base structure (taper top, flat cap, etc.) and the concrete adjustment unit such that the top of the concrete adjustment unit is a minimum of 70 mm below the top of the asphalt layer (50mm for asphalt and 20 mm for frame thickness) and angled to match the required crossfall on top of precast section.

Supply, install, and inflate inflatable form to 10 psi creating a watertight seal into drainage structure opening. This shall be done prior to any grout installation.

Supply and place King In-Pakt Precision FS (Fast Setting) grout or an approved manufacturer’s equivalent into areas between the adjustment units and IFC tapered top.

Once grout has sufficiently set, release pressure from inflatable form and remove said form.

Supply and install telescopic ductile iron IFC frame on top of adjustment unit.

Install salvaged/Supply and install cover on IFC frame. (SPEC NOTE: Designer to decide if the existing cover will be used or a new cover is applicable.)

Supply, place, and compact granular roadbase material, as specified on Contract Drawings, up to the top of the surface of the adjustment unit.

Supply, place, and compact top lift of hot mix asphalt (HMA), as specified on the Contract Drawings, within excavated areas and between the frame and top of adjustment units. The frame shall be lifted off concrete, place and compact HMA under frame flange. This will allow the frame to be cushioned and become part of the pavement structure.

SPEC NOTE: Use the following “Note” subsection for IFC MH systems

Note:

The integrated frame and cover (IFC) system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s approved installation guide. Only Contractors/companies who have completed the manufacturer’s IFC training and certification program are permitted to install the IFC MH System. The IFC system used with precast concrete maintenance hole tender items and is only applicable for maintenance hole installations within existing, proposed, or future road surface locations.

The use of precast modular adjustment units shall not be permitted to be used with IFC systems.

Maintenance hole cover shall be as per OPSD 401.010, Type A.

The granular roadbase material shall be paid under the appropriate granular tender items.

Asphalt shall be paid under the appropriate hot mix asphalt tender items.

The IFC System shall be kept in place when surface course asphalt is compacted.

Contractor forces shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer’s personnel on the installation and construction of the IFC system.

SPEC NOTE: Measurements for Maintenance Hole Rebuilds using moduloc adjustment units should be made using the attached diagram as a guide. (Delete diagram before tendering)

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for rebuilding of existing storm/sanitary sewer maintenance holes shall be by amount of adjustment by metres.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of existing storm/sanitary sewer maintenance holes rebuilt using IFC systems.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.14.24 – Adjusting existing maintenance holes, catch basins, and watermain valve chambers (maximum 300 mm)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Section 02631
OPSS.MUNI 408
OPSD 704.010

Also include:

Remove and dispose of existing frame and grate.

Supply and place new frame and grate and adjust frame to grade.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of maintenance holes (maximum 300 mm) adjusted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of catch basins (maximum 300 mm) adjusted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of water valve chambers (maximum 300 mm) adjusted.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.14.25 – Relocate existing catch basin (single or double)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
RMDCS Sections 02315, 02318, and 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 510
RMDSD S-200.010
OPSD 400.020

Also include:

Excavate according to RMDCS Sections 02315 and 02318.

Remove and dispose of existing adjustment rings/brickwork and catch basin frame and grate.

Remove, salvage and clean existing (single or double) catch basin structure according to OPSS.MUNI 510.

Supply and place 75 mm depth of 19 mm diameter crusher run limestone base.

Install salvaged structure at proposed curb and gutter line or other new location, as specified.

Supply, place, and compact 300 mm wide Granular B backfill all around catch basin, full height, above bedding material.

Supply and install new frames and grates according to OPSD 400.020 and adjust to final grade. Total height of adjustment units shall not exceed 300 mm.

Reconnect to existing storm pipe sewer complete with new pipe in bedding according to RMDSD S 200.010.

Modify and plug existing openings with 30 MPa concrete as required.

Backfill all excavations with Select Native Material and compact.

Dispose of all excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of catch basins relocated.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.14.26 – Replace existing storm sewer maintenance hole frame and cover or catch basin frame and grate

Item 1.14.27 – Replace catch basin frame and grate with maintenance hole frame and cover

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
OPSS.MUNI 510 and 408
OPSD 400.020 and 401.010

Also include:

Remove and salvage existing frame and cover/grate and transport to Region's Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono, Scugog, Sunderland Depot.

Repair, or remove and replace existing brickwork with acceptable alternative, according to the Approved Manufacturers’ Products List (https://www.roadauthority.com). The maximum total height of existing and new bricks, adjustment units or grade rings shall be 300 mm.

Supply and install new maintenance hole frame and cover according to OPSD 401.010 complete in a new bed of mortar. Use Type A frame and cover.

Supply and install new catch basin frame and grate according to OPSD 400.020 complete in a new bed of mortar.

Supply and place Granular A backfill compacted around brickwork and frame.

Supply and place hot mix asphalt, in kind, except where asphalt placement is covered under another tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of frames and covers replaced.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of grates replaced.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.14.50 – NDS number xxxx - 250 mm x 250 mm polyethylene catch basin complete with NDS number xxxx grate and NDS number xxxx riser

Item 1.14.51 – NDS number xxxx - 300 mm x 300 mm polyethylene catch basin complete with NDS number xxxx grate and NDS number xxxx riser

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – General
NDS number 1200 and number 1882 (PECB)
NDS number 1212 and number 1812 (Grate)
NDS number 1216 and number 1816 (Riser)
NDS number 1206 (Plug) and number 1266 and number 1888 (Universal Outlet)

Also include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place standard precast patio slab levelled on grade.

Supply and install square NDS polyethylene catch basin (PE CB) complete with appropriate riser and green-coloured grate.

Plug any unused openings in CB unit with a NDS number 1206 plug.

Provide NDS number 1266 and number 1888 universal outlets, as appropriate, for all connections.

Connect existing service pipes into new PE CB with suitable NDS products and field adapters.

Supply, place and compact 100 mm wide Granular A backfill all around PE CB, above bedding material.

Backfill with Select Native Materials and compact.

Perform all other work necessary to complete installation of PE CB.

Note:

This product is distributed through various suppliers in Ontario. The parent company is:

National Diversified Sales (NDS) Incorporated.
NDS Website: www.ndspro.com.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of polyethylene catch basins installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract unit price shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.14.6x – Oil and grit separator number xx (SPEC NOTE: For Regional roads, the OGS number shall be a Regional assigned number)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
RMDCS Section 02631
RMDSD S-100.071
OPSS.MUNI 407
OPSD 404.020 and 405.020

Also include:

Prior to the submission of shop drawings to the Region the Contractor shall field verify the invert elevation of all existing storm sewers that connect to the proposed oil grit separator or connect to the proposed storm sewer upstream or downstream of the oil and grit separator. Written results of the field invert investigation shall be reported to the Contract Administrator and any existing storm sewer invert elevations found to deviate from the design shall be noted to allow the proposed storm sewer design to be verified prior to the submission of oil and grit separator shop drawings.

Supply, place, and compact 150 mm depth of 19 mm diameter crusher run limestone base.

Supply and install oil and grit separator according to this specification.

Provide steps according to OPSD 405.020.

Supply and install integrated frame and cover system as per manufactures’ specifications.

Provide safety platforms according to OPSD 404.020, where required.

Reconnect existing pipes as required complete with 30 MPa concrete supplied in place.

Supply, place, and compact 300 mm wide Granular B backfill all around structure, full height, above granular base material.

Backfill with Select Native Materials outside the Granular B envelope, and compact.

Note:

Maintenance hole frame and cover shall be according to OPSD 401.010. Use Type A frame and grate. (SPEC NOTE: If IFC MH system is being used then use “cover” and “grate” text only)

Catch basin grates shall be according to OPSD 400.020.

Ditch inlet grates shall be according to OPSD 403.010.

The integrated frame and cover shall be paid under Item 1.14.19.

The integrated frame and cover (IFC) system shall be used with precast concrete maintenance hole tender items and is only applicable for maintenance hole installations within existing, proposed, or future road surface locations.

The use of precast modular adjustment units shall not be permitted to be used with IFC systems.

SPEC NOTE: When OGS is proposed in the pavement, the Designer needs to consider the spacing between the frames that must be sufficient to ensure the frames (particularly the flanges) do not interfere with each other and asphalt can be compacted underneath each one. This needs to be addressed during the layout phase for the structure.

Oil and grit separators shall be designed with the following parameters:

For Oil and Grit Separator Item 1.14.xx (station xx+xxx).

Area of the site draining into the unit is x.xx hectares.

Composite runoff coefficient of the site is x.xx.

Peak flow expected xxxx.xx l/s.

Sediment storage capacity of x.xx m3.

Oil storage capacity of xxxx litres.

For Oil and Grit Separator Item 1.14.xx (station xx+xxx).

Area of the site draining into the unit is x.xx hectares

Composite runoff coefficient of the site is x.xxx.

Peak flow expected xxx.xx l/s.

Sediment storage capacity of x.xx m3.

Oil storage capacity of xxxx litres.

For Oil and Grit Separator Item 1.14.xx (station xx+xxx).

Area of the site draining into the unit is xx.xx hectares

Composite runoff coefficient of the site is x.xx

Peak flow expected xxxx.xx l/s

Sediment storage capacity of x.xx m3

Oil storage capacity of xxxx litres

General

Scope

The Contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment, and materials necessary to install the storm water treatment device(s) (SWTD) and appurtenances specified in the Contract Drawings and these specifications.

Submittals

Shop Drawings

The Contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings and calculation for average annual total suspended solids (TSS) removal. Supporting calculations shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario.

Hydraulic Performance

The SWTD manufacturer shall submit a hydraulic report that verifies the system weir is sized correctly for the treatment flow rate and in addition, indicates the effect the SWTD has on the hydraulic grade line.

Maintenance

The SWTD manufacturer shall submit a report estimating the SWTD maintenance frequency based on the following AEMC (average event mean concentration) for TSS loading.

Land Use	Average Event Mean Concentration (mg/L) – TSS
Residential	150
Commercial	120
Mixed	130
Open / Non-urban	200
Roads / Highway	330

Quality Assurance

Manufacturer’s Installation Certificate

The SWTD manufacturer shall submit a “Manufacturer’s Installation Certificate” certifying that each SWTD has been designed and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s technical design guidelines.

Products

Materials And Design

Precast concrete components shall conform to applicable sections of CSA standards, CAN/CSA A257.1, A257.2, A257.3, A257.4, ASTM C507M and OPSS.MUNI 1351 and the following:

Concrete shall achieve a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 28 MPa.

Unless otherwise noted, the precast concrete sections shall be designed to Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code (CHBDC) latest version loadings.

Cement shall be Type HE Portland Cement conforming to OPSS.MUNI 1301.

Aggregates shall conform to OPSS.MUNI 1001 and OPSS.MUNI 1002.

Reinforcing steel shall be deformed billet-steel bars, welded steel wire or deformed welded steel wire conforming to CSA A23.4-94 and ASTM A185 respectively.

Joints shall be sealed with fuel resistant joint sealing compound or gaskets.

Internal Components and appurtenances shall conform to the following:

Stainless Steel components shall be manufactured of Type 316 and 316L stainless steel conforming to ASTM F 1267-01.

Hardware shall be manufactured of Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A320.

Fiberglass components shall be manufactured to ASTM D-4097.

Concrete components shall be designed to withstand CHBDC latest version loadings.

SWTD Performance

The SWTD shall be designed to meet the following criteria:

The SWTD shall be designed to meet Ministry of Environment, Conservation and Parks Enhanced performance criteria.

The SWTD shall be capable of achieving an 80 per cent average annual reduction in the total suspended solids load based on the particle size distribution defined in the following table:

Table 1
Typical Stormwater Particle Size Distribution and Settling Velocities

Particle Size (µm) – (NURP 1983)	Per cent of Particle Mass	Average Settling Velocities (m/s)
Less than 20	0 to 20	0.00000254
20 to 40	20 to 30	0.00001300
40 to 60	30 to 40	0.00002540
60 to 130	40 to 60	0.00012700
130 to 400	60 to 80	0.00059267
400 to 4000	80 to 100	0.00550333

SWTD performance must be based on laboratory or field testing data. Sizing of the SWTD based solely on theoretical modeling is not acceptable.

Sizing of SWTD should be based on long term weather data from Canadian Station 6158350, Toronto Bloor Street. SWTD sizing model shall provide for an adjustment factor to correct for use of 60-minute data.

Hydraulic Capacity

The SWTD shall be equipped with an internal high flow bypass that is capable of conveying the maximum design flow rate from the treated drainage area with no flow going through the treatment portion of the unit.

Manufacturer

The oil grit separator supplied shall be one of the models listed on the Region of Durham’s Approved Manufacturers’ Products List (https://www.roadauthority.com/ASP/mpl/mpl.asp?MPIShortName=Durham+MPL).

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of oil and grit separator structures installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.15.05 – Concrete appurtenances - headwall

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 421
OPSS.MUNI 421, 902, 904, 905, and 1350
OPSD 804.030

Also include:

Backfill with Granular B below and above pipe sewer bedding and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for concrete appurtenances, headwall shall be by volume in cubic metres of the concrete placed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.15.10 – Precast concrete tree grate and cast-in-place concrete base

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Detail DSD-1

Include:

Excavation to grade and disposal of excess material in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place 30 MPa concrete to form square tree grate footing according to Contract Drawing, x-xx and/or Detail DSD-1.

Supply and place tree grate.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of tree grates supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.16.01 – Storm sewer outfall grate for 150 mm to 700 mm diameter CSP pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-100.090
OPSS.MUNI 1850

Also include:

Supply and install grate according to RMDSD S-100.090.

Note:

Hot dip galvanizing, if used, shall be according to ASTM A123M-15 (or latest edition).

Grates shall be installed on all storm sewer inlets and outlets to a closed sewer system except where an endwall is specified.

Pivot arm shall be installed level.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of grates supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.16.02 – Storm sewer outfall grate for 800 mm to 1400 mm diameter CSP pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-100.091

OPSS.MUNI 1850
Also include:

Supply and install grate according to RMDSD S-100.091.

Note:

Hot dip galvanizing, if used, shall be according to ASTM A123M-15 (latest edition).

Horizontal bars shall be installed level.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of grates supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.16.03 – Grating for concrete endwall

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 1850
OPSD 804.050

Also include:

Supply and install grate according to OPSD 804.050.

Note:

Hot dip galvanizing, if used, shall be according to ASTM A123M-15 (latest edition).

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of grates supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.17.01 – Concrete curb and gutter - all types, including curb terminations (machine placed and hand placed)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02700
OPSS.MUNI 353 and 1350
RMDSD S-300.070, S-300.080 and S-300.090
OPSD 310.030, 351.010, 600.010, 600.040, 600.080, 600.110, 605.030, and 608.010

Also include:

Construct curb terminations according to OPSD 608.010.

Construct traffic island end treatments according to RMDSD S-300.070, S-300.080 and S-300.090.

Provide sidewalk key where sidewalk is constructed adjacent to the proposed curb and gutter.

Note:

Curb shall be dropped flush to the gutter at all sidewalk ramps as per the “super elevated” section shown on OPSD 600.010 and as shown on OPSD 310.030. Do not use 30 mm lip shown on “tangent” section for sidewalk ramps. This lip shall be used at entrances only.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of concrete curb and gutter shall be by length in metres along the flow line of the gutter whether straight or curved, without separation into types. Areas which include temporary asphalt curb and gutter behind catch basins and catch basin maintenance holes shall be paid under their respective items and will not be included in this measurement for payment (SPEC NOTE: Include this sentence when Item 1.08.61 is included in tender).

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

There shall be no separate payment of concrete used for fillets in bullnoses.

Item 1.17.10 – Concrete curb and gutter - all types (hand placed)

SPEC NOTE: This item to be used only on rehab contracts. Do not use on capital contracts.

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02700
OPSS.MUNI 353 and 1350
OPSD 600.010, 600.040, 600.080, 600.110, 605.030, 608.010, 310.030, and 351.010
When including this item in a rehab contract, add the following points to the “Also include” list for Item 1.17.01

Also include:

Form new curb to match and tie into all existing curb and gutter shapes unless otherwise directed by the Contract Administrator.

Restore adjacent areas disturbed by curb construction (e.g. sod, asphalt, concrete etc.)

Hand form concrete around catch basins or any other appurtenances.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of concrete curb and gutter shall be by length in metres along the flow line of the gutter whether straight or curved, without separation into types. Areas which include temporary asphalt curb and gutter behind catch basins and catch basin maintenance holes shall be paid under their respective items and will not be included in this measurement for payment (SPEC NOTE: Include this sentence when Item 1.18.61 is included in tender).

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.17.16 – Catch basin setback

Item 1.17.17 – Maintenance hole setback

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02700
OPSS.MUNI 353 and 1350
RMDSD S-101.020

Note:

This item is “extra over” the straight-line curb paid under Item 1.17.01.

No deduction shall be made for the length of the catch basin setback in computing the measurement for any concrete curb and gutter item.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of catch basin setbacks constructed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of maintenance hole setbacks constructed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.18.01 – Concrete sidewalk

SPEC NOTE:
1. The text of Also include Clause .7 of this SP shall be suited to each project.
2. For projects on Regional Roads, the layout of ramps at intersections with Regional Roads shall be constructed according to OPSD 310.030, 310.031 or 310.033 as applicable. Other than the layout of ramps at intersections, the sidewalk shall be constructed according to the local area municipality standard (where a standard exists).
3. For contracts on local area municipality roads, ramps shall be constructed according to the local area municipality standard (where a standard exists), however traffic signal pole placement (if applicable) is according to OPSD 310.030, 310.031 or 310.033 as applicable.

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02700
Revisions to Standard Specifications Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 351
OPSS.MUNI 351 and 1350
OPSD 310.010, 310.020, 310.030, 310.031, 310.033, 310.040, and 310.050
City of Pickering Standard Drawing P-610 and P-611
Town of Ajax Standard Drawing AS-231
Town of Whitby Standard Drawing 208
Municipality of Clarington Standard Drawing C-307
City of Oshawa Standard Drawings OS-301, OS-303, and OS-304

SPEC NOTE:
Include the following for contracts in the City of Oshawa only:

OPSD 310.040 is amended as follows:

At all parking meters within the limits of sidewalk construction, a concrete boxout measuring 0.3 m x 0.3 m shall be constructed around the parking meter post.
At all utility poles within the limits of sidewalk construction, a concrete boxout measuring 0.75 m x 0.75 m shall be constructed around the utility pole.

Township of Uxbridge/Scugog/Brock

SPEC NOTE: Townships of Uxbridge, Scugog and Brock use OPSD’s. List appropriate OPSD references

Also include:

Supply and place welded wire mesh reinforcement (150 mm x 150 mm weave, MW 18.7 x MW 18.7) at all high density residential, commercial, and industrial driveways, if not otherwise defined in the local area municipality standard.

Construct contraction joints at intervals not exceeding 2.0 m, if not defined in the local area municipality standard.

Construct expansion joints at intervals not exceeding 6.0 m, if not defined in the local area municipality standard.

Provide expansion joints where sidewalk abuts other concrete structures, walks, curbs, utility poles, hydrants maintenance holes and any other location specified by the Contract Administrator.

Isolate utility poles, hydrants, maintenance holes, and other utility structures and appurtenances according to OPSD 310.040.

Increase sidewalk width to 1.8 m where adjacent to curb and gutter.

Construct sidewalk ramps at intersections according to (see spec note at the top of this specification).

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of concrete sidewalk shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Repair or removal and replacement of an unacceptable sidewalk bay shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner.

Granular A for sidewalk base shall be supplied under the Granular A tender item.

Item 1.18.03 – Extra over concrete sidewalk – tactile walking surface indicator plates (760 mm x 610 mm) as per Town of Ajax/Town of Whitby/City of Oshawa/Municipality of Clarington Standard Drawing xxx

Item 1.18.04 – Extra over concrete sidewalk – tactile walking surface indicator plates (915 mm x 610 mm) as per Town of Ajax/Town of Whitby/City of Oshawa/Municipality of Clarington Standard Drawing xxx

Item 1.18.06 – Extra over concrete sidewalk – radial tactile walking surface indicator plates (610 mm width) as per Town of Ajax/Town of Whitby/City of Oshawa/Municipality of Clarington Standard Drawing xxx

SPEC NOTE: The text of Also include Clause .1 of this SP shall be suited to each project.
For projects on Regional Roads, the layout of tactile plates at intersections with Regional Roads shall be constructed according to OPSD 310.030, 310.031 or 310.033 as applicable. Other than the layout, tactile plates shall be constructed according to the local area municipality standard (where a standard exists).
For contracts on local area municipality roads, tactile plates shall be constructed according to the local area municipality standard (where a standard exists).

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02700
OPSS.MUNI 351 and 1350
OPSD 310.030, 310.031, 310.033, and 310.039
Contract Drawings
Town of Ajax Standard Drawings AS-233 and AS-234
Town of Whitby Standard Drawing 208
City of Oshawa Standard Drawing OS-304
Municipality of Clarington Standard Drawing C-307
(SPEC NOTE: In Township of Scugog, Township of Uxbridge, and Township of Brock, use OPSD 310.039 unless otherwise directed by the Township)

Also include:

Supply and place tactile walking surface indicators at all sidewalk ramps as per (see spec note at the top of this specification).

Tactile walking surface indicators shall be as per OPSD 310.039.

At crosswalks, two tactile walking surface indicator plates (760 mm long x 610 mm wide) shall be used with a curb drop of 1.6 m as per the Contract Drawings.

At crossrides and locations where crossrides intersect with the adjacent crosswalk (sidewalk ramp locations with more than two tactile plates), radial tactile walking surface indicator plates (610 mm wide) shall be used to follow the curb radius with a curb drop as per the Contract Drawings. Curb drop shall match the full width of the crossride.

Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions, Working Drawings, and manufacturer’s certificate.

Note:

Concrete sidewalk shall be supplied and placed under Item 1.18.01.

Measurement for Payment:

SPEC NOTE: For Items 1.18.03 and 1.18.04 use:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made for each tactile walking surface indicators installed at each concrete sidewalk ramp.

SPEC NOTE: For Item 1.08.06 use:

Measurement of radial tactile walking surface indicators shall be by installed length in metres, complete in place, measured along the radius on the curb side of the tactile plates.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.18.05 – Concrete transit pad

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02700
Revisions to Standard Specifications Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 351
OPSD 310.010 and 310.020
RMDSD S-500.011/S-500.012

Also include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess material in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place reinforcement mesh screen and 25 MPa concrete to form passenger standing areas according to RMDSD S-500.011/S-500.012.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of concrete transit pads shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Supply and placement of 150 mm Granular A base shall be paid under Item 1.06.02.

Item 1.19.01 – Sod

Item 1.19.03 – Seed and mulch

Item 1.19.04 – Mechanical seeding

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 802
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 803
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 804
RMDCS Section 02700 and 02905
OPSS.MUNI 501, 802, 803, and 804

Note:

All work under these items shall be performed by an acceptable specialist Subcontractor using workers experienced in sodding and seeding.

For Item 1.19.03 – Seed and Mulch, seed shall be Standard Roadside Mix unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents.

Supply, placement and grading of imported topsoil when stockpiled topsoil is insufficient in quantity.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of sod shall be by area in square metres following the contours of the ground. This includes the supply and placement of imported topsoil where required.

Measurement of seeding and mulch shall be by area in square metres following the contours of the ground without any allowance for overlap. This includes the supply and placement of imported topsoil where required.

Measurement of mechanical seeding shall be by area in square metres following the contours of the ground without any allowance for overlap.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items for trench restoration shall be full compensation for all the labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Rejected topsoil material shall not be used and shall be removed and replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner.

SPEC NOTE: Add the following Clause (.3) for Item 1.19.01

Subsection 803.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 803 is amended by the addition of the following: (SPEC NOTE: Add this Clause/subclauses for Item 1.18

Progress payments for sod shall be made as follows:

50 per cent upon successful supply and placement.

50 per cent upon meeting the Performance Measure.

SPEC NOTE: Add the following Clause (.4) for Item 1.19.03

Subsection 804.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 804 is amended by the addition of the following:

Progress payments for seed and mulch shall be made as follows:

50 per cent upon successful supply and placement.

25 per cent upon meeting the 60-Day Performance Measure.

25 per cent upon meeting the 90-Day Performance Measure.

Items 1.20 – Equipment rental - common

Reference:
OPSS.PROV 127

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of rental equipment shall be by time in hours for effective operated time performing work designated by the Contract Administrator to be carried out on an equipment rental basis.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for these tender items shall be full compensation for total cost of owning and operating the Equipment including all direct and indirect costs such as, but not limited to: fuel, oil and other consumables and supplies; transportation of the equipment to and from the site; regular maintenance and field repairs; overhaul; depreciation and financing; storage; insurance; and overhead and profit.

The Contract price shall also include the cost of labour and a foreman for grade control and all requirements for traffic control.

No payment will be made for stand-by time or minimum call-out time except as specified.

Item 1.20.01 – Telescopic boom, crawler mounted excavator

Reference:
Clause 127.02.07.06 of OPSS.PROV 127

Also include:

Furnish and operate a carrier-mounted, telescopic boom, crawler mounted excavator with a minimum operating weight of 20,000 kg.

Note:

Acceptable models are:

Gradall XL4100.

Reviewed equivalent.

Item 1.20.02 – Motor grader, articulated frame

Reference:
Clause 127.02.06.09 of OPSS.PROV 127

Also include:

Furnish and operate a motor grader with an articulated frame having a minimum operating weight of 14,000 kg and a minimum net flywheel power of 155 kilowatt (kW).

Grade existing gravel road base and/or gravel shoulder to meet and protect the edge of the newly place asphalt, on the same day that the asphalt is placed and in any other area as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Sweep the road using a power broom during and after shoulder grading.

Scarify and regrade previously compacted pulverized materials. Scarification shall be carried out with a grader-mounted scarifier specifically designed for such use.

Note:

The use of an ice blade is will not be permitted for scarification.

Item 1.20.04 – Broom and sweeper equipment - self propelled, dual control

Reference: Clause 127.02.12.02 of OPSS.PROV 127

Also include:

Furnish and operate a self-propelled dual control mechanical sweeper with a vacuum system capable of removing fine (dust) material from the road surface and a water attachment.

Disposal of sweepings.

Note:

Acceptable models are:

Johnston VT605.

Elgin Geovac or Whirlwind.

Reviewed equivalent.

Item 1.20.05 – Tractor with loader/backhoe combination, four-wheel drive

Reference:
Clause 127.02.07.08 of OPSS.PROV 127

Also include:

Furnish and operate a tractor with loader/backhoe combination complete with an Extend-a-Hoe attachment, with a minimum net flywheel power of 65 kW.

Note:

Acceptable models are:

Case 580SL.

Reviewed equivalent.

Item 1.20.06 – Broom and sweeper equipment - tractor with front mounted attachment, hydraulic

Reference:
Clause 127.02.12.01 of OPSS.PROV 127

Also include:

Furnish and operate a tractor with a minimum net flywheel power of 60 HP, complete with a front mounted hydraulic operated broom with a minimum width of 1.8 m.

Item 1.20.08 – Skid steer loader, rubber tire

Reference:
Clause 127.02.07.12 of OPSS.PROV 127

Also include:

Furnish and operate a skid steer loader with a lift capacity of 700 kg and a minimum bucket width of 1.2 m.

Note:

Acceptable models are:

Bobcat 853.

New Holland LS170.

Caterpillar 236.

Reviewed equivalent.

Item 1.20.10 – Rear dump, triaxle dump truck, diesel

Reference:
Clauses 127.02.08.08 and 127.02.08.07 of OPSS.PROV 127

Also include:

Furnish and operate a diesel powered, tandem rear axle dump truck with third lift axle and a minimum Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of 32,000 kg.

Note:

Tandem dump trucks may be used as a substitute on locations approved by the Contract Administrator. Where used, tandem dump trucks shall be paid at 85 per cent of the Contract price for a triaxle dump truck.

Item 1.20.11 – Water truck, tandem rear axle

Reference:
Clause 127.02.08.13 of OPSS.PROV 127

Also include:

Furnish and operate a tandem rear axle water truck, gasoline or diesel powered, with a pressure water spray bar.

Item 1.21.02 – Labourer for assistance to property owners

Reference:
OPSS.PROV 127

Also include:

Provide at all times a worker to provide assistance to local residents and business owners in carrying parcels to and from their homes or businesses where construction makes access to residences or businesses difficult.

Provide a pickup truck or panel truck or other vehicle as necessary to assist with deliveries to local businesses where access by truck will be difficult.

Note:

This item will only be used upon the direction or consent of the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of labourer shall be by actual time, in hours, that the labourer is in service to local residents and businesses.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for labour costs, including payroll burden, overhead and profit, and equipment costs to provide one worker, as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Picking up and moving garbage and recycling containers placed at the curb by local residents within the limits of closed road areas will be at the Contractor’s expense and shall not be paid under this item.

Item 1.24.01 – Steel beam guide rail (SPEC NOTE: Use this item for OPSD 912.185)

Item 1.24.02 – Steel beam guide rail (SPEC NOTE: Use this item for OPSD 912.186)

Item 1.24.04 – Steel beam guide rail (SPEC NOTE: Use this item for OPSD 912.189)

SPEC NOTE:
1. Confirm with the affected Depot whether granular sealing is required around the guide rail. If so, add Item 1.08.77 Granular Sealing, measured by volume. Calculate the sealant quantity based on 3.4 litres per m2 sealed area and round up to the next 10 litres minimum.
2. Remove the SPEC NOTES with the OPSD references in the item descriptions once the correct item is determined.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 721
OPSD 912.185, 912.186, 912.188, and 912.189

Also include:

Supply and install steel beam guide rail at the location shown on the Contract Drawings.

SPEC NOTE: Use the appropriate Note subsection Clauses when applicable.

Note:

Use Item 1.24.01 for OPSD 912.185 specified steel beam guide rail.

Use Item 1.24.02 for OPSD 912.186 specified steel beam guide rail.

Use Item 1.24.04 for OPSD 912.189 specified steel beam guide rail.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of steel beam guide rail shall be by length in metres along the centreline of the system from end to end of each steel beam guide rail installation and does not include the terminal systems.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Costs associated with any required repairs or removal and replacement of defective materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.24.05 – Steel beam guide rail energy attenuating terminal system

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 732
OPSD 922.165, 922.171, and 922.186

Also include:

Supply and install high intensity object marker (Wa-33) and oversized snowplow marker (Wz-2) in front of impact head according to OPSD 984.201 and OPSD 984.202.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of each complete steel beam energy attenuating terminal system installed, regardless of the type of steel beam energy attenuating terminal system placed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for labour Equipment, and material to do the work.

This item includes the 15.0 m system length. Payment for guide rail within the system length shall not be made under the Steel beam guide rail item.

Costs associated with any required removals and replacement, or repairs of defective work and materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.24.06 – Steel beam guide rail terminal system

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 733
OPSD 922.150

Also include:

Supply and install high intensity object marker (Wa-33) and oversized snowplow marker (Wz-2) in front of impact head according to OPSD 984.201.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of each complete steel beam terminal system installed, regardless of the type of steel beam guide rail end terminal system placed.

Basis of Payment

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

This item includes the 12.4 m system length. Payment for guide rail within the system length shall not be made under the Steel beam guide rail item.

Costs associated with any required removals and replacement, or repairs of defective work and materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.24.07 – Steel beam guide rail leaving end treatment

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 721
OPSD 912.255

Also include:

Supply and install high intensity object marker (Wa-33) and oversized snowplow marker (Wz-2) according to OPSD 984.202.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of leaving end treatments installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Costs associated with any required repairs or removal and replacement of defective materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.24.08 – Steel beam guide rail structure connection

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 721
OPSD 912.315 and 912.430

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of steel beam guide rail structure connections installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

This item includes the 20.45 m steel beam guide rail with channel for structure connection. Payment for this length of guide rail shall not be made under the Steel beam guide rail item.

Costs associated with any required repairs or removal and replacement of defective materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.24.11 – Temporary precast concrete barrier

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Optional reference; add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 741
OPSD 911.160, 911.180, 911.181, 912.315, and 912.430
Ontario Traffic Manual Book 11 – Latest version

Also include:

Supply and install temporary precast concrete barriers as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Supply and install reflectors on all barriers. Reflectors shall have a minimum reflective surface of 100 mm x 100 mm; high intensity retroreflective sheeting according to ASTM D 4946, Type VII; colour according to OTM Book 11 – latest version; and flexibility to bend 90 degrees from vertical and self-restore.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of barriers shall be by length in metres along the centreline of the barrier, from end to end, including temporary end sections installed and removed, up to the maximum length of barriers required to be placed at any one time during the Contract.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for temporary precast concrete barriers shall be made as follows:

40 per cent for supply and erection.

30 per cent for relocation.

30 per cent for removal.

Costs associated with any required removals and replacements of defective workmanship or materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no cost to the Owner.

Item 1.24.15 – Pedestrian barricade

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 908
OPSD 980.101

Also include:

Fabricate barricade according to OPSD 980.101.

Note:

Install barricade utilizing a base plate where barricade is located on the proposed retaining wall.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pedestrian barricade shall be by length in metres from end to end of railing.

Basis for Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 1.24.20 – Temporary energy attenuator

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Optional reference; add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 723
OPSD 924.135 and 924.141

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for temporary energy attenuator shall be per the number of complete energy attenuator systems installed and removed, up to the maximum number of systems required to be placed at any one time during the Contract in accordance with OPSD 924.135 or OPSD 924.141.

Basis of Payment

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Costs associated with any required removals and replacement, or repairs of defective work and materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

Progress payments for temporary energy attenuator shall be made as follows:

80 per cent for supply and installation.

20 per cent for removal.

SPEC. NOTE:
1. Item 1.25.01 is to be used when there are animals in the farm field being fenced, the existing fence is all wooden post or the area being fenced is very small. Item 2. 1.25.02 the ratio of steel posts to wooden post shall be 2:1 instead of 3:1 to better stand blowing winter winds with snow.

Item 1.25.01 – Highway fencing with wooden posts

Item 1.25.02 – Highway fencing with steel posts

Item 1.25.07 – Brace panels in highway fence

Item 1.25.08 – Gates in highway fence

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 771
OPSD 971.101

Note:

Not all of the new fence locations have been established which are subject to agreements between the Region and the respective property owners being finalized. Consequently, at various locations throughout the contract limits, final fence locations shall be established in the field as directed by the Contract Administrator and in consultation with the respective property owners.

Highway fencing with steel posts as per OPSD 971.101 is to be revised for “the ratio of steel posts to wooden post shall be 2:1”

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of highway fence with wood/steel posts shall be by length in metres along the contour of the ground for the actual length of highway fence installed and shall include gate openings and brace panels.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of brace panels in highway fence installed, regardless of material type.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the gates in highway fence installed, regardless of the size and type. Double gates shall be counted as one gate.

Basis Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Costs associated with any required removals and replacements of defective workmanship or materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.25.03 – Chain link fence (1.8 m high)

Item 1.25.04 – Chain link fence (1.5 m high)

Item 1.25.05 – Chain link fence (1.2 m high)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Contract Drawing numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 772
OPSD 972.130

Note:

This item shall be installed on top of the proposed retaining wall as shown on the Contract Drawings.

This chain link fence shall be constructed with the top wire, as per OPSD 972.130.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of chain link fence shall be by length in metres along the contour of the ground for the actual length of fence installed.

Basis Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Costs associated with any required removals and replacements of defective workmanship or materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.25.06 – Temporary safety barrier (provisional)

Reference:
Contract Drawings

Include:

Supply and install xx m high orange polypropylene temporary safety barrier.

Maintain fencing during construction.

Remove temporary fencing materials upon completion of work.

Perform permanent surface restoration as specified elsewhere.

Note:

Temporary safety barrier may be ordered by the Contract Administrator to delineate the working area and to prevent the public from entering the working area. Protection of the public from excavations shall be provided using a more rigid fencing or barricade method.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of temporary safety barrier shall be by length in metres following the contour of the ground.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for temporary safety barrier shall be made as follows:

60 per cent for supply and erection.

40 per cent for removal.

SPEC. NOTE:
Temporary 1.8 m high fence appears in the road, watermain and sanitary sewer sections of the special provisions. Use only one item per contract.

Item 1.25.14 - Temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence

Reference:
Contract Drawings

Include:

Supply and install 1.8 m high temporary galvanized chain link fence from station x+xxx to x+xxx on xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) OR as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Maintain fence during construction.

Remove temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence upon completion of construction on xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx).

Perform permanent surface restoration as specified elsewhere.

Note:

Temporary 1.8m high chain link fence can be obtained from Fast Fence Inc. or Quick Fence Inc. or approved equivalent.

Temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence may be ordered by the Contract Administrator to delineate the working area and to prevent the public from entering the working area. Protection of the public on bridges shall be provided using a more rigid fence or barricade method.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence shall be by length in metres following the contour of the ground.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence shall be made as follows:

60 per cent for supply and erection.

40 per cent for removal.

Item 1.25.15 – Wildlife/reptile fence

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 501, 722, and 1541
OPSD 971.131

Materials:

1.2 m (4 feet) Knotted Joint Woven Wire Fence specifications:

All wires shall be single strand galvanized steel wire conforming to CAN2/CGSB-138.2.96.

Minimum 12.5 gauge high tensile strength wire.

Maximum spacing between vertical wires is 152 mm (6 inches).

Maximum spacing between horizontal wires is 178 mm (7 inches).

Class 3 galvanization.

Steel Posts specifications:

All post shall be of galvanized steel pipe and shall conform to CAN2/CGSB-138.2.96; hot dipped galvanized to the requirements of ASTM A123M-15 (latest edition).

Holes to tie through as required.

The steel pipe will not have an outside diameter less than 73 mm and shall have a length of not less than 2459 mm.

Any damage to galvanized coatings must be repaired. For damaged or cut galvanizing of steel posts and braces, two coats of an organic zinc rich paint shall be applied on thoroughly cleaned surface.

The minimum depth the footings shall be 1240 mm. All other Steel Post footing details shall be installed as per OPSD 972.130.

Steel posts shall be installed with galvanized steel post caps.

Bracing wire:

Shall be galvanized and a minimum of 9 gauge.

Wire Mesh:

Wire Mesh utilized as Wildlife Fence-Reptiles, shall be 6 mm (one-quarter inch) mesh size - Galvanized Welded (GAW) 1.2 (.047 inch) Wire Diameter, 914 mm (36 inches) wide or an approved equivalent. All edges shall be hemmed. Grommets shall be incorporated into the top hem, spaced approximately 30 centimetres (cm) apart along its entire length. The hemming and the addition of grommets must be specified to the manufacturer at the time of order.

Construction:

915 mm High Fence Installation:

Fence shall be installed by a Contractor experienced with high tensile strength wire fences.

Only steel posts shall be used.

At locations where the fence is terminated at a fixed object (e.g. structures, walls, and culverts), the fence fabric shall extend a minimum of 0.3 m beyond the terminal post to seal any voids between the fence and the fixed object. There shall be no gaps between the fence posts and the structures/culverts.

Steel Posts shall be spaced 3 m apart measured horizontally unless specified otherwise in the Contract.

Posts shall be installed plumb going across slopes and should be installed 3 degrees off vertical angle away from the highway.

Brace posts shall be installed at fence ends and at other stress points where required. The spacing between adjacent intermediate brace panels and between intermediate brace panels and end post panels, will not be more than 54 metres.

Wildlife Fence-Reptiles/ Wire Mesh:

Wire Mesh shall be place on the wildlife side of the fence posts and shall extend past the terminal posts at fixed objects by a minimum of 0.3 m to match the limit of the fence fabric. Boards will be place on the bottom of access gates to block reptiles crossing from wildlife side to highway side as detailed in drawings.

Wire Mesh shall be fastened to the steel posts using galvanized 9 gauge wire ties and at all line wires within 635 mm above the ground surface. The top hem of the Wire Mesh shall be secured tightly to the fence wire and shall not overlap the top (height) of the fence. It shall be placed without gaps or breaks along its length. Where the Wire Mesh is joined to provide a continuous run, the ends shall be securely fastened and overlapped a minimum of 500 mm.

The Wire Mesh shall also be secured to the wire fence via Stainless Steel (or non-corrosive) Grommets located along the top hem. Stainless steel hog rings shall be fed through the grommets, fastening the Wire Mesh to the wire fence, while ensuring that it is taut. The Wire Mesh shall extend to a minimum height of 635 mm above the ground surface.

Wire Mesh Installation in Earth - A trench measuring 205 mm wide by 180 mm deep shall be excavated along the base of the new Ungulate Fence in order to anchor the bottom of the Wire Mesh along its entire length. The trench shall be backfilled with granular B type II flush with the existing grade to hold the base of the Wire Mesh firmly in place.

Fence Layout and Inspection:

Four weeks prior to installation of the above tender item, the Contractor shall layout and stake the limits and location of the fence. The Contract Administrator will arrange for Conservation Authority to review the limits/location and will make necessary adjustments if required. The Contractor will accompany the Contract Administrator on the fields review. The Contractor will be required to make necessary changes to accommodate any adjustments specified.

Maintenance:

The wildlife/reptile fence shall be maintained in an effective, functioning, stable condition, without holes, tears, and punctures or sagging for a minimum of two years after initial installation or duration of contract whichever is longer. The Contractor shall inspect and repair all fences between April 1 and June 30 of each year following construction. Any major concerns with the integrity of the fence should be communicated to the Contract Administrator immediately.

Measurement for payment:

Measurement for the wildlife/retile fence shall be by actual length in metres of wildlife/reptile fence supplied, installed, and maintained.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 1.30 – Pavement marking, temporary - removable tape

Item 1.30.01 – Broken white (10 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.30.02 – Broken white (20 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.30.03 – Broken yellow (10 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.30.10 – Solid white (10 cm)

Item 1.30.11 – Solid white (20 cm)

Item 1.30.12 – Solid white (45 cm) for stop bars

Item 1.30.15 – Solid yellow (10 cm)

Item 1.30.19 – Blackout tape (10 cm)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 710
OPSS.MUNI 710 and 1715
Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7 – Latest edition

Also include:

At least three weeks in advance of using any temporary pavement marking tape, notify the Contract Administrator which tape material the Contractor intends to use for this work. Use only materials which are acceptable to the Contract Administrator.

Supply, install and remove acceptable temporary preformed pavement markings as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Apply temporary pavement markings to a clean and dry surface and according to the manufacturer’s specifications.

Perform all required layout and maintenance of the markings according to the Contract Drawings and in conformance to the Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7 – latest version and/or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Apply linear removable preformed pavement marking tape, 10 cm in width, by using a “Scotch Liner” brand manual tape applicator, and/or the “Scotch Liner” brand mechanical highway tape applicator or reviewed equivalent. All equipment shall be operated according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Under Item 1.30.19, place Blackout tape over existing pavement markings as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Remove and replace any temporary pavement markings which wear or ravel or which do not adhere to the road for any reason.

Note:

The removable preformed pavement markings shall be of a high-quality plastic tape meeting the requirements of OPSS.MUNI 1715. Acceptable products are those listed on MTO’s DSM List number 5.85.50 classified as “Class D Removable (Detour)”.

The work shall be performed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, which shall include the use of a qualified firm, trained, and licensed by the material manufacturer.

All pre-marking shall be performed by the Contractor and inspected by the Contract Administrator prior to application of pavement markings.

The markings shall be capable of performing for the duration of a normal construction season and shall then be capable of being removed intact or in large pieces, either manually or with a recommended roll up device.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pavement marking lines shall be by length in metres, excluding gaps, regardless of line width.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work.

Item 1.33 – Pavement marking - water-borne traffic paint

Item 1.33.01 – Broken white (10 cm all patterns)

Item 1.33.02 – Broken white (20 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.33.03 – Broken yellow (10 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.33.10 – Solid white (10 cm)

Item 1.33.11 – Solid white (20 cm)

Item 1.33.12 – Solid white (45 cm) for stop bars

Item 1.33.14 – Solid white (10 cm) transverse for crosswalk

Item 1.33.15 – Solid yellow (10 cm)

Item 1.33.17 – Black-out paint, lines (10 cm, solid and broken, all patterns)

Item 1.33.18 – Black-out paint, stop bars

Item 1.33.20 – Symbols – arrow

Item 1.33.21 – Symbols – rail crossing ‘x’ marker

Item 1.33.22 – Black out paint, symbols

Item 1.33.24 – Temporary, fluorescent orange (10 cm, solid and broken, all patterns)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 710
OPSS.MUNI 710 and 1716

Also include:

Removal of all temporary tape line markings.

Perform all pre-marking.

Apply all pavement markings within two Working Days of completion of the final lift of base course asphalt.

Note:

Paint materials shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 1716. Acceptable products are those water-borne products listed on MTO’s DSM List number 5.85.40.

The work shall be performed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, which shall include the use of a qualified firm, trained, and licensed by the material manufacturer.

Pre-marking shall be inspected by the Contract Administrator prior to application of permanent pavement markings.

Contract quantities provide for two applications of line markings, the first immediately after paving and the second the following Spring. A second application will be required as final surface course asphalt will not be placed (by others) until the end of the Warranty Period for this contract.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pavement marking lines shall be by length in metres, excluding gaps, regardless of line width.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pavement marking symbols installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work.

SPEC NOTE: For Section 1.33, confirm with the designer that the tender quantities do account for a double application.

SPEC NOTE: Use section 1.34 – Pavement marking, durable – field reacted polymeric unless otherwise directed by RMD Traffic Engineering Division

Item 1.34 – Pavement marking, durable – field reacted polymeric

Item 1.34.01 – Broken white (10 cm all patterns)

Item 1.34.02 – Broken white (20 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.34.03 – Broken yellow (10 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.34.04 – Broken white (45 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.34.10 – Solid white (10 cm)

Item 1.34.11 – Solid white (20 cm)

Item 1.34.12 – Solid white (45 cm) for stop bars

Item 1.34.14 – Solid white (10 cm) transverse for crosswalk

Item 1.34.15 – Solid yellow (10 cm)

Item 1.34.18 – Solid white (30 cm) for railway stop bars

Item 1.34.19 – Solid white (60 cm) for crosswalks

Item 1.34.20 – Symbols – arrow

Item 1.34.21 – Symbols – rail crossing ‘x’ marker

Item 1.34.23 – Symbols – disabled parking

Item 1.34.24 – Temporary, fluorescent orange (10 cm, solid and broken, all patterns)

Item 1.34.30 – Solid white anti-slip (20 cm) for ladder crossings

Item 1.34.31 – Solid white anti-slip (60 cm) for ladder crossings

Item 1.34.32 – Broken white anti-slip (40 cm) for bicycle crossings

Item 1.34.33 – Solid green surface treatment for bicycle lanes

Item 1.34.34 – Dragon’s teeth

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 710
RMDSD S-301.060
OPSS.MUNI 710
OPSS.MUNI 710, 1714, and 1750

Also include:

Perform all pre-marking.

Supply and apply field reacted, two component polymeric pavement marking material by the extrusion (screed) method according to the manufacturer's specifications, at locations as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Polymeric materials shall meet the requirements of OPSS.MUNI 1714. Acceptable products are Lafrentz System 400, or those products on MTO’s DSM List number 5.85.45 which are specified for the extrusion (screed) method. Spray method and products are not acceptable.

Glass beads shall meet the requirements of OPSS.MUNI 1750. Acceptable manufacturers are those listed on MTO’s DSM List number 5.85.38. The Contractor shall note Subsection 1714.05.04 of OPSS.MUNI 1714, which requires both premixed and surface applied glass beads for the screed application method.

The work shall be performed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, which shall include the use of a qualified firm, trained, and licensed by the material manufacturer.

Pre-marking shall be inspected by the Contract Administrator prior to application of permanent pavement markings and green surface treatments.

Stop bars shall not be installed until after intersection stop controls (traffic signals or stop signs) have been installed.

Any applications which fail to meet the service requirements specified in OPSS.MUNI 1714 at any time during the Warranty Period shall be completely removed and replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.

Anti-slip aggregate to be mixed throughout material so that as marking wears new aggregate become exposed. Anti-slip aggregate to be aluminium oxide (corundum). The following parameters shall be met:

All MMA material used for ladder pavement markings is required to have 0.75 to 1.0 litres of corundum added for each 25 kg pail of product.

The corundum shall be between 20 grit and 24 grit.

Only white or clear corundum will be acceptable.

Green surface treatment material shall be CycleGrip MMax manufactured by Ennis Flint or an approved equivalent and supplied as a kit including resin, corundum aggregate, and catalyst.

SPEC NOTE:

1. Use Clause .7 above for anti-slip aggregate clause for Ladder Crossings.

2. The following is only required for re-application on an existing surface:

Work includes retracing of existing transverse markings and symbols by the extrusion (screed) method. Appropriate straightedges shall be used for all line work and templates shall be used for symbols.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pavement marking lines shall be by length in metres, excluding gaps, regardless of line width.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pavement marking symbols installed.

For measurement purposes, a measurement shall be made of the actual area, in square metres of green surface treatment installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of dragon’s teeth pavement markings installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work.

Item 1.35 – Pavement marking, durable – field reacted polymeric or thermoplastic

Item 1.35.01 – Broken white (10 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.35.02 – Broken white (20 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.35.03 – Broken yellow (10 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.35.04 – Broken white (45 cm, all patterns)

Item 1.35.10 – Solid white (10 cm)

Item 1.35.15 – Solid yellow (10 cm)

Item 1.35.24 – Temporary, fluorescent orange (10 cm, solid and broken, all patterns)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 710
OPSS.MUNI 710, 1713, 1714, and 1750

Subsection OPSS.MUNI 710.08.02 is amended by the addition of the following:

Reflectivity shall be measured by random testing according to ASTM D7585-10. Should a random test area fail to meet the requirements of the applicable OPSS, the area for testing will be expanded to determine the overall length of marking that will have to be re-applied.

Should a section of the marking appear questionable in terms of its retroreflectivity, measurements shall be undertaken in accordance to ASTM D7585-10.

The zone of measurement will begin with the first stretch of suspect marking and extend to the last section.

Any applications which fail to meet the requirements specified in OPSS.MUNI 1713 or 1714, as applicable, at any time during the Warranty Period shall be completely removed and replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.

Deficient pavement markings shall be removed at Contractor’s expense. The removal method shall be non-destructive to the new HMA mat (e.g. water/soda blasting). Grinding of deficient pavement markings shall not be permitted.

Note:

Work under this tender item shall include the supply and application of longitudinal pavement marking materials.

Materials shall meet the requirements of OPSS.MUNI 1713 or 1714 and be listed on MTO’s DSM List number 5.85.43. Spray method and products are not acceptable.

Glass beads shall meet the requirements of OPSS.MUNI 1750. Acceptable manufacturers are those listed on MTO’s DSM List number 5.85.38. The application requires the operation of applying an overlay of glass beads during the application.

Pavement marking materials may be applied by means of extruded or ribbon applicator methods.

All work shall be performed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pavement marking lines shall be by length in metres, excluding gaps, regardless of line width.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work.

Item 1.36 – Pavement marking obliterating

Item 1.36.01 – Soda blasting - Schmidt accustrip system or equivalent (lines, 10 cm wide, all patterns, all colours)

Item 1.36.02 – Soda blasting - Schmidt accustrip system or equivalent (stop bars)

Item 1.36.03 – Soda blasting - Schmidt accustrip system or equivalent (arrows)

Item 1.36.10 – High pressure water blasting (lines, 10 cm wide, all patterns, all colours)

Item 1.36.11 – High pressure water blasting (stop bars)

Item 1.36.12 – High pressure water blasting (arrows)

Item 1.36.20 – Rotary grinder (lines, 10 cm wide, all patterns, all colours)

Item 1.36.21 – Rotary grinder (stop bars)

Item 1.36.22 – Rotary grinder (arrows)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 710
OPSS.MUNI 710

Also include:

Flush and sweep street to provide a clean surface for the installation of pavement markings.

Remove existing traffic markings by means of soda blasting using Schmidt Accustrip System.

Remove existing traffic markings by means of high pressure water blasting.

Remove existing traffic markings by means of rotary grinding.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pavement marking lines obliterated shall be by length in metres, excluding gaps, regardless of line width.

Each symbol to be obliterated shall be approximately equated in area to a 10 cm wide line.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work.

Item 1.37.01 – Recessed pavement markers

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Optional reference; add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 710
OPSS.MUNI 710

Section 710.01 of OPSS.MUNI 710 is amended by the addition of the following:

This specification also covers the requirements for the installation of recessed pavement markers.

Section 710.05 of OPSS.MUNI 710 is amended by the addition of the following subsection:

710.05.08 Recessed Pavement Markers

Acceptable pavement marker models are:

3M 290 recessed marker.

Ray-O-Lite Snowlite 300 marker.

Both products are available from the following supplier:

Astra International of Canada
5250 Lakeshore Road, Unit 204
Burlington, Ontario L7L 5L2
Phone: 905-635-8069

Supplier information is provided for information only and Contractor is not obligated to obtain any products from this supplier.

Subsection 710.07.09 of OPSS.MUNI 710 is amended by the addition of the following:

710.07.09.09	Pavement Markers, Recessed

Recessed pavement markers shall be supplied and installed as specified in the Contract Documents and according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Management of excess material shall be as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

Clause 710.09.01.02 of OPSS.MUNI 710 is amended by the addition of the following item:

Pavement Markers, Recessed

Subsection 710.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 710 is amended by the addition of the following item:

Pavement Markers, Recessed - Item

Note:

Recessed pavement markers shall be installed after pavement marking has dried.

Layout shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Contract quantities include:

74 two-way yellow.

20 one-way white.

Reflectors shall be the same colour as the adjacent longitudinal pavement marking. One-way reflectors shall be blank on the back side.

Ensure that the longitudinal asphalt joint is offset from both plastic pavement markings and recessed pavement markers.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of recessed pavement markers installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work.

Payment shall not be made for the removal and replacement of any rejected pavement markers.

Payment shall not be made for replacement of damaged final pavement markings.

SPEC NOTE: Ensure traffic has identified which signs require 4x4 posts and which signs require 6x6 posts.

Item 1.38.01 – Supply and install steel U-channel post for traffic signs

Item 1.38.02 – Supply and install single 4x4 wooden post for traffic signs

Item 1.38.03– Supply and install single 6x6 wooden post for traffic signs

Item 1.38.04 – Supply and install double 4x4 wooden posts for traffic signs

Item 1.38.05 – Supply and install double 6x6 wooden posts for traffic signs

Item 1.38.10 – Supply and install telespar sign support sleeve and post

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 703
RMDSD S-300.080
OPSD 985.110, 985.210, 985.220, and 990.110
Ontario Traffic Manual Book 1B – Latest edition, Section 12 – Sign Position

Subsection 703.05.02.02 of OPSS.MUNI 703 is amended by the addition of the following:

Preservative shall be selected from the following:

Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA) shall be according to AWPA P5, Type A, B or C.

Ammoniacal Copper Arsenate (ACA) shall be according to AWPA P5.

Only water-borne preservatives CCA or ACA shall be permitted for use on wood that is to be painted.

Sections 703.09 and 703.10 of OPSS.MUNI 703 are deleted in their entirety. Measurement for payment and basis of payment shall be as specified in this tender item.

Also include:

Supply and install mounting posts for new traffic signs at locations as specified on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

This tender item shall be used only for new traffic signs as shown on the Contract Drawings. Replacement of posts for existing traffic signs shall be deemed to be paid under the “Traffic Control and Signing” tender item.

Steel U-Flange posts shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 703 and OPSD 990.110.

Wooden posts shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 703 as amended under this tender item. Sizes noted on Contract Drawings are nominal Imperial sizes.

Telespar sign support system hardware shall be according to RMDSD S-300.080 including signpost, two-piece breakaway anchor and hardware as supplied by UCC Industries International Incorporated or approved equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of posts of each mounting type.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of post sets of each mounting type.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Costs associated with any required repairs or removals and replacements of defective materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 1.38.20 – Pick up traffic signs and mount on single post

Item 1.38.21 – Pick up traffic signs and mount on double posts

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 703
Ontario Traffic Manual Book 1B – Latest edition (Section 12 - Sign Position) and Book 6 – Latest edition

Also include:

Pick-up traffic signs indicated on Contract Drawings at the Owner’s Traffic Engineering and Operations Centre at 101 Consumers Drive, Whitby and deliver to site.

Secure storage of signs on-site prior to installation.

Mount Owner-supplied signs on posts using Contractor-supplied hardware acceptable to the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Fasteners and hardware shall be either stainless steel or protected after manufacture by hot dip galvanizing according to ASTM A123M-15.

Sign mounting heights shall be as specified on the Contract Drawings and in the Ontario Traffic Manual (OTM).

New signs mounted on traffic signal or street lighting poles must be installed by an electrician under Item 4.10.04.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of signs installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for these tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Costs associated with any required repairs or removals and replacements of defective materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

SPEC NOTE: For Item 1.38.22, ensure to update the SP and Builterra to reflect either “relocate” or “reinstate” or both.

Item 1.38.22 – Remove, salvage, and relocate/reinstate existing signs

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 703
Ontario Traffic Manual Book 1B – Latest edition (Section 12 - Sign Position) and Book 6 – Latest edition

Also include:

Remove, salvage, and relocate/ reinstate existing signs as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

New posts for relocated signs shall be covered under items 1.38.01, 1.38.02, 1.38.03, 1.38.04 and 1.38.05.

Note:

Fasteners and hardware shall be either stainless steel or protected after manufacture by hot dip galvanizing according to ASTM A123M-15.

Sign mounting heights shall be as specified on the Contract Drawings and in the Ontario Traffic Manual (OTM).

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of signs removed, salvaged, and relocated/reinstated.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Costs associated with any required repairs or removals and replacements of defective materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no additional cost to the Owner.

SPEC NOTE: Utilize provisional Items 1.40.03 to 1.40.08 (below) for additional detour signage.

Item 1.40.03 – TC-64 Road closure sign 1200 mm x 2400 mm (provisional)

Item 1.40.04 – TC-64T Road closure/restriction notice tab 300 mm x 2400 mm (provisional)

Item 1.40.05 – TC-10C Detour straight (standard) 450 mm x 750 mm sign (provisional)

Item 1.40.06 – TC-10BL Detour left (standard) 450 mm x 750 mm sign (provisional)

Item 1.40.07 – TC-10BR Detour right (standard) 450 mm x 750 mm sign (provisional)

Item 1.40.08 – TC-10D Detour ends (standard) 450 mm x 750 mm sign (provisional)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Traffic control and safety
Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7 Temporary Conditions – Latest edition
OPSS.MUNI 706
Occupational Health and Safety Act – O.Reg. 213/91, Sections 65 through 69.1

Also include:

Supply, install, and maintain additional traffic control signs as directed by the Contract Administrator including posts, mounting frames, stands, ballast weights, etc.

No signs shall be mounted to hydro/utility poles.

Relocation of the additional traffic control signage as directed by the Contract Administrator. This includes adding, editing, and removing follow tabs as necessary.

Removal and disposal of the additional traffic control signs upon completion of the closure/project.

Note:

These items are provisional for additional signage required as directed by the Contract Administrator above and beyond what is included in the Traffic Control Plan requirements under Item 8.03.04.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of additional detour signs installed, maintained, and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Changes to the TC-64 sign message details (i.e., dates, times, etc.) required as a result of the Contractor’s operations shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner.

Progress payments for detour signs shall be made as follows:

60 per cent of the unit price per sign upon installation.

20 per cent of the unit price per sign upon relocation.

20 per cent of the unit price per sign upon removal.

60 per cent of the unit price per sign upon installation.

40 per cent of the unit price per sign upon removal.

The removal and replacement of defective workmanship or materials shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

SPEC NOTE for Basis of Payment progress payments:

1. When relocation is applicable, use Clauses .1, .2, and .3

2. When relocation is not applicable, use Clauses .4 and .5

Item 1.40.09 – Temporary support of existing utility pole coordination

Include:

Coordinate, complete and submit with all applicable fees and insurance applications for any work related to the temporary support of existing utility poles.

All site preparation work to establish a suitable and safe working area for temporary support materials and equipment.

All costs incurred by the Contractor for guy anchor removal and reinstatement.

Site restoration to existing conditions, or better.

Note:

Payment for the temporary support of utility poles shall be made directly to the utility company from the Regional Municipality of Durham.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the coordination of temporarily supporting existing utility pole shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Sanitary Sewers

Item 2.01.xx.A – xxx mm diameter sanitary sewer pipe (3.0 m and less deep)

Item 2.01.xx.B – xxx mm diameter sanitary sewer pipe (3.1 m to 4.5 m depth)

Item 2.01.xx.C – xxx mm diameter sanitary sewer pipe (4.6 m to 5.5 m depth)

Item 2.01.xx.D – xxx mm diameter sanitary sewer pipe (5.6 m to 7.0 m depth)

Item 2.01.xx.E – xxx mm diameter sanitary sewer pipe (deeper than 7.0 m)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, xxx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers when sanitary sewer is included under Road contracts)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to RMDCS 02530
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Section 02530
OPSS.MUNI 401 and 410
RMDSD S-200.010 and S-201.020

Also include:

Supply and install bedding material according to RMDSD S-200.010.

SPEC NOTE: The following Clause (.1) is required only where wet soils are expected:

Supply, place, and compact additional Type 1 Clear Stone bedding according to RMDSD S-200.010 Class “P” for wet trenches.

SPEC NOTE: The following Clauses are only required when the sanitary sewer is installed in an easement or in an open field area.

Supply and install sign mounting posts for sanitary sewer main location signs.

Mount Owner-supplied sanitary sewer main location signs on installed posts as per RMDSD S-201.020.

Note:

All notations in the Form of Tender indicating size of pipe and depth of bury are for information only. Where there is any discrepancy between the Form of Tender and the Contract Drawings, the Contract Drawings shall be taken as correct. The Contract price for all sanitary sewer sections shall be based on the pipe material, size, and depth of bury indicated on the Contract Drawings.

Reference Region of Durham Approved Manufacturers' Products List (AMPL) on the Road Authority website (https://www.roadauthority.com) for acceptable pipe products. The AMPL states limitations for the use of certain pipe materials based on application and size.

Pipe classification shall be as specified on the Contract Drawings. If alternative pipe materials are proposed, the Contractor’s Engineer shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator that the pipe classification of all alternative pipe products proposed is acceptable.

Where an existing pipe sewer was constructed using concrete sewer pipe, the Contractor shall use concrete pipe for any pipe repairs and extensions of such pipe including cut-in tees. For pipe sewers extending from cut-in concrete tees, the Contractor may use other approved materials.

Cover shall be according to RMDSD S-200.010.

Sanitary sewer main location signs shall be installed according to RMDCS Section 02511, Clause 3.10 and RMDSD S-201.020. These signs will be supplied by the Owner and shall be picked up by the Contractor at the Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono, Scugog or Sunderland Depot located at 2020 Salem Road, Ajax/825 Conlin Road, Whitby/3480 Taunton Road, Orono/10 Goodwood Road, Port Perry/S995 River Road, Sunderland.

Any expenses for remedial work resulting from unauthorized over-excavation of the trench width and depth shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Trench width shall be in accordance with RMDSD S-200.010.

SPEC NOTE: Consider if “permanent restoration” or “temporary asphalt” items are required.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of sanitary sewer pipe shall be by length in metres along the horizontal centreline length of the pipe from the centre of one maintenance hole to the centre of another maintenance hole or outlet end of the pipe sewer and shall include excavation and backfill in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 401 and 410.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for these tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for breaking into and rebenching existing maintenance holes shall be made under Item 2.04.04.

These items shall not include those concrete pipe plugs requiring separate excavation to facilitate pipe removal and plug installation.

Item 2.01.16 – xxx mm diameter sanitary sewer siphon pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to RMDCS 02530
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Section 02530
OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDSD S-200.010

Also include:

Supply and install pipes for each siphon as shown on the Contract Drawings complete in the specified bedding and cover.

Supply and install concrete collars complete with reinforcing steel, sleeves, bolts, neoprene sponge wrapping, etc. as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Note:

Reference Region of Durham Approved Manufacturers' Products List (AMPL) on the Road Authority website (https://www.roadauthority.com) for acceptable pipe products for pipe materials specified on the Contract Drawings.

Pipe bedding and cover shall be according to RMDSD S-200.010 unless specified otherwise on the Contract Drawings.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of sanitary sewer siphons shall be by length in metres measured along the top of pipe from inside wall of the inlet chamber to the inside wall of the outlet chamber.

For Siphon number xx - Item 2.01.xx, maximum length for payment shall be xxxx m.

For Siphon number xx - Item 2.01.xx, maximum length for payment shall be xxxx m.

No adjustment in the measured length shall be made where the actual pipe length is within 0.3 m of the measurement shown on the Contract Drawings.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.01 – Trench restoration - arterial roadways (min. 3.5 m wide) for mainline sewers and service connections

SPEC NOTE:
1. This item only to be used for trench restoration which exceeds the requirements of RMDSD S-200.020.
2. Consider using Item 2.02.03 for long areas of grassed boulevard and easements.

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Sections 02700 and 02749
OPSS.MUNI 492

Also include:

Permanently restore granular base and asphalt on arterial roadways and paved and granular shoulders.

Temporary restoration with 50 mm or 60 mm HL 8 asphalt – installation, maintenance, and removal. (SPEC NOTE: Select applicable thickness; 50 mm for local roads or 60 mm for Regional roads)

Permanently restore concrete curb and gutter.

Permanently restore boulevards and other areas disturbed by the Contractor.

Supply, placement and grading of imported topsoil to a minimum depth of 150mm depth. Permanently restore disturbed lawns, boulevards, easements, and other grassed areas disturbed by the Contractor.

Note:

Restoration treatment shall be according to Contract Drawings, Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx and RMDCS Section 02700 and 02749.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of restoration on mainline sewer trenches shall be by horizontal length in metres of trench restored, regardless of width.

No extra payment shall be made for restoration of simple service reconnections unless the Contractor is ordered to replace a horizontal length of service pipe longer than 3.0 m.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE for Item 2.02.02:
1. This item shall only to be used for trench restoration which exceeds the requirements of RMDSD S-200.020.
2. Consider using Item 2.02.03 for long areas of grassed boulevard and easements.

Item 2.02.02 – Trench restoration - travelled roadways and driveways for mainline sewers and service connections

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Section 02700 and 02749
OPSS.MUNI 492
RMDSD S-200.020

Also include:

Permanently restore granular base and asphalt on local roadways according to RMDSD S-200.020.

Temporary restoration with 50 mm or 60 mm HL 8 asphalt – installation, maintenance and removal. (SPEC NOTE: Select applicable thickness; 50 mm for local roads or 60 mm for Regional roads)

Permanently restore concrete curb and gutter.

Permanently restore driveways, interlock concrete pavers, sidewalks, multi-use paths, boulevards, and other areas disturbed by the Contractor.

Supply, placement and grading of imported topsoil to a minimum depth of 150mm depth. Permanently restore disturbed lawns, boulevards, easements, and other grassed areas disturbed by the Contractor.

Note:

Restoration treatment shall be according to RMDSD S-200.020, Contract Drawings, Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx and RMDCS Sections 02700 and 02749.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of restoration on mainline sewer trenches shall be by horizontal length in metres of trench restored, regardless of width.

No extra payment shall be made for restoration of simple service reconnections unless the Contractor is ordered to replace a horizontal length of service pipe longer than 3.0 m.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.03 – Trench restoration – sodding and seeding (including topsoil)

SPEC NOTE: Use this item for long grassed boulevards and in grassed easements.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 802
RMDCS Section 02700
OPSS.MUNI 492 and 802

Also include:

Permanently restore disturbed lawns, boulevards, easements, and other grassed areas disturbed by the Contractor.

Supply, placement and grading of imported topsoil to a minimum depth of 150mm depth.

Note:

Restoration treatment shall be according to Contract Drawings, Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx and RMDCS Section 02700.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of restoration on sanitary mainline sewer trenches shall be by horizontal length in metres of trench restored, regardless of width.

Measurement of restoration on service connection trenches shall be by horizontal length, in metres, starting at a point 3.0 m from the centreline of the mainline sanitary sewer to the limit of the service connection pipe, regardless of width.

No extra payment shall be made for restoration of simple service reconnections unless the Contractor is ordered to replace a horizontal length of service pipe longer than 3.0 m.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.04 – Concrete encasement

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-200.010

Also include:

Supply and place 20 MPa concrete encasement according to RMDSD S-200.010 at locations shown on the Contract Drawings.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of concrete encasement shall be by length, in metres, of pipe encased.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all Labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.06 – Concrete plug in abandoned sanitary sewer pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
OPSS.MUNI 510

Also include:

Excavate to expose pipe.

Saw cut, remove, and dispose of existing pipe off-site.

Supply and place 15 MPa concrete plug in the ends of pipe to be abandoned.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Permanently/temporary restore disturbed area according to RMDSD S-200.020, Contract Drawings, Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx, and RMDCS Sections 02700 and 02749.

Note:

Minimum length of concrete plug shall be 300 mm.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete plugs installed in abandoned sanitary sewer pipe.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for concrete plugs installed in excavations for pipe sewers shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price for such pipe sewer.

Item 2.02.07 – Trench replacement - sand fill

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to RMDCS 02530
RMDCS 02315 and 02530

Also include:

Remove unsuitable native backfill materials and dispose of off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place Sand Fill material.

Compact Sand Fill to 100 per cent Standard Proctor Dry Density.

Note:

This item, if ordered by the Contract Administrator, shall include replacement of native materials removed from the sanitary sewer or service connection trench which are unsuitable for reuse as backfill.

Reference RMDCS Section 02315, 2.01.1.2 for gradation requirements of Sand Fill material.

Compaction method used shall minimize the impact of vibrations and noise on adjacent homes, structures, and buildings.

Measurement for Payment

Measurement of Sand Fill shall be by actual volume in cubic metres of Sand Fill material used as native material replacement.

Measurement shall be based on outer pipe diameter plus a maximum of 1200 mm for width multiplied by approved compacted depth and length of Sand Fill placed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.08 – Trench plug

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-200.040
OPSD 802.095

Also include:

Excavate beyond main trench as required.

Supply, place, and compact concrete/clay material as required to construct trench plug according to RMDSD S-200.040/OPSD 802.095.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of trench plugs installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.10 – Insulate forcemain

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-100.050

Also include:

Supply and install 75 mm thick closed-cell, extruded polystyrene insulation and sand cover according to RMDSD S-100.050.

Note:

Polystyrene sheets shall have a minimum compressive strength of 275 kPa.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of insulation shall be by actual linear length in metres of forcemain trench insulated.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for excavation shall be made under the appropriate forcemain pipe item.

Item 2.02.11 – Trench rock excavation (scratch rock - less than 0.5 m depth)

Item 2.02.12 – Trench rock excavation (greater than 0.5 m depth and boulders)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02316
OPSS.MUNI 403

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of trench rock excavation shall be by volume in cubic metres, regardless of width.

No extra payment shall be made for restoration of simple service reconnections unless the Contractor is ordered to replace a horizontal length of service pipe longer than 3.0 m.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.13 – Unshrinkable backfill

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02315
OPSS.MUNI 1359

Also include:

Remove unsuitable native backfill materials and dispose of off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place unshrinkable backfill according to Contract Drawings, RMDCS Section 02315 and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Protect open trench until Unshrinkable Backfill has sufficiently cured with steel plate/wooden planking or other protection methods approved by the Contract Administrator. (SPEC NOTE: Use steel plates for travel portion of roadway. Use wooden planking or other protection methods approved by Contract Administrator for situations where road traffic is not be accommodated)

Once Unshrinkable Backfill has sufficiently cured, backfill, and compact with overlying material(s).

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of unshrinkable backfill shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.14 – Stone for extra depth bedding (19.0 mm diameter type I, clear stone)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 01210
OPSS.MUNI 1004

Also include:

Excavate as required of unsuitable native materials below standard bedding depth, remove, and dispose excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply, place and compact 19 mm diameter Clear Stone, Type I as specified in OPSS.MUNI 1004 except that the stone shall have 100 per cent crushed materials and shall not contain any recycled materials.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of stone for extra depth bedding shall be by actual volume in cubic metres of stone placed below specified bedding.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.15 – Filter fabric

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)

Include:

Supply and install Typar 3341 or reviewed equivalent filter fabric mat according to manufacturer's recommended method and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Fabric width shall be the width of the trench plus one metre allowing for a 0.5 metre vertical rise at both trench walls.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of filter fabric shall be by length in metres of trench in which filter fabric is placed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.17 – Support systems left in place

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 01330
OPSS.MUNI 404

Also include:

Abandon close sheathing materials and all bracing materials (whalers, struts, etc.) including cutting off sheathing left in place.

Note:

This item is intended to cover the cost of close sheathing materials ordered left in place by the Contract Administrator upon completion of the proposed underground utility. Materials left in place solely at the choice of the Contractor shall not qualify for payment under this item.

Supply and placement of all trench shoring systems shall be deemed to be included in the appropriate Contract price for proposed sanitary sewer pipes. Where the close sheathing material is recovered by the Contractor, payment for the trench protection system shall be included in the Contract price for the appropriate sanitary sewer item and no payment shall be made under this item for recovered materials.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of support systems shall be by area in square metres, for the actual face area of close sheathing materials ordered left in place.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.02.19 – Temporary trench restoration with asphalt and subsequent removal prior to final restoration (provisional)

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration

Note:

Payment under this Item shall only be made when the temporary placement of asphalt on roadways, sidewalks or driveways has been authorized by the Contract Administrator. This item shall not be utilized to relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities for the maintenance of pedestrian and vehicular traffic during construction.

Also include:

Grading of granular base to provide smooth transition to existing asphalt or concrete surfaces.

Supply and placement of HL 8 Hot Mix Asphalt and Granular A (minimum compacted depth of asphalt to be 50 mm).

Maintenance of the temporary asphalt area during construction.

Removal and disposal of the temporary asphalt and Granular A prior to final trench restoration.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement shall be by length of trench temporarily restored, in metres, regardless of width.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for temporary trench restoration with asphalt and subsequent removal prior to final restoration shall be made as follows:

80 per cent on placement.

20 per cent on removal.

Item 2.02.20 – Bore and jack casing

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Work within the Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway (CPKC)/Canadian National Railway (CN) right-of-way
RMDCS Sections 01330 and 02319
RMDSD S-200.020 and S-200.080
OPSS.MUNI 416
Transport Canada General Order E-10

SPEC NOTE: Check required minimum depth of bury for the top of the installed liner (e.g. Crossing under Highway 401).

Also include:

Mobilize and demobilize all materials and equipment to and from site.

Supply shop drawings for casing pipe according to Subsection 1.04 of RMDCS 01330. Shop drawings shall be stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario.

Excavate and install shoring at all sending and receiving pits. Shoring shall be stamped and signed by a qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.

Supply Grade 2 steel casing pipe conforming to the latest revision of ASTM A252 and install according to RMDCS Section 02319, OPSS.MUNI 416, RMDSD S-200.080, and the Contract Drawings. Casing pipe ends shall be bevelled on outside to an angle of 30 degrees for butt weld splicing.

Provide concrete thrust blocking for pipe jacking restraint.

Perform survey work for the horizontal and vertical rail alignment as described.

Supply and maintain all additional equipment as required (e.g., flood lights) to provide for continuous around the clock construction operations.

Remove and dispose of all excess excavated materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Block and grout sewer pipe inside the casing.

Backfill all pits with Select Native Material and compact.

Permanent restoration of disturbed areas according to RMDSD S-200.020 and Contract Drawings.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of jacking and boring shall be by actual length in metres along the centreline of the casing pipe from the start to the end of the installed pipe.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material costs which are over and above an open-cut trench installation to install the casing pipe and to install the proposed sanitary sewer pipe inside the casing pipe complete according to RMDSD S-200.080.

Payment for all construction signs, flashers, delineators, barricades at each pit site shall be included in the Traffic Control and Signing tender item.

Concrete barriers at tunnel pits shall be paid separately under the appropriate tender item and if no specific item is provided, then payment shall be included in the Traffic Control and Signing tender item.

The removal of boulders having a volume in excess of 0.5 cubic metres shall be paid for as Extra Work under the appropriate Contract item.

Item 2.02.30 – Tunnel liner

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Work within the Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway (CPKC)/Canadian National Railway (CN) right-of-way
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Watercourse/fisheries protection
RMDCS Section 02314
RMDSD S-200.020 and S-200.080
OPSS.MUNI 415
Transport Canada General Order E-10

SPEC NOTE:
1. Check required minimum depth of bury for the top of the installed liner (e.g. Crossing under Highway 401).
2. This item is applicable to hand-mined, jack/bore and/or open cut liner installation only. Microtunnel liners are covered under the Microtunnel section of this document.

Also include:

Mobilize and demobilize all materials and equipment to and from site.

Excavate and install shoring at all tunnelling pits. Shoring shall be stamped and signed by a qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario.

Dewater as required and control siltation of ground water removed to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator. Dewatering shall be paid under Item 7.01.12.

Supply and install primary liner according to the shop drawings, stamped and signed by qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario.

Provide concrete thrust blocks for jack restraints.

Perform survey work for the horizontal and vertical rail alignment as described.

Supply and maintain all additional equipment as required (e.g., flood lights) to facilitate continuous a 24-hour construction operation.

Remove and dispose of all excess excavated materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Grout outside of tunnel liner.

Block and grout sewer pipe inside the tunnel liner.

Backfill all tunnelling pits with Select Native Material and compact.

Permanent restoration of disturbed areas according to RMDSD S-200.020 and Contract Drawings.

Note:

The minimum length of tunnels to be constructed shall be the lengths shown on the Contract Drawings.

Measurement for Payment

Measurement of tunnel liner shall be by Plan Quantity length in metres according to Subsection 415.09.02 of OPSS.MUNI 415.

No adjustment to Plan Quantity shall be made if the actual tunnel length is within plus or minus 0.5 metres of the lengths shown on the Contract Drawings.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material costs which are over and above an open-cut trench installation to install the proposed pipe sewer inside a tunnel liner complete according to Contract Drawings.

Payment for all construction signs, flashers, delineators, barricades at each pit site shall be included in the Traffic Control and Signing tender item.

Concrete barriers at tunnel pits shall be paid separately under the appropriate tender item and if no specific item is provided, then payment shall be included in the Traffic Control and Signing tender item.

Item 2.02.51 – Removal of asbestos-cement sanitary sewer pipe and disposal off-site

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Occupational health and safety act and Ontario regulation 213/91 – construction projects
RMDCS Section 01350

Also include:

Remove existing asbestos-cement pipe (mainline sanitary sewers and service connections) and prepare for transportation in required containers and bags according to the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations of the Ministry of Labour, the Ministry of the Environment, Conservation and Parks (MECP), and the Ministry of Transportation of Ontario.

During construction operations with asbestos-cement pipe:

Ensure pipe remains in a non-friable condition.

Ensure pipe is wetted during removal/handling operations.

Do not sand, saw, grind, chip, or use power tools for the removal of the asbestos-cement pipe.

Dispose of asbestos-cement pipe at an approved MECP site.

Provide all liability Insurance for the removal and shipping of asbestos “designated substance” waste.

Provide training for Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ workers in the proper removal and handling of asbestos-cement pipe as required under the current Ontario Health and Safety Act and Regulations.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for removal of asbestos-cement sanitary sewer pipe shall be by length in metres of asbestos-cement sanitary sewer pipe removed and properly disposed off-site.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.03.xx – xx mm diameter PVC/VCES sanitary service connection

SPEC NOTE: List each service connection pipe diameter separately with item number and description from item catalog/Builterra.

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – General
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to RMDCS 02530
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Sections 02315 and 02530
OPSS.MUNI 410 and 1841

Note:

This item shall be used for sanitary service connections up to 200 mm diameter. Pipes larger than 200 mm diameter shall be paid under the appropriate sanitary sewer pipe item.

Bedding and cover shall be according to RMDSD S-200.010 and RMDCS Section 02315.

Reference Region of Durham Approved Manufacturers' Products List (AMPL) on the Road Authority website (https://www.roadauthority.com) for acceptable pipe products. Acceptable pipe materials for this Item are:

SDR 28 PVC gravity sewer pipe according to OPSS.MUNI 1841.

Reviewed equivalent to above.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of the service connections shall be by length in metres along its horizontal centreline of the mainline sanitary sewer pipe to the end of the installed service connection.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Subsection 410.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 410 is amended by the addition of the following:

Service connections to existing pipe sewers or structures made using inline adapters, couplers or similar connectors to an existing inlet shall be the Contractor’s responsibility and at no extra cost to the Owner.

Service connections to existing pipe sewers or structures requiring coring or the use of a cut-in factory-made tee or other modification to the existing pipe sewer or structure shall be paid “extra-over” under the appropriate tender item.

Trench restoration for sanitary service connections shall be paid under this Contract item.

Item 2.03.07.A – 100 mm diameter cleanout

Item 2.03.07.B – 150 mm diameter cleanout

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to RMDCS 02530
RMDCS Section 02315 and 02530
RMDSD S-100.030 and S-200.010

Also include:

Supply and install all materials necessary to construct the cleanout according to RMDSD S-100.030.

Supply and install bedding and Sand Fill cover for exposed pipe according to RMDCS Section 02315.

Note:

Cost of excavation and backfill shall be deemed to be included in the sanitary service connection pipe Contract item.

Surface restoration shall be included in the appropriate sanitary service connection Contract item.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of cleanouts installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 2.03.08 – Extra-over service connections – modifications to existing sanitary sewer pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to RMDCS 02530
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Section 02530
OPSS.MUNI 410

Also include:

All modifications to the existing sanitary sewer mainline pipe to accommodate a new sanitary service pipe connection. Such modifications would include cutting-in a manufactured tee, core-drilling openings, concrete collars, saddles, or similar methods.

Note:

This item shall only be used where modifications are required to an existing mainline sanitary sewer pipe to connect a new service pipe (e.g., cut-in new manufactured tee).

Payment for new service connections to new mainline sanitary sewer pipe shall be paid under the appropriate service connection Contract item, not this item.

Direct connections to maintenance holes shall be paid under Item 2.04.04/.05.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the actual number of sanitary service connections made by modifications to existing mainline sanitary sewer pipe, regardless of the method used.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 2.03.10 – Reconnect 100 mm diameter sanitary service (maximum 3 m length)

Item 2.03.11 – Reconnect 150 mm diameter sanitary service (maximum 3 m length)

Item 2.03.12 – Reconnect 200 mm diameter sanitary service (maximum 3 m length)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to RMDCS 02530
RMDCS Section 02530

Also include:

Break into existing sanitary sewer service pipe and complete connection to new mainline sanitary sewer pipe.

Supply and place a 15 MPa concrete plug, minimum length of 300 mm, in abandoned pipe.

Note:

This item shall only be used for reconnections requiring up to 3.0 m of pipe. Reconnections requiring more than 3.0 m of service pipe shall be paid under the appropriate service connection pipe Contract item.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of service reconnections installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.04.01 – Removal of existing sanitary maintenance hole – total removal

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 510

Also include:

Excavate and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Disconnect any sewer pipe or service connections from the maintenance hole.

If applicable, supply and place 15 MPa concrete plugs, minimum length of 300 mm, in abandoned pipes.

Remove and dispose of existing structures off-site.

Existing frames and covers removed are to become property of the Contractor and disposed of at their expense.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of maintenance holes completely removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.04.02 – Abandonment of sanitary maintenance hole – partial removal

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 510
RMDCS Section 02315

Also include:

Excavate to grade as required and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Remove and dispose off-site of top 1200 mm of existing structure unless specified otherwise.

Disconnect any sewer pipe or service connections from maintenance hole.

Supply and place 15 MPa concrete plugs, minimum length of 300 mm, in abandoned pipes.

Backfill remaining structure with Sand Fill material and compact.

Backfill excavation with Select Native Materials and compact.

Note:

Existing frames and covers removed shall become property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of at the Contractor’s expense.

Reference RMDCS Section 02315, Subsection 2.01.2 for gradation requirements of Sand Fill material.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of maintenance holes partially removed and abandoned.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.04.03 – Adjusting existing sanitary maintenance hole

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Section 02631
OPSS.MUNI 408
OPSD 704.010

Include:

Adjust existing maintenance hole to final/base course asphalt or final grade in grassed areas as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

This item is for sanitary maintenance holes with existing moduloc adjustment units.

Adjustments shall be in accordance with OPSD 704.010.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of sanitary maintenance holes adjusted.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.04.04 – Breaking into existing sanitary maintenance hole and rebench

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Section 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 410
OPSD 701.021

Also include:

Break into the existing maintenance hole.

Remove and dispose of concrete and reinforcing steel of off-site.

Rebench maintenance hole including:

Remove existing benching completely and dispose of off-site.

Thoroughly cleanout the maintenance hole of debris.

Supply concrete and form new benching in maintenance hole according to OPSD 701.021.

Provide temporary pumping and/or bypass arrangements required for existing sewage flows, to allow for benching in maintenance holes to be completed.

Note:

Payment for connection to maintenance hole and restoration of structure to be included in Contract price for appropriate sanitary sewer pipe item.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of openings made and maintenance holes rebenched.

Basis for Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.04.05 – Breaking into existing sanitary maintenance holes and sanitary sewer pipes

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
OPSS.MUNI 410

Note:

This item shall be used only for breaking into existing sanitary maintenance holes or large (450 mm diameter and up) reinforced concrete pipe sewers. Breaking into existing non-reinforced pipes and connections to the existing pipe sewers with new fittings shall be included in the Contract price for the appropriate sanitary sewer pipe item.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of openings made in existing sanitary maintenance holes and sanitary sewer pipes.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for connection to and restoration of the maintenance hole shall be included in Contract price for the appropriate sanitary sewer pipe item.

Item 2.04.06 – Rebench existing sanitary maintenance hole

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
RMDCS Section 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407
OPSD 701.021

Also include:

Remove existing benching completely and dispose off-site.

Cleanout maintenance hole thoroughly.

Supply concrete and form new benching according to OPSD 701.021.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of maintenance holes rebenched.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 2.04.xx – xxxx mm diameter precast/semi-precast concrete sanitary sewer maintenance hole (less than 3.0 m deep/3.1 m to 4.5 m deep/4.6 m to 5.5 m deep/5.6 m to 7.5 m deep/deeper than 7.5 m)

Item 2.04.xx – xxxx mm diameter precast concrete sanitary sewer maintenance hole tee (less than 3.0 m deep/3.1 m to 4.5 m deep/4.6 m to 5.5 m deep/5.6 m to 7.5 m deep/deeper than 7.5 m)

SPEC. NOTE:
1. List each MH and MH tee separately with item number and description from item catalog/Builterra.
2. Use letters (i.e. 2.04.07.A, 2.04.07.B, etc.) to distinguish items with same MH diameter but with a different depth range.
3. Ensure to include depth range in each item description.
4. For precast concrete maintenance hole items 2.04.12 to 2.04.15 use RMDSD S-100.060 reference.
5. For semi-precast maintenance hole items 2.04.26 to 2.04.30 use RMDSD S-100.070 reference.
6. For maintenance hole tee items 2.04.31 to 2.04.35 use OPSD 707.010.

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions – General Requirements - General
RMDCS Section 02631
RMDSD S-100.060, S-100.070, S-100.071, and S-100.080
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 408
OPSD 401.010, 401.030, 401.060, 404.020, 405.010, 701.010, 701.011, 701.012, 701.013, 701.014, 701.021, and 707.010

Also include:

Supply, place and compact 300 mm Granular ‘B’, Type 1 backfill around structure up to subgrade level.

Maintenance hole steps as per OPSD 405.010.

Safety grates as per OPSD 404.020.

Drop structures as per S-100.080.

Supply and install frame and cover (SPEC NOTE: If IFC MH system is being used then use “cover” text only) as per OPSD 401.010, Type ‘A’/OPSD 401.030 to final/base course asphalt level or final grade in grassed areas. OPSD 401.010 shall be amended to include the wording “SANITARY” on the grate beneath the “DANGER” text, in the same text size and print as the “DANGER” wording.

Reconnecting existing pipes as required, using approved couplers, adaptors, etc.

Benching as per OPSD 701.021.

Note:

Maintenance hole lids shall be located within the centre of a travelled lane, outside the vehicular wheel path. Steps shall be aligned accordingly.

All new maintenance holes placed within existing, proposed, or future road surface locations shall be integrated frame and cover (IFC) maintenance hole system, unless directed otherwise by the Contract Administrator. The IFC system shall be installed according to the manufactures’ specifications and shall be paid under 2.04.46.

The use of precast modular adjustment units will not be permitted within the roadway unless the specific circumstances does not allow the use of an integrated frame and cover maintenance hole system or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of maintenance holes installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of maintenance hole tees installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 2.04.46 – Integrated frame and cover system for sanitary sewer maintenance hole

SPEC NOTE: When different MH diameters are used, use letters to differentiate between the items. For example, Item 2.04.46.A, 2.04.46.B, etc.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add the applicable drawing numbers)
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x – General
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
RMDCS Section 02631
RMDSD S-100.071
OPSS.MUNI 407
OPSD 401.010, 401.030, 405.010, 701.010, 701.011, 701.013, 701.014, 701.021, and 707.010

Also include:

Supply and install the integrated frame and cover (IFC) system.

Determine adjustment unit size by:

Measuring height from top of precast structure to final road surface.

Take measured height and subtract 150 mm. Round this value down to the nearest 50 mm.

Supply and place HDPE shims (25 mm minimum; 100 mm maximum) on top of the structure (IFC tapered top, chamber, etc.) to match the subbase height and required crossfall. The top of the adjustment unit shall be a minimum of 70 mm lower than the specified base course asphalt layer (50 mm for asphalt and 20 mm for the frame thickness).

Supply, install, and inflate inflatable form to 10 pounds per square inch (psi) into IFC System opening, creating a watertight seal. This shall be done prior to any grout installation.

Supply and place King In-Pakt Precision FS (Fast Setting) grout or an approved manufacturer’s equivalent into areas between the adjustment units and IFC tapered top.

Supply and install the telescopic ductile iron IFC frame.

Supply and install cover as per OPSD 401.010, Type ‘A’/OPSD 401.030. OPSD 401.010 shall be amended to include the wording “SANITARY” on the grate beneath the “DANGER” text, in the same text size and print as the “DANGER” wording.

Supply, place, and compact Granular B backfill all around the structure in accordance with Contract Drawings.

Supply, place, and compact Granular A to the top of the adjustment units. Ensure to leave a 50 mm minimum gap between the top of Granular A and the bottom of the IFC frame to accommodate the base course asphalt.

Base course asphalt stage:

Ensure there is no dirt or debris between the concrete adjustment unit and the frame.

After base course asphalt is placed, dig out and lift frame using a pick or prybar and fill the void with asphalt such that the top of the frame is sitting at road grade and ensure adequate compaction of asphalt.

Ensure there is no dirt or debris between the frame and the cover.

Surface course asphalt stage:

Adjust frame and cover by using pry bars to lift frame and place additional 40 mm of surface asphalt between the frame flange and the base course asphalt.

Ensure frame is embedded in surface course asphalt and level with the final road grade after compaction.

Provide steps according to OPSD 405.020.

Note:

The integrated frame and cover (IFC) system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s approved installation guide. Only Contractors/companies who have completed the manufacturer’s IFC training and certification program are permitted to install the IFC MH System. The IFC system used with precast concrete maintenance hole tender items and is only applicable for maintenance hole installations within existing, proposed, or future road surface locations.

The use of precast modular adjustment units shall not be permitted to be used with IFC systems.

Base and surface course asphalt shall be compacted with the IFC frame in place.

No saw cutting of the asphalt is required for final setting of the frame and cover.

The Granular B shall be paid under 1.06.01.

The Granular A shall be paid under Item 1.06.02.

The base course asphalt shall be paid under Item 1.08.xx.

The final course asphalt shall be paid under Item 1.08.xx.

Item 2.04.46.x applies to the xxxx mm diameter precast concrete maintenance holes. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Clause only when there is more than one MH diameter in same tender. Add the appropriate Item number and MH diameter)

Item 2.04.46.x applies to the xxxx mm diameter precast concrete maintenance holes. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Clause only when there is more than one MH diameter in same tender. Add the appropriate subletter for the appropriate IFC MH Item number)

Contractor forces shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer’s personnel on the installation and construction of the IFC system.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of the concrete integrated frame and cover system for sanitary sewer maintenance holes installed.

This item shall be extra over the cost of each sanitary maintenance hole tender item.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 2.04.70 – Install drop structure on existing sanitary maintenance hole number xx

SPEC NOTE:

1. When this item applies to more than one MH, then revise the item number to 2.04.70.A, 2.04.70.B, etc.
2. Use Region of Durham assigned MH numbers for the ‘maintenance hole number’ field.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx
RMDCS Section 02631
OPSD 701.010, 701.011, and 701.012
RMDSD S-100.080, Type A/B

Include:

Break into existing sanitary maintenance hole and existing sanitary sewer pipe.

Remove concrete, reinforcing steel, and all debris from the maintenance hole and dispose of off-site.

Supply and install required sanitary sewer pipe and all other appurtenances required to complete this work.

Note:

The drop structure shall be constructed in accordance with RMDSD S-100.080.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of drop structures installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 2.04.80 – Siphon inlet chamber number xx (SPEC NOTE: Use Region of Durham assigned chamber number)

Item 2.04.81 – Siphon outlet chamber number xx (SPEC NOTE: Use Region of Durham assigned chamber number)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Section 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 408

Also include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/16, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install the following:

Bulkheads as required.

Concrete and reinforcing steel.

Armco flap grate as required.

Benching and steps.

Hot-dipped galvanized frame and cover and clamps to ASTM A123M-15 (or latest revision).

Neoprene pads and sponge rubber.

All other items as required to complete the Chambers.

Backfill with granular materials and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of siphon inlet and outlet chambers installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.05.xx – xxx mm diameter PVC/CPP sanitary forcemain pipe

SPEC NOTE: List each pipe diameter separately with item number and description as per Builterra

Reference:
Contract Drawings

Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx – General
RMDCS Section 02531
RMDSD S-201.030
OPSS.MUNI 412

Also include:

Supply and install sanitary forcemain pipe in accordance with Contract Drawings.

Provide temporary plug and perform blowoff at open end of forcemain.

Supply and install tracing wire in accordance with RMDSD S-201.030.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of sanitary forcemain pipe shall be by length in metres horizontally along the centreline of the pipe.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.06.xx – xxx mm diameter forcemain gate valve and valve box

SPEC NOTE: List each gate valve diameter separately with item number and description as per Builterra.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02531
RMDSD S-201.030 and S-220.010
OPSS.MUNI 412

Also include:

Excavate to the required grade and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install gate valve and valve box.

Supply and install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030.

Backfill with Select Native Materials and compact.

Adjust valve box to final grade at completion of work.

Note:

A bypass is not required.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count will be made of the number of gate valves and valve boxes installed, regardless of size. (SPEC NOTE: Use “regardless of size” when different valve and valve box sizes are being used)

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.06.xx – Forcemain drain valve concrete chamber number xxx

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Sections 02531 and 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 408
RMDSD S-220.060
OPSD 401.030

Also include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply, install and compact 19 mm diameter crusher run stone.

Supply and install 20 MPa formed concrete support, as per the Contract Drawings.

Supply and install 100/150/200 mm diameter drain pipe, gate valves and boxes, solid rod valve extensions and brackets.

Supply and install watertight frame and cover according to OPSD 401.030 to final/base course asphalt level or to 300 mm above grade in unmaintained grassed areas. OPSD 401.030 shall be amended to include the wording “SANITARY” on the grate beneath the “DANGER” text, in the same text size and print as the “DANGER” wording.

Supply and install precast concrete chamber, complete to the details and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings, including precast concrete sections, adjustment units, sump, grate, and ladders.

Backfill with select native materials and compact.

Stainless steel fasteners for all valves and fittings.

Note:

In unmaintained grass areas, a 1.0 m plateau area with 3:1 sloping to existing ground shall be constructed.

SPEC NOTE: The following Clauses are only required when the drain valve in chamber is located in an easement or in an open field area.

Supply and install sign mounting posts for sanitary sewer main location signs close as possible to structure.

Mount Owner-supplied sanitary sewer main location signs on installed posts as per RMDSD S-201.020.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of drain valve chambers installed, no matter the number of valves installed in the chamber.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.06.16 – Cut in xxx mm diameter gate valve and valve box on existing xxx mm diameter PVC/CPP forcemain pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02531
RMDSD S-201.030 and S-220.010
OPSS.MUNI 412

Also include:

Excavate to expose existing forcemain pipe and dispose excess material off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347 and the Soil Rules.

Saw cut existing pipe, remove, and dispose off-site of existing pipe including all bends, fittings, tees, and thrust restraints, as required.

Supply and install xxx mm diameter gate valve on existing forcemain to remain in service.

Supply and install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030

Adjust valve box to final grade at completion of work.

Note:

A bypass is not required.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count will be made of the number of gate valves and valve boxes installed, regardless of size. (SPEC NOTE: Use “regardless of size” when different valve and valve box sizes are being used)

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.07.01 – Forcemain air relief valve chamber number xxxx

SPEC. NOTE: When more than one air relief valve and chamber is being installed under the same tender, then add ‘.A, .B, etc’ to distinguish between the different chambers (For example: 2.07.01.A, 2.07.01.B, etc.)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Sections 02531 and 02631
RMDSD S-220.060
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 408

Also include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply of 19 mm diameter crusher run stone, compact in place.

Supply and install 20 MPa formed concrete support according to the Contract Drawings.

Supply and install air relief valve with all related piping and valves according to the Contract Drawings.

Supply and install precast concrete chamber, complete to the details and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings, including precast concrete sections, adjustment units, sump, grate and ladders.

Supply and install watertight frame and cover according to OPSD 401.030 to final/base course asphalt level or to 300 mm above grade in unmaintained grassed areas. OPSD 401.030 shall be amended to include the wording “SANITARY” on the grate beneath the “DANGER” text, in the same text size and print as the “DANGER” wording.

Backfill with Select Native Materials and compact.

Stainless steel fasteners for all valves and fittings.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of forcemain air relief valve chambers installed, no matter the number of valves installed in the chamber.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.08.02 – 50 mm diameter forcemain bypass

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-210.040

Also include:

Supply and install all valves, backflow preventers, and fittings, etc. as per RMDSD S-210.040 to fill the proposed forcemain with clean water from an existing watermain.

Remove all components upon completion of testing and flushing.

Backfill with Select Native Materials and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of bypasses installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.09.01 – Temporary bulkhead and 50 mm diameter blowoff

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-210.060

Also include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install a temporary bulkhead and 50 mm diameter blowoff according to RMDSD S-210.060 to permit testing of the proposed forcemain.

Remove and dispose of bulkhead and blow-off upon acceptance of force main and prior to connection to existing distribution chamber.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of bulkheads with blowoffs installed and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 2.40.01 – Temporary concrete barrier

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 741

Also include:

Maintain temporary concrete barriers until adjacent trench is backfilled and restored to a driving surface and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Relocate barriers as required.

Note:

Barriers shall be used as trench protection and delineation of traffic lanes from working area along xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) as shown on the Contract Drawings xx-x or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

The minimum width of adjacent traffic lanes shall be 3.3 m.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of temporary concrete barriers shall be by length in metres along the centreline of the barrier, from end to end, including temporary end sections installed and removed, up to the maximum length of barriers required to be placed at any one time during the Contract.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Costs associated with any required removals and replacements of defective workmanship or materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no cost to the Owner.

Item 2.40.04 – Excavate by hydro vacuum

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 206 and 501

SPEC NOTE:

Include the following clause if deemed necessary:
1. This item is provided for use at the direction / approval of the Contract Administrator only. This item is not to be utilized to compensate the Contractor for advance daylighting of known subsurface utilities or other activities required to complete the work. For example, the Contract Administrator may direct the Contractor to daylight a previously unknown subsurface utility that was not identified at all on the Contract Drawings but became apparent after the Contractor’s locates were completed.

2. This item shall not be provisional. Specify the use for this item either by utilizing “Also include Clause .5” or by removing “Also include Clause .5” and adding a new clause to the “Note” subsection.

Also include:

Supply, with operator(s), a truck mounted combo vacuum excavator (hereunto known as a “Hydrovac”) as directed.

Associated labour, equipment, and materials (including water) to complete the work as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Supply, with operator(s), a truck mounted combo vacuum excavator (hereunto known as a “Hydrovac”) as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Associated labour, equipment, and materials (including water) to complete the work as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Excavate test pits, prior to any construction, to determine the exact field location and elevation of the existing telecommunications/gasmain/watermain/sanitary/hydro at station x+xxx. Expose the utility and field measure the location, orientation, depth, and pipe OD.

Excess soil and/or liquid soil generated during hydro excavation activities are required to be managed off-site in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules, as applicable.

Supply, place, backfill and compact excavated site with approved granular materials as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Provide Contract Administrator with signed release form, in accordance with Appendix SGC-G to the Supplementary General Conditions of Contract for off-site disposal of excess materials upon completion of all disposal activities.

Note:

This item to be used only as directed in writing by the Contract Administrator.

Truck shall be supplied with following features and equipment:

Variable and regulated high pressure water pump rated at approximately 204 litres per minute (LPM) (54 gallons per minute (GPM)) at 13789.5 kPa (2000 pounds per square inch (psi)).

Approximately 9 m3 (12 cu. yd.) debris body.

Approximately 4921 litres (1300 US gallons) capacity water tanks.

Hydraulic boom with large variable degree rotation and reach of 5.8 m (19 feet) minimum.

High pressure handheld operated gun.

Lighting to meet Ministry of Transportation of Ontario (MTO) specifications.

Traffic arrow board mounted on rear of the truck.

Large debris house.

Debris body shall be equipped with a working drain port and valve assembly to drain liquids.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, time shall be recorded and be paid in accordance with the number of hours the Hydro Vacuum Truck and crew was on site completing the work described above. Payment will not include travel time to and from the site. Minimum time of four hours shall be paid for each time the Vacuum Truck is called to site.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE:
Temporary 1.8 m high fence appears in the road, watermains, and sanitary sewers sections of this Special Provisions document. Use only one item per tender.

Item 2.40.05 - Temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence

Include:

Supply and install 1.8 m high temporary galvanized chain link fence from station x+xxx to x+xxx on xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) OR as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Maintain fence during construction.

Remove temporary 1.8m high chain link fence upon completion of construction on xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx).

Perform permanent surface restoration as specified elsewhere, as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence can be obtained from Fast Fence Inc. or Quick Fence Inc. or approved equivalent.

Temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence may be ordered by the Contract Administrator to delineate the working area and to prevent the public from entering the working area. Protection of the public on bridges shall be provided using a more rigid fence or barricade method.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence shall be by length in metres following the contour of the ground.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence shall be made as follows:

60 per cent for supply and erection.

40 per cent for removal.

Item 2.40.06 – Temporary support of existing utility pole coordination

Include:

Coordinate, complete and submit with all applicable fees and insurance applications for any work related to the temporary support of existing utility poles.

All site preparation work to establish a suitable and safe working area for temporary support materials and equipment.

All costs incurred by the Contractor for guy anchor removal and reinstatement.

Site restoration to existing conditions, or better.

Note:

Payment for the temporary support of utility poles shall be made directly to the utility company from the Regional Municipality of Durham.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the coordination of temporarily supporting existing utility pole shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Watermains

Item 3.01.xx – xxx mm diameter PVC watermain pipe

Item 3.01.xx – xxx mm diameter CPP watermain pipe

SPEC NOTE: List each pipe diameter separately with item number and description as per Builterra.

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – General
RMDCS Section 02511
OPSS.MUNI 401, 441, and 442
RMDSD S-200.010, S-200.050, S-200.060, S-201.020, S-201.030, and S-220.010

Also include:

Supply and install bedding material according to RMDSD S-200.010.

Supply and install mechanical plug on existing watermains to be cut but left in service while service connections are transferred to the new watermain.

SPEC NOTE: The following Clause (.3) is required only where wet soils are expected:

Supply, place, and compact additional Type 1 Clear Stone bedding according to RMDSD S-200.010 Class “P” for wet trenches.

Supply and install temporary xx mm diameter bulkheads with 150 mm flanged outlet.

Remove temporary bulkhead after testing, etc. prior to closure piece installation.

Restrain joints in all fill sections.

Provide 19 mm diameter IPT outlets at maximum 366 m intervals for obtaining water samples. Sampling points shall be paid under Item 3.06.10.

Where new CPP watermain pipe will be connected to existing pipe, expose, measure, and backfill existing pipe prior to ordering shop drawings.

Cathodic protection and tracer wire as per RMDCS 201.030 and S-220.010. This includes connections to existing watermain.

Supply and place 15 MPa concrete plug in the ends of watermain that is to be abandoned in place. Concrete plugs shall be a minimum of 300 mm in length. The concrete plug(s) shall be paid separately under Item 3.02.06.

Remove existing watermain pipe as indicated on Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator to accommodate the installation of the new watermain pipe.

SPEC NOTE: The following Clauses are only required when the watermain is installed in an easement or in an open field area.

Supply and install sign mounting posts for watermain location signs.

Mount Owner-supplied watermain location signs on installed posts as per RMDSD S-201.020.

Note:

Reference Region of Durham Approved Manufacturers' Products List (AMPL) on the Road Authority website (https://www.roadauthority.com) for acceptable pipe products. The AMPL states limitations for the use of certain pipe materials based on application and size.

All thrust/surge protection on PVC pipe according to RMD Standard Drawings, shall be by mechanical restrainers in combination with granular thrust blocks. Mechanical restrainers shall be according to RMDSD S-200.050 and S-200.060. Concrete thrust blocks are not permitted on PVC watermain pipe.

Watermain location signs shall be installed according to RMDCS Section 02511, Clause 3.10 and RMDSD S-201.020. These signs will be supplied by the Owner and shall be picked up by the Contractor at the Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono, Scugog, Sunderland Depot located at 2020 Salem Road, Ajax/825 Conlin Road, Whitby/3480 Taunton Road, Orono/10 Goodwood Road, Port Perry/S995 River Road, Sunderland.

The Contractor shall arrange for the shutdown of watermains with the Region of Durham. Such arrangement shall be in accordance with Part 3.18 of Section 02511 of the Region of Durham Design and Construction Specifications.

Any expenses for remedial work resulting from unauthorized over-excavation of the trench width and depth shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Trench width shall be in accordance with RMDSD S-200.010.

Minimum length of concrete plugs shall be 300 mm.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of PVC watermain pipe shall be by length in metres along the horizontal centreline of the pipe from the point of connection to a chamber, water treatment plant, other watermain appurtenance, or existing watermain to a point vertically above the end of the new watermain and shall include excavation and backfill in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 401 and 410.

Measurement of CPP watermain pipe shall be based on final, approved shop drawings using plan view measurements and shall include excavation and backfill in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 401 and 410. Payment length for CPP shall include pipe through all chambers with no deduction being made for valves, etc. Payment length shall not include the length of the closure piece.

Measurement of watermain pipe shall include pipe through casings/tunnel liners.

Note: Casing/tunnel liner installation shall be considered as “extra over” the cost of watermain pipe installation by open cut.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.01.30 – Field closure for xxx mm diameter CPP feedermain pipe at station x+xxx

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-200.010

Also include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Measure for the manufacture of concrete pressure pipe materials to complete closure section.

Supply all concrete pressure pipe materials including steel closure sleeves.

Install pipe sections and complete the welded connection.

Clean and prepare the exposed steel surface of the closure piece. Supply and install Denso system to fully encase the closure section, including Denso Paste, Denso Profiling Mastic, and Denso Tape, all in accordance with manufacturer specifications. (SPEC NOTE: For this Clause to be included, Contract drawing(s) MUST specifically state the requirement for Denso wrapped closure. Check and confirm that no similar product exists as of the writing of this specification to justify sole sourcing of product.)

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Remove existing watermain, including sawcutting and draining water from excavation as required to connect to the existing watermain.

Note:

Closure connections to be completed using split sleeve welded joint complete with cement mortar encasement according to CPP manufacturers’ recommendations.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of field closures installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.01.40 – xxx mm diameter watermain by horizontal directional drilling

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – General
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Watercourse/fisheries protection
RMDCS 02511
OPSS.MUNI 441 and 450

Also include:

Supply and install PVC watermain pipe to AWWA C-900, SDR18, Class 150, to CSA B137.3. For acceptable pipe products. Refer to RMD Approved Manufacturers’ Products List on The Road Authority website (Product number 7.95.62.68) (https://www.roadauthority.com).

Supply and install tracer wire complete with cathodic protection according to RMDCS 02511 and RMDSD S-201.030. Refer to RMD Approved Manufacturers’ Products List (AMPL) on the Road Authority website (https://www.roadauthority.com) for acceptable products.

Note:

Only bentonite and manufacturer approved polymers shall be used as drilling fluids. All additives used shall be chemically inert, biodegradable, and non-toxic. No petroleum-based additives will be permitted. No detergent additives will be permitted.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for a watermain pipe installation shall be by length, in metres, along the centreline of the useable watermain pipe between final connection points or work completed. No additional payment shall be made for end pieces to achieve the design elevation.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.01 – Trench restoration - arterial roadways (min. 3.5 m wide)

SPEC NOTE:
1. This item is only to be used for trench restoration which exceeds the requirements of RMDSD S-200.020.
2. Consider using Item 3.02.03 for long areas of grassed boulevard and easements.
3. When WM is installed under Regional road reconstruction projects, special restoration requirements need to be considered. For example, restore to bottom of Granular B, etc.

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Sections 02700 and 02749
RMDSD S-200.02
OPSS.MUNI 492

Also include:

Permanently restore granular base and asphalt on arterial roadways and shoulders. Saw cut and remove existing asphalt full depth to provide for 3.5 m wide (minimum) hot mix asphalt restoration.

Permanently/temporarily restore concrete curb and gutter.

Note:

Restoration treatment shall be according to Contract Drawings, Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x and RMDCS Sections 02700 and 02749.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of trench restoration on mainline watermain and 100 mm diameter PVC and larger service shall be by horizontal length, in metres, of trench restored, regardless of width.

Measurement of trench restoration for water service connection (up to 50 mm diameter) shall be part of the corresponding water service item.

No extra payment shall be made for restoration of simple service reconnections unless the Contractor is ordered to replace a horizontal length of service pipe longer than 3.0 m.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.02 – Trench restoration - local roadways and driveways

SPEC NOTE:
1. Consider if a “temporary asphalt restoration” item is required.
2. Consider using Item 3.02.03 for long areas of grassed boulevard and easements.

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Section 02700 and 02749
RMDSD S-200.020
OPSS.MUNI 492

Also include:

Permanently restore granular base and asphalt on local roadways according to RMDSD S-200.020.

Permanently restore concrete curb and gutter.

Permanently restore granular base and driveways, interlock concrete pavers, sidewalks, multi-use paths, boulevards, and other areas disturbed by the Contractor.

Note:

Restoration treatment shall be according to RMDSD S-200.020, Contract Drawings, Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x and RMDCS Sections 02700 and 02749.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of trench restoration on mainline watermain and 100 mm diameter and larger water services shall be by horizontal length, in metres, of trench restored, regardless of width.

Measurement of trench restoration for water service connections (up to 50 mm diameter) shall be part of the corresponding water service item.

No extra payment shall be made for restoration of simple service reconnections unless the Contractor is ordered to replace a horizontal length of service pipe longer than 3.0 m.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.03 – Trench restoration – sodding and seeding (including topsoil)

SPEC NOTE: Use this item for long grassed boulevards and in grassed easements.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – Revisions to OPSS.MUNI 802
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – Revisions to OPSS.MUNI 803
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – Revisions to OPSS.MUNI 804
RMDCS Section 02700
OPSS.MUNI 492

Also include:

Permanently restore disturbed lawns, boulevards, easements, and other grassed areas disturbed by the Contractor.

Note:

Restoration treatment shall be according to Contract Drawings, Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x and RMDCS Section 02700.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of trench restoration on mainline watermain and 100 mm diameter PVC and larger water services shall be by horizontal length, in metres, of trench restored, regardless of width.

Measurement of restoration on service connection trenches shall be by horizontal length starting at a point 3.0 m from the centreline of the mainline watermain pipe to the limit of the service connection pipe, regardless of width.

Measurement of trench restoration for water service connections (up to 50 mm diameter) shall be part of the corresponding water service item.

No extra payment shall be made for restoration of simple service reconnections unless the Contractor is ordered to replace a horizontal length of service pipe longer than 3.0 m.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 3.02.04 – Remove existing valve box

Reference:
Contract Drawing, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 510

Also include:

Turn valve to the “off” position.

Remove existing valve box and dispose off-site.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Permanently/temporarily restore disturbed lawns, boulevards, easements, and other grassed areas disturbed by the Contractor. (SPEC NOTE: When this work is done under a Regional road reconstruction project, determine if surface restoration shall be permanent or temporary.

Permanently/temporarily restore all disturbed hard-surfaces. (SPEC NOTE: When this work is done under a Regional road reconstruction project, determine if surface restoration shall be permanent or temporary.

Note:

Existing valve to be in the “off” position and abandoned.

Upper section of valve box to be removed and sand placed in the remaining valve box sections.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of valve boxes removed and disposed off-site.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.05 – Remove existing valve and box (complete with concrete plugs)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 510

Also include:

Supply and place 15 MPa concrete plugs, minimum length of 300 mm, in abandoned pipes.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Permanently/temporarily restore disturbed lawns, boulevards, easements, and other grassed areas disturbed by the Contractor. (SPEC NOTE: When this work is done under a Regional road reconstruction project, determine if surface restoration shall be permanent or temporary.

Permanently/temporarily restore all disturbed hard-surfaces. (SPEC NOTE: When this work is done under a Regional road reconstruction project, determine if surface restoration shall be permanent or temporary.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of valve and valve boxes removed, disposed off-site and concrete plugs installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.06 – Concrete plug in abandoned watermain pipe

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 510

Also include:

Excavate to expose existing watermain pipe.

Saw cut, remove, and dispose of existing pipe including fittings, valves, etc. off-site as required.

Supply and place 15 MPa concrete plug in the ends of watermain that is to be abandoned in place.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Permanently/temporarily restore disturbed areas. (SPEC NOTE: When this work is done under a Regional road reconstruction project, determine if surface restoration shall be permanent or temporary.

Note:

Minimum length of concrete plug shall be 300 mm.

Restoration treatment shall be according to RMDSD S-200.020, Contract Drawings, Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x and RMDCS Sections 02700 and 02749.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete plugs installed in abandoned watermain pipe.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for concrete plugs installed in excavations for watermain pipe shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price for such watermain pipe.

Item 3.02.07 – Trench replacement - sand fill

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Sections 02315 and 02511

Include:

Remove unsuitable native backfill materials and dispose of off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place Sand Fill material.

Compact Sand Fill to 100 per cent Standard Proctor Dry Density.

Note:

This item, if ordered by the Contract Administrator, shall include replacement of native materials removed from the watermain or service connection trench which are unsuitable for reuse as backfill.

Reference RMDCS Section 02315, 2.01.1.2 for gradation requirements of Sand Fill material.

Compaction method used shall minimize the impact of vibrations and noise on adjacent homes, structures, and buildings.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of Sand Fill shall be by actual volume, in cubic metres, of Sand Fill material used as native material replacement.

Measurement shall be based on outer pipe diameter plus a maximum of 1200 mm for width multiplied by approved compacted depth and length of Sand Fill placed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.08 – Trench plug

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-200.040
OPSD 802.095

Include:

Excavate beyond main trench as required.

Supply, place, and compact 10 MPa concrete/clay material as required to construct trench plug according to RMDSD S-200.040/OPSD 802.095.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of trench plugs installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.09 – Mechanical plug on existing watermain pipe to remain in service

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-201.030 and S-201.031

Include:

Excavate to expose existing watermain pipe.

Saw cut existing pipe, remove, and dispose off-site of existing pipe including all bends, fittings, tees, and thrust restraints, as required.

Supply and install mechanical plug on existing watermain to remain in service after disconnection of pipe to be abandoned.

Install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030 and S-201.031.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of mechanical plugs installed on existing watermain pipe to remain in service.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.10 – Insulate new watermain

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-100.050

Include:

Supply and install 75 mm closed-cell, extruded polystyrene insulation and sand cover according to RMDSD S-100.050, complete in place.

Note:

The polystyrene sheets shall have a minimum compressive strength of 275 kPa.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of watermain insulation shall be by length in metres for actual length of new/existing watermain insulated.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for excavation shall be made under Item 3.01.xx.

Payment for pipe bedding according to RMDSD S-200.010 and for compacted backfill shall be made under Item 3.01.xx.

Item 3.02.11 – Trench rock excavation (scratch rock - less than 0.5 m depth)

Item 3.02.12 – Trench rock excavation (greater than 0.5 m depth and boulders)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02316
OPSS.MUNI 403

Include:

Excavate, remove, and dispose to a location off-site of solid rock mass and/or boulders larger than one cubic metre. Note that "cemented till" shall not be considered rock for the purpose of this item.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of trench rock excavation shall be by volume in cubic metres according to Clause 4.03.09.01 of OPSS.MUNI 403, regardless of width.

No extra payment shall be made for restoration of simple service reconnections unless the Contractor is ordered to replace a horizontal length of service pipe longer than 3.0 m.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.13 – Unshrinkable backfill

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02315
OPSS.MUNI 1359

Include:

Remove unsuitable native backfill materials and dispose of off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place Unshrinkable Backfill according to Contract Drawings and RMDCS Section 02315.

Protect open trench until Unshrinkable Backfill has sufficiently cured with steel plate/wooden planking or other protection methods approved by the Contract Administrator. (SPEC NOTE: Use steel plates for travel portion of roadway. Use wooden planking or other protection methods approved by Contract Administrator for situations where road traffic is not be accommodated)

Once Unshrinkable Backfill has sufficiently cured, backfill, and compact with overlying material(s).

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement is in cubic metres for actual volume of unshrinkable fill placed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.14 – Stone for extra depth bedding (19.0 mm diameter type I, clear stone)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 01210
OPSS.MUNI 1004

Include:

Excavate as required of unsuitable native materials below standard bedding depth, remove, and dispose excess materials.

Remove unsuitable native materials and dispose of excess material off-site in accordance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules as applicable.

Supply, place and compact 19 mm diameter Clear Stone, Type I as specified in OPSS.MUNI 1004 except that the stone shall have 100 per cent crushed materials and shall not contain any recycled materials.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of stone for extra depth bedding shall be by actual volume in cubic metres of stone placed below specified bedding.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.02.15 – Watermain protection under water course

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Watercourse/fisheries protection
RMDSD S-200.010 and S-200.090

Include:

All costs extra-over open cut trench including shoring.

Supply, place, and compact 19 mm diameter Type 1 Clear Stone to 100 per cent Standard Proctor Density (SPD).

Supply and place 20 MPa concrete slab, as per RMDSD S-200.090.

Supply, place, and compact HL 8 Blend Crushed Stone compacted to 98 per cent Standard Proctor Dry Density.

Note:

Trench bedding dimensions shall be in accordance with RMDSD S-200.010, dry trench.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of watermain protection under water course shall be the actual length of trench constructed in accordance with RMDSD S-200.090, in metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material extra-over open cut trenching.

Item 3.02.16 – Restrained joints in fill section

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-200.050 and S-200.060
OPSS.MUNI 441 and 442

Include:

All costs extra over the appropriate watermain pipe item for supply and install mechanical restrainers on straight line sections of pipe in earth fill areas as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of restrained joints in fill section shall be by the actual length of the thrust block installed at each restrained joint in earth fill areas.in metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material extra-over the appropriate watermain pipe item.

Payment for mechanical restraint in accordance with RMDSD S-200.050 and S-200.060 on pipe fittings, etc. shall be included in the unit price bid for the respective watermain pipe.

Item 3.02.17 – Support systems left in place

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 01330
OPSS.MUNI 404

Also include:

Abandon close sheathing materials including cutting off sheathing left in place and all bracing materials (whalers, struts, etc.)

Note:

This item is intended to cover the cost of close sheathing materials ordered left in place by the Contract Administrator upon completion of the proposed underground utility. Materials left in place solely at the choice of the Contractor shall not qualify for payment under this item.

Supply and placement of all trench shoring systems shall be deemed to be included in the appropriate unit price bid for proposed watermains. Where the close sheathing material is recovered by the Contractor, payment for the trench protection system shall be considered to be included in the unit price bid for the appropriate watermain item and no payment shall be made under this item for recovered materials.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement is in square metres, for the actual area of close sheathing materials ordered left in place.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to abandon close sheathing materials in place, including cutting off of sheathing left in place and all bracing materials (whalers, struts, etc.).

Item 3.02.19 – Temporary trench restoration with asphalt and subsequent removal prior to final restoration (provisional)

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration

Also include:

Grading of granular base to provide smooth transition to existing asphalt or concrete surfaces.

Supply and placement of HL 8 Hot Mix Asphalt (minimum compacted depth to be 50 mm).

Maintenance of the temporary asphalt area during construction.

Removal and disposal of the temporary asphalt prior to final trench restoration.

Note:

Payment under this Item shall only be made when the temporary placement of asphalt on roadways, sidewalks or driveways has been authorized by the Contract Administrator. This item shall not be utilized to relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities for the maintenance of pedestrian and vehicular traffic during construction.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement shall be by length of trench temporarily restored, in metres, regardless of width.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for temporary trench restoration with asphalt and subsequent removal prior to final restoration shall be made as follows:

80 per cent on placement.

20 per cent on removal.

Item 3.02.20 – Bore and jack casing

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Work within the Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway (CPKC)/Canadian National Railway (CN) right-of-way
RMDCS Sections 01330 and 02319
RMDSD S-200.080
OPSS.MUNI 416
Transport Canada General Order E-10

SPEC NOTE: Check required minimum depth of bury for the top of the installed liner (e.g. Crossing under Highway 401).

Include:

Mobilize and demobilize all materials and equipment to and from site.

Supply shop drawings for casing pipe according to Subsection 1.04 of RMDCS 01330. Shop drawings shall be stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario.

Excavate and install shoring at all sending and receiving pits. Shoring shall be stamped and signed by a qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.

Supply and install Grade 2 steel casing pipe to ASTM A252 according to Contract Drawings. Casing pipe ends shall be bevelled on outside to an angle of 30º for butt weld splicing.

Provide concrete thrust blocking for jack restraint for jack and bore construction.

Perform survey work for the horizontal and vertical rail alignment as described.

Supply and maintain all additional equipment as required (e.g. flood lights) to provide for continuous around the clock construction operations.

Remove and dispose all excess excavated materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Block and grout sewer pipe inside the casing.

Backfill and compact all pits with Select Native Material.

Complete all repairs and other costs for CPKC/CN property restoration.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of bored and jacked casing shall be by actual length in metres along the centreline of the casing pipe from the start to the end of the installed pipe.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material costs over and above an open-cut trench installation to install the casing pipe and to install the proposed watermain pipe inside the casing pipe complete as per RMDSD S-200.080.

The removal of boulders having a volume in excess of 0.5 cubic metres shall be paid for as Extra Work, Item 3.02.xx.

Item 3.02.30 – Tunnel liner

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Work within the Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway (CPKC)/Canadian National Railway (CN) right-of-way
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Watercourse/fisheries protection
RMDCS Section 02314
OPSS.MUNI 415
RMDSD S-200.020 and S-200.080
Transport Canada General Order E-10

SPEC NOTE:

1. Check required minimum depth of bury for the top of the installed liner (e.g. Crossing under Highway 401).
2. This item is applicable to hand-mined, jack/bore and/or open cut liner installation only. Microtunnelled liners are covered under the Microtunnel section of this document.

Also include:

Mobilize and demobilize all materials and equipment to and from site.

Excavate and install shoring at all tunnelling pits. Shoring stall be stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.

Dewater as required and control siltation of ground water removed to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator. Dewatering shall be paid under Item 7.01.12.

Supply and install primary liner according to the shop drawings, stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario.

Provide concrete thrust blocks for jack restraints.

Perform survey work for the horizontal and vertical rail alignment as described.

Supply and maintain all additional equipment as required (e.g. flood lights) to facilitate continuous a 24-hour construction operation.

Remove and dispose of all excess excavated materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Grout outside of tunnel liner.

Block and grout watermain pipe inside the tunnel liner.

Backfill all tunnelling pits with Select Native Material and compact.

Permanent restoration of disturbed areas according to RMDSD S-200.020 and Contract Drawings.

Note:

The minimum length of tunnels to be constructed shall be at the lengths shown on the Contract Drawings.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of tunnel liner shall be by Plan Quantity length in metres according to Subsection 415.09.02 of OPSS.MUNI 415.

No adjustment to Plan Quantity shall be made if the actual tunnel length is within plus or minus 0.5 metres of the lengths shown on the Contract Drawings.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material costs which are over and above an open cut trench installation to install the proposed watermain pipe inside a tunnel liner complete according to the Contract Drawings.

Payment for all construction signs, flashers, delineators, barricades at each pit site shall be included in the Traffic Control and Signing tender item.

Concrete barriers at tunnel pits shall be paid separately under the appropriate tender item and if no specific item is provided, then payment shall be included in the Traffic Control and Signing tender item.

Item 3.02.51 – Removal of asbestos-cement watermain pipe and disposal off-site

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx – Occupational health and safety act and Ontario regulation 213/91 – construction projects
RMDCS Section 01350

Also include:

Remove existing asbestos-cement pipe (mainline watermain and service connections) and prepare for transportation in required containers and bags according to the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations of the Ministry of Labour, the Ministry of the Environment, Conservation and Parks (MECP), and the Ministry of Transportation of Ontario.

During construction operations with asbestos-cement pipe:

Ensure pipe remains in a non-friable condition.

Ensure pipe is wetted during removal/handling operations.

Do not sand, saw, grind, chip, or use power tools for the removal of the asbestos-cement pipe.

Dispose of asbestos-cement pipe at an approved MECP site.

Provide all liability Insurance for the removal and shipping of asbestos “designated substance” waste.

Provide training for Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ workers in the proper removal and handling of asbestos-cement pipe as required under the current Ontario Health and Safety Act and Regulations.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for removal of asbestos-cement watermain pipe shall be by length in metres of asbestos-cement watermain pipe removed and properly disposed off-site.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.03.xx – xxx mm diameter gate valve and valve box

SPEC NOTE: List each gate valve diameter separately with item number and description as shown in Builterra.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
OPSS.MUNI 441 and 442
RMDSD S-201.030 and S-220.010

Also include:

Supply and install the (resilient seat) gate valve and valve box according to RMDSD S-220.010.

Excavate to required depth, supply and install block, backfill with suitable materials, and compact as per standard.

Arrange and install tracer wire according to RMDSD S-220.010.

Supply and install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030.

Adjust final grade at completion of work.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count will be made of the number of gate valves and valve boxes supplied and installed, regardless of size. (SPEC NOTE: Use “regardless of size” when different valve and valve box sizes are being used)

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.03.xx – 400/500 mm diameter butterfly valve and valve box

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
OPSS.MUNI 441 and 442
RMDSD S-201.030, S-220.010, and S-220.030

Also include:

Supply and install butterfly valve and valve box according to RMDSD S-220.020.

Excavate to required depth, supply and install block, backfill with suitable materials, and compact as per RMDSD 220.030.

Arrange and install tracer wire according to RMDSD S-220.010.

Supply and install Cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030.

Adjust to final grade at completion of work.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of butterfly valves installed.

Item 3.03.08/09 – Precast concrete chamber number xxx, including 600 mm diameter butterfly valve

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Sections 02511 and 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407, 408, and 441
RMDSD S-220.031
OPSD 401.030

Also include:

Supply and place precast chamber designed to H20 loading according to RMDSD S-220.031.

Supply and install the butterfly valve, valve stem, extension bracket and valve box according to RMDSD S 220.031.

Supply and place all CPP through the proposed chamber up to and including the closest CPP pipe joint outside the chamber on either side.

Watertight frame and cover according to OPSD 401.030.

Supply and install precast concrete valve chamber designed for H20 loading, complete to the details and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings, including all valves, sumps, grate, drains, ladders, and vent piping.

Supply and install reinforced, cast-in-place concrete thrust blocking around all watermain piping entering the chamber as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

Supply and apply membrane waterproofing to the top and sides of chamber using the following materials:

Membrane - Bituthene 3000, 1.5 mm minimum thickness.

Primer - Bituthene Primer P-3000.

Mastic - Bituthene EM-3000 Elastomeric Mastic.

All as manufactured by W.R. Grace and Company or approved equivalent. Apply materials according to manufacturer’s recommendations using experienced workers.

Except where waterproofing is covered with insulation, protect waterproofing with 6 mm thick asphalt impregnated protection boards according to OPSS.MUNI 914.

Insulate all exterior surfaces of chamber to 1500 mm below grade with extruded polystyrene foam insulation manufactured to CAN/ULC-S701-05, Type 4 within minimum compressive strength of 240 kPa. Anchor insulation to chamber with plastic Hilti IDFD insulation anchors.

Supply and install rectangular valve chamber frame and two-piece cover as per OPSD 402.030.

Supply, place and compact 300 mm wide Granular B, Type I (Modified) backfill all around precast chamber, full height, above bedding material.

Stainless steel fasteners for all valves and fittings.

Note: Unshrinkable backfill to be supplied and placed under Item 3.02.13.

Note:

Acceptable asphalt impregnated protection board products are:

Globe Glass Protection Board by Bakor Incorporated.

IKO Protectoboard by IKO Industries Limited.

Vibraflex MTO by W.R. Meadows of Canada

Reviewed equivalent.

Acceptable insulation products are:

Styrofoam HI 100 by Dow Chemicals.

Cellfort Foamular 600 by Owens Corning.

Reviewed equivalent.

Restore according to Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of precast concrete valve chambers installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for CPP through chamber shall be made under the appropriate watermain pipe item.

Item 3.03.xx – xxx mm diameter butterfly valve in precast concrete chamber number xxx

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause x – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Sections 02511 and 02631
RMDSD S-220.020 and S-220.030
OPSS.MUNI 407, 408, 441, and 914
OPSD 401.030

Also include:

Supply and install precast concrete valve chamber designed for H20 loading according to RMDSD S-220.031.

Supply and install the butterfly valve, valve stem, extension bracket and valve box according to RMDSD S-220.031.

Supply and place all CPP through the proposed chamber up to and including the closest CPP pipe joint outside the chamber on either side.

Watertight frame and cover according to OPSD 401.030.

Supply and install precast concrete valve chamber designed for H20 loading, complete to the details and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings, including all valves, sumps, grate, drains, ladders, and vent piping.

Supply and install reinforced, cast-in-place concrete thrust blocking around all watermain piping entering the chamber as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

Supply and install, maintenance and eventual removal of all interim fittings and appurtenances (flanges, 150mm diameter bypasses, backflow preventors, etc) within valve chambers for the purpose of construction staging and commissioning, as per the Contract Drawings.

Supply and apply membrane waterproofing to the top and sides of chamber using the following materials:

Membrane - Bituthene 3000, 1.5 mm minimum thickness.

Primer - Bituthene Primer P-3000.

Mastic - Bituthene EM-3000 Elastomeric Mastic.

All as manufactured by W.R. Grace and Company or approved equivalent. Apply materials according to manufacturer’s recommendations using experienced workers.

Except where waterproofing is covered with insulation, protect waterproofing with 6 mm thick asphalt impregnated protection boards according to OPSS.MUNI 914.

Insulate all exterior surfaces of chamber to 1500 mm below grade with extruded polystyrene foam insulation manufactured to CAN/ULC-S701-05, Type 4 within minimum compressive strength of 240 kPa. Anchor insulation to chamber with plastic Hilti IDFD insulation anchors.

Supply and install rectangular valve chamber frame and two-piece cover as per OPSD 402.030.

Supply, place and compact 300 mm wide Granular B, Type I (Modified) backfill all around precast chamber, full height, above bedding material.

Stainless steel fasteners for all valves and fittings.

Note: Unshrinkable backfill to be supplied and placed under Item 3.02.13.

Note:

Acceptable asphalt impregnated protection board products are:

Globe Glass Protection Board by Bakor Incorporated.

IKO Protectoboard by IKO Industries Limited.

Vibraflex MTO by W.R. Meadows of Canada

Reviewed equivalent.

Acceptable insulation products are:

Styrofoam HI 100 by Dow Chemicals.

Cellfort Foamular 600 by Owens Corning.

Reviewed equivalent.

Restore according to Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of precast concrete valve chambers installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The supply and placement of all CPP piping inside the chamber walls shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price for the applicable watermain pipe items.

Item 3.03.15 – 1500 mm diameter butterfly valve in semi-precast concrete chamber number xxx

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Sections 02511 and 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407, 408, and 904
OPSD 402.030

Also include:

Supply and install 1500 mm diameter butterfly valve, valve stem, extension bracket and valve box complete in semi-precast concrete chamber as shown and specified on Contract Drawings, x-xx and according to RMDCS Sections 02511. Construct the semi-precast chamber according to the Contract Drawings, RMDCS Section 02631, OPSS.MUNI 407, and Standard Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407 and OPSS.MUNI 904.

Supply and place all CPP through the proposed chamber up to and including the closest CPP pipe joint outside the chamber on either side.

Supply and install precast concrete valve chamber designed for H20 loading, complete to the details and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings, including all valves, sumps, grate, drains, ladders, and vent piping.

Supply and install reinforced, cast-in-place concrete thrust blocking around all watermain piping entering the chamber as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

Supply and apply membrane waterproofing to the top and sides of chamber using the following materials:

Membrane - Bituthene 3000, 1.5 mm minimum thickness.

Primer - Bituthene Primer P-3000.

Mastic - Bituthene EM-3000 Elastomeric Mastic.

All as manufactured by W.R. Grace and Company or approved equivalent. Apply materials according to manufacturer’s recommendations using experienced workers.

Except where waterproofing is covered with insulation, protect waterproofing with 6 mm thick asphalt impregnated protection boards according to OPSS.MUNI 914.

Insulate all exterior surfaces of chamber to 1500 mm below grade with extruded polystyrene foam insulation manufactured to CAN/ULC-S701-05, Type 4 within minimum compressive strength of 240 kPa. Anchor insulation to chamber with plastic Hilti IDFD insulation anchors.

Supply and install rectangular valve chamber frame and two-piece cover as per OPSD 402.030.

Supply, place and compact 300 mm wide Granular B, Type I (Modified) backfill all around precast chamber, full height, above bedding material.

Stainless steel fasteners for all valves and fittings.

Note:

Acceptable asphalt impregnated protection board products are:

Globe Glass Protection Board by Bakor Incorporated.

IKO Protectoboard by IKO Industries Limited.

Vibraflex MTO by W.R. Meadows of Canada

Reviewed equivalent.

Acceptable insulation products are:

Styrofoam HI 100 by Dow Chemicals.

Cellfort Foamular 600 by Owens Corning.

Reviewed equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of semi-precast concrete chambers installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for CPP through chamber shall be made under the appropriate watermain pipe item.

Item 3.03.16 – Precast water valve chamber at station x+xxx

SPEC NOTE – When multiple Precast Water Valve Chambers are required:

1. For each separate Precast Water Valve Chamber, list as 3.03.16.A, 3.03.16.B, 3.03.16.C, etc. This applies to both the SP’s and Builterra.
2. Ensure each chamber has an unique chamber number. This applies to both the SP’s and Builterra.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements Clause xx – General
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Sections 02511 and 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407, 408, 441, and 914
OPSD 402.030

Also include:

Supply and install precast concrete valve chamber designed for H20 loading, complete to the details and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings, including all valves, sumps, grate, drains, ladders, and vent piping.

Supply and install reinforced, cast-in-place concrete thrust blocking around all watermain piping entering the chamber as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

Supply and apply membrane waterproofing to the top and sides of chamber using the following materials:

Membrane - Bituthene 3000, 1.5 mm minimum thickness.

Primer - Bituthene Primer P-3000.

Mastic - Bituthene EM-3000 Elastomeric Mastic.

All as manufactured by W.R. Grace and Company or approved equivalent. Apply materials according to manufacturer’s recommendations using experienced workers.

Except where waterproofing is covered with insulation, protect waterproofing with 6 mm thick asphalt impregnated protection boards according to OPSS.MUNI 914.

Insulate all exterior surfaces of chamber to 1500 mm below grade with extruded polystyrene foam insulation manufactured to CAN/ULC-S701-05, Type 4 within minimum compressive strength of 240 kPa. Anchor insulation to chamber with plastic Hilti IDFD insulation anchors.

Supply and install rectangular valve chamber frame and two-piece cover as per OPSD 402.030.

Supply, place and compact 300 mm wide Granular B, Type I (Modified) backfill all around precast chamber, full height, above bedding material.

Stainless steel fasteners for all valves and fittings.

Note:

Acceptable asphalt impregnated protection board products are:

Globe Glass Protection Board by Bakor Incorporated.

IKO Protectoboard by IKO Industries Limited.

Vibraflex MTO by W.R. Meadows of Canada

Reviewed equivalent.

Acceptable insulation products are:

Styrofoam HI 100 by Dow Chemicals.

Cellfort Foamular 600 by Owens Corning.

Reviewed equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the precast water valve chamber shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The supply and placement of all CPP piping inside the chamber walls shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price for the applicable watermain pipe items.

Item 3.03.17 – Concrete valve chamber number xxx, including xxx mm diameter and xxx mm mainline valves

SPEC NOTE – When multiple Concrete Valve Chamber, including Mainline Valves are required:

1. For each separate Concrete Valve Chamber, list as 3.03.17.A, 3.03.17.B, 3.03.17.C, etc. This applies to both the SP’s and Builterra.
2. Ensure each chamber has an unique chamber number. This applies to both the SP’s and Builterra.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Sections 02511 and 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407, 408, and 441
RMDSD S-220.031
OPSD 401.030

Also include:

Supply and place precast/cast-in-place valve chamber designed to H20 loading according to RMDSD S-220.031.

Supply and install the butterfly valve, valve stem, extension bracket and valve box according to RMDSD S 220.031.

Supply and place all CPP through the proposed chamber up to and including the closest CPP pipe joint outside the chamber on either side.

Watertight frame and cover according to OPSD 401.030.

Supply and install precast concrete valve chamber designed for H20 loading, complete to the details and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings, including all valves, sumps, grate, drains, ladders, and vent piping.

Supply and install reinforced, cast-in-place concrete thrust blocking around all watermain piping entering the chamber as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

Supply and apply membrane waterproofing to the top and sides of chamber using the following materials:

Membrane - Bituthene 3000, 1.5 mm minimum thickness.

Primer - Bituthene Primer P-3000.

Mastic - Bituthene EM-3000 Elastomeric Mastic.

All as manufactured by W.R. Grace and Company or approved equivalent. Apply materials according to manufacturer’s recommendations using experienced workers.

Except where waterproofing is covered with insulation, protect waterproofing with 6 mm thick asphalt impregnated protection boards according to OPSS.MUNI 914.

Insulate all exterior surfaces of chamber to 1500 mm below grade with extruded polystyrene foam insulation manufactured to CAN/ULC-S701-05, Type 4 within minimum compressive strength of 240 kPa. Anchor insulation to chamber with plastic Hilti IDFD insulation anchors.

Supply and install rectangular valve chamber frame and two-piece cover as per OPSD 402.030.

Supply, place and compact 300 mm wide Granular B, Type I (Modified) backfill all around precast chamber, full height, above bedding material.

Stainless steel fasteners for all valves and fittings.

Note: Unshrinkable backfill to be supplied and placed under Item 3.02.13.

Note:

Acceptable asphalt impregnated protection board products are:

Globe Glass Protection Board by Bakor Incorporated.

IKO Protectoboard by IKO Industries Limited.

Vibraflex MTO by W.R. Meadows of Canada

Reviewed equivalent.

Acceptable insulation products are:

Styrofoam HI 100 by Dow Chemicals.

Cellfort Foamular 600 by Owens Corning.

Reviewed equivalent.

Restore according to Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number valve chambers installed, regardless of the number of mainline valves installed in the chamber.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for CPP through chamber shall be made under the appropriate watermain pipe item.

Item 3.03.xx – Air release valve and chamber number xxx

SPEC NOTE: List each Air Release Valve and Chamber separately with item number and description. Use assigned numbers in Builterra.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Sections 02511 and 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 408
RMDSD S-220.050 or S-220.051

Also include:

Supply and place air release valve and precast concrete chamber complete with all related piping and valves as shown and specified on the Contract Drawings.

Close inlet shut-off gate valve prior to testing and chlorinating watermain. Open inlet shut-off gate valve as directed by Contract Administrator.

Supply and install precast concrete valve chamber designed for H20 loading, complete to the details and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings, including all valves, sumps, grate, drains, ladders, and vent piping.

Supply and install reinforced, cast-in-place concrete thrust blocking around all watermain piping entering the chamber as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

Supply and apply membrane waterproofing to the top and sides of chamber using the following materials:

Membrane - Bituthene 3000, 1.5 mm minimum thickness.

Primer - Bituthene Primer P-3000.

Mastic - Bituthene EM-3000 Elastomeric Mastic.

All as manufactured by W.R. Grace and Company or approved equivalent. Apply materials according to manufacturer’s recommendations using experienced workers.

Except where waterproofing is covered with insulation, protect waterproofing with 6 mm thick asphalt impregnated protection boards according to OPSS.MUNI 914.

Insulate all exterior surfaces of chamber to 1500 mm below grade with extruded polystyrene foam insulation manufactured to CAN/ULC-S701-05, Type 4 within minimum compressive strength of 240 kPa. Anchor insulation to chamber with plastic Hilti IDFD insulation anchors.

Supply and install rectangular valve chamber frame and two-piece cover as per OPSD 402.030.

Supply, place and compact 300 mm wide Granular B, Type I (Modified) backfill all around precast chamber, full height, above bedding material.

Stainless steel fasteners for all valves and fittings.

Note:

Acceptable asphalt impregnated protection board products are:

Globe Glass Protection Board by Bakor Incorporated.

IKO Protectoboard by IKO Industries Limited.

Vibraflex MTO by W.R. Meadows of Canada

Reviewed equivalent.

Acceptable insulation products are:

Styrofoam HI 100 by Dow Chemicals.

Cellfort Foamular 600 by Owens Corning.

Reviewed equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of air release valve chambers supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for CPP through chamber shall be made under the appropriate watermain pipe item.

Item 3.03.xx – Drain valve and precast concrete chamber number xxx

SPEC NOTE: List each Drain Valve and Chamber separately with item number and description. Use assigned numbers in Builterra.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 407
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
RMDCS Sections 02511 and 02631
OPSS.MUNI 407 and 408
RMDSD S-220.060
OPSD 401.030

Also include:

Supply and install 150 mm diameter gate valves and boxes, solid rod valve extensions.

Supply and install watertight frame and cover according to OPSD 401.030.

Supply and install precast concrete valve chamber designed for H20 loading, complete to the details and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings, including all valves, sumps, grate, drains, ladders, and vent piping.

Supply and install reinforced, cast-in-place concrete thrust blocking around all watermain piping entering the chamber as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

Supply and apply membrane waterproofing to the top and sides of chamber using the following materials:

Membrane - Bituthene 3000, 1.5 mm minimum thickness.

Primer - Bituthene Primer P-3000.

Mastic - Bituthene EM-3000 Elastomeric Mastic.

All as manufactured by W.R. Grace and Company or approved equivalent. Apply materials according to manufacturer’s recommendations using experienced workers.

Except where waterproofing is covered with insulation, protect waterproofing with 6 mm thick asphalt impregnated protection boards according to OPSS.MUNI 914.

Insulate all exterior surfaces of chamber to 1500 mm below grade with extruded polystyrene foam insulation manufactured to CAN/ULC-S701-05, Type 4 within minimum compressive strength of 240 kPa. Anchor insulation to chamber with plastic Hilti IDFD insulation anchors.

Supply and install rectangular valve chamber frame and two-piece cover as per OPSD 402.030.

Supply, place and compact 300 mm wide Granular B, Type I (Modified) backfill all around precast chamber, full height, above bedding material.

Stainless steel fasteners for all valves and fittings.

Note:

Acceptable asphalt impregnated protection board products are:

Globe Glass Protection Board by Bakor Incorporated.

IKO Protectoboard by IKO Industries Limited.

Vibraflex MTO by W.R. Meadows of Canada

Reviewed equivalent.

Acceptable insulation products are:

Styrofoam HI 100 by Dow Chemicals.

Cellfort Foamular 600 by Owens Corning.

Reviewed equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of drain valve chambers supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for CPP through chamber shall be made under the appropriate watermain pipe item.

Item 3.03.30 – Drain chamber drain pipe including gate valve and valve box

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – General
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDCS Sections 02511 and 02631
OPSS.MUNI 410
RMDSD S-100.090, S-200.010, S-201.030, and S-220.010

Also include:

Supply and install bedding material according to RMDSD S-200.010.

Supply and install resilient seat gate valve and valve box according to RMDSD S-220.010.

Supply and install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030.

Adjust valve box to final grade at completion of work.

Note:

Drain pipe shall be PVC DR18 watermain pipe according to the Region’s Approved Manufacturers’ Products List on the Road Authority website (https://www.roadauthority.com) for acceptable pipe products.

Resilient seat gate valve and box shall be according to the Region’s Approved Manufacturers’ Products List on the Road Authority website (https://www.roadauthority.com) for acceptable gate valve and box products. Valve shall be left in the “closed” position.

Where the pipe outlets to the natural environment, a 2.0 metre length of CSP shall be provided at the outlet complete with a storm sewer outfall grate in accordance with RMDSD S-100.090. CSP shall be aluminum Type 2 to CSA G401 and shall be sized to fit over the PVC watermain pipe. The PVC pipe shall be extended between 0.6 m to 1.2 m inside the CSP outlet pipe. A 0.3 m minimum wide rubber boot fitted with stainless steel bands shall be provided at the CSP / PVC pipe overlap, or an alternative treatment approved by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of drain chamber pipe including gate valve and valve box shall be by length in metres along the horizontal centreline length of the pipe, measured from outside wall of the drain chamber to the proposed/existing storm sewer/outfall or ditch.

There shall be no separate payment for the connection to the storm sewer.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.03.40 – Cut in xxx mm diameter gate valve and valve box on existing xxx mm diameter ductile iron/cast iron/asbestos-cement/PVC/CPP watermain pipe

SPEC NOTE: If multiple cut-ins are required, then use letters to distinguish between each cut-in location. For example 3.03.40.A, 3.03.40.B, etc.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-201.030, S-201.031, and S-220.010
OPSS.MUNI 441 and 442

Also include:

Excavate to expose existing watermain pipe and dispose excess material off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347 and the Soil Rules. This includes disposing of removed AC pipe to a MECP approved disposal site at Contractor’s cost.

Isolate existing watermain.

Saw cut existing pipe, remove and dispose off-site of existing pipe including all bends, fittings, tees, and thrust restraints, as required.

Supply and install xxx mm diameter gate valve on existing watermain to remain in service.

Install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030 and S-201.031.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Notes: (SPEC NOTE: If applicable, add subsection if specific notes are required, otherwise remove)

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count will be made of the number of gate valves and valve boxes cut into existing watermain.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, Equipment, and Material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE for Item 3.03.47 – When more than one line stop is required for the same project, then add a letter to the Item number. For example, 3.03.47.A, 3.03.48.B, etc.

Item 3.03.47 – Line stop on existing xxx mm diameter CPP watermain

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Sections 02511
OPSS.MUNI 441

Note:

Please note that the existing watermain’s pipes operational attributes are summarized as follows:

Existing watermain is an AWWA Cxxx(x), CL–xx, xxx mm diameter installed in xxxx. Record shop drawings for this watermain were included in the original Contract Documents.

Operating pressure range to be up to xxx KPa (xxx psi), with approximately x.x m to x.x m of cover at the location of the proposed line stop.

This section of the watermain cannot be isolated and/or depressurized, therefore the specified work shall be completed with a full pressure of xxx KPa (xxx psi).

To date the Region of Durham is not aware of any leakage from the existing watermain.

The xxx mm diameter line stop shall be in place until such time that both the closure piece at station x+xxx is completed and the existing xxx mm dimeter butterfly valve (WCV-xxx-xxx) is replaced within the existing valve chamber number x on xxx street/road (Regional Road/Highway xx).

The line stop cannot be installed until the xxx mm diameter PVC watermain bypass and xxx mm diameter gate valve is installed in the intersection of xxx street/road (Regional Road/Highway 2) and xxx Street/Road.

Note that the Contractor shall not commence with removal of any xxx mm diameter feedermain on xxx street/road (Regional Road/Highway 2) without approval from the Contract Administrator, after the line stop is installed and closed. This time will be used to ensure the line stop and adjacent existing valves are serving their intended purpose and the water system in general is managing the flow restriction.

The location of the line stop is expected (SPEC NOTE: Add the line stop location) as shown on Contract Drawing x-x. The line stop is to be installed between pipe joints on the first full section of pipe north/south/east/west of the existing valve chamber.

The Contract Administrator and Contractor shall conduct a site meeting to select the preferred location of the line stop after the preconstruction kick-off meeting but before work is scheduled to commence (SPEC NOTE: Add location if applicable, such as at an intersection).

Also include:

Advanced excavation of the existing watermain at the proposed line stop location for the purpose of:

Confirming the location of the midpoint of the pipe length on which the line stop is to be placed.

Measuring the outside diameter of the watermain pipe at the location of the line stop agreed to be placed with the Contract Administrator following a thorough pipe surface cleaning. Ensure that the measurement is taken by an individual experienced and knowledgeable in methodology of tapping saddle manufacturing and installation and that the method employed is acceptable to the specialty subcontractor, if the specialty subcontractor is not the staff completing the measurements.

Temporary restoration of the excavation to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

The timing of the advanced excavation shall be such that sufficient lead time is provided for by the Contractor to order, manufacturer, and deliver all necessary materials and equipment to the site. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling this advanced excavation activity as not to incur schedule delay. The advanced excavation shall be entirely backfilled, and temporary asphalt placed to restore the travelled roadway surface to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Preconstruction Submittals to be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least 20 working days prior to commencing any site work associated with installation of the line stop. The advanced excavation for the line stop installation may proceed before preconstruction submittals are approved by the Contract Administrator. Preconstruction submittals shall include the following:

Provide to the Contract Administrator the contact information for the specialty subcontractor experience of completing at least 10 successful line stops on watermains this type and size, including the corresponding watermain system owner contact information for reference checking purposes.

Provide summary of specialty subcontractor staff experience, resumes, qualifications, and certifications.

Provide shop drawings for the excavation temporary shoring and dewatering system, signed, and stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.

Provide signed and stamped details for the existing watermain pipe’s temporary support during the work execution for the line stop installation and removal, as required to complete the work.

Provide detailed methodology for the live tap and line stop installation and removal procedure at the full pressure specified above, including the method for measuring the field measured pipe outside diameter following a thorough pipe surface cleaning. The detailed methodology plan, including details shall include a description of the procedure that will be followed and specifications for all equipment and materials that will be used, including sketches showing appurtenances and fittings for temporary and permanent conditions. The submission shall include a letter from the pipe manufacturer stating that it concurs with the Contractor’s proposed installation procedure.

Provide methodology for the existing watermain elevation monitoring system during the specified work. Establish a set of baseline elevations at two locations on the exposed watermain. Monitor watermain elevations minimum twice daily and report readings to the Contract Administrator with tabulated and graphical comparison between the baseline and actual readings. Watermain displacement cannot be tolerated; displacement shall be 0.0 mm at all times. The elevations reading accuracy shall be 0.5 mm. All measurements shall be taken and reported by a licensed Ontario Land Surveyor (OLS) and be reported as geodetic elevations, with UTM NAD 83, Zone 17 northings and eastings for each location.

Provide summary of lead times for the stainless steel saddles and line stop appurtenance and fitting delivery times from date of approval of preconstruction submittals.

Provide disinfection procedure for the thorough disinfection of all temporary and permanent materials, fittings, and equipment that shall come into contact with the potable water in the existing watermain.

Provide a detailed methodology for the corrosion protection system of all metal fittings and products to be permanently buried.

No work shall proceed until written authorization is received from the Contractor Administrator to proceed with the work.

Ensure that the knife gate valve for the pipe coring and line stop insertion has been shop tested and inspected to ensure that it is operational and that valve seats are in good condition.

Complete any and all non-destructive condition inspection testing recommended to be required to be completed by the specialty sub-contractor on the existing CPP watermain prior to initiating the saddle installation procedure.

Excavation, design and construction of the excavation support system, backfilling, restoration, off-site disposal of excess materials, existing utility protection/support, dewatering and ground water control.

Full restoration of the excavation to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

All preparatory works including all coordination, and securing all required approvals and permits, shall be completed by the Contractor prior to the commencement of works.

The Contract shall supply a hot tapping machine capable of tapping into live existing concrete pressure pipe watermain, with an operating pressure of plus/minus 1035 KPa (plus/minus 150 psi). Hot tapping shall be completed in accordance with the tapping machine manufacturer's recommendation.

Provide live tap size suitable for insertion of the 600 mm diameter full line stop, complete with gaskets, NSF certified epoxy coated stainless steel saddle.

The Contractor shall supply an NSF certified epoxy coated stainless steel hot tap fitting meeting ANSI Class 150 or as approved by the Contract Administrator, which shall be used for tapping into the existing CPP watermain. All equipment, temporary items, including permanent fittings that will come into contact with the water in the existing CPP shall be NSF certified and shall be thoroughly disinfected immediately prior to use.

The Contractor shall supply epoxy coated carbon steel blind flanges meeting ANSI Class 150 or approved equivalent, which shall be used with hot tap fitting.

All nuts, bolts, washers, and all other fittings shall be of 304 stainless steel.

Hot tapping equipment and materials shall be manufactured by one of the following companies:

TD Williamson Incorporated.

Team Industrial Services.

Furmanite Canada Corporation.

Approved equivalent.

The Contractor shall coordinate with the Region’s Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono, Scugog, Sunderland Depot staff, who will operate all existing valves. The Contractor shall make the appropriate arrangements to ensure that the work can be carried out with the specified pressure of 689 KPa (100 psi) in the existing watermain.

All costs for applying for and procuring a road occupancy permit from the City of Pickering/Town of Ajax/Town of Whitby/City of Oshawa/Municipality of Clarington/Township of Uxbridge/Township of Scugog/Township of Brock, including any renewals required.

All costs associated with installing pedestrian and vehicle barriers, traffic control measures, signing and securing the excavation as stable and safe from work site and public and vehicular access.

Restore site according to Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the line stop on the existing watermain shall be lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

All costs for backfilling to the top of base course granulars shall be included in this item, both for the restoration of the advanced excavation and for the final backfilling of the line stop excavation.

Costs for temporary and final restoration shall be paid as per the respective item numbers for each.

Progress payments for line stops on existing watermain shall be based on the following percentage of the Contract price:

10 per cent upon backfilling and restoration of the advanced excavation.

10 per cent upon Contact Administrator approval of all preconstruction submittals.

40 per cent upon mobilization and satisfactory installation of line stop and demonstration that line stop has isolated flow without leakage.

40 per cent upon removal of line stop and permanent capping of tapping saddle watertight, complete with cathodic protection of saddle, backfilling, and site restoration.

Item 3.03.50 – Extra-over valve and box - cut-in anchor tee with xxx mm diameter gate valve and valve box

Reference:
RMDCS Section 02315 and 02511
RMDSD S-201.030, S-201.031, and S-220.010

Include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and cut in xxx mm x xxx mm x xxx mm anchor tee complete with filler piece watermain pipe, solid sleeve, and cathodic protection, all according to RMDSD S-201.030 or S-201.031.

Supply and install xxx mm diameter resilient seat gate valve and valve box complete with cathodic protection.

Supply and install solid concrete block according to RMDSD S-220.010.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact according to RMDCS Section 02315.

Adjust to final grade at completion of work.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of anchor tees with gate valves cut into existing watermain.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material costs to do the work which are over and above those normally incurred in the installation of a standard new valve and valve box on a new watermain. Payment for the respective-sized gate valve and valve box shall be made in addition to this item.

Item 3.03.51.A – Extra over valve and box – xxx mm x xxx mm x xxx mm tapping sleeve and xxx mm diameter valve and valve box

Item 3.03.51.B – Extra over valve and box – xxx mm x xxx mm x xxx mm tapping sleeve and xxx mm diameter gate valve and valve box

SPEC NOTE:
1. Use Item 3.03.51.A for valves less than 100 mm diameter.
2. Use item 3.03.51.B for gate valve and valve box installations; valves 100 mm diameter and greater.

Reference:
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-201.030, S-201.031, and S-220.010

Include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install a tapping sleeve with cathodic protection in accordance with RMDSD S-201.030 or S-201.031.

Supply and install a tapping valve and box in accordance with RMDSD S-220.010.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Adjust to final grade at completion of work.

Note:

For PVC watermain pipe use stainless steel tapping sleeves only.

The existing watermain is CI/DI and was installed in 19xx. Due to the existing watermain age, an oversized saddle is required. (SPEC NOTE: This Clause is to capture the watermain material and age in order to determine if an oversized saddle is required; pre-1970’s CI/DI may require oversized saddles. This is to be determined by the Designer.)

The existing watermain is C-xxx, CL-xxx CPP pipe.

Measurement for Payment:

SPEC NOTE: For Item 3.03.51.A use:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of tapping sleeve with valve and valve box installed.

SPEC NOTE: For Item 3.03.51.B use:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of tapping sleeves with gate valve and valve box installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material costs to do the work which are over and above those normally incurred in the installation of a standard new valve and valve box on a new watermain. Payment for the respective-sized valve and valve box shall be made in addition to this item.

Item 3.03.52 – Remove existing concrete valve chamber and replace with valve box

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
OPSS.MUNI 510
RMDSD S-220.010

Also include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess material off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Remove valve chamber walls above base of structure and dispose off-site.

Salvage, clean and transport existing frames and covers to the Region's Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono, Scugog, Sunderland Depot.

Supply and install new valve box and rod on existing valve.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Adjust valve box to final grade at completion of work.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of valve chambers replaced with a valve box.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.03.53 – Adjusting existing valve chamber

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – General
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 408
OPSS.MUNI 408
OPSD 704.010

Also include:

Saw cut asphalt or concrete as required.

As required, remove, salvage, clean and store existing interlocking concrete pavers.

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess material off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Remove existing adjustment units and dispose off-site.

Supply and install new adjustment units to final grade.

Install adjustment units as per OPSD shown on the Contract Drawings, and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Reinstate asphalt or concrete, as shown on Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Reinstate grass area disturbed by the Contractor.

Reinstate interlocking pavers to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrators. This work shall be performed by a specialist paving stone/landscaping firm using workers experienced in interlocking concrete paver installations.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of valve chambers adjusted.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.03.54 – Abandonment of valve chamber – partial depth removal

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02315
OPSS.MUNI 510

Also include:

Remove and dispose off-site of top 1200 mm of existing structure unless noted otherwise on Contract Drawings.

Turn valve to the "off" position.

OR

Remove existing valve and transport to the Region's Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono, Scugog, Sunderland Depot. (SPEC NOTE: Choose the appropriate Depot)

Supply and place 15 MPa concrete plugs, minimum length of 300 mm, in abandoned pipes.

Backfill remaining structure with Sand Fill material and compact.

Backfill excavation with Select Native Material and compact.

Note:

Existing frames and covers removed shall become property of the Contractor and disposed of at the Contractor’s expense.

Reference RMDCS Section 02315, Subsection 2.01.2 for gradation requirements of Sand Fill material.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of valve chambers abandoned regardless of size.

Basis of Payment:

.1	Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.04.01 – Hydrant sets

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
OPSS.MUNI 441 and 442
RMDSD S-201.030 and S-210.010

Also include:

Supply and install hydrant (with Storz pumper nozzle), anchor tee, resilient-seat gate valve, valve box, and hydrant lead watermain pipe according to RMDSD S-210.010.

Supply and install hydrant extensions and/or valve box and rod extensions as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Provide and install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrant sets supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.04.02 – Hydrant barrier

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-210.020

Include:

Fabricate, supply, and install hydrant barrier as per RMDSD S-210.020.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrant barriers installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.04.03 – Temporary flushing hydrant set

Item 3.04.09 – Permanent flushing hydrant set

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-210.010, S-210.040, S-210.050 and S-230.020

Include:

Excavate to grade and dispose off excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply of temporary/permanent hydrant with Storz pumper nozzle, anchor tee, resilient seat gate valve, 19 mm diameter test point and hydrant lead watermain pipe according to RMDSD S-210.010.

Supply and install hydrant extensions and/or valve box and rod extensions as shown on the Contract Drawings. Include, pipe, block, and restrainers according to RMDSD S-210.010 and remove upon completion. (SPEC NOTE: Use this text only for item 3.04.03)

All side streets shall have temporary flushing hydrants and 19 mm diameter test points installed at the limits of the watermain construction.

Supply and install all other materials as required.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

SPEC NOTE: Use the below Clause for temp. flushing hydrant installations:

For measurement purpose, a count will be made of the number of temporary flushing hydrant sets supplied, installed, and removed.

SPEC NOTE: Use the below Clause for permanent flushing hydrant installations:

For measurement purpose, a count will be made of the number of permanent flushing hydrant sets supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE: Use Item 3.04.04 for relocating existing hydrants to new locations on an existing watermain

Item 3.04.04 – Salvage and relocate existing hydrant

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-201.030 and S-210.010

Include:

Excavate to grade and dispose off excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Remove and salvage existing hydrant, secondary valve, and valve box.

Remove all piping and appurtenances and dispose off-site.

Supply and install mechanical cap/plug on existing tee.

Supply and cut in new 150 mm anchor tee including solid sleeve and restrainers (at station x+xx only).

Supply and install new hydrant lead watermain pipe restrained to existing M.J. tee/new anchor tee.

Connect salvaged hydrant, valve, and valve box to new hydrant lead piping using mechanical restrainers.

Supply and install extensions to hydrant barrel, valve box and rod as required and according to RMDSD S 210.010.

Provide and install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Note:

If a new valve and/or hydrant is deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator such valve and/or hydrant shall be paid extra to this item based on Contractor's paid invoice (less HST) plus 20 per cent mark up and the existing materials shall be delivered to the Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono., Scugog, Sunderland Depot.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrants relocated.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.04.05 – Removal of hydrant set complete with concrete plugs

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 510

Include:

Excavate to expose hydrant, secondary valve, and piping as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Remove hydrant set including hydrant, secondary valve, valve box, and hydrant piping.

Separate hydrant, valve, and pipes.

Clean, salvage, and transport existing hydrant, secondary valve, and valve box to the Region’s Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono, Scugog, Sunderland Depot.

Dispose of removed pipe off-site.

Supply and place 15 MPa concrete plug in the ends of the existing watermain that is to be abandoned in place. The minimum length of the concrete plug shall be 300 mm.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrant sets removed with concrete plugs installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.04.06 – Cut-in new hydrant on existing watermain pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-201.030, S-201.031, and S-210.010

Include:

Excavate to expose existing watermain pipe and dispose excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and cut-in of anchor tee complete with filler piece watermain pipe and solid sleeve.

Supply and install hydrant and resilient-seat gate valve and box.

Supply and install 150 mm diameter PVC Class 150 C-900 hydrant lead watermain pipe.

Supply and install mechanical restrainers.

Provide and install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030/S-201.031.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrants cut-in on existing watermains.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.04.07 – Hydrant access ramp

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-210.030
OPSD 802.010/802.030

Include:

Excavate and remove all topsoil. Dispose excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Prepare culvert bedding according to OPSD 802.010/802.030. Embedment material shall be 19 mm diameter Crusher Run Limestone or Granular B, Type 1 (Modified).

Supply and install 450 mm diameter CSP/HDPE culvert, 1.6 mm/dual wall thickness. (SPEC NOTE: When there is a deviation from RMDSD S-210.030, then the culvert size and material type shall be in accordance with the Contract Drawings)

Supply and install Granular B, Type 1 (Modified) for access ramp. Ramp shall be minimum of 4.0 m wide with minimum 300 mm cover over culvert pipe.

Backfill and compact to 100 per cent Standard Proctor Dry Density.

Adjust secondary valve to final grade.

Re-grade and restore existing ditches on both sides of culvert.

Note:

For the culverts, refer to the Region of Durham Approved Manufacturers' Products List (AMPL) on the Road Authority website (https://www.roadauthority.com) for acceptable pipe products. The AMPL states limitations for the use of certain pipe materials based on application and size.

CSP culvert pipe shall be Aluminized Type 2.

HDPE culvert pipe shall be dual wall corrugated pipe.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrant access ramps installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.04.08 – Remove and replace hydrant only

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
OPSS.MUNI 510
RMDSD S-201.030 and S-210.010

Include:

Excavate to expose existing hydrant and hydrant lead pipe.

Remove and salvage the existing hydrant and deliver it to the Region’s Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono, Scugog, Sunderland Depot.

Remove the hydrant lead pipe and dispose off-site.

Supply and install new hydrant with Storz pumper nozzle according to RMDSD S-210.010.

Supply and install new 150 mm diameter PVC Class 150 C-900 hydrant lead watermain pipe from existing secondary valve to new hydrant, according to RMDSD 2010.010.

Provide and install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Note:

If a new secondary valve is deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator such valve shall be supplied and paid extra to this item according to the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions. Material costs shall be based on Contractor's paid invoice (less HST) plus 20 per cent mark up.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrants removed and replaced.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

SPEC NOTE:

1. Item 3.04.09 is for hydrant relocations using the existing tee, secondary valve, and moving the existing hydrant towards the Property Line. This item shall be used for Watermain or Watermain/Sanitary sewer joint projects only.
2. Use Item 1.13.02 for same work for Road Reconstruction projects.

Item 3.04.10 – Salvage and relocate existing hydrant by extending hydrant lead pipe

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-201.030 and S-210.010

Include:

Excavate to grade and dispose off excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Remove and salvage existing hydrant.

Supply and install new 150 mm diameter PVC Class 150 C-900 hydrant lead watermain pipe restrained to existing M.J. tee.

Connect salvaged hydrant to new 150 mm diameter PVC hydrant lead watermain piping using mechanical restrainers.

Supply and install extensions to hydrant barrel, valve box and rod as required and according to RMDSD S 210.010.

Provide and install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Note:

If a new valve and/or hydrant is deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator such valve and/or hydrant shall be paid extra to this item based on Contractor's paid invoice (less HST) plus 20 per cent mark up and the existing materials shall be delivered to the Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono., Scugog, Sunderland Depot.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hydrants relocated by extension of the hydrant lead pipe.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.05 – Water service connections

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
OPSS.MUNI 441
RMDSD S-230.020, S-230.021, S-230.030, S-230.031, and S-230.032

SPEC NOTE: Designer to decide which Clause or Clauses below are applicable.

General Note:

A water service may be:

New main stop connected to an existing service pipe.

New main stop and a piece of copper pipe one metre or more in length connected to existing service pipe or existing curb stop.

New main stop, new copper pipe, and a new curb stop with a water service box connected to existing service.

Existing service being replaced with a new main stop, new copper pipe and a new curb stop with water service box connected to new watermain.

A new water service connection complete with a new main stop, new copper pipe, new curb stop with water service box that is connected to an existing watermain.

Note:

The exact locations for all new service connections shall be field confirmed by the Contractor under the direction of the Contract Administrator, unless specifically dimensioned on the Contract Drawings.

Item 3.05.xx – xx mm diameter main stop

SPEC NOTE: When multiple water service main stop diameters are used, then list each main stop diameter separately ensuring to follow item numbers provided in Builterra.

Include:

Where corresponding service pipe is not being installed, include excavation to expose watermain pipe and backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Supply and install main stop valve complete with saddle, union adapter, connectors, etc.

Provide cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-230.020/S-230-021.

Turn existing main stops to ‘off’ position, install brass plug at mainline and disconnect existing service pipe. (SPEC NOTE: Add this Clause for existing service disconnections. For watermains to be abandoned, remove the “, install brass plug at mainline”; this work is only required for services disconnections where existing watermain is remaining in service.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of main stops supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.05.xx – xx mm diameter curb stop and box

SPEC NOTE: When multiple water service curb stop and box diameters are used, then list each curb stop and box diameter separately ensuring to follow item numbers provided in Builterra.

Include:

Where corresponding service pipe is not being installed, include excavation, backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Removal of existing curb stop, service box, and rod.

Supply and install curb stop and box complete with stainless steel rod with brass pin according to RMDSD S-230.020/S-230-021.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of curb stops and boxes supplied and installed.

Basis for Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.05.xx – xx mm diameter copper water service pipe

SPEC NOTE: When multiple water service pipe diameters are used, then list each pipe diameter separately ensuring to follow item numbers provided in Builterra.

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – General
RMDSD S-200.010 and S-230.020/S-230.021

Include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Remove existing service pipe as required and dispose off-site.

Supply and install pipe according to RMDSD S-230.020/S-230.021 in Class D bedding and cover according to RMDSD S-200.010.

Connect to existing service pipe with required unions/adapters.

Supply and install of cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-230.020/S-230.021.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Permanently restore the surface according to Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x.

Note:

The exact locations for all new service connections shall be field confirmed by the Contract Administrator unless specifically dimensioned on the Contract Drawings.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of copper service pipe shall be by length in metres of copper service pipe supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE: Use Items 3.05.5X and 3.05.6X for polybutylene water service replacement contracts only.

Item 3.05.50 – 19 mm diameter main stop

Item 3.05.51 – 25 mm diameter main stop

Reference:
RMDCS Sections 02315 and 02749
RMDSD S-200.010, S-201.030, and S-201.031
OPSS.MUNI 441

Also include:

Remove, salvage, clean and store existing interlocking paving stones and precast concrete curb.

Saw cut, remove, and dispose of existing temporary cold mix and permanent hot mix asphalt as marked out by the Contract Administrator. Saw cut in a straight and uniform line. Dispose of all removed materials off-site to a location arranged for by the Contractor.

Remove and dispose off-site existing concrete section bounded by expansion/contraction joints.

Excavate for and remove existing main stop. Removed main stop shall become the property of the Contractor for disposal off-site.

Supply, install and remove all shoring required to safely remove and install new main stop and copper pipe connection.

Supply and install new main stop and saddle on PVC watermain.

Supply and install any required union adapters, connectors, etc.

Connect new service pipe.

Supply and install cathodic protection for main stop according to RMDSD S-201.030 and S-201.031.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Restore road base. Supply, place, and compact 300 mm Granular B Type I (Modified) and 150 mm Granular A.

Temporarily restore roadways, sidewalks, and driveways daily. Supply, place, and compact 19 mm diameter Crusher Run Limestone flush to adjacent surfaces.

Note:

Existing main stops have been located by the Region and shown on the Contract Drawings as indicated on the main stop tie sheets.

The main stop excavation shall become the receiving pit for the installation of the new copper water service by trenchless technology.

Backfill all pits and trenches daily. No pits shall be left open overnight.

Be aware of the potential for underground sprinkler systems and underground invisible electric fence on private properties and make any necessary repairs at Contractor’s expense if damage occurs.

Maximum allowable receiving pit opening size shall be 2 m x 2 m.

Supply, placement, and compaction of replacement watermain bedding shall be paid under Item 3.02.xx.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of main stops shall be by a count of the number of main stops supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.05.55 – 19 mm diameter curb stop and box

Item 3.05.56 – 25 mm diameter curb stop and box

Reference:
RMDCS Sections 02315 and 02749
RMDSD S-200.010, S-201.030, and S-201.031
OPSS.MUNI 441

Also include:

Remove, salvage, clean and store existing interlocking paving stones and precast concrete curb.

Saw cut, remove, and dispose of existing temporary cold mix and permanent hot mix asphalt as marked out by the Contract Administrator. Saw cut in a straight and uniform line. Dispose of all removed materials off-site to a location arranged for by the Contractor.

Remove and dispose off-site existing concrete section bounded by expansion/contraction joints.

Excavate for and remove existing curb stop, box and rod. Removed items shall become the property of the Contractor for disposal off-site.

Supply, install and remove all shoring required to safely remove and install new curb stop, box, rod, and copper pipe connection.

Supply and install new curb stop and box complete according to RMDSD S-230.020.

Supply and install stainless steel rod with brass pin.

Connect new service pipe.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Restore driveway base. Supply, place and compact 150 mm Granular A.

Temporarily restore roadways, sidewalks, and driveways daily. Supply, place, and compact 19 mm diameter Crusher Run Limestone flush to adjacent surfaces.

Note:

Existing curb stops have been located by the Region except where not shown on the Contract Drawings.

The curb stop excavation shall become the sending pit for the installation of the new copper water service by trenchless technology.

Backfill all pits and trenches daily. No pits shall be left open overnight.

Be aware of the potential for underground sprinkler systems and underground invisible electric fence on private properties and make any necessary repairs at Contractor’s expense if damage occurs.

Maximum allowable sending pit opening size shall be 3 m x 2 m.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of curb stops shall be by a count of the number of curb stops and boxes supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.05.60 – 19 mm diameter copper water service pipe

Item 3.05.61 – 25 mm diameter copper water service pipe

Reference:
RMDCS Sections 02315 and 02749
RMDSD S-200.010, S-201.030, and S-201.031
OPSS.MUNI 441

Also include:

Remove, salvage, clean and store existing interlocking paving stones and precast concrete curb.

Saw cut, remove, and dispose of existing temporary cold mix and permanent hot mix asphalt as marked out by the Contract Administrator. Saw cut in straight and uniform lines. Dispose of all removed materials off-site to a location arranged for by the Contractor.

Remove and dispose off-site existing concrete section bounded by expansion/contraction joints.

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials as required if trenchless technology fails or if the pipe length is too short to allow trenchless construction.

Remove and dispose of existing service pipe as required.

Supply and install service pipe according to RMDSD S-230.020 in specified bedding and cover including connections to existing service with required unions/adapters.

Supply and install cathodic protection according to RMDSD S-201.030 and S-201.031.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Restore road base. Supply, place and compact 300 mm Granular B Type I (Modified) and 150 mm Granular A.

Temporarily restore roadways, sidewalks, and driveways daily. Supply, place, and compact 19 mm diameter Crusher Run Limestone flush to adjacent surfaces.

Note:

The exact locations for all new service connections shall be field confirmed by the Contract Administrator unless specifically dimensioned on the Contract Drawings.

Backfill all pits and trenches daily. No pits shall be left open overnight.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of copper service pipe shall be by actual length in metres of copper service pipe supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.06.01 – Test point/ bypass/ flushing arrangement for watermains 300 mm diameter and less

Item 3.06.02 – Test point/ bypass/ flushing arrangement for watermains 400 mm diameter and larger

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-210.010, S-210.040, S-210-050, and S-230.020
RMDCS 02511

Include:

Excavate to required depth and management of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install all backflow preventers, test points, restrainers, sleeves, fittings, valves, valve boxes, blocks, bedding and backfill with suitable compacted material.

Protect and maintain test point bypass throughout the duration of the project.

Remove of all the above including excavation upon completion of and approval of testing and flushing. Supply and install brass plugs on all test points where required.

Supply and install a brass plug in locations where main stops were removed.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Certify and provide backflow certification for each backflow device arrangement.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of test point/ bypass/ flushing arrangements installed and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for test point/bypass/flushing arrangements shall be as follows:

50 per cent for installation.

50 per cent upon removal.

Item 3.06.10 – 19 mm diameter sampling points

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-230.020

Include:

Supply and install new main stop, new copper pipe and a new curb stop at surface grade for sampling.

Remove all main stops upon completion of testing and flushing.

Supply and install a brass plug in locations where main stops were removed.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of sampling points supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.06.11 – Permanent 19 mm diameter sampling station

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-210.070 and S-230.020

Include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install new main stop, new copper pipe and a new curb stop at surface grade for sampling.

Supply and install 5.4 kg zinc anode and brass service ground clamp. Connect to copper service pipe.

Supply and install vent tube and galvanized steel standpipe.

Supply and install 300 mm diameter sonotube, minimum 1.2 m in length.

Supply and place 20 MPa concrete in sonotube.

Supply and install aluminum base and housing with doors.

Supply and install 6.25 mm diameter pet cock to be enclosed in the aluminum housing.

Install decal provided by the Region.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of permanent sampling stations installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.07.01 – 19 mm diameter blow off

Item 3.07.02 – 50 mm diameter blow off

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDSD S-210.060

Include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install 50 mm diameter blow off in accordance with RMDSD S-210.060.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of blow offs installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.08.03 – Install 14.5 kg anode on existing ferrous watermain

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Section 02511
RMDSD S-201.031

Include:

Excavate extra over and above that required for proposed main or service connections to the existing ferrous (e.g., ductile iron, cast iron, etc.) watermain pipe, as required.

Supply and place 14.5 kg magnesium anode.

Supply and install all Thermite Weld connections complete with Roybond 747 primer and Handy Caps or reviewed equivalent.

Backfill with Select Native Material and compact to 95 per cent Standard Proctor Dry Density.

Restore all areas disturbed by the Contractor to accommodate this work in accordance with Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x.

Note:

Cathodic protection of the existing ferrous watermain where it is exposed shall be included in this tender item. Cathodic protection for the proposed watermain, fittings, tracer wire and appurtenances shall be included in the appropriate watermain pipe or appurtenance items.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of anodes supplied and installed on existing ferrous watermains.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.08.07 – Cathodic protection test station (flush mount)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration

Include:

Excavate to grade and dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install flush mount test station supplied by one of the following:

Street Fink with conduit (30 mm x 15 mm diameter) by Cott Manufacturing Company.

Install flush mount test stations level to grade at the nearest property line wherever possible.

Supply and install all related stainless steel hardware, conduits, wire leads, etc.

For each test station, weld two test leads (White AWG number 10/7 stranded cable having RWU-90 insulation) to the watermain. Connect each lead by insulated ring tongues to a separate terminal in the test station. Connect the anode lead wire by an insulated ring tongue to the blue terminal. Inside the terminal box, connect the blue terminal to the adjacent white terminal using a jump wire with insulated ring tongues.

Install decal provided by the Region.

Backfill and compact with native materials.

Restore the site to original conditions or better to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Each test station shall have a minimum three lead terminal board. Actual location of test station shall be in accordance with Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Horizontal, underground wiring runs shall be at least 500 mm deep and shall be terminated in the test station.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of temporary flush mount cathodic protection test stations installed and removed. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Measurement for Payment Clause for temporary installations)

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of permanent flush mount cathodic protection test stations installed. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Measurement for Payment Clause for permanent installations)

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract for the above tender item price shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.11.01 – Temporary water service to residence

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions - General Requirements
RMDCS Sections 01510 and 02511

Include:

Obtain hydrant permits from the Region of Durham’s Ajax/Pickering, Oshawa/Whitby, Orono Scugog, Sunderland Depot.

Supply and install temporary watermain with joint restraining system, service connection tees and valves from a live hydrant. Connections to hydrants shall be made to the 63.5 mm diameter nozzles. Temporary watermains shall be installed on each side of the roadway. Service connections shall not cross the roadway.

Supply and install two 150 mm diameter foam swabs in each temporary watermain to be flushed by the Region.

Where temporary watermain crosses the existing roadway, saw cut and remove asphalt from the roadway to permit burying the temporary watermain pipe without disturbing the concrete base where applicable. and provide temporary asphalt cover flush with the existing road surface. Protect temporary watermain from damage by vehicular traffic.

Where the ends of the temporary watermain are connected to different pressure districts, install a check valve.

Supply and install valves in the temporary watermain in the vicinity of existing mainline valves on the line being removed/abandoned and at such other locations as the Contract Administrator may direct.

Supply and place temporary asphalt mound cover for driveway protection and sidewalk crossings, complete with delineation for pedestrian traffic. Supply and place building paper or other such material, as approved by the Contract Administrator, before placing the asphalt.

Supply and install temporary 50 mm diameter hydrants matching the existing number of hydrants plus two for each street.

Supply and install 50 mm diameter backflow prevention device at each connection to existing hydrant.

Provide a 19 mm diameter test point, including curb stop valve, at each connection to existing hydrant.

Provide 100 mm diameter restrained end caps as required.

Supply and installation of temporary service pipe to each house, designed for a working pressure of 860 kPa (125 psi). All materials used shall be NSF 61 certified and shall not impart any taste or odour to the water. The pipe and fittings shall provide adequate water tightness.

Provide a “Y” connection and two ball valves for connection to the dwelling’s outside hose bib.

Supply and install main stops on the temporary watermain. Provide one main stop for each service installed.

Provide all maintenance and do all repairs to the temporary water supply system while in use.

Remove complete temporary system and restore and cleanup all disturbed areas including asphalt for roadway crossing areas. All removed materials shall become the property of the Contractor for disposal at the end of the contract.

Note:

The Region will issue letters to property owners prior to the start of installation of the temporary water supply system.

Temporary watermain shall be 100 mm diameter PVC.

Temporary service connection lines shall be 20 mm internal diameter (ID).

In general, all piping for the temporary system shall be laid where it will cause the least obstruction and is least liable to be damaged.

The Region will chlorinate the temporary water supply system complete prior to connection to the existing properties. Samples will be taken by the Region and the results will take at least one week. The Contract Administrator shall notify the Contractor of the results of such testing as soon as reasonably possible. Upon successful test results, the Contract Administrator shall give the Contractor clearance to make the connections to the existing dwellings.

The existing watermain shall not be removed from service until the installed temporary water supply system has been approved, in writing, by the Contract Administrator.

All temporary water systems shall be removed no later than October 30, depending on freezing temperatures.

Safety measures shall be taken by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator, but such provisions shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for the adequacy of protection.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposed, a count shall be made of the number of temporary service connections installed, maintained, and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE: Item 3.30.01 is to be used when decommissioning municipal/residential wells

Item 3.30.01 – Decommission existing well

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)

Include:

Plug and seal existing well according to the Ministry of the Environment, Conservation and Parks (MECP) requirements (Ontario Regulation 903 and 601/88, S.2) by a licensed well driller.

Maintain all records and advisement of the MECP as required.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of existing wells decommissioned.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 3.40.01 – Temporary concrete barrier

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 741
OPSD 911.140

Include:

Supply, place and remove precast concrete barriers as per OPSD 911.140 and Contract Drawings along xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx).

Maintain temporary concrete barriers until adjacent trench is backfilled and restored to a driving surface.

Relocate temporary concrete barriers as required.

Note:

Barriers shall be used as trench protection and delineation of traffic lanes from working area.

The minimum width of adjacent traffic lanes shall be 3.3 metres.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of temporary concrete barriers shall be by length in metres along the centreline of the barrier, from end to end, including temporary end sections installed and removed, up to the maximum length of barriers required to be placed at any one time during the Contract.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the Work.

Costs associated with any required removals and replacements of defective workmanship or materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility at no cost to the Owner.

Item 3.40.04 – Excavate by hydro vacuum

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 206 and 501

SPEC NOTE:

Include the following clause if deemed necessary:
1. This item is provided for use at the direction / approval of the Contract Administrator only. This item is not to be utilized to compensate the Contractor for advance daylighting of known subsurface utilities or other activities required to complete the work. For example, the Contract Administrator may direct the Contractor to daylight a previously unknown subsurface utility that was not identified at all on the Contract Drawings but became apparent after the Contractor’s locates were completed.

2. This item shall not be provisional. Specify the use for this item either by utilizing “Also include Clause .5” or by removing “Also include Clause .5” and adding a new clause to the “Note” subsection.

Also include:

Supply, with operator(s), a truck mounted combo vacuum excavator (hereunto known as a “Hydrovac”) as directed.

Associated labour, equipment, and materials (including water) to complete the work as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Supply, with operator(s), a truck mounted combo vacuum excavator (hereunto known as a “Hydrovac”) as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Associated labour, equipment, and materials (including water) to complete the work as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Excavate test pits, prior to any construction, to determine the exact field location and elevation of the existing telecommunications/gasmain/watermain/sanitary/hydro at station x+xxx. Expose the utility and field measure the location, orientation, depth, and pipe OD.

Excess soil and/or liquid soil generated during hydro excavation activities are required to be managed off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules, as applicable.

Supply, place, backfill and compact excavated site with approved granular materials as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Provide Contract Administrator with signed release form, in accordance with Appendix SGC-G to the Supplementary General Conditions of Contract for off-site disposal of excess materials upon completion of all disposal activities.

Note:

This item to be used only as directed in writing by the Contract Administrator.

Truck shall be supplied with following features and equipment:

Variable and regulated high pressure water pump rated at approximately 204 LPM (54 GPM) at 13,789.5 kPa (2000 psi).

Approximately 9 m3 (12 cu.yd.) debris body.

Approximately 4921 litres (1300 US gallons) capacity water tanks.

Hydraulic boom with large variable degree rotation and reach of 5.8 m (19 feet) minimum.

High pressure handheld operated gun.

Lighting to meet Ministry of Transportation of Ontario (MTO) specifications.

Traffic arrow board mounted on rear of the truck.

Large debris house.

Debris body shall be equipped with a working drain port and valve assembly to drain liquids.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, time shall be recorded and be paid in accordance to the number of hours the Hydro Vacuum Truck and crew was on site completing the work described above. Payment will not include travel time to and from the site. Minimum time of four hours shall be paid for each time the Vacuum Truck is called to site.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the Work.

SPEC NOTE:
Temporary 1.8m high chain link fence appears in the watermain and sanitary sewer sections of the special provisions. Use only one item per contract.

Item 3.40.05 - Temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence

Include:

Supply and install temporary 1.8 m high galvanized chain link fence from station x+xxx to x+xxx on xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) OR as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Maintain fence during construction.

Remove temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence upon completion of construction on xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx.

Perform permanent surface restoration as specified elsewhere, as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence can be obtained from Fast Fence Inc. or Quick Fence Inc. or approved equivalent.

Temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence may be ordered by the Contract Administrator to delineate the working area and to prevent the public from entering the working area. Protection of the public on bridges shall be provided using a more rigid fence or barricade method.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence shall be by length in metres following the contour of the ground.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence shall be made as follows:

60 per cent for supply and erection.

40 per cent for removal.

Item 3.40.06 – Temporary support of existing utility pole coordination

Include:

Coordinate, complete and submit with all applicable fees and insurance applications for any work related to the temporary support of existing utility poles.

All site preparation work to establish a suitable and safe working area for temporary support materials and equipment.

All costs incurred by the Contractor for guy anchor removal and reinstatement.

Site restoration to existing conditions, or better.

Note:

Payment for the temporary support of utility poles shall be made directly to the utility company from the Regional Municipality of Durham.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the coordination of temporarily supporting existing utility pole shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Traffic Signals

Reference:

Construct all traffic signal items and appurtenances according to OPSS.MUNI 106 and the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

Clause 106.07.10.01.02 of OPSS.MUNI 106 is deleted and replaced with the following:

106.07.10.01.02	Proof of Performance Testing and Inspection

Proof of performance testing and inspection of electrical work shall include all testing and inspection of system component installations into the work to verify the physical and operational features of each part of the system components and electrical subsystems.

A Region of Durham traffic representative shall witness the inspection, testing and test results for the following electrical work according to the appropriate specification:

Grounding according to OPSS.MUNI 609.

Installation of underpass luminaires according to OPSS.MUNI 611.

Installation of power supply equipment according to OPSS.MUNI 614.

Installation of roadway luminaires according to OPSS.MUNI 617.

Traffic signal equipment and electrical traffic control devices according to OPSS.MUNI 620.

Contract Drawings for Contract D202x-xx.

Reference Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx.

The Contractor shall provide one copy of the ESA final certificate of inspection to the Contract Administrator.

Qualifications of Electrical Subcontractor

The Contractor shall use an Electrical Subcontractor who has established a successful track record of being able to complete the proposed electrical work using experienced, fully trained, and qualified staff. Personnel directly involved in the performance of electrical work shall have a minimum of five year’s related experience in providing these or similar services. All electrical work shall be performed by or under the direct supervision of a licensed electrician. Further, traffic signal and traffic signal control equipment installation, inspection, and testing shall be performed by or under the direct supervision of a licensed electrician who has successfully completed Levels 1 and 2 of the IMSA Traffic Signal Technician Certification Program. The Contractor shall provide proof of these qualifications at the Pre-Installation Meeting noted below.

Traffic Signal Works Pre-Installation Meeting

A Traffic Signal Works Pre-Installation Meeting will be conducted one week prior to construction of any Traffic Signal works to review standards and material installation, quality control and quality assurance, proposed scheduling, construction methods and any other issues either the Contractor or the Contract Administrator may wish to discuss related to supply and installation of Traffic Signal works.

As a minimum, attendance at the Traffic Signal Works Pre-Installation Meeting will include the Contract Administrator, a representative from the Region of Durham’s Traffic Division, the Contractors’ Site Superintendent, and a representative of the Contractor’s Traffic Signal Subcontractor, if applicable.

Materials Supplied or Salvaged by Owner

Materials to be supplied by the Owner shall be picked up at the Region of Durham’s Traffic Operations Centre, 101 Consumers Drive, Whitby.

The Contractor shall make specific arrangements with the Region’s Stock Keeper 48 hours prior to the materials being ready for pick up. Contact the Stock Keeper at 905-666-8116.

Hours available for material pick up or salvaged material drop off will be between the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 2:30 p.m., Monday through Friday. Access to and from the Traffic Operations Centre yard will not be granted outside of these hours.

The Owner guarantees to the Contractor that all materials packaged and ready for pick up are free of defects. The Contractor is responsible for inspecting all materials ready for pick up for defects prior to loading such materials for transportation.

The Contractor shall provide the appropriate labour and equipment required to pick up and transport the materials. The Contractor shall ensure that all materials are safely secured, connected, or packaged prior to transporting such materials.

The Contractor is solely responsible for materials supplied by the Owner during pick up, transportation, storage, and installation. Materials damaged or missing in any way shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator by the Contractor at his expense.

Item 4.01.02 – Single 50 mm diameter flexible HDPE duct (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.03 – Single 75 mm diameter flexible HDPE duct (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.10 – Two 50 mm diameter flexible HDPE ducts (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.11 – Two 75 mm diameter flexible HDPE ducts (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.13 – Three 50 mm diameter flexible HDPE ducts (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.14 – Three 75 mm diameter flexible HDPE ducts (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.15 – Two flexible HDPE ducts (one 50 mm diameter 7 way and one 75 mm diameter trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.16 – Three flexible HDPE ducts (one 50 mm diameter 7 way and Two 75mm diameter trenchless installation)

Item 4.02.01 – Single 25 mm or 32 mm diameter rigid PVC duct (open cut)

Item 4.02.02 – Single 50 mm diameter rigid PVC duct (open cut)

Item 4.02.03 – Single 75 mm diameter rigid PVC duct (open cut)

Item 4.02.04 – Single 100 mm diameter rigid PVC duct (open cut)

Item 4.02.17 – Two ducts, any diameter rigid PVC (open cut) in same trench

Item 4.02.18 – Three ducts, any diameter rigid PVC (open cut), in same trench

Item 4.02.19 – Four ducts, any diameter rigid PVC (open cut), in same trench

Item 4.02.24 – One 75 mm diameter rigid PVC duct and one 50 mm diameter flexible HDPE 7 way duct (open cut), in same trench

Item 4.02.25 – Two 75 mm diameter rigid PVC ducts and one 50 mm diameter flexible HDPE 7 way duct (open cut), in same trench

Reference:
RMDSD S-200.020, S-400.030, S-400.032, and S-400.033
OPSS.MUNI 603
OPSD 2100.05, 2101.01, 2103.02 ,2103.05, 2103.06, and 2123.01

Clause 603.07.19.02 of OPSS.MUNI 603 is deleted and replaced with the following:

All ducts shall be inspected and tested to ensure that they are constructed as specified in the Contract Documents. All ducts shall be tested to ensure that they are free of debris, water, breakage, or distortion by pulling a mandrel through the ducts. The mandrel shall be solid, round and have a diameter of 6 mm less than the nominal duct diameter. The Contractor shall follow the test procedure outlined by the manufacturer for 7-way multiduct. The Contractor shall give the Contract Administrator 24 hours notice of when this testing will be carried out.

Also include:

Supply and install ducts, couplings, fittings, fish lines, tracer wires, marker tape and other materials. Couplings including microduct couplings shall provide an airtight, watertight, and secure fit in accordance with the manufacturers recommended practice for joining conduit.

Backfill with granular materials at locations below the roadway, shoulders, or driveways. For all other locations, backfill with Select Native Materials.

Supply and install fish lines in all ducts.

Supply and install tracer wire with all traffic signal interconnect ducts. Tracer wire shall be installed outside of the duct(s) and shall be brought into each electrical chamber beside the bell-end. Provide a 1.5 m loop of tracer wire inside each electrical chamber.

Supply and install red marker tape with repeating black lettering “Caution – Buried Electric Line”, or similar message, in all trenches as per OPSS.MUNI 603 and OPSD 2100.05.

Break into existing electrical chambers and install ducts where indicated on the Contract Drawings according to RMDSD S-400.030, S-400.032 or S-400.033 as applicable or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Cap and mark the location of the end of all ducts not terminating in electrical chambers or pole foundations according to OPSS.MUNI 603.

Note:

Rigid ducts shall be heavy wall PVC duct meeting CSA Standard C22.2 Number 211.2-06 (R2011) or latest revision.

Flexible ducts shall meet standards UL 651A; ASTM F2160-10 Schedule 40; NEMA TC 7-2013 for type EPEC-40-HDPE.

50 mm diameter flexible HDPE 7-way duct shall include seven 16 mm outside/12 mm inside diameter multi-cell microducts, HDPE orange oversheath (1.8 mm (0.070 inches)) with two ripcords and 20 AWG copper tracer wire. The conduit must have longitudinal inner ribs and must have a silicone additive inside wall to lower friction and meter markings. Inner walls must have a smoothness to eliminate the need for secondary lubrication while blowing cable. The conduit shall conform to the NEMA TC7, applicable ASTM standards, UL651 and Telcordia Bellcore GRE 3155 and GRE 356. The supplier shall supply microtechnology straight couplers fitting to the size of the supplied microducts.

Fish lines shall be 13 mm (1/2 inch) woven polyester tape (Mule tape) that is a minimum 560 kg in strength, and is free of knots, splices, and defects of any kind.

Tracer wire shall be coated (white), 7 strand, 12 gauge TW75, TWU75 or RW90XLPE rated at minus 40C.

Minimum depth of excavation shall be the greater of 760 mm from original ground or 1200 mm below the centreline of the roadway. The plow method shall not be used.

Measurement for Payment:

Single duct items, measurement shall be made of the actual length, in metres, of single duct installed complete in place.

Where item calls for multiple ducts, measurement shall be made of the actual length, in metres, of duct banks installed complete in place including specified number of ducts. No additional payment shall be made for the second, third and successive ducts installed in the same trench.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

If the Contractor chooses to substitute flexible ducts with rigid ducts, payment for those rigid ducts shall be at the unit price bid for the tender item Flexible Ducts.

When drilling and blasting are required as a part of the work, progress payment shall be made according to OPSS.MUNI 206.

The work of providing clearance for required Utility crossing shall be administered as Change in the Work.

Item 4.02.23 – Extra over duct - unshrinkable backfill

Reference:
RMDCS Section 02315

Include:

Supply and place unshrinkable fill where specified on the Contract Drawings and according to RMDCS Section 02315.

Dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules

Protect open trench until unshrinkable fill has cured sufficiently to place overlying materials.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of unshrinkable fill shall be by volume, in cubic metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.03.01 – 2 cond. number 10 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.02 – 2 cond. number 8 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.07 – 2 cond. number 14/19t sh AWG, traffic signal cable, in duct

Item 4.03.08 – 4 cond. number 14 AWG, traffic signal cable, in duct

Item 4.03.09 – 7 cond. number 14 AWG, traffic signal cable, in duct

Item 4.03.10 – 12 cond. number 14 AWG, traffic signal cable, in duct

Item 4.03.11 – 19 cond. number 14 AWG, traffic signal cable, in duct

Item 4.03.12 – 4 cond. number 18 AWG, home-run (canoga) cable, in duct

Item 4.03.13 – 3 cond. number 20 AWG, opticom cable, in duct

Item 4.03.14 – 3 pair number 22 AWG, communication cable, in duct

Item 4.03.15 – 12 pair number 22 AWG, telephone cable, in duct

Item 4.03.16 – Co-axial cable, in duct

Item 4.03.17 – 3 cond. number 14 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.18 – 4 pair number 23 AWG, UTP CAT6 cable, in duct

Item 4.03.23 – 3-1 cond. number 10 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.24 – 3-1 cond. number 8 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.25 – 3-1 cond. number 6 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.26 – 3-1 cond. number 2 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.27 – 2-1 cond. number 10 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.28 – 2-1 cond. number 8 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.29 – 2-1 cond. number 6 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.40 – 6 cond. 1PR number 20, 2PR number 22 AWG smartsensor cable, in duct

Item 4.03.41 – 9 mm diameter grade 160 steel messenger cable, aerial (SPEC NOTE: Not to be used for temp signal builds)

Item 4.03.42 – Duplex service drop cables, aerial

Item 4.03.43 – Triplex service drop cables, aerial

Item 4.03.70 – Pull back and reinstall existing cable, in duct

Reference:
RMDSD S-411.030 and S-411.040
OPSS.MUNI 604 and 2409
OPSD 2242.02, 2245.01, 2245.02, and 2545.01

Also include:

Supply and install cables, regardless of type, gauge, and number of conductors.

Supply and install all hardware, fittings, connectors, wire markers, tape, splices, solder, terminations, fish lines, coils, slack cable, protection, barriers, and mechanical supports.

Mark all traffic signal cables at both ends with bands of coloured vinyl electrical tape to identify cable groups as specified in RMDSD S-411.030 and S-411.040 or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Removal and reinstallation of cables, regardless of type, AWG, and number of conductors.

Note:

PVC sleeve wire markers shall identify all traffic signal cables, extra-low voltage cables and interconnect cables as shown on the Contract Drawings.

CAT6 cable shall be 4-Pair number 23 AWG STP, solid copper core, outdoor direct burial, supplied by Provo Limited, Catalogue number 8824404L6-21, Jacket colour: black, or reviewed equivalent.

SmartSensor cable shall be 6 Conductor number 20/22 AWG, supplied by Wavetronix., Catalogue number SS-705 complete with 8-pin female connectors, supplied by Wavetronix, Catalogue number SS-709. The 6 conductor SmartSensor home-run cables between the traffic controller cabinet and the designated pole and spliced to the detector wiring harness at the pole handhole, base of the pole using 22-18 AWG power phase red polyolefin sealed solder butt splice connectors supplied by Fastenal, reference Catalogue number 07009714.

Three Conductor number 14 AWG, 41x30 Stranded cable shall be stranded copper, outdoor direct burial, water resistant, with colour code black/white/green supplied by Carol Brand, Model 01360 type SJ00W or Provo SKU: SJOOW314 or equivalents as approved by Contract Administrator.

Coaxial cable shall be RG-8 type model 7810a manufactured by Belden Incorporated.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for cable shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct and aerial cable; from centre to centre of poles, pole footings, electrical chambers, junction boxes, sign footings, and traffic signal controller cabinet pads; and to the face of bridge structures, retaining walls, and substation pads.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.04.02 – Ground electrode, ground rod

Reference:
RMDSD S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 609
Subsection 609.05.01 of OPSS.MUNI 609 is amended by the deletion of the requirement for copper cladding.

Also include:

Provide thermite weld connections to ground wire.

Place 600 mm lengths of 100 mm diameter duct, painted red, over each ground rod connection prior to backfilling. Remove duct sleeves and backfill over the ground rods after inspection is complete.

Note:

Ground rod connections shall remain exposed for inspection by the Electrical Safety Authority and the Contract Administrator prior to backfilling.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of ground electrode, ground rods installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.04.03 – Ground electrode, ground plate

Reference:
RMDSD S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 609

Also include:

Excavate by mechanical device, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means and dispose of excess or unsuitable materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Backfill with granular materials.

Provide thermite weld connections to ground wire.

Place 600 mm lengths of 100 mm diameter duct, painted red, over each ground plate connection prior to backfilling. Remove duct sleeves and backfill over the ground plates after inspection is complete.

Note:

Ground plate connections shall remain exposed for inspection by the Electrical Safety Authority and the Contract Administrator prior to backfilling.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of ground electrode, ground plates installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.04.04 – Number 6 AWG green insulated ground cable, in duct

Item 4.04.05 – Number 12 AWG green insulated ground cable, in duct

Reference:
RMDSD S-411.020
339OPSS.MUNI 609

Also include:

Supply and installation of ground wire complete with all hardware.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for green insulated ground cable in duct shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct from centre to centre of poles, pole footings, electrical chambers, or enclosures; sign footings; controller cabinet pads, and ground electrodes; or the face of bridge structures, retaining walls, and substation pads.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.04.06 – Number 2/0 AWG bare copper ground cable, direct buried

Item 4.04.07 – Number 6 AWG bare copper ground cable, direct buried

Reference:
RMDSD S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 609

Also include:

Excavation and disposal of excess or unsuitable materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and installation of ground wire complete with all hardware.

Backfill and compaction of granular materials to meet 100 per cent Standard Proctor Density.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for direct buried bare copper ground cable shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the trench from centre to centre of poles, pole footings, electrical chambers, or enclosures; sign footings; controller cabinet pads, and ground electrodes; or the face of bridge structures, retaining walls, and substation pads.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.05.01 – Steel pole, base mounted

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 615 and 620
OPSD 2415.010 or 2415.011

Include:

Supply and installation of base mounted steel poles.

Note:

Steel poles shall be xx m long, (sectional) steel octagonal/round poles.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of base mounted steel poles supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.05.02 – Wooden pole, direct buried in earth

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 501, 615 and 620
OPSD 2210.020 and 2238.01

Also include:

Supply and installation of direct buried wooden poles.

Backfill with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Note:

Wooden poles shall be Class xx, xx m long.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of wooden poles direct buried in earth supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.05.03 – Concrete pole, direct buried in earth

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 501, 615, and 620
OPSD 2225.010

Also include:

Supply and installation of direct buried concrete poles.

Backfill excavation above concrete encasement with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Note:

Concrete poles shall be Class xx, xx m long.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete poles buried in the earth supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.05.09 – 1.5 m pedestrian push button post, base mounted

Item 4.05.10 – 3.7 m steel pole, base mounted

Item 4.05.11 – 6.1 m standard duty steel pole, base mounted

Item 4.05.12 – 6.1 m heavy-duty steel pole, base mounted

Item 4.05.14 – 5.5 m sectional steel pole, direct buried

Item 4.05.15 – 7.3 m heavy-duty steel pole, base mounted

Item 4.05.16 – 9.1 m heavy-duty steel pole, base mounted

Item 4.05.17 – 10.7 m heavy-duty steel pole, base mounted

Item 4.05.18 – Guy anchor

Item 4.05.19 – Guy strut

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.011, S-410.020, S-410.021, and S-410.040
OPSS.MUNI 615, 501, and 2453 are only used for Item 4.05.14
OPSD 2215.03, 2220.01, 2228.010, 2232.010, 2235.010, 2428.01, and 2558.00

Also include:

Supply and installation of 1.5m round aluminum pedestrian push button poles.

Supply and installation of octagonal steel poles.

Supply and installation of guy anchors.

Supply and installation of guy struts.

Supply and installation of round sectional steel direct buried poles. Backfill with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Note:

Aluminum Pedestrian Button Pole

The aluminum traffic pole shaft shall be constructed of a minimum 156 mm thick aluminum.

The shaft of the aluminum traffic pole shall be straight and round with an outside diameter of 127 mm and a height of 1.5 m.

The base plate bolt circle diameter shall be 190 mm.

The aluminum traffic pole shall be constructed with a handhole 65 mm x 130 mm in size, 450 mm from the bottom of the base to the center of the handhole. It shall be complete with cover and ground lug.

The top of the aluminum traffic pole shall be welded closed with an aluminum cover.

Octagonal Steel Traffic Pole

The information provided below is applicable to both light and heavy-duty octagonal steel traffic poles. The two types of octagonal steel traffic poles are differentiated by the size of the taper where the steel traffic pole meets the base plate. The taper of the heavy-duty steel traffic pole is the larger of the two types.

The steel traffic pole shaft and base plate shall be constructed of Low Silicon Steel. All steel used in the production shall be according to CSA G40.21, grade 300 W, for shafts and 300 WT, for base plates.

The standard finish shall be hot dip galvanize and shall conform to ASTM A 123 or the CSA specification Number G164-M92 or subsequent revisions thereof.

The welding shall conform to the specifications of CSA Number W47.1-92, and Number W59-M1989 approved as amended from time to time.

Bolt holes in pole base plates shall be elliptical in construction.

All steel traffic poles shall be constructed with a 100 mm x 300 mm (4 inches x 12 inches) handhole and cover with gasket hardware and frame. The handhole shall be located 460 mm (18 inches) above the base plate and incorporate a 6 mm (1/4 inch) national coarse ground stud on the inside of the handhole.

All steel traffic poles shall come equipped with a top cap complete with bolt assembly - not welded.

Each pole shall have the following identification markings located approximately 100 mm above the top of the handhole:

Manufacturer's name or trade mark.

Length.

Gauge of steel.

Bolt circle diameter.

Date of manufacture (e.g., yyyy-mm-dd).

These markings shall be on a corrosion-resistant metal plate securely attached to the surface of the pole.

The base plate, bolt circle and shaft dimensions shall be as follows for steel traffic pole heights as shown:

Steel Traffic Pole	Height	Base Plate	Bolt Circle Elliptical	Shaft
Standard	3.0 m	13 mm x 253 mm x 253 mm	242 mm	11 GA x 140 mm x 87 mm
Standard	3.7 m	13 mm x 253 mm x 253 mm	242 mm	11 GA x 149 mm x 87 mm
Standard	4.6 m	13 mm x 253 mm x 253 mm	242 mm	11 GA x 148 mm x 87 mm
Standard	6.1 m	15 mm x 395 mm x 395 mm	395 mm	11 GA x 173 mm x 100 mm
Heavy-Duty	6.1 m	25 mm x 395 mm x 395 mm	395 mm	11 GA x 248 mm x 146 mm
Heavy-Duty	7.3 m	25 mm x 395 mm x 395 mm	395 mm	11 GA x 248 mm x 125 mm
Heavy-Duty	9.1 m	25 mm x 395 mm x 395 mm	395 mm	11 GA x 248 mm x 125 mm
Heavy-Duty	10.7 m	25 mm x 395 mm x 395 mm	395 mm	11 GA x 248 mm x 125 mm

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of base mounted pedestrian push button posts supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of base mounted steel poles supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of direct buried sectional steel poles supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of guy anchors supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of guy struts supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.06.01 – 460 mm diameter type I concrete footing for steel poles

Item 4.06.02 – 610 mm diameter type II concrete footing for steel poles

Item 4.06.03 – 760 mm diameter type III concrete footing for steel poles

Reference:
RMDSD S-400.010
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 616

Also include:

Lay out proposed concrete footing locations and verify with the Contract Administrator prior to excavation.

Backfill with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete footings for steel poles installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.06.06 – Frangible bases

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 615
OPSD 2215.03 and 2428.01

Also include:

Supply and installation of frangible bases.

Note:

Frangible bases to be grooved coupler type manufactured by Manitoba Safe-T-Base Model 1600 P x 1-1/4 meeting the requirements of OPSD 2428.01 or an approved equivalent as per MTO DSM List.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of frangible bases supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.06.07 – Concrete footing for traffic controller/UPS cabinet

Reference:
RMDSD S-400.020
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 616

Also include:

Supply and install formed-in-place concrete base for traffic controller cabinet including ducts.

Backfill with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete footings for traffic controller cabinets installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.06.08 – Concrete footing for pedestal supply control cabinet

Reference:
RMDSD S-400.011
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 616

Also include:

Lay out proposed concrete footing locations and verify with the Contract Administrator prior to excavation.

Backfill with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete footings for pedestal supply control cabinets installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.06.09 – 300 mm diameter concrete footing for pedestrian push button poles

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 616
OPSD 2200.041

Also include:

Lay out proposed concrete footing locations and verify with the Contract Administrator prior to excavation.

Backfill with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of 300 mm diameter concrete footings for pedestrian push button poles installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE: Use roadway illumination items in Traffic Signal section only when luminaire/arm is attached to Traffic Signal pole and is shown on the Traffic Signal Contract Drawings.

Item 4.07.07 – Roadway lighting luminaire

Item 4.07.08 – Roadway illumination elliptical tapered aluminum arm bracket

Item 4.07.20 – Number 12 AWG riser wires and accessories

Item 4.07.21 – Pole fuse holder assemblies

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.020
OPSS MUNI 617
OPSD 2250.01, 2255.020, and 2420.01

Also include:

Supply and install luminaires, arm brackets, riser wires, and all other hardware.

Supply and install riser wires inside the poles and signal arm and connect to the external wiring circuit in the underground conduit, by wire connectors in pole handholes.

Supply and install fuse holders inside traffic signal poles.

Note:

Road lighting luminaires shall be xx V operated, xx W, IES distribution type xx and shall meet the following:

IES photometric file number: xx.

Luminaire manufacturer: xx or reviewed equivalent.

Catalogue number: xx or reviewed equivalent.

Provide shop drawings for review and approved prior to ordering of luminaires.

Arm brackets shall be xx m long with xx m rise, elliptical tapered aluminum mast arms as manufactured by xx catalogue number xx or reviewed equivalent.

Riser wires shall be number 12 AWG RW90.

Fuse holders shall be in-line type suitable for use with number 12 AWG conductors. Ferraz Shawmut type FEB BA with one 10 amp, 600 V rated Ferraz Shawmut type ATM fuse, or Amerace 65 waterproof fused connector kits. In-line fuse holders and fuses shall not be used where luminaires are to be installed on traffic signal poles.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of LED roadway luminaires supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of roadway illumination elliptical tapered aluminum arm brackets supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of number 12 AWG riser wires and accessories supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pole fuse holder assemblies supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.09.01 – Electrical handhole 450 mm diameter non-concrete

Reference:
RMDSD S-300.070, S-300.090, and S-400.030
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 602
OPSD 2112.02 and 2118.02

Subsection 602.05.08 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is amended by the addition of the following:

Handhole frame and cover assemblies shall be 460 mm diameter and shall be according to OPSD 2112.02.

Clause 602.07.11.02 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is deleted and replaced with the following:

602.07.11.02	Electrical Handholes

Handholes shall be installed according to RMDSD S-400.030.

Electrical handholes shall be non-concrete materials according to the appropriate Region of Durham standard drawing.

Electrical handholes shall be installed plumb, true to alignment and grade, and firmly bedded on the drainage pocket backfill.

Subsection 602.07.12 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is amended by the addition of the following:

During installation, the duct entry holes shall be oriented in the required direction. Duct entry holes shall be drilled with a hole saw no more than 6 mm larger than the outside diameter of the entering duct or fitting. Except as shown otherwise on the applicable Region of Durham standard drawing, holes shall be oriented so that all ducts enter the handhole at the same elevation, level, and aligned to the centre of the handhole. Holes shall not be drilled closer than 50 mm apart.

Handholes installed with duct entry holes made larger than specified or made using a device other than a hole saw shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Patching of oversized or irregular shaped duct entry holes shall not be permitted.

During installation, the handhole shall be adjusted to facilitate the required elevation of the frame and cover as specified in the Contract Documents.

The second paragraph of Subsection 602.07.13 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Metal handhole frames shall be connected to the system ground wire using number 6 AWG copper wire and suitable ground lugs. number 6 AWG ground wire shall be connected between the frame or the system ground wire and the cover using suitable ground lugs with at least 1.5 m of wire left loose for cover removal.

Subsection 602.07.16 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is amended by the addition of the following:

Handhole frame and cover assemblies shall be adjusted to the required cross-fall and connected to the handhole pipe material using three 9 mm stainless steel bolts. The handhole pipe shall be notched sufficiently at cover mounting bolts to allow the frame to sit flush onto the top of the handhole pipe and to allow dirt and debris to easily fall through cover mounting bolt holes.

Handhole covers shall be fastened securely to the frame using the 19 mm standard thread stainless steel bolts.

Also include:

Excavate using auger, backhoe, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules

Supply and install all handhole materials including frame and cover assemblies and 450 mm diameter PVC or HDPE pipe all according to RMDSD S-400.030.

Backfill handholes installed within medians, shoulders or in sidewalks using Granular B, Type I (Modified) and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Backfill handholes installed in grassed areas using Select Native Materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of 450 mm diameter non-concrete electrical handholes supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.09.02 – Electrical handhole 460 mm diameter precast concrete

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 602
OPSD 2112.02, 2117.02, 2118.020, and 2123.03

Also include:

Excavate using auger, backhoe, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347 and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install precast concrete electrical handhole all handhole materials.

Backfill handholes installed within medians, shoulders or in sidewalks using Granular B, Type I (Modified) and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Backfill handholes installed in grassed areas using Select Native Materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement of Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of 460 mm diameter precast concrete electrical handholes supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.09.03 – Adjustment of existing electrical handhole

Reference:
RMDSD S-400.031
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 602

Also include:

Adjust existing PVC or HDPE handhole and reconnect rim and lid assembly according to RMDSD S 400.031.

Backfill handholes installed within medians, shoulders or in sidewalks using Granular B, Type I (Modified) and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Backfill handholes installed in grassed areas using Select Native Materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of existing handholes adjusted.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.09.04 – Electrical handhole 370 mm diameter non-concrete

Reference:
RMDSD S-300.070, S-300.090, and S-400.032
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 602
OPSD 2118.02

Subsection 602.07.11 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is amended by the addition of the following:

602.07.11.03 Electrical Handholes

Handholes shall be prefabricated units.

Handholes shall be installed plumb, true to alignment and grade and firmly bedded on the drainage pocket backfill.

Duct entry shall be made through the bottom of handholes using appropriate diameter sweep bends for the entering ducts. Ducts shall be oriented to enter in the centre of the handhole.

During installation, the handhole box shall be adjusted to the required elevation as specified in the Contract Documents.

Cover shall be fastened securely using the hardware supplied with the handhole.

Also include:

Excavate using auger, backhoe, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install electrical handhole.

Backfill handholes installed within medians, shoulders or in sidewalks using Granular B, Type I (Modified) and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Backfill handholes installed in grassed areas using Select Native Materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Note:

Electrical handhole shall be West Coast Engineering Limited small round plastic underground electrical junction box with open bottom, 372 mm top diameter x 508 mm bottom diameter x 385 mm deep and plastic lid. Reference catalogue numbers: 25020 Box and 25400 Lid or an equivalent as approved by Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purpose, a count shall be made of the number of 370 mm diameter non-concrete electrical handholes supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.09.06 – Electrical handhole, rectangular non-concrete, type II

Item 4.09.07 – Electrical handhole, rectangular non-concrete, type III

Reference:
RMDSD S-400.033
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 602
OPSD 2118.02

Section 602.07.11 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is amended by the addition of the following subsections:

602.07.11.05 Electrical Handholes

Electrical handholes shall be oriented such that the ducts or duct bank entries shall have an angle of 90 degrees between the handhole wall and the axis of the ducts or duct bank. Electrical handholes shall be installed plumb, true to alignment and grade and firmly bedded on the drainage pocket backfill.

During installation, the duct entry holes shall be oriented in the required direction. Duct entry holes shall be drilled with a diamond tipped masonry hole saw no more than 6 mm larger than the outside diameter of the entering duct or fitting and shall be drilled no closer than 50 mm apart. Holes shall be oriented so that the ducts entering the electrical handhole are at the same elevation both vertically and horizontally perpendicular to the handhole wall.

Electrical handholes installed with duct entry holes made larger than specified or made using a device other than a hole saw shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Patching of oversized or irregular shaped duct entry holes shall not be permitted.

Electrical handholes shall be reinforced internally prior to backfilling. Backfill according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

During installation, the electrical handhole shall be adjusted to the required elevation as specified in the Contract Documents.

Subsection 602.07.16 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Covers shall be fastened securely using the hardware supplied with the handhole.

Also include:

Excavate using auger, backhoe, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install electrical handhole complete with grade-adjustable extension and cover, ducts, fittings, and all other associated hardware.

Backfill handholes installed within medians, shoulders or in sidewalks using Granular B, Type I (Modified) and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Backfill handholes installed in grassed areas using Select Native Materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Note:

Electrical handholes shall be Quazite precast polymer concrete PG style with open bottom, or reviewed equivalent, 1261 mm long x 816 mm wide x 457 mm deep, complete with a grade-adjustable extension and heavy-duty two-piece cover with “TRAFFIC” logo and shall have a load rating of TIER 15 (15,000 lbs vertical). Reference catalogue numbers: PG3048BA18, PG3048EA11, or PG3048HS044.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of non-concrete rectangular electrical handholes supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.09.08 – Electrical handhole 675 mm diameter precast concrete

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 602
OPSD 401.010, 704.010, 2112.030, 2117.020, 2118.020, 2123.01, and 2123.030

Also include:

Excavate using auger, backhoe, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means and dispose of excess or unsuitable materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install ducts, fittings, hardware, and granular materials.

Supply and install precast concrete electrical handhole, two 50 mm precast concrete adjustment units, frame, and Type A closed cover.

Fill duct entry holes with grout according to OPSD 2123.01 (entry of direct buried ducts in electrical maintenance holes) in place of expandable foam as outlined in OPSD 2123.03 (entry of direct buried and encased ducts in electrical hand holes).

Backfill handholes installed within medians, shoulders or in sidewalks using Granular B, Type I (Modified) and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Backfill handholes installed in grassed areas using Select Native Materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of 675 mm diameter precast concrete electrical handholes supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.10.04 – Traffic sign on pole (installation only)

Item 4.10.05 – Traffic sign on mast arm complete with bracket

Item 4.10.06 – Remove, salvage, and reinstall signs on signal and lighting poles or mast arm

Item 4.10.07 – Mast arm street name sign complete with bracket

Item 4.10.08 – Large traffic sign on mast arm complete with dual brackets

Item 4.10.09 – Remove, salvage, and reinstall large traffic sign on mast arm complete with dual brackets

Item 4.10.14 – Relocate mast arm street name sign complete with bracket

Item 4.10.15 – Traffic sign on wooden post

Reference:
RMDSD S-300.070, S-300.080, S-300.090, S-410.011, S-410.040, and S-410.070
OPSD 2526.01

Include:

Pick up Owner-supplied signs at Region’s Traffic Operations Centre at 101 Consumers Drive, Whitby and transport to site.

Install Owner-supplied traffic signs and mast arm street name signs at locations shown on the Contract Drawings. Coordinate location and sign type with the Contract Administrator prior to installation.

Supply and install mast arm sign brackets for traffic and mast arm street name signs, wooden posts, hardware and fittings.

Remove, salvage, store and reinstall mast arm street name signs complete with new brackets.

Remove, salvage, store and reinstall existing traffic sign on new or existing traffic signal or street lighting pole complete with new brackets.

Excavation by auger, backhoe, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means, disposal of excess or unsuitable materials and permanent surface restoration.

Backfill and compaction of granular materials.

Installation of temporary Wb-3 “New” Starburst sign above Wb-102 Traffic Signal Ahead sign on a 4x4 wooden post are to be considered a single installation as they share one 4x4 wood post.

Note:

Mast arm sign brackets shall be Sentinel Pole and Traffic Equipment Ltd. Sign Mounting Bracket Assembly, bracket to be sized for sign, part numbers SMBA-18, SMBA-24, SMBA-36, or an equivalent as approved by Contract Administrator.

Mast arm street name sign brackets shall be Sentinel Pole and Traffic Equipment Ltd. Horizontal Versa-Brac Sign Assembly Clamp Mount Type, part number VSMB-C-72 or an equivalent as approved by Contract Administrator.

Owner shall supply all traffic signs and mast arm street name signs.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of new signs installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of existing signs removed, salvaged, and reinstalled.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.11.03 – Power supply control cabinet on steel pole

Item 4.11.04 – Power supply control cabinet on wooden pole

Item 4.11.06 – Power supply control cabinet on concrete pole

Item 4.11.07 – Meter base

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.090, S-410.091, S-410.092, S-410.093, and S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 614

Also include:

Supply and install supply control cabinet assembly.

Supply and install meter base (where specified), vertical runs of conduit and cables, connections and fittings, adapters and brackets, protective moulding, vertical runs of ground wire and all connections, excluding ground wire and ground rods or ground plates beyond the edge of poles.

All costs for Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) inspection.

Note:

Supply control cabinet shell be Square D load center model CQO18M100RB60 with four 15 amp single pole breakers model QO115 and a secondary surge suppressor model QO2175SB, or an equivalent assembly as approved by the Contract Administrator.

Conduit and fittings for the installation of pole mounted equipment shall be rigid PVC meeting the requirements of CSA C22.2 Number 211.2 below the cabinet and aluminum above the cabinet as per referenced RMDSD Standard Drawings.

Meter Base must be a CSA approved 120/240 V 200 amp minimum rated, 4 jaw S-Base outdoor overhead type meter base. Confirm meter manufacturer and model meets the current version with the appropriate Hydro Authority prior to installation.

Measurement of Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pole mounted power supply control cabinets supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of meter bases supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.11.05 – Pedestal supply control cabinet, base mounted

Reference:
RMDSD S-411.010 and S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 614

Also include:

Supply and install pedestal supply control cabinet assembly.

Supply and install pedestal supply control cabinet assembly with integrated metre base.

Supply and install vertical runs of conduit and cables, conduit and cables, connections and fittings, adapters and brackets, protective moulding, ground wire and all connections, excluding ground wire and ground rods or ground plates beyond the edge of the pedestal footing.

Meter Base must be a CSA approved 120/240 V 200 amp minimum rated, 4 jaw S-Base outdoor overhead type meter base. Confirm meter manufacturer and model meets the current version with the appropriate Hydro Authority prior to installation.

All costs for Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) inspection.

Note:

Supply control cabinet assembly shall be model TCL60-8-T supplied by Sentinel Pole and Traffic Equipment Limited or an equivalent as approved by Contract Administrator.

Supply control cabinet assembly with integrated metre base shall be model MTL60-8 supplied by Sentinel Pole and Traffic Equipment Limited or an equivalent as approved by Contract Administrator.

Supply control cabinet shall include four 15 amp single pole breakers model QO115 and a secondary surge suppressor model QO2175SB.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of base mounted pedestal supply control cabinets supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.12.01 – Detector loop

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 620
OPSD 2520.01, 2520.02, and 2530.01

Also include:

Apply treatment for crossing major pavement cracks, butt or expansion joints, pavement irregularities or transition areas according to OPSD 2520.01 and OPSD 2520.02. Alternatively, detector loop shall be re-marked into separate loops at the discretion of the Contract Administrator.

Saw cut detector loop according to OPSD 2520.01 and OPSD 2520.02.

Install detector loop with the size, winding direction, configuration, number of turns, and inductance value as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Provide identification numbers for each loop cable and extra low voltage cable clearly indicated on vinyl sleeve wire markers in the splice point and in the controller cabinet as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Note:

Schedule work such that detector loops are installed in the binder course asphalt.

Detector loop layout shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings and shall be verified by the Contract Administrator prior to saw cutting.

Detector loop cable shall be according to IMSA Cable Specification 51-5 or number 14 AWG type RWU90 (-40°C) stranded copper wire.

Sealing compound shall be Pro Seal 6006 or reviewed equivalent cold pumped type or hot poured type. NOTE: Hot poured sealing compound shall not be used when loops are installed in the binder course asphalt.

Insulated resin splice closures shall be Klik-it II, Raychem or reviewed equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of detector loops installed regardless of the size or type of loop.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE: Item 4.12.02 shall only be used for connection of existing loops

Item 4.12.02 – Loop cable splice kit

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 620

Also include:

Supply and install insulated resin splice closures shall be Klik-it II, Raychem, or reviewed equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of loop cable splice kits supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.12.04 – Pedestrian/cyclist push button

Item 4.12.05 – Accessible pedestrian push button

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.011
OPSS.MUNI 620
OPSD 2558.000

Also include:

Supply and installation of all pedestrian/cyclist accessible pedestrian push button types, wiring, and mounting hardware.

Install Owner-supplied Ra-12 pedestrian, Ra-14 cyclist, and audible only push button signs.

Pick up Owner-supplied signs at Region’s Traffic Operations Centre at 101 Consumers Drive, Whitby, and transport to site.

Note:

Accessible Pedestrian push button to be to be Polara iNS2 2 Wire Opt “B” (Yellow) part number PBISAAB, and 2 Wire ICCU-S2 complete with Interconnect Brd, A and C cable part number CACCUS2A or an approved equivalent as per the MTO DSM List.

Polara Bulldog Non-Latching buttons colour yellow (model BDLM2-Y) or its equivalent and mounted using Bulldog Pole Mounts colour yellow (model BDPM-Y) or an equivalent as approved by the Contract Administrator or an equivalent as approved by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pedestrian/cyclist push buttons installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of accessible pedestrian push buttons installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.12.06 – Traffic signal pre-emption equipment

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.060
OPSS.MUNI 620

Also include:

Supply and installation of optical pre-emption detector.

Note:

Optical pre-emption detector to be Global Traffic Technologies Opticom Infrared System Detector Model 721. The Opticom Discriminator will be supplied by the Owner as part of the Owner supplied Traffic Controller Cabinet.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of optical pre-emption detector systems supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.12.15 – CCTV camera

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 620

Also include:

Supply and installation of CCTV camera and mounting bracket.

Note:

CCTV camera to be Axis Communications Axis Q6074-E 60 hertz (Hz) PTZ Dome Network Camera part number 01974-004 or an equivalent as approved by Contract Administrator.

Mounting bracket to be Axis Communications Axis T91L61 part number 5801-721 or an equivalent as approved by Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of CCTV cameras supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work including all cabling and equipment required to transmit, receive, and process video signals as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Item 4.12.16 – Transit signal priority antenna

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 620

Also include:

Supply and installation of Transit Signal Priority Antenna on designated pole shown on the contract drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Supply and installation of RG-8 coaxial cable connectors for connections at the pole mounted Transit Signal Priority Antenna and priority detector card located in the traffic controller cabinet.

Note:

Transit Signal Priority Antenna to be 18 inch omni-directional UHF antenna with N type connector manufactured by Emtrac Systems.

Antenna pole mount to be Astro Mini-Brac Clamp type Model AB-0121.

Coaxial cable connector for connection at the pole mounted antenna shall be RFI Hex/Knurl Combo N male type model RFN-1006-I-WB manufactured by RF Industries.

Coaxial cable connector for connection at the priority detector card shall be BNC type model CON-12-400 manufactured by Terrawave Solutions.

Coaxial cable connectors shall be installed using an Amphenol CTL-3 crimping tool or equivalent crimping tool with die cavity dimensions including 2.5 mm (0.1 inch) and 10.9mm (0.429 inch)

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of Transit Signal Priority Antenna supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.12.17 – Relocate microwave detector

Item 4.12.18 – Relocate video detection camera

Item 4.12.19 – Relocate pedestrian push button

Item 4.12.20 – Relocate accessible pedestrian push button

Item 4.12.21 – Relocate optical pre-emption detector

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 620

Also include:

Relocation of existing equipment as per the Contract Drawings.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of relocated microwave detectors.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of relocated video detection cameras.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of relocated pedestrian push buttons.

For measurement purpose, a count shall be made of the number of relocated accessible pedestrian push buttons.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of relocated optical pre-emption detectors.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.12.25 – LTE cellular antenna

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 620

Also include:

Supply and installation of LTE (Long Term Evolution) cellular antenna and fasteners as shown the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

The LTE antenna must include a minimum of one LTE cellular antenna and one Glonass Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna with a SMA connector interface for each connection.

The LTE antenna must attach to an outdoor cabinet using a threaded bolt and nut and include a weather tight gasket.

The LTE cellular antenna to be Airgain M2MAX CCG, manufacturer’s part number AP-M2M2-CCG-Q-S222-BL-6 or approved equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of LTE cellular antennas supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.12.26 – LTE cellular modem

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 620

Also include:

Supply and installation of LTE (Long Term Evolution) cellular modem and mounting hardware as shown the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

The modem must be rated for outdoor use as they will be installed in outdoor NEMA enclosures.

The modem must have a minimum of three ethernet ports, one SMA LTE ports and one SMA GPS port.

The modem to be Microhard, BulletPlus-NA2, manufacturer’s number BulletPlusNA2 or approved equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of LTE cellular antennas supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.12.27 – Non-intrusive detector, local intersection

Item 4.12.28 – Non-intrusive detector, long distance system

Item 4.12.29 – Non-intrusive cabinet interface device, four channel

Item 4.12.30 – Non-intrusive cabinet interface device, six channel

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 620

Also include:

Supply and installation of non-intrusive equipment, wiring, and mounting hardware.

Setup and configure detection system components using SmartSensor Manager Matrix and SmartSensor Manager Advance Software.

Note:

Non-intrusive detectors shall be Wavetronix SmartSensor Matrix (part number SS-225) for local intersection detection and Wavetronix SmartSensor Advance (part number SS-200V) for long distance system detection complete with wiring harnesses and connectors and include SmartSensor mounts (part number SS-611) and SmartSensor cable junction boxes (part number SS-710) or equivalent as approved by the Contract Administrator.

Non-intrusive cabinet interface devices shall include the four channel Click 650 (part number CLK650) and six channel Click 656 (part number CLK656) complete with surge protection, RS232, SDLC data cable and ethernet or equivalent as approved by the Contract Administrator.

SmartSensor home-run cabling and 8-pin female connectors shall be supplied and installed under Item 4.03.40.

Video Detection Systems will not be accepted as an equivalent for this contract.

SPEC NOTE: SmartSensor cable junction box used where applicable, overhead wiring to wooden poles, where possible have wiring harnesses dropped to pole handhole.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of non-intrusive detectors supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of non-intrusive cabinet interface devices supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.13.01 – Traffic signal head, three section, complete with backboard

Item 4.13.02 – Traffic signal head, four section, complete with backboard

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDSD S-410.020, S-410.021, S-410.022, S-410.023, S-410.040, S-410.050, and S-410.055
OPSS.MUNI 620
OPSD 2524.010 and 2545.01

Also include:

Supply and installation of traffic signal heads.

Supply and installation of seven conductor runner cable (in place of riser cable) between the traffic signal heads and the pole handholes or the pole-mounted PVC junction boxes.

Supply and installation of all wiring connectors, pole-mounted conduit and fittings, PVC junction boxes, fittings, hardware, and accessories.

Note:

Traffic signal heads shall be CSA factory approved and include LED optical units, signal housings, tunnel visors, and backboards.

All LED lenses must meet Regulation 626 of the HTA, OTM Book 12 and be CSA approved.

Signal housings sections shall be one-piece moulded polycarbonate and have ribbing to ensure sufficient strength and shall be designed to withstand maximum wind loading as per ITE Publication Number ST-017A-1997. An aluminum reinforcing plate shall be installed in the top section of the signal housing with sufficient fastening points to ensure adequate strength. The top section of the signal housing shall have moulded in serration around a 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) NPT. opening such that the signal heads are capable of being rotated about their vertical axis in increments of five degrees over a full 360 degrees of rotation. Individual signal housings shall be self aligning when installed together and shall be attached in such a manner that vibration will not cause them to separate, however, can be separated by means of simple tools.

Signal housing doors shall have inserts and separate screws for visor and lens attachments. Optical units shall be attached to the housing door using four stainless steel or aluminum lens clips and four 12.7 mm (½ inch) x 10 Robertson drive stainless steel screws. These clips and screws shall provide sufficient tension to ensure the lens gasket is sufficiently compressed to prohibit the entry of dust, moisture, and road film to the optical unit. The clips and screws holding the lens should be such that the lens can be rotated or removed without removing either the clip or the screws.

Signal housings shall be constructed with two integrally moulded hinges on the left side and at least one integrally moulded latching screw lug on the right side with lenses oriented for vertical mounting. The location of the hinges and latching mechanism shall be such that when the door is closed, sufficient compression of the gasket is provided to exclude entry of dust, moisture, and road film to the inside of the housing. The latching screw used to secure the door shall consist of a stainless steel eye bolt and wing nut. The eyebolt shall be secured to the signal housing with a stainless steel pin.

Traffic signal housings shall be the colour yellow Federal specification number 595a-33538, opaque and moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent and will not require painting if cracked, dented, or chipped. The signal housing colour shall be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation.

Tunnel visors shall be one-piece injection moulded polycarbonate, open bottom for approximately 60 mm, and full length for the remaining circumference of the lens. The visor shall be attached to the housing door using four Robertson type screws (minimum 15.9 mm (5/8 inch) in length) and four brackets. No extra hardware shall be required, and snap fit visors are not acceptable.

The exterior side of the visor shall be the colour yellow Federal specification number 595a-33538 and black Federal specification number 595a-37308 on the interior side of the visor. The visor colour shall be moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent and will not require painting if cracked, dented, or chipped. The visor shall be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation.

Backboards shall be one-piece three mm thick high density polyethylene sheets and project a minimum of 115 mm width beyond the traffic signal head. Backboards shall be pre-drilled to match the mounting holes of the signal heads and shall conform to the selected signal head manufacturer. Backboards shall be the colour yellow Federal specification number 595a-33538 and be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation. Backboards shall have a 75mm reflective sheeting applied around the perimeter of the front facing border as per manufacture’s recommendations. Reflective sheeting shall be fluorescent yellow prismatic retroreflective sheeting according to ASTM D 4956, Type XI.

All signal housing, visor, and backboard screws shall be stainless steel Robertson type. All other signal housing, visor, and backboard hardware shall be stainless steel.

Manufactures of Traffic Signal Housings, visors, and backboards previously approved by the Region include Econolite, Fortran, LFE, McCain and TCT (Peek). Following the instructions found within Part 1 – Invitation and Submission Instructions, Clause 1.7 Equivalent Products, Bidders may propose an equivalent.

LED optical units including 300 mm red, yellow, and green circular indications must meet ITE VTSCH-LED circular signal supplement specification, latest version. 300 mm LED bimodal arrow optical units must indicate it is bimodal yellow/green and must be approved by the Region of Durham. All LED optical units shall be CSA factory approved. The following chart lists LED optical units that have been previously approved by the Region. Following the instructions found within Part 1 – Invitation and Submission Instructions, Clause 1.7 Equivalent Products, Bidders may propose an equivalent.:

Dialight	Leotek	Duralight/ Trastar	EOI	Swarco	GelCore
300 mm Vertical White Bar	433-2W22-C121-NQ01	TSL-12W-IL6-BV-A1	JXR300- VLWHF	TRQ-W12DD-Z2	TR6-WC5H-01A-51
300 mm Red	433-1210-003XL	TSL-12R-LX-IL6A1	JXC300HFR TR04	TRV-R12SG-D2T	FL-12R-S2	DR6-RTFB-77A
300 mm Yellow	433-3230-901XL	TSL-12Y-LX-IL6A1	JXC-300HFT Y04	TRV-Y12SG-D2T	FL-12A-S2	DR6-YTFB-17YX1
300 mm Green	433-2220-001XL	TSL-12G-LX-IL6A1	JXC-300HFT G04	TRV-G12SG-D2T	FL-12G-S2	DR6-GTFB-17A
300 mm Bimodal Yellow/ Green Arrow	432- 2324- 009XOD	TSL-12BM-LD-A1	JXJ-300VIY GACAD	TRA-B12DD1W3	FL-12BA-N	TR6-WC5H-01A-51

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of three section traffic signal heads with backboard supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of four section traffic signal heads with backboard supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.13.03 – Bicycle signal head, three section

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDSD S-410.020 and S-410.055
OPSS.MUNI 620
OPSD 2524.010 and 2545.01

Also include:

Supply and installation of bicycle signal heads.

Supply and installation of four conductor runner cable (in place of riser cable) between the bicycle signal heads and the pole handholes or the pole-mounted PVC junction boxes.

Supply and installation of all wiring connectors, pole-mounted conduit and fittings, PVC junction boxes, fittings, hardware, and accessories.

Note:

Bicycle signal heads shall be CSA factory approved and include LED optical units, signal housings and tunnel visors.

All LED lenses must meet Regulation 626 of the HTA, OTM Book 12A and be CSA approved.

Signal housings sections shall be one-piece moulded polycarbonate and have ribbing to ensure sufficient strength and shall be designed to withstand maximum wind loading as per ITE Publication Number ST-017A-1997. The top section of the signal housing shall have moulded in serration around a 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) NPT. opening such that the signal heads are capable of being rotated about their vertical axis in increments of 5 degrees over a full 360 degrees of rotation. Individual signal housings shall be self aligning when installed together and shall be attached in such a manner that vibration will not cause them to separate, however, can be separated by means of simple tools.

Signal housing doors shall have inserts and separate screws for visor and lens attachments. Optical units shall be attached to the housing door using four stainless steel or aluminum lens clips and four 12.7 mm (½ inch) x 10 Robertson drive stainless steel screws. These clips and screws shall provide sufficient tension to ensure the lens gasket is sufficiently compressed to prohibit the entry of dust, moisture, and road film to the optical unit. The clips and screws holding the lens should be such that the lens can be rotated or removed without removing either the clip or the screws.

Signal housings shall be constructed with two integrally moulded hinges on the left side and at least one integrally moulded latching screw lug on the right side with lenses oriented for vertical mounting. The location of the hinges and latching mechanism shall be such that when the door is closed, sufficient compression of the gasket is provided to exclude entry of dust, moisture, and road film to the inside of the housing. The latching screw used to secure the door shall consist of a stainless steel eye bolt and wing nut. The eyebolt shall be secured to the signal housing with a stainless steel pin.

Traffic signal housings shall be the colour black Federal specification number 595a-37308, opaque and moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent and will not require painting if cracked, dented, or chipped. The signal housing colour shall be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation.

Tunnel visors shall be one-piece injection moulded polycarbonate, open bottom for approximately 60 mm, and full length for the remaining circumference of the lens. The visor shall be attached to the housing door using four Robertson type screws (minimum 15.9 mm (5/8 inch) in length) and four brackets. No extra hardware shall be required, and snap fit visors are not acceptable.

The exterior and interior side the of the visor shall be the colour black Federal specification number 595a-37308. The visor colour shall be moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent and will not require painting if cracked, dented, or chipped. The visor shall be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation.

Backboards are not required.

All signal housing and visor screws shall be stainless steel Robertson type. All other signal housing and visor hardware shall be stainless steel.

Manufactures of Traffic Signal Housings and visors, and previously approved by the Region include Econolite, Fortran, LFE, McCain and TCT (Peek).

LED optical units including 300 mm red, yellow, and green bicycle indications must have the exact symbol as shown in Ontario Regulation 408/15 made under the Highway Traffic Act Reg 626. All LED optical units shall be CSA factory approved and must be approved by the Region of Durham. The following chart lists bicycle LED optical units that have been previously approved by the Region:

Dialight	EOI	Leotek
300 mm Red	433-1210-003XLB	TRB-R12SG-D2T	TSL -12R-IL6-BK-A1
300 mm Yellow	433-3230-901XLB	TRB-Y12SG-D2T	TSL-12Y-IL6-BK-A1
300 mm Green	433-2220-001XLB	TRB-G12SG-D2T	TSL-12G-IL6-BK-A1

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of each bicycle signal head supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.13.04 – Pedestrian signal head

Item 4.13.05 – Countdown pedestrian signal head

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.011, S-410.022, S-410.023, and S-410.050
OPSS.MUNI 620
OPSD 2524.010 and 2545.01

Also include:

Supply and installation of pedestrian and countdown pedestrian signal heads.

Supply and install four conductor runner cable (in place of riser cable) between the pedestrian signal heads and the pole handholes or the pole-mounted PVC junction boxes.

Supply and install all wiring connectors, pole-mounted conduit and fittings, PVC junction boxes, fittings, hardware, and accessories.

Note:

Pedestrian and countdown pedestrian signal heads shall be CSA factory approved and include LED optical units, signal housings, and visors.

All LED lenses must meet Regulation 626 of the HTA, OTM Book 12 and be CSA approved.

Signal housing sections shall be one-piece moulded polycarbonate and have ribbing to ensure sufficient strength and shall be designed to withstand maximum wind loading as per ITE Publication Number ST-017A-1997. The top section of the signal housing shall have moulded in serration around a 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) NPT. opening such that the signal heads are capable of being rotated about their vertical axis in increments of five degrees over a full 360 degrees of rotation. Individual signal housings shall be self aligning when installed together and shall be attached in such a manner that vibration will not cause them to separate however, can be separated by means of simple tools.

Signal housings shall be constructed with two integrally moulded hinges on the left side and at least one integrally moulded latching screw lug on the right side. Visors and lenses shall be oriented for vertical mounting. The location of the hinges and latching mechanism shall be such that when the door is closed, sufficient compression of the gasket is provided to exclude entry of dust, moisture, and road film to the inside of the housing. The latching screw used to secure the door shall consist of a stainless steel eye bolt and wing nut. The eyebolt shall be secured to the signal housing with a stainless steel pin.

Signal housing door shall be one-piece moulded polycarbonate, have inserts and separate screws for visor and lens attachments. Optical units shall be attached to the housing door using four stainless steel or aluminum lens clips and four 12.7 mm (½ inch) x 10 Robertson drive stainless steel screws. These clips and screws shall provide sufficient tension to ensure the lens gasket is sufficiently compressed to prohibit the entry of dust, moisture, and road film to the optical unit. The clips and screws holding the lens should be such that the lens can be removed without removing either the clip or the screws.

Signal housing and door colour shall be opaque and moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent and will not require painting if cracked, dented, or chipped. The colours shall be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation. Signal housing colour shall be yellow Federal specification number 595a-33538. Signal housing door colour shall be black Federal specification number 595a-37308.

Visors shall be square in shape, one-piece injection moulded polycarbonate and shall be attached to the housing door using four Robertson type screws and four brackets. No extra hardware shall be required and snap fit visors are not acceptable.

The exterior side of the visor shall be the colour yellow Federal specification number 595a-33538 and black Federal specification number 595a-37308 on the interior side of the visor. The visor colour shall be moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent and will not require painting if cracked, dented, or chipped. The visor shall be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation.

Walk / Don’t Walk signal to be combined into one 300 mm square LED lens. Walk image to be lunar white in colour when engaged. Don’t Walk image to be Portland orange in colour when engaged.

Countdown LED lens to be 300 mm square with countdown digits comprised of double row LEDs with a minimum height of 178 mm (7 inch) and a minimum width of 76 mm (3 inch). Countdown LED lens shall be programmed to display a blank indication upon the completion of timing. Timing for Countdown LED lens shall be determined using 110 volt AC outputs from the controller. Switches or remote circuits are not acceptable.

All signal housing and visor screws shall be stainless steel Robertson type.

Manufactures of Signal Housings and visors previously approved by the Region include Econolite, Fortran, LFE, McCain and TCT (Peek).

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pedestrian signal heads supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of countdown pedestrian signal heads supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.13.07 – Traffic signal head dual end hanger

Item 4.13.09 – Double arm bracket

Item 4.13.11 – Traffic signal mast arm complete with bracket

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDSD S-410.011, S-410.020, S-410.021, S-410.022, S-410.023, S-410.030, S-410.040, S-410.050, and S-410.055
OPSS.MUNI 620 and 2460
OPSD 2524.010 and 2545.01

Also include:

Supply and install traffic signal dual-end hangers, double arm brackets, traffic signal mast arms, and pole plate assemblies.

Note:

Dual-end hangers shall be Sentinel Pole and Traffic Equipment Limited Vertical Signal Assembly Clamp Mount Type, part number VSB-C-46 for three section traffic signal heads and VSB-C-58 for four section traffic signal heads or an equivalent as approved by Contract Administrator.

Double arm brackets shall be as per OPSD 2524.010. Pole offsets shall be 250 mm for countdown pedestrian signal and traffic signal heads. Pole offsets shall be 350 mm for transit signal heads. Pole offsets shall be 500 mm for countdown pedestrian signal heads when mounted on a common pole with transit signal heads. Double arm brackets shall be unpainted aluminum with hollow construction for wire routing. Installation of bracket on wood or octagonal steel pole can be with bolts as per RMDSD S-410.050 or steel strapping as per OPSD 2524.010.

Traffic signal mast arm to be Aluminum Single Member Arms as per OPSS.MUNI 2460.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of traffic signal head dual end hangers supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of double arm brackets supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of traffic signal mast arm with brackets supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.13.20 – Transit signal head, three section

Item 4.13.21 – Transit signal head, four section

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDSD S-410.050
OPSS.MUNI 620

OPSD 2524.010

Also include:

Supply and installation of transit signal heads.

Supply and installation of seven conductor runner cable (in place of riser cable) between the traffic signal heads and the pole handholes or the pole-mounted PVC junction boxes.

Supply and installation of all wiring connectors, pole-mounted conduit and fittings, PVC junction boxes, fittings, hardware, and accessories.

Note:

Transit signal heads shall be CSA factory approved and include LED optical units, signal housings and tunnel visors.

All LED lenses must meet the latest versions of Regulation 626 of the HTA, OTM Book 12, and be CSA approved.

Signal housings sections shall be one-piece moulded polycarbonate and have ribbing to ensure sufficient strength and shall be designed to withstand maximum wind loading as per ITE Publication Number ST-017A-1997. The top section of the signal housing shall have moulded in serration around a 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) NPT. opening such that the signal heads are capable of being rotated about their vertical axis in increments of 5 degrees over a full 360 degrees of rotation. Individual signal housings shall be self aligning when installed together and shall be attached in such a manner that vibration will not cause them to separate, however, can be separated by means of simple tools.

Signal housing doors shall have inserts and separate screws for visor and lens attachments. Optical units shall be attached to the housing door using four stainless steel or aluminum lens clips and four 12.7 mm (½ inch) x 10 Robertson drive stainless steel screws. These clips and screws shall provide sufficient tension to ensure the lens gasket is sufficiently compressed to prohibit the entry of dust, moisture, and road film to the optical unit. The clips and screws holding the lens should be such that the lens can be rotated or removed without removing either the clip or the screws.

Signal housings shall be constructed with two integrally moulded hinges on the left side and at least one integrally moulded latching screw lug on the right side with lenses oriented for vertical mounting. The location of the hinges and latching mechanism shall be such that when the door is closed, sufficient compression of the gasket is provided to exclude entry of dust, moisture, and road film to the inside of the housing. The latching screw used to secure the door shall consist of a stainless steel eye bolt and wing nut. The eyebolt shall be secured to the signal housing with a stainless steel pin.

Traffic signal housings shall be the colour black Federal specification number 595a-37308, opaque and moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent and will not require painting if cracked, dented, or chipped. The signal housing colour shall be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation.

Tunnel visors shall be one-piece injection moulded polycarbonate, open bottom for approximately 60 mm, and full length for the remaining circumference of the lens. The visor shall be attached to the housing door using four Robertson type screws (minimum 15.9 mm (5/8 inch) in length) and four brackets. No extra hardware shall be required, and snap fit visors are not acceptable.

The exterior and interior side the of the visor shall be the colour black Federal specification number 595a-37308. The visor colour shall be moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent and will not require painting if cracked, dented, or chipped. The visor shall be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation.

Backboards are not required.

All signal housing and visor screws shall be stainless steel Robertson type. All other signal housing and visor hardware shall be stainless steel.

Manufactures of Traffic Signal Housings and visors, and previously approved by the Region include Econolite, Fortran, LFE, McCain and TCT (Peek).

LED optical units including 300 mm red and yellow circular indications must meet ITE VTSCH-LED circular signal supplement specification, latest version. 300 mm LED bimodal arrow optical units must indicate it is bimodal yellow/green and must be approved by the Region of Durham. All LED optical units shall be CSA factory approved. The following chart lists LED optical units that have been previously approved by the Region:

Dialight	Leotek	Duralight/ Trastar	EOI	Swarco	GelCore
300 mm Red	433-1210-003XL	TSL-12R-LX-IL6A1	JXC300-HFRTR04	TRV-R12SG-D2T	FL-12R-S2	DR6-RTFB-77A
300 mm Yellow	433-3230-901XL	TSL-12Y-LX-IL6A1	JXC300-HFTY04	TRV-Y12SG-D2T	FL-12A-S2	DR6-YTFB-77YX1
300 mm Bimodal Yellow/ Green Arrow (Yellow not used)	432-2324-009XOD	TSL-12BM-A1	JXJ-300VIYGACAD	TRA-B12DD1W3	FL-12BA-N	TR6-WC5H-01A-51

Four section transit signal heads to include combination of green through and turn arrows for advance transit signal phasing.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of three section transit signal heads with backboard supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of four section transit signal heads with backboard supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.13.30 – Temporary signal system (full temp)

Item 4.13.31 – Temporary signal system (partial temp)

Item 4.13.32 – Temporary signal system (IPS temp)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDSD S-410.022, S-410.023, S-410.050, S-410.060, S-410.070, S-410.080, S-410.082, S-410.091, S-410.092, and S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 603, 604, 609, 610, 614, 615, 617, and 620
OPSD 2210.01, 2235.01, 2238.01, 2240.01, 2242.02, 2245.01, 2245.02, 2540.01, 2540.03, 2540.100, and 2545.01

Also include:

Supply and installation of temporary traffic signal controllers and components, temporary uninterruptible power supplies, temporary traffic signal heads, backboards, pedestrian signal heads, countdown pedestrian signal heads, supply control cabinet, meter base, microwave detection systems, broadband integrated radios and antennas, closed circuit television cameras (CCTV), wooden poles, wooden posts, temporary traffic signal cabinet base, guy cables, guy anchors, guy struts, guy fittings, bolts, clamps, grips, insulators, suspension cables, stabilization cables, messenger cables, signal head suspension mounting hardware, accessible pedestrian push buttons, pedestrian push buttons, push button mounting frames, roadway lighting luminaires, photoelectric cells, aluminum luminaire arm brackets, cabling, cable ties, wiring, wiring connections, grounding, grounding plates, conduit, pole mounted conduit and fittings, PVC junction boxes, steel u-guard pole risers, fittings, hardware and other materials. Contractor shall assume ownership of all non-Owner supplied temporary equipment OR The owner shall assume ownership of all non-Owner supplied temporary equipment.

SPEC NOTE for Clause .1 regarding “Advanced Temporary Traffic Signal” contacts - Include the wording “The owner shall assume ownership of all non-Owner supplied temporary equipment.”

Pre-installation testing of temporary traffic signal controllers shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 620.07.10.03.04 Controllers.

The Contract Administrator shall provide the contractor with a controller book complete with all controller and conflict monitor programming, accessible pedestrian button settings, intersection drawings and schematics, and logbook. The Contractor shall setup the traffic signal controller by performing all programming, setting all timing controls and switch settings, and setting any other controller operational parameters obtained from the Contract Administrator. The Contractor shall verify to his own satisfaction that the signal timing is consistent and complete. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Region of Durham Traffic Operations Centre to setup, test, and confirm traffic controller communications with Flux central traffic control systems.

Proof of performance testing and inspection shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 620.07.10.04.

Relocation of existing mast arm street name signs and traffic signal pre-emption detector heads to suspension/stabilization cables mounted with vertical supports as shown on the contract drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Relocation of existing closed circuit television cameras (CCTV).

Relocation of accessible pedestrian push buttons to temporary wood posts/steel poles as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Relocation of traffic signs and interconnect terminal boards as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Commissioning of the temporary traffic signal system. The Contractor shall arrange to have a Durham Regional Police officer direct traffic in the intersection until the temporary traffic control signal is completely tested and operational and the traffic signal heads have been removed from the existing traffic signal poles.

Removal of existing traffic signal equipment following commissioning of temporary traffic signal system. Existing traffic signal controller shall be salvaged and returned to the Region’s Traffic Operations Centre. All other traffic signal equipment, cabling, wiring and connectors are to be disposed of off-site.

SPEC NOTES for Clause 10:

1. A careful site-specific review of existing traffic signal and street lighting equipment shall be done to ensure newly installed equipment due to previous construction or maintenance (APS buttons, CCTV cameras, broadband antennas etc.) or retrofit (LED fixtures installed by local municipalities) are not removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Include remove/salvage or relocation wording where necessary.2. For “Advanced Temporary Signal” contracts - Include wording related to footing, handhole, and maintenance hole removal by others at a future date if preceding a capital reconstruction contract. Anchor bolts and exposed conduits should be removed from existing footings at the time of pole or cabinet removal.

During commissioning of the permanent traffic signal system, provide a Durham Regional Police officer to direct traffic in the intersection until the permanent traffic control signal is completely tested and operational and the temporary traffic signal heads have been de-energized and removed from the overhead spans.

Removal of temporary traffic signal equipment following commissioning of permanent traffic signal system. Dispose of all temporary signal equipment, cabling, wiring and connectors off-site.

Temporary traffic signal systems shall be maintained and operated under Item 4.13.35 - Maintenance and Operation of Temporary Traffic Signal System.

Locations requiring spans to be installed above the public utility neutral line must be approved by Hydro Utility/Elexicon Energy. The Contractor shall be certified as a licensed Power Journeyman Lineman to perform the work and adhere to all limits of approach safety training. Proof of qualification of said Power Journeyman Lineman shall be provided at the pre-installation meeting. Elexicon Energy approved strain insulator rods include Hubbell GS160XXCPSC, MacLean GCTE15-XXR and K-Line KLXXCHSF available in 609, 1219, and 2438 mm (24, 48, and 96 inch) lengths. Proposed strain insulator rods and connectors shall be submitted to Elexicon Energy for approval. An Elexicon Energy representative shall be onsite during installation to ensure quality control.

Relocation of temporary traffic signal heads and 6x6 (150 mm x 150 mm) wooden posts complete with pedestrian signal heads, push buttons, signs, and temporary overhead wiring to accommodate the proposed construction staging as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

The temporary traffic signal controller shall include the following components:

For Multiple Temporary Signals:

A – Intersection 1	B – Intersection 2	C – Intersection 3	D – Intersection 4	Description
1	1	1	1	Econolite 8 Phase MXX TS2 Type 1 Cabinet
1	1	1	1	Econolite Controller Unit, ASC/3-1000 (Firmware Version 02.64.00) or Econolite Cobalt-2100 (Firmware Version 32.62.00)
1	1	1	1	Econolite MMU-1600 16 Channel Malfunction Management Unit
1	1	1	1	Econolite TS2 Cabinet Power Supply
3	3	3	3	Econolite Bus Interface Unit Assembly
12	12	12	12	Econolite LS-200 Solid State Load Switch
1	1	1	1	Econolite FL-200 Solid State Flasher
4	4	4	4	Reno A and E TR-200 Flash Transfer Relay
1	1	1	1	Wavetronix Click 650 Cabinet Interface (See Note .11)
N/A	1	N/A	1	Axis Power over ethernet injector for CCTV Cameras (See Note .12)
1	1	1	1	GTT Opticom Phase Selector model 762
1	1	N/A	N/A	Stinson AIS-S Shelf Mount Bluetooth and Wifi Detector complete with power over ethernet injector
1	1	1	1	Microhard Systems 4G LTE Ethernet Bridge/Serial Gateway, model BulletPlusNA2 (sim card to be supplied by the owner)
1	1	1	1	Airgain M2MAX MIMO Cell/LTE x 2, Wi-Fi x 2 and GNSS combo antenna with EZConnect cable harness 6 feet length (threaded bolt mounting style), model AP-C2W2G-1-2-1-6. Bolted to the exterior roof of the controller cabinet and connected to the 4G LTE Cellular Modem and Stinson AIS-S Shelf Mount Bluetooth and Wi-Fi Detector
N/A	1	N/A	N/A	Ubiquiti flex mini 5 port ethernet switch, model USW-Flex-Mini
3	5	2	3	Cat 6 Ethernet Cables - 2 metres for Controller Unit, Bluetooth Detector, CCTV Camera and ethernet switch – 3 metres for uninterruptible power supply
1	1	1	1	Tripp Lite 8-outlet surge protector, 2.4 m (8 foot) cord

For Single Signal Build:

Item Quantity	Description
1	Econolite 8 Phase MXX TS2 Type 1 Cabinet
1	Econolite Controller Unit, ASC/3-1000 (Firmware Version 02.64.00) or Econolite Cobalt-2100 (Firmware Version 32.62.00)
1	Econolite MMU-1600 16 Channel Malfunction Management Unit
1	Econolite TS2 Cabinet Power Supply
3	Econolite Bus Interface Unit Assembly
12	Econolite LS-200 Solid State Load Switch
1	Econolite FL-200 Solid State Flasher
4	Reno A and E TR-200 Flash Transfer Relay
1	Stinson AIS-S Shelf Mount Bluetooth and Wifi Detector complete with power over ethernet injector
1	GTT Opticom Phase Selector model 762
1	Wavetronix Click 650 Cabinet Interface (See Note .10)
4	Wavetronix Click 112 Contact Closure Cards (See Note .10)
1	Microhard Systems 4G LTE Ethernet Bridge/Serial Gateway, model BulletPlusNA2 (sim card to be supplied by the owner) Can be used as a cell modem or network switch when using broadband integrated radio and antenna communication instead of cellular.
1	Airgain M2MAX CCG Cellular, LTE, and Global Positioning System (GPS) combo antenna (threaded bolt mounting style), model AP-M2M2-CCG-Q-S222-BL-6. Bolted to the exterior roof of the controller cabinet and connected to the 4G LTE Cellular Modem. Use the following when using a Stinson AIS-S shelf mount Bluetooth and Wifi detector Airgain M2MAX MIMO Cell/LTE x 2, Wi-Fi x 2 and GNSS combo antenna with EZConnect cable harness 6 feet length (threaded bolt mounting style), model AP-C2W2G-1-2-1-6. Bolted to the exterior roof of the controller cabinet and connected to the 4G LTE Cellular Modem and Stinson AIS-S Shelf Mount Bluetooth and Wi-Fi Detector.
1, 2, 3. 4, or 5	Cat 6 Ethernet Cables - 2 metres for Controller Unit, Bluetooth Detector, Broadband Antenna, CCTV Camera and ethernet switch – 3 metres for uninterruptible power supply
1	Ubiquiti flex mini 5 port ethernet switch, model USW-Flex-Mini
1	Tripp Lite 8-outlet surge protector, 2.4 m (8 feet) cord

Used temporary traffic signal controllers and components may be supplied provided that all material components or assemblies have CSA or UL approval, are in good condition, approved according to the Ontario Electrical Safety Code, and comply with the requirements of the contract.

Temporary Traffic signal controllers and components shall be inspected prior to installation to ensure that they are according to the Contract Documents.

Traffic signal heads shall be CSA factory approved and include LED optical units, signal housings, tunnel visors, and backboards. Traffic signal housings, tunnel visors, and backboards shall be the colour yellow Federal specification number 595a-33538, opaque and moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent. Interior side of the visor to be black, Federal specification number 595a-37308. LED optical units including 300 mm red, yellow, and green circular indications must meet ITE VTSCH-LED circular signal supplement specification, latest version. 300 mm LED bimodal arrow optical units must indicate it is bimodal yellow/green and must be approved by the Owner. All LED optical units shall be CSA factory approved. The following chart lists LED optical units that have been previously approved by the Region of Durham:

Dialight	Leotek	Duralight/ Trastar	EOI	Swarco	GelCore
300 mm Red	433-1210-003XL	TSL-12R-LX-IL6A1	JXC300-HFRTR04	TRV-R12SG-D2T	FL-12R-S2	DR6-RTFB-77A
300 mm Yellow	433-3230-901XL	TSL-12Y-LX-IL6A1	JXC300-HFTG04	TRV-Y12SG-D2T	FL-12A-S2	DR6-GTFB-77A
300 mm Green	433-2220-001XL	TSL-12G-LX-IL6A1	JXC300-HFTG04	TRV-G12SG-D2T	FL-12G-S2	DR6-GTFB-77A
300 mm Bimodal Yellow/ Green Arrow	432-2324-009XOD	TSL-12BM-LD-A1	JXJ-300VIYGACAD	TRA-B12DD1W3	FL-12BA-N	TR6-WC5H-01A-51

Pedestrian signal heads shall be CSA factory approved and include LED optical units, signal housings and square visors. Signal housings and visors shall be the colour yellow Federal specification number 595a-33538, opaque and moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent. Interior side of the visor to be black, Federal specification number 595a-37308. Walk / Don’t Walk signal to be combined into one 300 mm round LED lens. Walk image to be lunar white in colour when engaged. Don’t Walk image to be Portland orange in colour when engaged. Countdown LED lens to be 300 mm round with countdown digits comprised of double row LEDs with a minimum height of 178 mm (7 inch) and a minimum width of 76 mm (3 inch). Countdown LED lens shall be programmed to display a blank indication upon the completion of timing. Timing for Countdown LED lens shall be determined using 110 volt AC outputs from the controller. Switches or remote circuits are not acceptable. All LED optical units shall be CSA factory approved.

Pedestrian push buttons shall be Polara Engineering Bulldog model BDL3-Y or equivalent as approved by Contract Administrator. Push button mounts for temporary wood poles and posts shall be Polara Engineering model PBF5X7-Y.

Accessible Pedestrian push button to be to be Polara iNS2 2 Wire Opt “B” (Yellow) part number PBISAAB, and 2 Wire ICCU-S2 c/w Interconnect Brd, A and C cable part number CACCUS2A.

Temporary traffic signal cabinet base shall be Quazite box pad for Type M cabinets part number PB24360612B18 or an approved equivalent or a constructed wooden base as approved by the Contract Administrator.

Supply control cabinet assembly shall be Square D load center model CQO18M100RB60 with four 15 amp single pole breakers model QO115 and a secondary surge suppressor model QO2175SB or an equivalent assembly as approved by the Contract Administrator.

Temporary roadway lighting luminaires shall be General Electric Evolve Series LED fixtures with120 volts supply voltage, Type III distribution, and individually photo controlled. Catalogue number ERL2-1-23-C3-30-A-GRAY (photometric file ERL2_23C330_-120-277.IES). Photoelectric cells to be Precision Multiple Controls catalogue number EC120-AP-TD or reviewed equivalent.

Temporary roadway lighting luminaires and brackets shall be relocated from existing steel traffic poles as per Contract Drawings.

Arms brackets shall be 2.4 m (8 feet) long with 1.2 m (4 feet) rise elliptical aluminum mast arms, per Contract Drawings, as manufactured by Utility Supply Specialists (USS) catalogue number TER 8MA or reviewed equivalent.

Microwave detection system shall be a complete Wavetronix SmartSensor Matrix four leg detection system or equivalent as approved by the Contract Administrator. The Contractor shall supply, install and setup the microwave detection system including all detectors, components, mounting hardware, and Smart Sensor cables for the temporary traffic control signal as shown on the contract drawings. Microwave detection system to include SmartSensor detectors complete with wiring harnesses and connectors (part number SS-225), Click 650 Cabinet Interface c/w Surge Protection, RS232, SDLC data cable and Ethernet Interface (part number CLK650), optional Click 112 Contact Closure Cards for each detector (part number CLK-112), SmartSensor mounts (part number SS-611), SmartSensor cable junction boxes (part number SS-710) and 6 conductor SmartSensor home-run cables between the pole mounted junction boxes and the traffic controller cabinet (part number SS-705). Video Detection Systems will not be accepted as an equivalent for this contract.

Broadband Integrated Radios and Antennas shall be Encom Wireless Energy (Part Number Energy 5 INT) and shall be supplied with a Power over Ethernet injector supporting a gigabit 10/100/1000 transfer protocol.

Closed circuit television cameras (CCTV) shall be Axis Communications Axis Q6074-E 60Hz PTZ Dome Network Camera part number 01974-004. CCTV cameras shall be supplied with Axis pole mounting hardware Axis Communications Axis T91L61 part number 5801-721 and 60 Watt Power over Ethernet injector (Part Number T8134).

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for a full temporary signal system shall be by lump sum.

Payment for a partial temporary signal system shall be by lump sum.

Payment for a IPS temporary signal system shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work as specified and as shown on the Contract Drawings, including but not limited to, all costs for ESA inspection and permit fees, testing, fees for paid duty police officer, transporting of Owner-supplied materials, salvaged materials, and materials to be disposed of off-site and disposal fees.

Progress payments for the temporary signal systems shall be based on the following percentage of the Contract price:

50 per cent upon satisfactory installation.

50 per cent upon removal.

OR

100 per cent upon satisfactory installation. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Clause for Advanced Signal contracts)

Item 4.13.33 – Temporary signal system (modify existing temp)

Reference:
Contract Drawings
RMDSD S-410.022, S-410.023, S-410.050, S-410.060, S-410.070, S-410.080, S-410.082, S-410.091, S-410.092, and S 411.020
OPSS.MUNI 603, 604, 609, 610, 614, 615, 617, and 620
OPSD 2210.01, 2235.01, 2238.01, 2240.01, 2242.02, 2245.01, 2245.02, 2540.01, 2540.03, 2540.100, and 2545.01

Also include:

The Contractor shall assume ownership of all existing and modified temporary traffic signal equipment, and materials with the exception of sim cards for cellular modems.

Relocation of existing 6x6 wood posts complete with pedestrian signal heads, push buttons, signs, and temporary overhead wiring to accommodate the proposed construction staging as directed by the Contract Administrator.

During commissioning of the permanent traffic signal system, provide a Durham Regional Police officer to direct traffic in the intersection until the permanent traffic control signal is completely tested and operational and the temporary traffic signal heads have been de-energized and removed from the overhead spans.

Removal of temporary traffic signal equipment following commissioning of permanent traffic signal system. Dispose of all temporary traffic signal equipment, and materials off-site. Sim cards shall be salvaged and returned to the Owner.

Temporary traffic signal systems shall be maintained and operated under Item 4.13.35 – Maintenance and Operation of Temporary Traffic Signal System.

Note:

The existing temporary traffic signal controller includes the following components:

Item Quantity	Description
1	Econolite 8 Phase MXX TS2 Type 1 Cabinet
1	Econolite Controller Unit, ASC/3-1000 (Firmware Version 02.64.00) or Econolite Cobalt-2100 (Firmware Version 32.62.00)
1	Econolite MMU-1600 16 Channel Malfunction Management Unit
1	Econolite TS2 Cabinet Power Supply
3	Econolite Bus Interface Unit Assembly
12	Econolite LS-200 Solid State Load Switch
1	Econolite FL-200 Solid State Flasher
4	Reno A and E TR-200 Flash Transfer Relay
1	GTT Opticom Phase Selector model 762
1	Wavetronix Click 650 Cabinet Interface
4	Wavetronix Click 112 Contact Closure Cards
1	Microhard Systems 4G LTE Ethernet Bridge/Serial Gateway, model BulletPlusNA2
1	Antenna Plus Cellular, LTE, and Global Positioning System (GPS) combo antenna, model AP-M2M2-CCG-Q-S222-BL-6
1	Encom Power Over Ethernet Injector for Broadband radios
1	Axis 60W Power Over Ethernet Injector for CCTV cameras
1 or 2 or 3	Cat 6 Ethernet Cable for Controller Unit, Broadband Radio, and CCTV– 2 metres

SPEC. NOTE:
Specific controller equipment to be revised accordingly, multiple tables might be required for multiple intersections with varying equipment.

A modify temporary signal contract drawing needs to include the existing temporary signal plant noting pole types, signal head types, stations for the relocation of 6x6 posts, pole mounted detection equipment, communications equipment, and any other relevant equipment to be identified for maintenance purposes.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for modifying existing temporary signal system shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work as specified and as shown on the Contract Drawings, including but not limited to, all costs for testing, fees for traffic control by Durham Regional Police, transporting of Owner-supplied materials, salvaged materials, and materials to be disposed of off-site and disposal fees.

Item 4.13.35 – Maintenance and operation of temporary signal system

References
OPSS.MUNI 603, 604, 609, 610, 614, 615, 617, and 620

Definitions:

Critical Failure means any failure related to the system components, which causes the improper operation of, or the failure of system components such that they are operating under substantial degraded performance; or the failure of any system component that adversely affects the electrical system or impacts public safety.

Detect, Detected or Detection means observed, should have been observed or has been informed.

Emergency Repairs means any activity required to bring the temporary traffic signal system to full functionality in accordance with the specifications other than routine maintenance activities.

Equipment means all electrical or mechanical devices and vehicles used or reasonably required for use in emergency repairs or routine maintenance and operation of the temporary traffic signal system.

Made Aware means when the Contractor has been advised by any party or upon detection.

Non-Routine Maintenance means any activity required to repair unexpected failure of system components. It requires immediate action and takes precedence over routine maintenance activities for the duration of the emergency. Non-routine maintenance includes all emergency maintenance activities.

Outcome Target means a performance requirement with a measurable goal that is to be met within a specified time.

Routine Maintenance means ongoing preventative maintenance activities in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the Contract Documents. Routine maintenance includes the periodic adjustment of the temporary traffic signal system components to correct deviations from the system specifications resulting from normal operation of the system.

System Components means all hardware and software components, devices, parts and materials included in the temporary traffic signal system supplied and installed by the Contractor.

Materials:

Used Materials:

Used materials, except cables and LED optical units, may be used in the maintenance and operation of temporary installations provided that:

All material components or completed assemblies of components have CSA or UL approval.

The material is in good condition.

The material is approved according to the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

The material complies with the requirements of the contract.

Stocking of Components

Contractor must keep the following components and quantities on hand to facilitate prompt emergency repairs and routine maintenance of the installation, thereby ensuring the traffic signal remains in service at all times.

Component	Project Quantity
Econolite 8 Phase MXX TS2 Type 1 Cabinet	1
Econolite Controller Unit, ASC/3-1000 (Firmware Version 02.64.00) OR Econolite Cobalt-2100 (Firmware Version 32.62.00)	1
Econolite MMU-1600 16 Channel Malfunction Management Unit	1
Econolite TS2 Cabinet Power Supply	1
Econolite Bus Interface Unit Assembly	3
Econolite LS-200 Solid State Load Switch	12
Econolite FL-200 Solid State Flasher	1
Reno A and E TR-200 Flash Transfer Relay	4
Thermostat Panels	1
Fans for Cabinets	1
Heaters for Cabinets	1
Filters for Cabinets	1
Alpha Technologies Limited pole mounted Uninterruptible power supply, part number CAUPS6 including ALPHA S6 Traffic Enclosure complete with FXM HP 1100 (48VDC) Control unit, Universal Automatic Transfer Switch (UATS) with 483 mm (19 inch) Rack Assembly (1), Alpha Guard battery balancer (1), Heater Mats (4), 12V AlphaCell 240XTV Batteries (4) and Battery Cable Kit complete with integrated Alpha Guard wiring	1
SquareD Supply Control Cabinet model CQO18M100RB60	1
Microhard Systems 4G LTE Ethernet Bridge/Serial Gateway, model BulletPlusNA2	1
Ubiquiti flex mini 5 port ethernet switch, model USW-Flex-Mini	1
Antenna Plus Cellular, LTE, and Global Positioning System (GPS) combo antenna (threaded bolt style), model AP-M2M2-CCG-Q-S222-BL-6	1
Airgain M2MAX MIMO Cell/LTE x 2, Wi-Fi x 2 and GNSS combo antenna with EZConnect cable harness 1.8 m (6 feet) length (threaded bolt mounting style), model AP-C2W2G-1-2-1-6.
Polara iNS2 2 Wire Opt “B” (Yellow) part number PBISAAB	2
Polara 2 wire ICCU-S2 complete with interconnect board, A and C cable part number CACCUS2A	1
Polara Bulldog Push Buttons model BDL3-Y	2
GTT Opticom Phase Selector model 762	1
CCTV Cameras (Axis Q6074-E)	1
Stinson AIS-S Shelf Mount Bluetooth and Wifi Detector	1
Broadband Radio Antenna (Energy 5 INT)	1
Wavetronix Click 650 Cabinet Interface	1
Wavetronix Click 112 Contact Closure Card	2
Wavetronix Smart Sensor Detector	2
GE Evolve LED Streetlight fixture model ERL2-1-23-C3-30-A-GRAY	2
Oversized Highway Traffic Signal Heads and Backboards	4
4 Section Traffic Signal Heads and Backboards	2
Pedestrian Signal Heads	4
Countdown Pedestrian Signal Heads	2
300mm Red LED Optical Unit	4
300mm Amber LED Optical Unit	4
300mm Green LED Optical Unit	4
300mm Bimodal Green/Yellow Arrow LED Optical Unit	2
300mm Round Pedestrian LED Optical Unit	4
300mm Round Countdown LED Optical Unit	4

Construction:

General:

The temporary traffic signal systems within the project limits shall be operated and maintained according to the Contract Documents.

Duration:

The period of maintenance shall begin from the time of commissioning the temporary control signal. The temporary traffic signal system shall be operated and maintained until the temporary traffic signal system is de-energized by the Contractor.

SPEC NOTE:
Revisions for Advanced Temporary Signal Contracts:
A defined maintenance period should be specified (i.e. Approximately 6-12 months) which would end with the mobilization of the following capital reconstruction contract. It is important to have a good understanding of the schedule and any potential delays for the following project to determine an appropriate duration. The following Clause shall be used and revised accordingly: “The period of maintenance and operation shall begin from the time of commissioning of the temporary traffic control signal. The temporary traffic signal system shall be maintained and operated until the mobilization of the scheduled road reconstruction contract D20xx-xx to follow in approximately six months.”

Maintenance and Operation:

At any time during the contract, the Contract Administrator reserves the right to review the timing and operations of the temporary traffic signal system and the Contractor shall implement any changes to the operation settings and timings requested by the Contract Administrator. Changes to the timing controls, switch settings, or change any operational parameters with respect to the traffic signal shall not be made unless directed by the Contract Administrator. The Contractor shall be responsible for installing the revised traffic signal timing into the traffic signal controller upon direction from the Contract Administrator within five regular business days (Monday to Friday, 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.). The Contractor shall be responsible for installing revised traffic signal timing up to a maximum of ten times.

All temporary traffic signal components shall be maintained in good working condition according to the Contract Documents. Routine maintenance and emergency repairs shall be provided as necessary to fulfil this obligation. Routine and non-routine maintenance service shall be provided during seasonal shut down.

Routine maintenance shall also include biannual conflict monitor checks, inspection of the traffic control signal system and seasonal traffic controller cabinet changeovers in advance of the summer and winter seasons and after wind storm events as described below.

Prior to the summer season:

Remove the controller cabinet filter and fan baffle plates, replace the filters, inspect the thermostat and repair, or replace if defective.

Perform field testing of conflict monitor with police direction of traffic as the conflict monitor is cycled through the tests.

Inspect controller cabinet and components for loose or missing parts, evidence of burning or shorts, lightening, water, heat, corrosion, or collision damage. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Inspect controller and supply disconnect cabinet door hinges, door stays and locks. Lubricate if required.

Check cabinets for evidence or rodents and insects. Remove all debris by vacuum.

Check grounding connection to the ground bus of the controller and test resistance to ground. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Check overhead spans for required clearance over roadways and driveways. Tighten guy cables and/or vertical ties as required.

Inspect all signal heads for proper visibility at each approach and check each signal head for plumbness, tilt and twist. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Check that all aerial wiring is securely fastened to span cables. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Check all poles for damage and plumbness. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Prior to the winter season:

Install controller cabinet fan and filter baffle plates, check heater operation, and repair or replace if defective.

Perform field testing of conflict monitor with police direction of traffic as the conflict monitor is cycled through the tests.

Inspect controller cabinet and components for loose or missing parts, evidence of burning or shorts, lightening, water, heat, corrosion, or collision damage. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Inspect controller and supply disconnect cabinet door hinges, door stays and locks. Lubricate if required.

Check cabinets for evidence or rodents and insects. Remove all debris by vacuum.

Check grounding connection to the ground bus of the controller and test resistance to ground. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Check overhead spans for required clearance over roadways and driveways. Tighten guy cables and/or vertical ties as required.

Inspect all signal heads for proper visibility at each approach and check each signal head for plumbness, tilt and twist. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Check that all aerial wiring is securely fastened to span cables. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Check all poles for damage and plumbness. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

As soon as practical after storm events that generate strong and gusting winds:

Inspect all signal heads for proper visibility at each approach and check each signal head for plumbness, tilt and twist. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Check overhead spans for required clearance over roadways and driveways. Tighten guy cables and/or vertical ties as required.

Check that all aerial wiring is securely fastened to span cables. Make or schedule the necessary repairs.

Emergency repairs shall be provided whenever there is a failure or cessation of the operation of any component or components of the temporary traffic signal system. On-call local emergency repair service shall be provided 24 hours a day, seven days a week, for the duration of the Contract.

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing locates of the existing traffic signal plant as part of their maintenance obligation for the duration of the Contract. All records of locate requests shall be maintained by the Contractor.

In the event of damage to the temporary signal system due to a third party (e.g., vehicle collision) or sever weather the Contractor shall be compensated for the repair and materials on a time and material basis.

Response, Notification, and Restoration:

The names of the Contractor’s designated contact person and an alternate contact person shall be provided to the Contract Administrator prior to commissioning the temporary signal system or modifications.

The Contractor shall be available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for the duration of the Contract, and during any seasonal shutdowns. Non-routine maintenance shall be required whenever there is a critical failure of any system component of the temporary traffic signal system or whenever vehicular accidents, weather or other factors have caused damage to system components. Critical failures in traffic signal systems are identified in Table 1 (refer below).

All non-routine maintenance calls shall be responded to within two hours of being made aware or upon detection.

For all critical failures the Contractor shall meet or exceed the following outcome targets:

Respond and begin repairs of all critical failures within two hours of detection or being made aware.

Complete permanent or temporary repairs before leaving the site.

Complete permanent repairs within 10 days.

A log book shall be provided and kept in the traffic signal cabinet. All field work performed on the temporary traffic signal system including routine and non-routine maintenance, replacement of any hardware, changes to the software, changes to the configuration, phasing or timing parameters shall be recorded in the log book. The time and date of each entry in the log book shall be recorded and the entry signed by the individual making the entry.

The Contractor shall notify a Systems Group representative of the Region of Durham Traffic Operations Centre at 905-666-8116 once on-site to perform any temporary signal field work during regular business hours (Monday to Friday, 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.). Notification of any temporary signal field work completed outside regular business hours including evening and weekends shall be made on the next regular business day. The Contractor shall contact a Systems Group representative to confirm traffic controller communications with the Flux central traffic control systems when troubleshooting communication failures of the traffic signal system.

Table 1
Critical Failures in Traffic Signal Systems

Reported Problem
Aerial span wire down
Pole knocked down or hit
Power supply knocked down
Controller knocked down
Lamp burnout
Power supply failure
Overhead equipment unfastened or hanging over roadway
Emergency cable locates
Conflicting signal indications
Mast arm or head turned
Programmed phase fails to occur
Phase or cycle time errors
Signal cabinet damaged or displaced
Single signal head knockdowns
Communication system failure
Signals on flash
Pedestrian push button not working
Accessible pedestrian signals (APS) failure
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) failure
Backboard damaged
Detection system not working
CCTV Camera not working
Streetlight fixture not working

Quality Control:

Each time emergency repair work is performed; the temporary traffic signal system shall be tested and inspected to ensure that it has been restored to full functionality as specified in the Contract Documents.

Quality Assurance:

The Contract Administrator may make random inspection of the work.

Measurement of Payment:

Payment for maintenance and operation of temporary signal system shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.14.01 – Single section flashing beacon

Item 4.14.05 – Four-way overhead flashing beacon

Item 4.14.06 – Active advanced warning beacon

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 620
OPSD 2242.02, 2245.01, 2245.02, 2540.02, 2540.03, and 2545.01

Also include:

Supply and install flashing beacons, flasher mechanism, sign light assemblies, signal head sections, lens assemblies, lamps, LED modules, mast arms, signal hangers, wiring, wiring connectors, pole mounted conduit and fittings, PVC junction boxes, fittings, hardware, and accessories.

Note:

Flasher mechanism shall be Econolite Flasher-Beacon-2 Cir-4 Pin or an equivalent as approved by Contract Administrator.

Signal heads shall be CSA factory approved and include LED optical units, signal housings, tunnel visors, and backboards.

All LED lenses must meet Regulation 626 of the HTA, OTM Book 12 and be CSA approved.

Signal housings sections shall be one-piece moulded polycarbonate and have ribbing to ensure sufficient strength and shall be designed to withstand maximum wind loading as per ITE Publication Number ST-017A-1997. An aluminum reinforcing plate shall be installed in the top section of the signal housing with sufficient fastening points to ensure adequate strength. The top section of the signal housing shall have moulded in serration around a 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) NPT. opening such that the signal heads are capable of being rotated about their vertical axis in increments of 5 degrees over a full 360 degrees of rotation. Individual signal housings shall be self aligning when installed together and shall be attached in such a manner that vibration will not cause them to separate, however, can be separated by means of simple tools.

Signal housing doors shall have inserts and separate screws for visor and lens attachments. Optical units shall be attached to the housing door using four stainless steel or aluminum lens clips and four 12.7 mm (½ inch) x 10 Robertson drive stainless steel screws. These clips and screws shall provide sufficient tension to ensure the lens gasket is sufficiently compressed to prohibit the entry of dust, moisture, and road film to the optical unit. The clips and screws holding the lens should be such that the lens can be rotated or removed without removing either the clip or the screws.

Signal housings shall be constructed with two integrally moulded hinges on the left side and at least one integrally moulded latching screw lug on the right side with lenses oriented for vertical mounting. The location of the hinges and latching mechanism shall be such that when the door is closed, sufficient compression of the gasket is provided to exclude entry of dust, moisture, and road film to the inside of the housing. The latching screw used to secure the door shall consist of a stainless steel eye bolt and wing nut. The eyebolt shall be secured to the signal housing with a stainless steel pin.

Signal housings shall be the colour yellow Federal specification number 595a-33538, opaque and moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent and will not require painting if cracked, dented, or chipped. The signal housing colour shall be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation.

One removable sealing device (bird plug) shall be provided with each traffic signal head. Bird plugs may be flush mounted, two-piece round disc type with bolt, nut and locking washer or one-piece round type complete with a self tapping screw. Friction fit bird plugs are also acceptable.

Tunnel visors shall be one-piece injection moulded polycarbonate, open bottom for approximately 60 mm, and full length for the remaining circumference of the lens. The visor shall be attached to the housing door using four Robertson type screws (minimum 15.9 mm (5/8 inch) in length_ and four brackets. No extra hardware shall be required, and snap fit visors are not acceptable.

The exterior side of the visor shall be the colour yellow Federal specification number 595a-33538 and black Federal specification number 595a-37308 on the interior side of the visor. The visor colour shall be moulded in to ensure the colour remains permanent and will not require painting if cracked, dented, or chipped. The visor shall be ultraviolet stabilized so that fading will not occur with age or ultraviolet radiation.

All signal housing and visor screws shall be stainless steel Robertson type. All other signal housing hardware shall be stainless steel.

Manufactures of Traffic Signal Housings and visors previously approved by the Region include Econolite, Fortran, LFE, McCain and TCT (Peek).

LED optical units including 300 mm red and yellow circular indications must meet ITE VTSCH-LED circular signal supplement specification, latest version. All LED optical units shall be CSA factory approved. The following chart lists LED optical units that have been previously approved by the Region:

Dialight	Leotek	Duralight/ Trastar	EOI	Swarco	GelCore
300 mm Red	433-1210-003XL	TSL-12R-LX-IL6A1	JXC300-HFRTR04	TRV-R12SG-D2T	FL-12R-S2	DR6-RTFB-77A
300 mm Yellow	433-3230-901XL	TSL-12Y-LX-IL6A1	JXC300-HFTG04	TRV-Y12SG-D2T	FL-12A-S2	DR6-GTFB-77A

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of single section flashing beacons supplied and installed.

Payment for four-way overhead flashing beacons shall be by lump sum.

Payment for active advanced warning beacons shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.15.01 – Traffic signal controller, pad mounted (installation only)

Item 4.15.02 – Traffic signal controller, pole mounted (installation only)

Item 4.15.03 – Uninterruptible power supply, pad mounted

Item 4.15.04 – Uninterruptible power supply, pole mounted

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.080, S-410.081, and S-410.082
OPSS.MUNI 620

Also include:

Install Owner-supplied traffic signal controllers and components.

Install Owner-supplied uninterruptible power supply and components.

Supply and install all wiring, wiring connectors, straight blade plug, RJ45 connectors, pole-mounted conduit and fittings, PVC junction boxes, fittings, hardware, and accessories.

Note:

Supplied traffic signal controllers will be Econolite and supplied Uninterruptible power supply will be Alpha Technologies or approved equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pad mounted traffic signal controllers installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pole mounted traffic signal controllers installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pad mounted uninterruptible power installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pole mounted uninterruptible power installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE:

1. Designer to determine which removal item(s) are to be used; there are items in the Roadworks section for the below items, except for footings for steel poles.

2. Ensure all applicable removal items are listed below at Items and withing the specification.

Item 4.17.15 – Removal of concrete footings for signal and lighting poles

Item 4.17.16 – Removal of concrete footing for traffic controller cabinet

Item 4.17.19 – Removal of steel footing for steel pole

Item 4.17.22 – Removal of electrical handhole

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 610

Also include:

Removal of concrete footings and electrical handholes.

Concrete footings and electrical handholes removed shall be disposed off-site.

Removal and salvage of steel footings for steel poles. Salvaged steel footings shall be delivered to the Region of Durham Traffic Operations Centre at 101 Consumers Drive, Whitby.

Note:

Removal of all temporary traffic signal systems shall be paid under the appropriate Temporary Signal System items.

Measurement for Payment:

SPEC NOTE: Ensure a Measurement of Payment for all removal items are listed below.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete footings for traffic and lighting poles removed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete footings for traffic control cabinets removed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of steel footings for steel poles removed and salvaged.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of electrical handholes removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 4.18.02 – 60 fibre optic backbone cable, in duct

Item 4.18.03 – Pull back and reinstall fibre optic cable, in duct

Item 4.18.04 – 84 fibre optic backbone cable, in duct

Item 4.18.05 – 96 fibre optic backbone cable, in duct

Item 4.18.06 – 144 fibre optic backbone cable, in duct

Item 4.18.16 – 12 fibre optic break out cable with integrated patch panel, in duct

Item 4.18.24 – Outdoor fibre optic splice closure for breakout cable

Item 4.18.25 – Outdoor fibre optic splice closure for reel end splice

Item 4.18.26 – Fibre optic cable connection at existing splice closure

Item 4.18.27 – Fibre optic cable connection at existing panel patch

Item 4.18. 28 – Two fibre optic outdoor patch cables, in duct

Item 4.18.29 – Relocate existing fibre optic splice closure for breakout cable

Item 4.18.30 – Relocate existing fibre optic splice closure for reel end splice

Item 4.18.31 – Removal of existing fibre optic cables, in duct

Item 4.18.32 – Removal of existing 12 fibre modular patch panels in traffic signal controllers

Item 4.18.33 – Traffic demarcation pedestal

Item 4.18.34 – Number 12 AWG white tracer wire

Item 4.18.35 – Removal of existing fibre optic cable, in duct

Item 4.18.36 – Removal of existing outdoor fibre optic splice closures

Reference:
RMD Details 1, 2, 3, Fibre Optic layout Detail, and Traffic / Durham OneNet Demarcation Pedestal Detail
OPSS.MUNI 604

General requirements:

When cable on a reel is to be installed in two directions from a central point, or the installation of a cable run is completed in stages, the Contractor shall utilize a figure eight method to coil cable. Any damaged cable sections shall be replaced from splice to splice by the Contractor at his expense.

The cable will be continuous between stations and/or splices as indicated on the plans. The Contractor shall not cut the cable to aid in installation, unless approved in writing by the Region. At locations where selective splicing is required, only those fibres spliced to local drop or branch cables may be severed in the main fibre optic cable run.

Care must be taken in locations where the fibre optic cable is installed in the same duct with an existing copper cable. At each utility vault the cable shall be inspected for any damage to the sheath during the installation. If damage occurs, then installation is to stop, and the installation process modified to avoid damage during installation. If the damage is deemed to have damaged the fibres, then that section of cable shall be replaced at the Contractors expense.

Contractor requirements:

A representative shall be appointed by the Contractor who has three years experience in the installation, testing, and trouble shooting techniques specific to the fibre optic cable being installed.

The Contractor’s representative shall be in attendance at the work during all operations and shall attend such meetings required by the Contract Administrator to coordinate services affected by the Contract.

If the Contractor’s representative is not in attendance at the work, the Contract Administrator may direct the Contractor to cease all work until the Contractor’s representative is on site to do or supervise the work.

Material requirements:

All fibre cable, connectors and hardware must be compatible with the Region’s existing Corning fibre plant.

The Contractor shall be required to submit the specifications for the materials to be supplied for this project (and samples if deemed necessary) within one week of the Region’s request. The Region has the right to accept or reject any materials submitted and may require that the contractor supply alternate materials that meet the Region’s requirements.

The backbone and break out cable shall both include corning glass to ensure compatibility and interoperability. Fibre optic backbone cable shall be supplied to the following specifications:

Number of Fibres:

As per plans.

Construction:

Cable shall have loose tube construction with sheath consisting of medium density polyethylene construction with a nominal thickness of 1.3 mm. The MDPE jacket material shall be as defined by ASTM D1248, Type II, Class C and Grades J4, E7 and E8. The cable shall be all dielectric construction. Cables shall contain at least one ripcord under the outer sheath to facilitate its removal. Cable shall be suitable for aerial or underground installation. The cables shall be GEL Free and be constructed using water-swellable yarns. The central member shall consist of a dielectric, glass reinforced plastic (GRP) rod. The purpose of the central member is to provide tensile strength and prevent buckling. The cable sheath shall be marked with meter length, cable size, fibre type and date of manufacture.

Physical Characteristics:

Minimum static bending radius shall not be greater than 10 X cable diameter. The minimum bending radius during installation and under tension shall not be greater than 20 X the cable diameter. Cable shall be able to withstand a pulling tension of 2700 N (600 lbf) without any resulting damage and 890 N (200 lbf) long term installed. The cable shall have a maximum outside diameter of less than 20 mm.

Environmental:

Cable shall be suitable for operation over a temperature range of negative 40°C to plus 70°C.

Buffer Tubes:

All fibres shall be housed in buffer tubes with a nominal outer diameter of 3.0 mm. Fibres shall be loose and not adhere to the inside of the buffer tubes. Each buffer tube shall contain up to 12 fibres. Buffer tubes shall be color coded as per TIA/EIA 598B “Optical Fibre Cable Color Coding” standards. Buffer tubes shall meet 7 CFR 1755.900 shrink back requirements. Filler tubes of nominal 3.0 mm diameter may be added to the core to provide cylindrical symmetry. A water blocking tape shall be applied longitudinally around the outside of the cable core. The buffer tubes shall be stranded together with the dielectric central member and a water-blocking yarn using the reverse oscillation, or "S-Z," stranding process.

Fibres:

All fibres shall be single mode G652 C or D with a nominal core diameter of 8.3 to 9.0 μm and nominal cladding diameter of 125 μm. All fibres shall be encased in a protective polymer coating. Fibres shall be colored with UV curable inks. Fibres shall be color coded according to TIA/EIA 598B “Optical Fibre Cable Color Coding” standards.

Optical Characteristics:

All fibres shall have an attenuation not greater than 0.4 dB/km at 1310 nm and 0.3 dB/km at 1550 nanometres (nm).

Packaging:

All cable shall be supplied on wooden reels, with both ends of the cable accessible for testing. Each reel shall be clearly labeled with “Region of Durham Fibre Cable Project”, as well as the cable code, length, and date of manufacture. The actual length of the cable shall be within negative zero to plus one per cent of the length markings. The print color shall be white. The entire length of cable between splice locations shall be supplied on a single reel to avoid the necessity for mid span splices.

The backbone and break out cable shall both include corning glass to ensure compatibility and interoperability. The fibre optic breakout cable with integrated patch panel shall be the custom outdoor gatorpatch 12F ODVA pigtail FT4-IO LT part number FCP16244-XX-00 manufactured by Fiber Connections Incorporated or approved equivalent by the Contract Administrator.

SPEC NOTE:

Cables lengths are manufactured to order “XX” in the part number refers to metres. Include length based on worst case scenario between all intersections.

Outdoor fibre optic splice closures shall provide physical protection for splicing of fibre cables. The splice closure shall be suitable for outdoor use, installed in an underground utility vault.

Physical:

The splice closure shall protect the fibres from moisture and mechanical damage and shall be suitable for installation in a subterranean splice vault. The optical fibre closure shall be available in distinct sizes to accommodate a variety of cable entries. The installation of the splice closure shall not require specialized tools or equipment, other than those normally carried by installation crews. The closure shall be capable of safe and proper assembly at temperatures of negative10°C plus or minus 2°C and 40°C plus or minus 2°C using materials and procedures specified by the manufacturer.

Materials:

The splice closure housing shall be non-metallic. It shall be resistant to solvents, stress cracking, and creep. The housing materials shall also be compatible with chemicals and other materials to which they might be exposed in normal applications. All materials in the splice closure shall not support galvanic cell action.

Re-entry:

The splice closure shall be re-enterable in a manner that does not reduce the protection offered by the unit. The closure end cap shall be capable of accepting additional cables without removal of the sheath retention or strength member clamping hardware on previously installed cables or disturbing existing splices.

Strain Relief:

Strain relief provisions suitable for outside plant cables shall be made for each cable entering the closure. The optical fibre splice closure shall provide a clamping mechanism to prevent pistoning of the central member or strength members and to prevent cable sheath slip or pullout.

Splice Trays:

Fibre Optic Splice Trays suitable for fusion splicing shall be supplied with each closure. Sufficient trays shall be supplied to splice all fibres in the closure, placing no more than 12 fibres on a tray. The closure shall accommodate splice trays suitable for single fibre, single fibre heat shrink, or mechanical splices. Spliced fibres shall not be subjected to a bend radius smaller than 30 mm (1.2 inches). Buffer tubes shall not be subjected to a bend radius smaller than 38 mm (1.5 inches). The closure shall provide sufficient space to enclose all splice trays required, as well as at least 1.83m (6 feet) of loose tube buffers from cables entering the closure.

Waterproofing:

The closure shall be able to withstand one metre head of water without any water ingress in the closure for an indefinite period. Encapsulation shall not be required to resist water penetration.

The two fibre optic outdoor patch cables shall be OS2 ODVA LC to LC Uniboot part number D22AKLNNNNLUA20SF-XX-1 manufactured by Fiber Connections Inc. or approved equivalent by the Contract Administrator.

SPEC NOTE: Cables lengths are manufactured to order “XX” in the part number refers to metres. Include length based on worst case scenario between all intersections.

The traffic demarcation pedestal shall be a Fortress plastic pedestal part number PL12124141-1049-RD manufactured by Connect Telecommunications Solutions Incorporated or approved equivalent by the Contract Administrator.

Pre-Installation Testing:

Each backbone fibre reel shall be tested prior to installation in ducts. Pre-installation testing shall include a minimum of 10 per cent of the total fibre optic communications cable. Where 10 per cent equates to more than one fibre, the fibres to be tested shall be located in different buffer tubes. All backbone fibres shall have an attenuation not greater than 0.4 dB/km at 1310 nm and 0.3 dB/km at 1550 nm.

Cable and reel marking verification:

All damage to reels or cable shall be reported to the Region for inspection before pulling. Even in the event of such notification, the Contractor will retain full responsibility for the integrity of the cable.

Prior to setting up a cable reel, Contractor to verify the reel number, size, and length of the cable with the information provided on the cable reel packaging label.

Cable installation:

The Contractor shall use either of the following methods to install the fibre optic cable in the 50 mm (2 inches) or 75 mm (3 inches) pipe.

Mechanical pulling.

Pneumatic (blowing).

A dynamometer shall be used for all pulling operations.

Maximum pulling tensions for cable pulled in conduit shall not exceed 2700 N (600 lbs) or amount specified by cable manufacturer. A 2700 N (600 lbs) breakaway swivel shall be used on all underground cable pulls.

Cable shall not be subjected to a dynamic bending radius of less than 20 times the outside diameter of the cable. The minimum static bending radius for cable in place shall be 10 times the outside diameter of the cable.

Where feasible, continuous cable pulls shall not be made through more than one 90 degree bend or more than a total of 180 degrees in conduit bends. However, when this is not possible, the cable pull shall be monitored to ensure that the pulling tension shall not exceed 2700 N (600 lbs) or the amount specified by the manufacturer.

The Contractor shall record cable footage or meter markings at all utility vault locations.

The use of a factory installed pulling eye is preferred; however, a Kellum grip is acceptable for pulling cable through conduit. It is recommended that the central strength member and/or Kevlar be woven into and secured onto the grip on these pulls.

Cable lubrication shall be used to reduce pulling tension on longer segments of the cable placement operation. Only pulling lubricants approved by the fibre manufacturer shall be used.

At each splice location a 20 m coil of fibre shall be left on each cable end (total of 40 meters) for the splicing and storage of slack cable. This is the length required before preparing the cable for splicing.

Cable ends, in vaults, are to be protected by a splice closure until spliced and tested, and directional tags shall be placed at each location to indicate direction of cable.

The Contractor shall monitor the cable carefully as it unreels, continually inspecting it for sheath defects or damage.

If a cable defect or damage is noticed during the pull, stop the pull and have the Contract Administrator inspect the cable before resuming the pull.

When stops are necessary, the pull line operator shall stop the pulling operation, but shall not release tension unless signaled to do so. In starting up again, the inertia of the cable shall be overcome by gradually increasing the tension in steps a few seconds apart until the cable starts to move.

Storage loops:

Storage loops are required in selected cable vaults as shown on the plans. Such coils shall be formed neatly and stored in the cable vault so that subsequent cables installed through the vault do not pass through the centre of the coil. The length of the slack storage is included in the overall estimated quantities.

Post Installation Testing and Splicing:

Prior to splicing, the optical length of each cable section shall be determined using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) and submitted to the Region with the final test results.

Each length of backbone cable shall be tested after installation in ducts and shall include a minimum of 10 per cent of the single mode fibres to be connected to equipment. The contractor shall not test the same fibres on consecutive lengths. The contractor shall record the reel number from which the cable came, the identification of the fibres measured and the attenuation in db/km of the fibres measured. All backbone fibres shall have an attenuation not greater than 0.4 dB/km at 1310 nm and 0.3 dB/km at 1550 nm.

All fibres shall be spliced in accordance with the contract drawings and as designated on the Fibre Splicing Schematic as provided by the Region.

All fibres are to be fusion spliced and organized and secured in the splice closure.

All spliced fibres shall be protected by sleeve or splice pack.

Each optical fibre with at least one fibre connector shall be tested at 1310 nm and 1550 nm as directed by the Region.

The maximum loss introduced by any single mode splice shall not exceed 0.25 dB.

The Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) test results shall be completed and submitted to the Region as described below.

Splices which do not meet this requirement shall be remade by the Contractor at their expense.

An OTDR capable of producing fibre test documentation on electronic media shall be utilized for this Work. Fibre splice test data shall be submitted to the Region in a portable document format (PDF) by email within one week following the completion of all fibre testing.

All test equipment shall be calibrated within six months prior to testing.

A sticker with the date of calibration from the factory or certified test lab shall be fixed to equipment.

A certification document shall accompany all test data for that piece of equipment.

The OTDR shall be capable of storing traces electronically and shall have suitable dynamic range and performance characteristics.

A patch cord of sufficient length to ensure that start of the fibre under test is not in the “dead zone” of the OTDR shall be used for all testing, and the first connector of the link under test shall be visible on the trace.

When connecting to bare fibres for power meter/light source or OTDR tests, the Contractor shall use either bare fibre adaptors, or temporarily connect a fibre optic pigtail to the bare fibre using a mechanical splice or fusion set (the fibres may be aligned in the fusion set without actually fusing for this method).

Prior to testing, all fibre optic connectors and bare fibre ends shall be properly cleaned using a residue free alcohol solution (better than 91 per cent de-natured alcohol and distilled water) and compressed air.

The vertical and horizontal scales used on the OTDR shall be expanded to maximize the amount of detail shown on the OTDR trace.

The fibre number and end points of the fibre link under test (“from” and “to”) shall be recorded electronically on the OTDR with the trace.

The Contractor shall ensure that traces identify the end points of the fibre under test and the fibre designation. If this information is not provided by the trace itself, a cross-reference table between the stored trace file name and the fibre designation shall be provided.

End-to-End Power Test:

Each optical link (fibre link terminated with optical connectors on each end) shall be tested from end to end using a 1310 nm and 1550 nm stabilized high light source and power meter. Calibration between the light source and power meter shall be performed at the beginning of each day of testing and after every 20 optical link measurements.

Documentation:

Test data documents shall be submitted to and approved by the Contract Administrator and shall form part of the project as-built documentation.

The test data documents submitted shall be legible, completely filled out, and in a portable document format (PDF).

The test data documents shall contain the following:

Identification of test equipment used for each test and accompanying calibration certificate.

OTDR fibre test reports for each span including end point locations, testing dates, cable identification, fibre identification, span measurements, OTDR traces, and OTDR events tables.

Contractor must submit Test data to the Region for review and approval prior to the project completion deadline and final payment being released by the Region.

Coordination:

Except as otherwise noted, or as approved by the Contract Administrator, adjacent or adjoining facilities shall not be disturbed, altered. or damaged in any way to permit the construction of this Work.

As described in the scope of work, the Contractor is required to install the fibre break out into the traffic cabinets in the presence of the Region of Durham representative. The contractor should coordinate all testing and commissioning of the cable plant with the Region of Durham representative.

Discrepancies and conflicts:

Discrepancies and conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Contract Administrator prior to commencement of work on that portion of the Work. No additional payment will be made for correction of errors made in this regard.

Also include:

Supply and installation of cables, regardless of type or number of fibres, including all hardware, fittings, connectors, wire markers, tape, splices, terminations, fish lines, coils, slack cable, protection, barriers, mechanical supports, quality control, testing and commissioning.

Supply and installation of fibre optic breakout cable with integrated patch panel and splice closures, regardless of type, including all hardware, fittings, connectors, wire markers, tape, splices, terminations, coils, slack cable, mechanical supports, quality control, testing and commissioning.

Removal and reinstallation of fibre cables, regardless of fibre count.

Relocation and reinstallation of existing fibre optic splice closures including all hardware, fittings, connectors, wire markers, tape, splices, terminations, coils, slack cable, mechanical supports, testing, and commissioning.

Removal of existing fibre optic slice closures, fibre optic cables, and 12 fibre optic modular patch panels. Materials shall be disposed of off-site.

Supply and installation of traffic demarcation pedestals regardless of type including all hardware and fittings.

Supply and installation of number 12 AWG white tracer wire between traffic signal controller, traffic demarcation pedestal and vault including all hardware, fittings, connectors, wire markers, terminations, and slack cable.

Measurement of Payment:

Measurement for fibre optic backbone cable shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct from centre to centre of vaults. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 4.18.02, 4.18.04, 4.18.05, and 4.18.06)

Measurement of fibre optic backbone cable being pull backed and reinstalled shall be by length in metres.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of 12 fibre optic breakout cables with integrated patch panels installed in traffic demarcation pedestals.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of breakout cables outdoor fibre optic splice closures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of reel end outdoor fibre optic splice closures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of existing splice closures at which fibre optic cable connections were completed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of existing panel patches at which fibre optic cable connections were completed.

For measurement purposes a count shall be made of the number of two fibre optic outdoor patch cables installed.

For measurement purposes a count shall be made of relocated fibre optic splice closures for breakout cables.

For measurement purposes a count shall be made of relocated fibre optic splice closures for reel end splices.

Measurement for removal of fibre cables shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct from centre to centre of vaults and traffic signal controllers.

For measurement purposes a count shall be made of 12 fibre modular patch panels removed from traffic signal controllers.

For measurement purposes a count shall be made of traffic demarcation pedestals supplied and installed.

Measurement for number 12 AWG white tracer wire shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct from centre to centre of traffic demarcation pedestals and traffic signal controllers.

For measurement purposes a count shall be made of existing fibre optic splice closures removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Roadway Illumination

Reference:

Construct all roadway illumination items and appurtenances according to OPSS.MUNI 106 and the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

Contract Drawings for Contract D202x-xx.

Reference Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx.

The Contractor shall provide one copy of the ESA final certificate of inspection to the Contract Administrator.

Qualifications of Electrical Subcontractor

The Contractor shall use an Electrical Subcontractor who has established a successful track record of being able to complete the proposed electrical work using experienced, fully trained and qualified staff. Personnel directly involved in the performance of electrical work shall have a minimum of five year’s related experience in providing these or similar services. All electrical work shall be performed by or under the direct supervision of a licensed electrician. Further, roadway illumination and roadway illumination control equipment installation, inspection, and testing shall be performed by or under the direct supervision of a licensed electrician.

Materials Supplied or Salvaged by Owner

Materials to be supplied by the Owner shall be picked up at the Region of Durham’s Traffic Operations Centre, 101 Consumers Drive, Whitby.

The Contractor shall make specific arrangements with the Region’s Stock Keeper 48 hours prior to the materials being ready for pick up. Contact the Stock Keeper at 905-666-8116.

Hours available for material pick up or salvaged material drop off will be between the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 2:30 p.m., Monday through Friday. Access to and from the Traffic Operations Centre yard will not be granted outside of these hours.

The Owner guarantees to the Contractor that all materials packaged and ready for pick up are free of defects. The Contractor is responsible for inspecting all materials ready for pick up for defects prior to loading such materials for transportation.

The Contractor shall provide the appropriate labour and equipment required to pick up and transport the materials. The Contractor shall ensure that all materials are safely secured, connected or packaged prior to transporting such materials.

The Contractor is solely responsible for materials supplied by the Owner during pick up, transportation, storage and installation. Materials damaged or missing in any way shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator by the Contractor at his expense.

Item 4.01.02 – Single 50 mm diameter flexible HDPE duct (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.03 – Single 75 mm diameter flexible HDPE duct (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.10 – Two 50 mm diameter flexible HDPE ducts (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.11 – Two 75 mm diameter flexible HDPE ducts (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.13 – Three 50 mm diameter flexible HDPE ducts (trenchless installation)

Item 4.01.14 – Three 75 mm diameter flexible HDPE ducts (trenchless installation)

Item 4.02.02 – Single 50 mm diameter rigid PVC duct (open cut)

Item 4.02.03 – Single 75 mm diameter rigid PVC duct (open cut)

Item 4.02.04 – Single 100 mm diameter rigid PVC duct (open cut)

Item 4.02.17 – Two ducts, any diameter rigid PVC (open cut), in same trench

Item 4.02.18 – Three ducts, any diameter rigid PVC (open cut), in same trench

Item 4.02.19 – Four ducts, any diameter rigid PVC (open cut), in same trench

Reference:
RMDSD S-200.020, S-400.030, S-400.032, and S-400.033
OPSS.MUNI 603
OPSD 2100.05, 2101.01, 2103.02, 2103.05, 2103.06, and 2123.01
Clause 603.07.19.02 of OPSS.MUNI 603 is deleted and replaced with the following:

All ducts shall be inspected and tested to ensure that they are constructed as specified in the Contract Documents. All ducts shall be tested to ensure that they are free of debris, water, breakage, or distortion by pulling a mandrel through the ducts. The mandrel shall be solid, round and have a diameter of 6 mm less than the nominal duct diameter. The Contractor shall give the Contract Administrator 24 hours notice of when this testing will be carried out.

Also include:

Supply and install ducts, fittings, fish lines, tracer wires, marker tape, and other materials.

Backfill with granular materials at locations below the roadway, shoulders, or driveways. For all other locations, backfill with Select Native Materials.

Supply and install fish lines in all ducts.

Supply and install tracer wire with all roadway illumination interconnect ducts. Tracer wire shall be installed outside of the duct(s) and shall be brought into each electrical chamber beside the bell-end. Provide a 1.5 m loop of tracer wire inside each electrical chamber.

Supply and install red marker tape with repeating black lettering “Caution – Buried Electric Line”, or similar message, in all trenches as per OPSS.MUNI 603 and OPSD 2100.05.

Break into existing electrical chambers and install ducts where indicated on the Contract Drawings according to RMDSD S-400.030, S-400.032 or S-400.033 as applicable or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Cap and mark the location of the end of all ducts not terminating in electrical chambers or pole foundations according to OPSS.MUNI 603.

Note:

Rigid ducts shall be heavy wall PVC duct meeting CSA Standard C22.2 Number 211.2-06 (R2011) or latest revision.

Flexible ducts shall meet standards UL 651A; ASTM F2160-10 Schedule 40; NEMA TC 7-2013 for type EPEC-40-HDPE.

Fish lines shall be 13 mm (1/2 inch) woven polyester tape (Mule tape) that is min. 560 kg in strength, and is free of knots, splices, and defects of any kind.

Tracer wire shall be coated (white), 7 strand, 12 gauge TW75, TWU75 or RW90XLPE rated at minus 40C.

Minimum depth of excavation shall be the greater of 760 mm from original ground or 1200 mm below the centreline of the roadway. The plow method shall not be used.

Measurement for Payment:

Single duct items, measurement shall be made of the actual length, in metres, of single duct installed complete in place.

Where item calls for multiple ducts, measurement shall be made of the actual length, in metres, of duct banks installed complete in place including specified number of ducts. No additional payment shall be made for the second, third and successive ducts installed in the same trench.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

If the Contractor chooses to substitute flexible ducts with rigid ducts, payment for those rigid ducts shall be at the unit price bid for the tender item Flexible Ducts.

The work of providing clearance for required Utility crossing shall be administered as Change in the Work.

Item 4.02.23 – Extra over duct - unshrinkable backfill

Reference:
RMDCS Section 02315

Include:

Supply and place unshrinkable fill where specified on the Contract Drawings and according to RMDCS Section 02315.

Dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with Reg. 406/16, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Protect open trench until unshrinkable fill has cured sufficiently to place overlying materials.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of unshrinkable fill shall be by volume, in cubic metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.03.01 – 2 cond. number 10 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.02 – 2 cond. number 8 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.23 – 3-1 cond. number 10 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.24 – 3-1 cond. number 8 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.25 – 3-1 cond. number 6 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.26 – 3-1 cond. number 2 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.27 – 2-1 cond. number 10 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.28 – 2-1 cond. number 8 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.29 – 2-1 cond. number 6 AWG, low-voltage cable, in duct

Item 4.03.70 – Pull back and reinstall existing cable, in duct

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 604 and 2409
OPSD 2242.02, 2245.01, 2245.02, and 2545.01

Also include:

Supply and install cables, regardless of type, gauge, and number of conductors.

Supply and install all hardware, fittings, connectors, wire markers, tape, splices, solder, terminations, fish lines, coils, slack cable, protection, barriers, and mechanical supports.

Removal and reinstallation of cables, regardless of type, AWG, and number of conductors.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for cable shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct and aerial cable; from centre to centre of poles, pole footings, electrical chambers, junction boxes, sign footings, and traffic signal controller cabinet pads; and to the face of bridge structures, retaining walls, and substation pads.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.04.02 – Ground electrode, ground rod

Reference:
RMDSD S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 609
Subsection 609.05.01 of OPSS.MUNI 609 is amended by the deletion of the requirement for copper cladding.

Also include:

Provide thermite weld connections to ground wire.

Place 600 mm lengths of 100 mm diameter duct, painted red, over each ground rod connection prior to backfilling. Remove duct sleeves and backfill over the ground rods after inspection is complete.

Note:

Ground rod connections shall remain exposed for inspection by the Electrical Safety Authority and the Contract Administrator prior to backfilling.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of ground electrode, ground rods installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.04.03 – Ground electrode, ground plate

Reference:
RMDSD S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 609
Subsection 609.07.14.02 of OPSS.MUNI 609 is amended by the deletion of the third paragraph in its entirety.

Also include:

Excavate by mechanical device, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means and dispose of excess or unsuitable materials.

Backfill with granular materials.

Provide thermite weld connections to ground wire.

Place 600 mm lengths of 100 mm diameter duct, painted red, over each ground plate connection prior to backfilling. Remove duct sleeves and backfill over the ground plates after inspection is complete.

Note:

Ground plate connections shall remain exposed for inspection by the Electrical Safety Authority and the Contract Administrator prior to backfilling.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of ground electrode, ground plates installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.04.04 – Number 6 AWG green insulated ground cable, in duct

Item 4.04.05 – Number 12 AWG green insulated ground cable, in duct

Reference:
RMDSD S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 609

Also include:

Supply and installation of ground wire complete with all hardware.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for green insulated ground cable in duct shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct, from centre to centre of poles, pole footings, electrical chambers, or enclosures; sign footings; controller cabinet pads, and ground electrodes; or the face of bridge structures, retaining walls, and substation pads.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.04.06 – Number 2/0 AWG bare copper ground cable, direct buried

Item 4.04.07 – Number 6 AWG bare copper ground cable, direct buried

Reference:
RMDSD S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 609

Also include:

Excavation and disposal of excess or unsuitable materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/16, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and installation of ground wire complete with all hardware.

Backfill and compaction of granular materials to meet 100 per cent Standard Proctor Density.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for direct buried bare copper ground cable shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the trench, from centre to centre of poles, pole footings, electrical chambers, or enclosures; sign footings; controller cabinet pads, and ground electrodes; or the face of bridge structures, retaining walls, and substation pads.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.05.01 – Steel pole, base mounted

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 615 and 620
OPSD 2415.011

Include:

Supply and installation of base mounted steel poles.

Note:

Steel poles shall be xx m long, (sectional) steel octagonal/round poles.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of steel poles base mounted supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.05.02 – Wooden pole, direct buried in earth

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 501, 615 and 620
OPSD 2210.020 and 2238.01

Also include:

Supply and installation of direct buried wooden poles.

Backfill with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Note:

Wooden poles shall be class xx, xx m long.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of wooden poles direct buried in earth supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 4.05.03 – Concrete pole, direct buried in earth

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 501, 615 and 620
OPSD 2225.010

Also include:

Supply and installation of direct buried concrete poles.

Backfill excavation above concrete encasement with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Note:

Concrete poles shall be Class xx, xx m long.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete poles direct buried in earth supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 4.05.14 – 5.5 m sectional steel pole, direct buried

Item 4.05.15 – 7.3 m heavy-duty steel pole, base mounted

Item 4.05.16 – 9.1 m heavy-duty steel pole, base mounted

Item 4.05.17 – 10.7 m heavy-duty steel pole, base mounted

Item 4.05.18 – Guy anchor

Item 4.05.19 – Guy strut

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.020 and S-410.021
OPSS.MUNI 615, 501, and 2453 are only used for Item 4.05.14
OPSD 2215.03, 2220.01, 2228.010, 2232.010, 2235.010, and 2428.01

Also include:

Supply and installation of octagonal steel poles.

Supply and installation of round sectional steel direct buried poles. Backfill with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Supply and installation of guy anchors.

Supply and installation of guy struts.

Note:

Octagonal Steel Roadway Illumination Pole

The information provided below is applicable to both light and heavy-duty octagonal steel traffic poles. The two types of octagonal steel traffic poles are differentiated by the size of the taper where the steel traffic pole meets the base plate. The taper of the heavy-duty steel traffic pole is the larger of the two types.

The steel traffic pole shaft and base plate shall be constructed of Low Silicon Steel. All steel used in the production shall be according to CSA G40.21, grade 300 W, for shafts and 300 WT, for base plates.

The standard finish shall be hot dip galvanize and shall conform to ASTM A 123 or the CSA specification Number G164-M92 or subsequent revisions thereof.

The welding shall conform to the specifications of CSA number W47.1-92, and number W59-M1989 approved as amended from time to time.

Bolt holes in pole base plates shall be elliptical in construction.

All steel traffic poles shall be constructed with a 100 mm x 300 mm (4 inches x 12 inches) handhole and cover with gasket hardware and frame. The handhole shall be located 460 mm (18 inches) above the base plate and incorporate a 6 mm (1/4 inch) national coarse ground stud on the inside of the handhole.

All steel traffic poles shall come equipped with a top cap complete with bolt assembly - not welded.

Each pole shall have the following identification markings located approximately 100 mm above the top of the handhole:

Manufacturer's name or trade mark.

Length.

Gauge of steel.

Bolt circle diameter.

Date of manufacture (e.g., yyyy-mm-dd).

These markings shall be on a corrosion-resistant metal plate securely attached to the surface of the pole.

The base plate, bolt circle and shaft dimensions shall be as follows for steel traffic pole heights as shown:

Steel Traffic Pole	Height	Base Plate	Bolt Circle Elliptical	Shaft
Heavy-Duty	7.3 m	25 mm x 395 mm x 395 mm	395 mm	11 GA x 248 mm x 125 mm
Heavy-Duty	9.1 m	25 mm x 395 mm x 395 mm	395 mm	11 GA x 248 mm x 125 mm
Heavy-Duty	10.7 m	25 mm x 395 mm x 395 mm	395 mm	11 GA x 248 mm x 125 mm

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of base mounted heavy-duty steel poles supplied and installed. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 4.05.12, 4.05.15, 4.05.16 and 4.05.17)

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of direct buried sectional steel poles supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of guy anchors supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of guy struts supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.06.03 – 760 mm diameter type III concrete footing for steel poles

Reference:
RMDSD S-400.010
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 616432

Also include:

Lay out proposed concrete footing locations and verify with the Contract Administrator prior to excavation.

Backfill with granular materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete footings for steel poles installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.06.06 – Frangible bases

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 615
OPSD 2215.03 and 2428.01

Also include:

Supply and installation of frangible bases.

Note:

Frangible bases to be grooved coupler type manufactured by Manitoba Safe-T-Base Model 1600 P x 1-1/4 meeting the requirements of OPSD 2428.01 or an approved equivalent as per MTO DSM List.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of frangible bases supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.07.07 – Roadway lighting luminaire

Item 4.07.08 – Roadway illumination elliptical tapered aluminum arm bracket

Item 4.07.20 – Number 12 AWG riser wires and accessories

Item 4.07.21 – Pole fuse holder assemblies

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.020
OPSS MUNI 617
OPSD 2250.01, 2255.020, and 2420.01

Also include:

Supply and install luminaires, arm brackets, riser wires, fuse assemblies, and all other hardware.

Supply and install riser wires inside the poles and signal arm and connect to the external wiring circuit in the underground conduit, by wire connectors in pole handholes.

Supply and install fuse holders inside roadway lighting poles.

Note:

Road lighting luminaires shall be xx V operated, xx W, IES distribution type xx and shall meet the following:

IES photometric file number: xx.

Luminaire manufacturer: xx or reviewed equivalent.

Catalogue number: xx or reviewed equivalent.

Provide shop drawings for review and approved prior to ordering of luminaires.

Arm brackets shall be xx m long with xx m rise, elliptical tapered aluminum mast arms as manufactured by xx catalogue number xx or reviewed equivalent.

Riser wires shall be number 12 AWG RW90.

Fuse holders shall be in-line type suitable for use with number 12 AWG conductors. Ferraz Shawmut type FEB BA with one 10 amp, 600 V rated Ferraz Shawmut type ATM fuse, or Amerace 65 waterproof fused connector kits. In-line fuse holders and fuses shall not be used where luminaires are to be installed on traffic signal poles.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of roadway luminaires supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of roadway illumination elliptical tapered aluminum arm brackets supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of number 12 AWG riser wires and accessories supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pole fuse holder assemblies supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.09.01 – Electrical handhole 450 mm diameter non-concrete

Reference:
RMDSD S-300.070, S-300.090, and S-400.030
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 602
OPSD 2112.02 and 2118.02

Subsection 602.05.08 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is amended by the addition of the following:

Handhole frame and cover assemblies shall be 460 mm diameter and shall be according to OPSD 2112.02.

Clause 602.07.11.02 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is deleted and replaced with the following:

602.07.11.02 Electrical Handholes

Handholes shall be installed according to RMDSD S-400.030.

Electrical handholes shall be non-concrete materials according to the appropriate Region of Durham standard drawing.

Electrical handholes shall be installed plumb, true to alignment and grade, and firmly bedded on the drainage pocket backfill.

Subsection 602.07.12 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is amended by the addition of the following:

During installation, the duct entry holes shall be oriented in the required direction. Duct entry holes shall be drilled with a hole saw no more than 6 mm larger than the outside diameter of the entering duct or fitting. Except as shown otherwise on the applicable Region of Durham standard drawing, holes shall be oriented so that all ducts enter the handhole at the same elevation, level, and aligned to the centre of the handhole. Holes shall not be drilled closer than 50 mm apart.

Handholes installed with duct entry holes made larger than specified or made using a device other than a hole saw shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Patching of oversized or irregular shaped duct entry holes shall not be permitted.

During installation, the handhole shall be adjusted to facilitate the required elevation of the frame and cover as specified in the Contract Documents.

The second paragraph of Subsection 602.07.13 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is deleted and replaced with the following:

Metal handhole frames shall be connected to the system ground wire using number 6 AWG copper wire and suitable ground lugs. number 6 AWG ground wire shall be connected between the frame or the system ground wire and the cover using suitable ground lugs with at least 1.5 m of wire left loose for cover removal.

Subsection 602.07.16 of OPSS.MUNI 602 is amended by the addition of the following:

Handhole frame and cover assemblies shall be adjusted to the required cross-fall and connected to the handhole pipe material using three 9 mm stainless steel bolts. The handhole pipe shall be notched sufficiently at cover mounting bolts to allow the frame to sit flush onto the top of the handhole pipe and to allow dirt and debris to easily fall through cover mounting bolt holes.

Handhole covers shall be fastened securely to the frame using the 19 mm standard thread stainless steel bolts.

Also include:

Excavate using auger, backhoe, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install all handhole materials including frame and cover assemblies and 450 mm diameter PVC or HDPE pipe all according to RMDSD S-400.030.

Backfill handholes installed within medians, shoulders or in sidewalks using Granular B, Type I (Modified) and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Backfill handholes installed in grassed areas using Select Native Materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of 450 mm diameter non-concrete electrical handholes supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.09.02 – Electrical handhole 460 mm diameter precast concrete

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 602
OPSD 2112.02, 2117.02, 2118.020, and 2123.03

Also include:

Excavate using auger, backhoe, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means and dispose of excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install precast concrete electrical handhole and all handhole materials.

Backfill handholes installed within medians, shoulders or in sidewalks using Granular B, Type I (Modified) and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Backfill handholes installed in grassed areas using Select Native Materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of 460 mm diameter precast concrete electrical handholes supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.09.03 – Adjustment of existing electrical handhole

Reference:
RMDSD S-400.031
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 602

Also include:

Adjust existing PVC or HDPE handhole and reconnect rim and lid assembly according to RMDSD S 400.031.

Backfill handholes installed within medians, shoulders or in sidewalks using Granular B, Type I (Modified) and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Backfill handholes installed in grassed areas using Select Native Materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of existing handholes adjusted.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.09.08 – Electrical handhole 675 mm diameter precast concrete

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 501 and 602
OPSD 401.010, 704.010, 2112.030, 2117.020, 2118.020, 2123.01, and 2123.030

Also include:

Excavate using auger, backhoe, jet/vacuum, hand dig or other suitable means and dispose of excess or unsuitable materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install ducts, fittings, hardware, and granular materials.

Supply and install precast concrete electrical handhole, two 50 mm precast concrete adjustment units, frame, and Type A closed cover.

Fill duct entry holes with grout according to OPSD 2123.01 (entry of direct buried ducts in electrical maintenance holes) in place of expandable foam as outlined in OPSD 2123.03 (entry of direct buried and encased ducts in electrical hand holes).

Backfill handholes installed within medians, shoulders or in sidewalks using Granular B, Type I (Modified) and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Backfill handholes installed in grassed areas using Select Native Materials and compact according to OPSS.MUNI 501.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of 675 mm diameter precast concrete electrical handholes supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.11.01 – Square D model number CQO18M100RB

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.091, S-410.092, S-410.093, and S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 614

Also include:

Supply and install supply control cabinet assembly.

Supply and installation of meter base (where specified), vertical runs of conduit and cables, connections and fittings, adapters and brackets, protective moulding, vertical runs of ground wire and all connections, excluding ground wire and ground rods or plates beyond the edge of poles.

All costs for Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) inspection.

Note:

Power Supply shall be Square D load center catalogue number as specified on Contract Drawings.

To be CSA certified, Factory Assembled, NEMA Type 3R Enclosure, 125 amp Rating, 120/240 V, 1Phase, 3 Wire.

Complete with:

One Main Breaker, 100 amp, double pole.

12 Branch Circuit Breakers, 30 amp, single pole.

Cabinet rated 125 amp minimum.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of Square D model number CQO18M100RB control cabinet assemblies supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 4.11.03 – Power supply control cabinet on steel pole

Item 4.11.04 – Power supply control cabinet on wooden pole

Item 4.11.06 – Power supply control cabinet on concrete pole

Item 4.11.07 – Meter base

Reference:
RMDSD S-410.091, S-410.092, and S-411.020
OPSS.MUNI 614

Also include:

Supply and install supply control cabinet assembly.

Supply and install meter base (where specified), vertical runs of conduit and cables, connections and fittings, adapters and brackets, protective moulding, vertical runs of ground wire and all connections, excluding ground wire and ground rods or ground plates beyond the edge of poles.

Note:

Supply control cabinet shell be Square D load center model CQO18M100RB60 with four 15 amp single pole breakers model QO115 and a secondary surge suppressor model QO2175SB, or an equivalent assembly as approved by the Contract Administrator.

Conduit and fittings for the installation of pole mounted equipment shall be rigid PVC meeting the requirements of CSA C22.2 Number 211.2 below the cabinet and aluminum above the cabinet as per RMDSD S-410.091.

Meter Base must be a CSA approved 120/240 V 200 amp minimum rated, 4 jaw S-Base outdoor overhead type meter base. Confirm meter manufacturer and model meets the current version with the appropriate Hydro Authority prior to installation.

All costs for Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) inspection.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of pole mounted power supply control cabinets supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of meter bases supplied and installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE:

1. Designer to determine which removal item(s) are to be used; there are items in the Roadworks section for the below items, except for footings for steel poles.

2. Ensure all applicable removal items are listed below at Items and within the specification.

Item 4.17.15 – Removal of concrete footing for steel pole

Item 4.17.19 – Removal of steel footing for steel pole

Item 4.17.22 – Removal of electrical handhole

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 610

Also include:

Removal of concrete footings and electrical handholes.

Concrete footings and electrical handholes removed shall be disposed off-site.

Removal and salvage of steel footings for steel poles. Salvaged steel footings shall be delivered to the Region of Durham Traffic Operations Centre at 101 Consumers Drive, Whitby.

Note:

Removal of all temporary signal systems shall be paid under the appropriate Temporary Signal System items.

Measurement of Payment:

SPEC NOTE: Ensure a Measurement of Payment for all removal items are listed below.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete footings for steel poles removed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of steel footings for steel poles removed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of steel footings for steel poles removed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of electrical handholes removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Structures

Index 5.405 – Construction specification for pipe subdrains

Item 5.405.01 – 150 mm diameter perforated plastic subdrain with filter cloth

Item 5.405.02 - 150 mm diameter non-perforated plastic subdrain with rodent grate

Item 5.405.03 - 150 mm diameter perforated CSP subdrain with filter cloth

Item 5.405.04 - 150 mm diameter non-perforated CSP subdrain with rodent grate

Item 5.405.05 - Closed-circuit television inspection

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 405
OPSD 3102.100

Also include:

Supply and placement of all crushed stone/clear stone material and geotextile for the installation of the subdrain, as per the Contract Drawings.

Supply and installation of rodent grates at exposed outlet locations.

Note:

The Contractor shall install sloped 150 mm diameter perforated or non-perforated HDPE or CSP or PVC subdrains behind each abutment wall and at each approach sleeper slab.

Geotextile shall be placed around clear stone bedding. Perforated or non-perforated pipe shall be installed within the clear stone bedding and secured in place to prevent movement or disturbance during subsequent operations.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pipe subdrain shall be by length in metres horizontally along the centreline of the pipe between the ends of the pipe subdrain, including outlets, or between the upstream end of the pipe subdrain and the centre of a maintenance hole, catch basin, or ditch inlet.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When excavation and backfilling of subdrain and outlet pipe overlaps the excavation and backfilling required for other work, payment for overlapping excavation and backfilling shall be made in accordance with the specifications for such other work as though no excavation and backfilling were required for pipe subdrain.

Index 5.416 – Construction specification for pipeline and utility installation by jacking and boring

Item 5.416.01 – Jack and boring

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUN 416

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of jacking and boring shall be by length in metres along the centreline of the casing pipe from the start to the end of the installed pipe.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The removal of boulders having a volume in excess of 0.5 cubic metres shall be paid for as Extra Work.

Index 5.421 – Construction specification for pipe culvert installation in open cut

SPEC NOTE: For Items 5.421.01/.02/.03/.04, when multiple culvert sizes are used for each culvert type/material, then distinguish items with letters. For example: 5.421.01.A, 5.421.04.B/5.421.02.A, 5.421.02.B/5.421.03.A, 5.421.03.B/ 5.421.04.A, 5.421.04.B etc.

Item 5.421.01 – xxx mm diameter, CSP/HDPE, class x pipe culverts

Item 5.421.02 – xxx mm x xxx mm, CSP, class x non-circular pipe culverts

Item 5.421.03 – xxx mm diameter, CSP/HDPE, class x pipe culvert extensions

Item 5.421.04 – xxx mm x xxx mm, CSP, class x non-circular pipe culvert extensions

Item 5.421.05 – Granular bedding for pipe culvert

Item 5.421.06 – Supply and place xx mm diameter crushed stone bedding

Item 5.421.07 – Supply and place xx mm diameter clear stone bedding

Item 5.421.08 – Clay seal

Item 5.421.09 – Concrete appurtenances

Item 5.421.10 – Culvert end section

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 1010
OPSS.MUNI 314, 421, 501, 902, and 1010

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pipe culverts shall be along the horizontal length of the pipe in metres, from one end of the pipe to the other end of the pipe. When the grade of the pipe culvert is 10 per cent or greater, the above measurement shall then be of the slope length.

Measurement of non-circular pipe culvert shall be along the horizontal length of the pipe in metres, from one end of the pipe to the other end of the pipe. When the grade of the pipe culvert is 10 per cent or greater, the above measurement shall then be of the slope length.

Measurement of pipe culvert extensions shall be along the horizontal length of the pipe in metres, from one end of the pipe to the other end of the pipe. When the grade of the pipe culvert is 10 per cent or greater, the above measurement shall then be of the slope length.

Measurement of non-circular pipe culvert extensions shall be along the horizontal length of the pipe in metres, from one end of the pipe to the other end of the pipe. When the grade of the pipe culvert is 10 per cent or greater, the above measurement shall then be of the slope length.

Measurement of granular bedding for pipe culvert shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Measurement of crush stone bedding shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Measurement of clear stone bedding shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Payment for clay seals shall be by lump sum.

Payment for concrete appurtenances shall be by lump sum.

Payment for culvert and sections shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this item shall include all labour, material, and equipment to supply and place 300 mm depth Granular A bedding, compacted to 100 per cent Standard Proctor Density, for the full length of the pre-cast concrete culvert and extending 200 mm either side of the culvert.

When the Contract requires swamp excavation to place a pipe culvert, payment for the swamp excavation shall be under the tender item covering the swamp excavation for earth embankment construction. No alterations shall be made to the tender item for the pipe culvert so affected.

Index 5.422 – Construction specification for precast reinforced concrete box culverts in open cut

SPEC NOTE: When multiple culvert sizes are used, then distinguish items with letters. For example: 5.422.01.A, 5.422.04.B, etc.

Item 5.422.01 – xxx mm x xxx mm precast concrete box culvert

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 422, 904, 905, and 919

Also include:

Provide 25 mm diameter butyl gaskets and 1.0 m wide Class I (light-duty), non-woven geotextile filter fabric (Terrafix 270R, Mirafi 140NL, or Armtec 160) around each joint between precast concrete culvert sections.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of the actual length of box culvert installed shall be made in metres along the centreline of the invert of the box culvert.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this item shall include all labour, material, and equipment to supply and place 300 mm depth Granular A bedding, compacted to 100 per cent Standard Proctor Density, for the full length of the precast concrete culvert and extending 200 mm either side of the culvert.

Item 5.422.02 – Precast concrete rigid frame

Item 5.422.03 – Precast concrete footing

Item 5.422.04 – Precast concrete retaining wall

Item 5.422.05 – Granular bedding for concrete box culvert

Item 5.422.06 – Supply and place xx mm diameter crushed stone bedding for concrete box culvert

Item 5.422.07 – Supply and place xx mm diameter clear stone bedding for concrete box culvert

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 1010
OPSS.MUNI 314, 501, 902 and 1010

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for precast concrete rigid frame shall be by lump sum.

Payment for precast concrete footing shall be by lump sum.

Payment for precast concrete retaining wall shall be by lump sum.

Measurement of granular bedding for concrete box culvert shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Measurement of crushed stone bedding for concrete box culvert, supplied and placed shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Measurement of clear stone bedding for concrete box culvert, supplied and placed shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for this item shall include all labour, material, and equipment to supply and place 300 mm depth Granular A bedding, compacted to 100 per cent Standard Proctor Density, for the full length of the precast concrete culvert and extending 200 mm either side of the culvert.

Index 5.500 – Miscellaneous

Item 5.500.01 – Bridge plaque

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)

Scope:

Under this tender item the Contractor shall install a 250 mm x 150 mm bronze identification plaque recessed into the northwest/northeast/southwest/southeast concrete endwall as shown on the Contract Drawing, including all required fastening, as directed by the Contract Administrator. (SPEC NOTE: Specify the applicable quadrant and structure component where the plaque is being installed)

The plaque shall be anchored to the concrete end post with four - number 10 stainless steel screws.

The Region shall supply the plaque and hardware to the Contractor for installation.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of plaques installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 5.500.02 – Plug existing deck drains

Item 5.500.03 – Armour stone retaining wall

Item 5.500.04 – Preparation of the site

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of plugs installed in existing deck drains.

Measurement of armour stone retaining wall shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Payment for the preparation of the site shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.510 – Construction specification for removal

Item 5.510.01 – Removal and disposal of existing structure

Item 5.510.02 – Removals from existing structure

Item 5.510.03 – Removals of bridge footings

Item 5.510.04 – Removals of modular bridge

Item 5.510.05 – Removals of modular bridge substructure

Item5.510.06 – Removal of asphalt pavement from concrete surfaces on structures

Item 5.510.07 – Removal of asphalt membrane waterproofing from bridge deck

Item 5.510.08 – Removal of concrete

Item 5.510.09 – Removal of gabions

Item 5.510.10 – Removal of sign support structure

Item 5.510.11 – Removal of sign support structure footings

Item 5.510.12 – Hoarding

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 510, 539, and 902

Also include:

Remove and dispose off-site the existing asphalt pavement from concrete surface and membrane waterproofing from bridge deck.

Remove and dispose off-site existing railings on parapet walls.

Remove and dispose off-site the top portion of existing cleats.

Remove and dispose off-site the existing bearings.

Retain existing reinforcing steel where indicated on the Contract Drawings.

Contractor shall remove graffiti from the existing abutments and wingwalls by soda blasting, as indicated on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent any debris from falling into the watercourse. Any material which falls into the watercourse shall be located and removed and the bed shall be cleaned of all debris prior to completion of the Contract to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor shall observe all safety laws and regulations in carrying out the work of these items.

All removals from the existing structure, except specifically noted, shall remain the property of the Contractor to be properly disposed of by the Contractor off the project site at a location arranged by the Contractor at their own expense and to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Blasting shall not be permitted for any work under these items.

Work under these items shall not commence without prior approval in writing from the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment progress for the removal and disposal of existing structure will be made as following:

At the rate 40 per cent of the lump sum price bid upon satisfactory erection of the protection.

Remaining 60 per cent of the lump sum price bid for removal of the protection system and restoration of the area.

Payment for the removals from existing structure shall be by lump sum.

Measurement of removal of bridge footings shall be by volume in cubic metres of the concrete removed.

Payment for the removals of modular bridge shall be by lump sum. This work shall include the dismantling, removal and salvage of the modular bridge components, all timber in the deck, curbs, running strips, and steel beam guide rail system attached to the bridge. The work shall include the unloading and erection of the launching nose and subsequent dismantling.

Payment for the removals of modular bridge substructures shall be by lump sum.

This work shall include the removal of modular bridge substructures, bank seats, cribs, timber and steel bents and any rock in cribs.

The modular bridge substructure materials shall be removed from the right-of-way or managed as specified in the Contract Documents.

Rocks from cribs shall not be placed in any waterbody.

Measurement of removal of asphalt pavement from concrete surfaces on structures shall be by area in square metres.

Measurement of removal of asphalt membrane waterproofing from bridge deck shall be by area in square metres.

Measurement of removal of concrete shall be by volume in cubic metres of the concrete removed.

Measurement of removal of gabions shall be by volume in cubic metres.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of sign support structures removed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of sign support structure footings removed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of hoarding installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.511 – Construction specification for rip-rap, rock protection, and granular sheeting

Item 5.511.01 – Rock protection

Item 5.511.02 – River run stone

Item 5.511.03 – Geotextile

Item 5.511.04 – Rip-rap

Item 5.511.05 – Granular sheeting

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 511

Also include:

Cover the construction joint on the culvert between Phase I and Phase II of the cast-in-place concrete option with Class I (light-duty), non-woven geotextile filter fabric (Terrafix 270R, Mirafi 140NL, or Armtec 160). The cloth shall extend from the top of the foundation walls to the top of the units, and across the top of the culvert, for 3 m on either side of the construction joint.

SPEC NOTE: Use ‘Also include’ Clause .1 for Items 5.511.01/.02/.03

Note:

Filter fabric for the precast culvert option is not included in this Special Provision.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of rock protection shall be by volume in cubic metres. The volume is a product of the area of the rock protection measured following the contour of the ground by its depth. Truck box measurement shall be used when it is not possible to take and in place measurement.

Measurement of river run stone shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Measurement of geotextile shall be by area in square metres following the contour of the ground, without any allowance made for overlaps.

Measurement of rip-rap shall be by area in square metres following the contour of the ground.

Measurement of granular sheeting shall be by area in square metres.

Basis for Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When there is not a separate tender item for geotextile, payment for the geotextile shall be included in the tender item for rip-rap/rock protection/granular sheeting.

Index 5.512 – Construction specification for installation of gabions

Item 5.512.01 – Gabions

Item 5.512.02 – Gabion mattress

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 512

Include:

Excavate and dispose of excavated excess materials in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place Class I (light-duty), non-woven geotextile filter fabric (Terrafix 270R, Mirafi 140NL, or Armtec 160).

Supply and place gabion baskets and gabion stone complete.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of gabions shall be by volume in cubic metres based on the nominal dimensions of the gabions used. When the gabion excavation overlaps excavation required for other work, the measurement shall be made as specified with no deduction for overlaps.

Measurement of gabion mattresses shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Any costs associated with any unauthorized over-excavation shall be the Contractor’s responsibility and at no additional cost to the Owner.

Index 5.539 – Construction specification for temporary protection systems

Item 5.539.01 – Protection system

Item 5.539.02 – Cofferdams

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 539 and 805

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for protection systems shall be by lump sum.

For measurement purposes, a count of the number of cofferdams constructed, maintained, and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for the cofferdam shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

Index 5.902 – Construction specification for excavating and backfilling - structures

Item 5.902.01 – Earth excavation for structure

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 902

SPEC NOTE:
1. Dewatering of the existing structure should not be included in Earth Excavation for Structure. It should be a separate tender item as per OPSS.MUNI 902 and that tender item SP should reference OPSS.MUNI 517 and OPSS.MUNI 518. Similarly, removal of the existing structure should be in a separate tender item and the SP for that tender item should reference OPSS.MUNI 510.
2. Designer shall include a specification for the above tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of earth excavation for structure shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 5.902.02 – Rock excavation for structure

Item 5.902.03 – Unwatering structure excavations

Item 5.902.04 – Dewatering system

Item 5.902.05 – Temporary flow passage system

Item 5.902.06 – Granular backfill to structure

Item 5.902.07 – Engineered fill

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 517 and 902

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of rock excavation for structure shall be by volume in cubic metres.

Payment for unwatering structure excavations shall be by lump sum.

Payment for dewatering system shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the temporary flow passage system shall be by lump sum.

Measurement of granular backfill to structure shall be by volume in tonnes.

Measurement of engineered fill shall be by volume in tonnes.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.903 – Construction specification for deep foundations

Item 5.903.01 – Supply equipment for installing driven piles

Item 5.903.02 – Supply equipment for installing caisson piles

Item 5.903.03 – Supply equipment for installing displacement caisson piles

Item 5.903.04 – H-piles

Item 5.903.05 – Tube piles

Item 5.903.06 – Precast concrete piles

Item 5.903.07 – Wood piles

Item 5.903.08 – Displacement caisson piles

Item 5.903.09 – Caisson piles

Item 5.903.10 – Driving shoes

Item 5.903.11 – Rock points

Item 5.903.12 – Sheet piles

Item 5.903.13 – Sheet pile enclosure

Item 5.903.14 –Load test

Item 5.903.15 – Retapping piles

Item 5.903.16 – Extraction of piles upon premature refusal (provisional)

Item 5.903.17 – Extract piles (provisional)

Item 5.903.18 – size, type pile casing (SPEC NOTE: Add the size and type of pile casing)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 903

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the supply equipment for installing drive piles shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the supply equipment for installing caisson piles shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the supply equipment for installing displacement caisson piles shall be by lump sum.

Measurement of H-piles shall be by length in metres of the piling left in place after cut-off.

Measurement of tube piles shall be by length in metres of the piling left in place after cut-off.

Measurement of precast concrete pile shall be by length in metres of the piling left in place after cut-off.

Measurement of wood piles shall be by length in metres of the piling left in place after cut-off.

Measurement of displacement caisson piles shall be by length in metres of the depth along the centreline between the approved bearing surface at the bottom and the specified elevation at the top.

Measurement of caissons piles shall be by length in metres of the depth along the centreline between the approved bearing surface at the bottom and the specified elevation at the top.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of driving shoes used.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of rock points used.

Measurement of sheet piles shall be by area in square metres based on the driving lines specified and the length of piling left in place after cut-off.

Measurement of sheet pile enclosures shall be by area in square metres.

For measurement purpose, a count shall be made of the number of load tests completed.

Payment for retapping piles shall be by lump sum above and beyond the minimum number described in the Retapping Tests on Piles clause.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of extraction of piles upon premature refusal completed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of extract piles completed.

Measurement of pile casing shall be my length in metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

For payment purposes, 50 per cent of the work under this item is completed when the satisfactory performance of the equipment has been demonstrated to the Contract Administrator by the installation of 1 per cent of piles. The remaining 50 per cent shall be paid on the satisfactory completion of the installation of piles. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 5.903.01, 5.903.02 and 5.903.03)

When the hammer performance is requested to be verified, such verification shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner when the energy delivered is less than 90 per cent of the stated potential energy (rated energy) specified in the submission. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 5.903.01, 5.903.02 and 5.903.03)

Payment for redriving piles shall be at the Contract price for the applicable tender item above. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 5.903.04 to 5.903.14)

When the Contractor substitutes driving shoes or Oslo points with Titus H bearing pile points, the cost of such substitutions shall be at no extra cost to the Owner. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 5.903.04 to 5.903.14)

Retapping the minimum specified number of piles for retapping tests shall include all labour, equipment, and material to do the work and shall be included in the Contract price for the appropriate pile tender item. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Item 5.903.15)

Where additional retapping is required, payment shall be made based on the ratio of the number of piles retapped in a pile group above the minimum requirement, up to the total number of piles in that pile group, times the tender price for retapping all piles for that pile group. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Item 5.903.15)

SPEC NOTE:
For Index 5.903 Basis of Payment refer to the following:
1. Clauses .2 and .3 – Additional Clauses to be used for Items 5.903.01, 5.903.02 and 5.903.03.
2. Clauses .4 and .5 – Additional Clauses to used for Items 5.903.04/.05/.06/.07/.08/.09/.10/.11/.12/.13/.14.
3. Clauses .6 and .7 – Additional Clauses for Item 5.903.15.

Index.5 904 – Construction specification for concrete structures

Item 5.904.01 – Concrete in footings

Item 5.904.02 – Concrete in barrier wall footings

Item 5.904.03 – Concrete in piers

Item 5.904.04 – Concrete in abutments and wingwalls

Item 5.904.05 – Concrete in abutment

Item 5.904.06 – Concrete in wingwall

Item 5.904.07 – Concrete in structure

Item 5.904.08 – Concrete in substructure

Item 5.904.09 – Concrete in substructure and retaining walls

Item 5.904.10 – Concrete in bearing pedestals

Item 5.904.11 – Concrete in deck

Item 5.904.12 – Concrete in light pole bases

Item 5.904.13 – Concrete in deck topping

Item 5.904.14 – Concrete in sidewalks

Item 5.904.15 – Concrete in median

Item 5.904.16 – Concrete in barrier walls

Item 5.904.17 – Concrete in parapet walls

Item 5.904.18 – Concrete in end walls

Item 5.904.19 – Concrete in approach slabs

Item 5.904.20 – Concrete in sleeper slab

Item 5.904.21 – Concrete in crash wall

Item 5.904.22 – Concrete in slope paving

Item 5.904.23 – Concrete in toe wall

Item 5.904.24 – Concrete in collar

Item 5.904.30 – Concrete working slab

Item 5.904.31 – Mass concrete

Item 5.904.32 – Lean concrete

Item 5.904.33 – Unshrinkable fill

Item 5.904.34 – Tremie concrete

Item 5.904.35 – Concrete in culvert

Item 5.904.36 – Concrete in distribution slab

Item 5.904.37 – Concrete in retaining wall

Item 5.904.38 – High performance concrete in substructure

Item 5.904.39 – High performance concrete in structure

Item 5.904.40 – High performance concrete in approach slabs

Item 5.904.41 – High performance concrete in deck

Item 5.904.42 – High performance concrete in sidewalk

Item 5.904.43 – High performance concrete in barrier wall

Item 5.904.44 – High performance concrete in parapet wall

Item 5.904.45 – High performance concrete in substructure and retaining wall

SPEC NOTE: List each concrete item for tender at start of section then list again with specifications.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 904, 910, 919, and 1350

Shipping of Concrete Test Cylinders

In addition to the requirements of OPSS.MUNI 904.10, payment whether by the lump sum or by the cubic metre, will include compensation for shipping concrete test cylinders to the location designated by the Contract Administrator.

Aggregate Sources

Only those sources listed on the Aggregate Sources List for Concrete shall be used; sources that are not shown on this list may be accepted by the Contract Administrator after samples have been tested and have met the current physical requirements and the alkali reactivity requirements of OPSS.MUNI 1002.

Curing Concrete

Concrete shall be cured by covering exposed, fresh concrete with at least two layers of wet burlap covered with opaque white plastic sheets for the number of days as shown in Section 904.07.10 of OPSS.MUNI 904. Burlap shall be kept continuously soaked with clean water. Strips of wet burlap shall overlap by at least 150 millimetres. Plastic sheets shall be at least 100 um thick and shall be of standard commercial quality, free from snags, tears or other flaws in order to provide a tough, pliable moisture barrier. The plastic sheets shall overlap by a minimum of 300 mm and shall be held in place against wind or otherwise.

General

All dust and loose particles shall be removed from inside the forms using compressed air just prior to placing of concrete. Any surface against which concrete is to be placed shall be wetted just prior to placing the concrete. No standing water shall be permitted in the formwork.

Concrete shall not be placed until all reinforcement and formwork has been inspected by the Contract Administrator. Access for such inspection shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator at least 48 hours before any scheduled concrete pours to allow sufficient time to carry out inspection of the reinforcing steel by the Contract Administrator. No claims for additional compensation shall be entertained for concrete placement delays as a result of corrective action required on the part of the Contractor with respect to the placed reinforcement.

Removal of the forms shall be subject to the following condition:

Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has reached a strength of 25 MPa.

Joint faces of hardened and fresh concrete shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements as specified elsewhere in the Contract.

Under these Items and for the Contract unit prices bid, the Contractor will include:

Supply and installation of all joint filler, Bakor Polybitume 570-05, expanded and extruded polystyrene, caulking, EVA foam, etc., and similar Items as indicated on the drawings, and as required to complete the structure.

The Contractor shall remove and dispose of off-site all formwork at the completion of the Work. Also included under these Items of work, the Contractor shall ensure that no material, equipment, or debris is allowed to enter the watercourse.

Cold weather concrete shall be in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 904. No additional payment will be made for cold weather concrete operations.

Formwork and false work will not be measured for payment.

Materials

Section 904.05 of OPSS.MUNI 904 is amended by the addition of the following sub-sections:

904.05.15 Abrasives for Blast Cleaning
Abrasives for blast cleaning shall be angular to sub-angular in shape, and not more than one per cent shall pass a 300 m sieve.

Construction

Subsection 904.07.13 of OPSS.MUNI 904 is amended by the addition of the following:

Construction joints shall be neat, properly formed and well bonded.

V-grooves shall be straight and true to line and grade.

A chamfered keyway shall be required where shown on the Contract Drawings.

All joint faces shall be cleaned prior to placing bonding agent or concrete so that all dirt, oil, grease, or debris is removed.

Field Testing and Sampling of Concrete

Clause 904.07.06.01 of OPSS.MUNI 904, is amended by the addition of the following:

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that only concrete which is in accordance with the submitted mix design, and which meets the specification requirements for air content, slump, temperature and delivery time, is included in the Work.

Field testing and sampling of concrete shall be done by a person certified as a concrete field testing technician by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA), or by the American Concrete Institute (ACI). This person shall:

Have successfully completed as part of the certification requirements, written and practical examinations within the last five years verifying his/her competence to carry out field testing of concrete (slump, air content, temperature and casting of cylinders).

Have in his/her possession at all times field testing is to be performed, a card issued by the certifying agency verifying the currency of the individual's certification.

After each day’s work the Contractor shall submit, to the Contract Administrator, records of concrete air content, slump, temperature, delivery time, all adjustments made to the air content and slump of the load of concrete after delivery and shall identify rejected material.

Mobile Concrete Mixing Plants

OPSS.MUNI 1350.07 is amended in that the use of mobile continuous concrete mixing plants is prohibited for all concrete produced for this Contract.

Early Loading of Structural Concrete

Full design loads shall not be applied to the structure until the specified 28-Day compressive strength has been attained. Early loading of a structural component is permitted, unless expressly stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, subject to the following conditions:

Prior to any early loading, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the concrete has reached a compressive strength of 20 MPa by preparing, curing, and transporting early strength cylinders according to the Testing for Early Strength subsection.

Subsequent placement of reinforcement, formwork and falsework on a footing, culvert base slab, or caisson shall not begin until at least 24 hours after concrete placement, provided that concrete in the footing, culvert base slab, and caisson can withstand the forces exerted. Placement of concrete on the footing, culvert base slab, or caisson shall not be carried out until the concrete has reached a compressive strength of 20 MPa.

Subsequent placement of reinforcement, formwork, falsework, and concrete on all other structural components shall not be carried out until the concrete has reached a compressive strength of 20 MPa.

Early loading of concrete is not permitted where cold weather protection is required.

Construction vehicles shall not be permitted on bridge decks until the concrete has reached a compressive strength of 20 MPa and construction vehicles shall not be permitted on the cantilever portion of the bridge deck until the specified 28-Day compressive strength has been achieved. Gross vehicle weight of the construction vehicles shall not exceed 20,000 kg.

Full curing is to be maintained at all times as specified in the Contract Documents.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of concrete shall by Plan Quantity Measurement, in cubic metres.

Section 904.09.02.01 of OPSS.MUNI 904 is deleted and replaced by the following:

Payment for each concrete item shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the concrete tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work, subject to payment adjustments specified in the Contract Documents.

Surface cavities greater than 50 mm and honeycombing shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.

Payment at the Contract price for the tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work, except that payment for the reinforcing steel bars or coated reinforcing steel bars or stainless steel reinforcing bars used as the dowels shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 905. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 5.904.26 to 5.904.29)

No payment shall be made for dowels that fail the pull test, except where the failure is due to concrete breakout. SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 5.904.26 to 5.904.29)

Repair to the concrete required due to Contractor’s operations shall be made at no cost to the Owner. SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 5.904.26 to 5.904.29)

For any dowels that fail the pull test as a result of concrete breakout failure and not by bond failure, payment for repairs to concrete resulting from concrete breakout failure during the pull test and the cost of the replacement dowel shall be made as Extra Work. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 5.904.26 to 5.904.29)

The cost of additional testing according to the Acceptance of Dowels into Concrete clause shall be at the Contractor’s expense and shall be a lump sum of $1,000 with additional cost of $50 per dowel. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Items 5.904.26 to 5.904.29)

When a concrete working slab is required by the Contract Administrator, payment shall be made as Extra Work at the unit price of the concrete in the footing to be placed on it. (SPEC NOTE: Use for Item 5.904.30)

Item 5.904.01 – Concrete in footings

Item 5.904.02 – Concrete in barrier wall footings

Item 5.904.03 – Concrete in piers

Item 5.904.04 – Concrete in abutments and wingwalls

Item 5.904.05 – Concrete in abutment

Item 5.904.06 – Concrete in wingwall

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 904

Also include:

Supply and installation of all joint filler, Bakor Polybitume 570-05, expanded and extruded polystyrene, caulking, EVA foam, etc., and similar Items as indicated on the drawings, and as required to complete the structure.

Concrete in the reconstructed wingwalls where barrier walls are replaced.

Item 5.904.07 – Concrete in structure

Item 5.904.08 – Concrete in substructure

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 904

Also include:

Place concrete in the reconstructed portions of the wingwalls and cleats.

Install all required foams, fillers, elastomers, and associated components required to perform the work.

Item 5.904.09 – Concrete in substructure and retaining walls

Item 5.904.10 – Concrete in bearing pedestals

Item 5.904.11 – Concrete in deck

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 904
OPSD 3340.150

Also include:

Place concrete in the reconstructed bridge deck, including portions of intermediate, pier, and abutment diaphragms.

Place concrete in the semi-integral deck ends.

Install concrete curb as hand work.

Install deck drains.

Install all required foams, fillers, elastomers, and associated components required to perform the work.

Complete all required surveys and checks to provide and confirm girder elevations to the Contract Administrator / Engineer, in order to determine final screed elevations.

Finishing the surface of the deck in conformance with OPSS.MUNI 904.

Item 5.904.12 – Concrete in light pole bases

Item 5.904.13 – Concrete in deck topping

Item 5.904.14 – Concrete in sidewalks

Item 5.904.15 – Concrete in median

Item 5.904.16 – Concrete in barrier walls

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 904

Also include:

Supply and installation of all joint filler, caulking, expanded and extruded polystyrene, EVA foam, etc., and similar Items as indicated on the Contract Drawings, as required to complete the structure and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Supply and installation of anchorages for the guide rails and channels as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Maintaining formwork in place a minimum of three days after concrete placement and prior to stripping.

Include the supply and installation of the anchorages for the aluminum barrier rail.

Item 5.999.01 will include the installation of the bridge plaque in the Northwest and Southeast quadrants.

Item 5.904.17 – Concrete in parapet walls

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 904

Also include:

Concrete in parapet walls shall include the placement of concrete in the new end walls for box bean railings as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Form and cast recess for new inset plaque at southeast end wall.

Item 5.904.18 – Concrete in end walls

Item 5.904.19 – Concrete in approach slabs

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 904

Also include:

Place concrete in the new approach slabs and approach slab curbs.

Place concrete in the new sleeper slabs at approach slab ends.

Supply and install a double layer of polyethylene sheet beneath the approach slabs.

Supply and install type ‘A’ bituminous joint filler between approach slabs and wingwalls.

Supply and install Dow-Corning 888 joint sealant (or approved equivalent).

Supply and install elastomer on the approach slab seats.

Supply and install polystyrene on cleats.

Supply and install bond breaker on sleeper slab seat.

Supply and install weep tubes.

Item 5.904.20 – Concrete in sleeper slab

Item 5.904.21 – Concrete in crash wall

Item 5.904.22 – Concrete in slope paving

Item 5.904.23 – Concrete in toe wall

Item 5.904.24 – Concrete in collar

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 904

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above concrete tender items.

Item 5.904.25 – Prestressed concrete bridge deck

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)

Item 5.904.26 – Dowels into concrete - reinforcing steel

Item 5.904.27 – Dowels into concrete – stainless steel reinforcing

Item 5.904.28 – Dowels into concrete – GFRP reinforcing

Item 5.904.29 – Dowels in rock

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 904

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above dowel tender items.

Item 5.904.30 – Concrete working slab

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 904

Include:

Supply and place 20 MPa non-reinforced concrete, 100 mm thick, under culvert bottom slab to provide a “working slab”. This item may be deleted in whole or in part at the discretion of the Contract Administrator.

Item 5.904.31 – Mass concrete

Item 5.904.32 – Lean concrete

Item 5.904.33 – Unshrinkable fill

Item 5.904.34 – Tremie concrete

Item 5.904.35 – Concrete in culvert

Item 5.904.36 – Concrete in distribution slab

Item 5.904.37 – Concrete in retaining wall

Item 5.904.38 – High performance concrete in substructure

Item 5.904.39 – High performance concrete in structure

Item 5.904.40 – High performance concrete in approach slabs

Item 5.904.41 – High performance concrete in deck

Item 5.904.42 – High performance concrete in sidewalk

Item 5.904.43 – High performance concrete in barrier wall

Item 5.904.44 – High performance concrete in parapet wall

Item 5.904.45 – High performance concrete in substructure and retaining wall

SPEC NOTE: Add the applicable specification for Items 5.904.31 to 5.904.45

Index 5.905 – Construction specification for streel reinforcement for concrete

Item 5.905.01 – Reinforcing steel bar

Item 5.905.02 – Stainless steel reinforcing bar

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 905

Section 905.05.01 of OPSS.MUNI 905 is amended by the addition of the following:

Manufacture and Fabrication of Stainless Steel Reinforcement

The manufacture of stainless steel reinforcing bars shall be by a manufacturer listed under “Mills” in the MTO’s Designated Sources for Materials listing DSM number 9.65.76 "Reinforcing Steel, Stainless, Mills and Fabricators."

Fabrication of stainless steel reinforcing bars shall be by a fabricator listed under “Fabricators” in the MTO’s Designated Sources for Materials listing DSM number 9.65.76 "Reinforcing Steel, Stainless, Mills and Fabricators."

Note:

Condition/Finish: reinforcing stainless (SPEC NOTE: Remove if black reinforcing steel bars are used) steel bars and shapes shall be hot rolled and pickled or hot rolled and descaled to the required mechanical properties and dimensions.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of reinforcing steel bar shall be by mass in tonnes.

Measurement of stainless steel reinforcing steel bar shall be by mass in tonnes.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 5.905.03 – Epoxy coated reinforcing steel bar

Item 5.905.04 – Mechanical connectors

Item 5.905.05 – Stainless steel mechanical connectors

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional reference; add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 905

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of epoxy coated reinforcing steel bar shall be by mass in tonnes.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of mechanical connectors installed.

For measurement of purposes, a count shall be made of the number of stainless steel mechanical connectors installed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.906 – Construction specification for structural streel for bridges

Item 5.906.01 – Fabrication of structural steel

Item 5.906.02 – Delivery of structural steel

Item 5.906.03 – Erection of structural steel

Item 5.906.04 – Supply and install prefabricated pedestrian bridge

Item 5.906.05 – Deck drainage system

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 906

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of fabrication of structural steel shall be by mass in tonnes.

Measurement of delivery of structural steel shall be by the actual mass in tonnes of the structural steel delivered to project site.

Measurement of erection of structural steel shall be by the actual mass in tonnes of the structural steel erected on project site.

Payment for the supply and installation of prefabricated pedestrian bridge shall be by the lump sum.

Payment for the deck drainage system shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.907 – Construction specification for structural wood systems

Item 5.907.01 – Wood in structure

Item 5.907.02 – Wood in cribs

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 907

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of wood in structure shall be by volume in cubic metres using dressed dimensions of the wood with no deductions for grooves, notches, and holes.

Measurement of wood in cribs shall be by volume in cubic metres using dressed dimensions of the wood with no deductions for grooves, notches, and holes.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When rock is available on the Contract, no deduction shall be made from the tender item “Rock Excavation, Grading,” for the quantity of rock used in cribs.

When excavation for wood cribs overlaps excavation for other work, measurement of the overlapping excavation shall be according to the specification for such other work.

SPEC NOTE: Use all three Clauses for Item 5.907.02

Index 5.908 – Construction specification for metal traffic barriers and metal railings for structures

Item 5.908.01 – Metal traffic barrier

Item 5.908.02 – Barrier wall railing

Item 5.908.03 – Parapet wall railing

Item 5.908.04 – Pedestrian railing

Item 5.908.05 – Bicycle railing

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 908
Ministry of Transportation of Ontario Structural Standard Drawings, xxx.xxxx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable MTO Structural Drawing reference)

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of metal traffic barrier shall be by length in metres from end to end of barrier.

Measurement of barrier wall railing shall be by length in metres from end to end of railing.

Measurement of parapet wall railing shall be by length in metres from end to end of railing.

Measurement of pedestrian railing shall be by length in metres from end to end of railing.

Measurement of bicycle railing shall be by length in metres from end to end of railing.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.909 – Construction specification for prestressed concrete - precast members (SPEC NOTE: For each item, specify the type of the prestressed concrete member by replacing the “type” text without the quotation marks)

Item 5.909.01 – Prestressed concrete members “type” fabrication

Item 5.909.02 – Prestressed concrete members containing silica fume “type” fabrication

Item 5.909.03 – Prestressed concrete members “type” delivery

Item 5.909.04 – Prestressed concrete members containing silica fume “type” delivery

Item 5.909.05 – Prestressed concrete members “type” erection

Item 5.909.06 – Prestressed concrete members containing silica fume “type” erection

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 909

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the prestressed concrete members fabrication shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the prestressed concrete members containing silica fume shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the prestressed concrete members delivery shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the prestressed concrete members containing silica fume delivery shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the prestressed concrete members erection shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the prestressed concrete members containing silica fume erection shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.910 – Construction specification for stressing systems for post – tensioning

Item 5.910.01 – Longitudinal stressing system

Item 5.910.02 – Transverse stressing system

Item 5.910.03 – Vertical stressing system

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 910

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the longitudinal stressing system shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the transverse stressing system shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the vertical stressing system shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

50 per cent of the Contract price shall be paid on completion of the stressing. The remainder shall be paid after completion of the grout curing and review of the 28-Day compressive strength test results by the Contract Administrator and be based on any payment adjustment calculated.

For stressing system payment adjustment:

The results of the compressive strength tests of the six cubes made for each sublot shall be averaged. The average of the test results for all sublots shall then be averaged. The Contract price for the stressing system will be reduced by 2 per cent for each MPa this average is below 60 MPa.

The calculations will be based on the compressive strength of the cubes made from samples taken at the mixer.

Index 5.911 – Construction specification for coating structural steel systems

Item 5.911.01 – Coating existing structural steel

Item 5.911.02 – Coating new structural steel

Item 5.911.03 – Coating steel railing system

Item 5.911.04 – Environmental protection during cleaning and coating of structural steel

Item 5.911.05 – Coating new structural steel sign support structures

Item 5.911.06 – Abrasive blast cleaning structural steel

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 911

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of coating existing structural steel shall be by area in square metres.

Measurement of coating new structural steel shall be by area in square metres.

Measurement of coating steel railing system shall be by area in square metres.

Payment for environmental protection during cleaning and coating of structural steel shall be by lump sum.

Measurement of coating new structural steel sign support structures shall be by area in square metres.

Measurement of abrasive blast cleaning structural steel shall be by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment at the contract price for the tender items Coating Existing Structural Steel and Coating Steel Railing System shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials for the management of spent material, except waste class 146T.

Any costs for the disposal of spent material as waste class 146T, that are additional to those for disposal as a non-hazardous solid industrial waste, shall be paid as Extra Work provisions of the Contract.

Remedial work on environmental protection shall be completed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

Progress payments for the coating items shall be made on the following basis:

Coating existing and new structural steel:

Paint Coatings:

Surface preparation and prime coat:

80 per cent for two coat systems.

70 per cent for three coat systems.

Second coat:

15 per cent for two coat systems.

10 per cent for three coat systems.

Third coat:

15 per cent for three coat systems.

Cleanup and final coating repair:

Five per cent.

Hot dip galvanizing and hot dip galvanizing with paint coatings:

Surface preparation and hot dip galvanizing coat:

90 per cent for hot dip galvanizing only application.

55 per cent for hot dip galvanizing with paint coatings.

Sweep blasting and all coats of paint coating:

35 per cent.

Cleanup and final coating repair atter erection:

10 per cent.

Thermal sprayed metal coating with seal coat:

Surface preparation, metallizing, and seal coat:

90 per cent.

Cleanup and final coating repair:

10 per cent.

Coating steel railing system:

Dismantling, delivery to galvanizer, surface preparation, galvanizing, and coating of post and anchors:

80 per cent.

Delivery to site and erection:

15 per cent.

Cleanup ad final coating repair after erection:

Five per cent.

Progress payments for environmental protection shall be made on the same percentage basis as the coating items for which the environmental protection is required.

Index 5.913 – Construction specification for embedded work in structures for electrical systems

Item 5.913.01 – Embedded work in structure

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 913

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the embedded work in structure shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.914 – Construction specification for waterproofing bridge decks with hot applied asphalt membrane

Item 5.914.01 – Bridge deck waterproofing

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 914
OPSD 3370.100 and 3370.101

Subsection 914.07.08.01 of OPSS.MUNI 914 shall be deleted in its entirety.

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of bridge deck waterproofing shall be by area in square metres. Allowance shall not be made in the measurement for the turn-up at vertical faces, for any overlap, or for a second application of waterproofing membrane over the membrane reinforcement.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 5.914.02 – Membrane reinforcement

Item 5.914.03 – Form and fill grooves

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 914

Also include:

Waterproof entire deck, including approach slabs.

Sawcut and fill grooves at the deck end/approach slab interface.

Note:

Form and fill grooves shall be completed within 48 hours of surface course asphalt paving.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of membrane reinforcement shall be by length in metres. Allowance shall not be made in the measurement for the turn-up at vertical faces or for any overlap.

Measurement of forming and filling grooves shall be by length in metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 5.914.04 – Deck surface preparation

Item 5.914.05 – Modification of deck drains

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 914

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of deck surface preparation shall be by area in square metres.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of deck drains modified, regardless of type and size.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.915 – Construction specification for sign support structures

Item 5.915.01 – Concrete in ground mounted static sign support footings, tri-chord and cantilever

Item 5.915.02 – Concrete in median mounted static sign support footings tri-chord and cantilever

Item 5.915.03 – Concrete in ground mounted variable message sign support footings

Item 5.915.04 – Concrete in median mounted variable message sign support footings

Item 5.915.05 – Concrete in steel monotube overhead sign support footings

Item 5.915.06 – Concrete in steel column breakaway sign support footings

Item 5.915.07 – Concrete in steel column non-breakaway sign support footings

Item 5.915.08 – Tri-chord static sign support structures, span xx m (SPEC NOTE: Add the span length)

Item 5.915.09 – Cantilever static sign support structures, class xx (SPEC NOTE: Add the applicable class)

Item 5.915.10 – Steel monotube overhead sign support structures, span xx m (SPEC NOTE: Add the span length)

Item 5.915.11 – Variable message sign support structures, span xx m (SPEC NOTE: Add the span length)

Item 5.915.12 – Steel column breakaway sign support structures

Item 5.915.13 – Steel column non-breakaway sign support structures

Item 5.915.14 – Wood column breakaway sign support structures

Item 5.915.15 – Wood column non-breakaway sign support structures

Item 5.915.16 – Aluminum bridge mounted sign support structures

Item 5.915.17 – Coating new sign support structure

Item 5.915.18 – Repair of existing structure

Item 5.915.19 – Attachment of sign

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 915

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of ground mounted concrete static sign support footings, tri-chord and cantilevers supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of median mounted concrete static sign support footings, tri-chord and cantilevers supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of ground mounted concrete variable message sign support footings supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of median mounted concrete variable message sign support footings supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete in steel monotube overhead sign support footings supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete in steel column breakaway sign support footings supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete in steel column non-breakaway sign support footings supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of tri-chord static sign support structures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of cantilever static sign support structures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of steel monotube overhead sign support structures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of variable message sign support structures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of steel column breakaway sign support structures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of steel column non-breakaway sign support structures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of wood column breakaway sign support structures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of wood non-breakaway sign support structures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of bridge mounted aluminum sign support structures supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of the coating of new sign support structures completed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of repairs of existing structures completed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of signs attached.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

For payment purposes, the fabrication and delivery of the sign support structures to the work site shall constitute 60 per cent of the work of the tender item.

Replacement of aluminum components that were cracked, ruptured, or damaged during fabrication or erection shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

Index 5.918 – Construction specification for modular bridge structures for temporary installations

Item 5.918.01 – Temporary modular bridge

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 918

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the temporary modular bridge shall by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

For payment purposes, the construction of the modular bridge shall constitute 50 per cent of the work of the tender item.

Index 5.919 – Construction specification for formwork and falsework

Item 5.919.01 – Temporary support

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 919

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the temporary support shall by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.920 – Construction specification for deck joint assemblies, preformed seals, joint fillers, joint seals, joint sealing compounds, and waterstops - structures

Item 5.920.01 – Deck joint assemblies, installation

Item 5.920.02 – Deck joint assemblies, modification

Item 5.920.03 – Repair of existing deck joints

Reference:
Contact Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 920

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of deck joint assemblies, installation shall by length in metres installed.

Measurement of deck joint assemblies, modification shall be by length in metres modified.

Measurement of repaired of existing deck joints shall be by length in metres of the actual repairs completed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When the repairs are not specified in the Contract Documents, payment for the cost of repairing existing deck joints and of repairing concrete prior to the installation of deck joint assemblies or preformed seals shall be administered as Extra Work.

SPEC NOTE: Use Basis of Payment Clause .2 as an additional Clause for Item 5.920.03

Index 5.922 – Construction specification for installation of bearings

Item 5.922.01 – Bearings (size, type)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 922

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for bearings shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The Contract price shall include full compensation for the bearings supplied for destructive testing.

Item 5.922.02 – Jack bridge structure including temporary supports

Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 906, 919, and 922

1.0 Scope

This specification covers the requirements for raising and lowering a bridge superstructure by the use of jacks.

2.0 References

This Special Provision refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction

OPSS.MUNI 906

OPSS.MUNI 919

OPSS.MUNI 922

Structural Steel for Bridges

Formwork and Falsework

Installation of Bearings

Ontario Ministry of Transportation of Ontario Publications

Structural Manual

Designated Sources for Materials (DSM) Manual

CSA Standards

G40.20-013/G40.21-13 General Requirements for rolled or welded structural quality steel / Structural quality steel.

ASTM International

A 563M-15 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

F 436M-16 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers

F 3125M-15a Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 830MPa and 1040MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric)

3.0 Definitions

For the purpose of this Special Provision the following definitions apply:

Jacking Design Engineer means a Professional Engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario retained by the Contractor qualified to provide the services specified in the Contract Documents to both design and certify the provided jacking equipment and jacking methodologies will facilitate the jacking and lowering of the bridge in conformance with the Contract Documents.

Jacking System means all components required to perform the lifting and temporary support of the bridge superstructure. This includes but is not limited to; jacks, hydraulic hoses and fluid, valves, sensors, jacking systems, shims, temporary support systems, and all related appurtenances.

Survey means precise and detailed measurements and elevations taken, recorded, documented, and certified by a licensed Ontario Land Surveyor (OLS) with The Association of Ontario Land Surveyors (AOLS) or a Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario.

4.0 Design and Submission Requirements

4.01 Design Requirements

4.01.01 General

Unless a detailed jacking system design is provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the jacking system. When certain aspects of a jacking system are provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall incorporate these aspects into the design of the jacking system.

When jacking locations are provided in the Contract Documents, they shall be incorporated into the design of the Contractor’s proposed jacking system and shall not be changed.

Where the replacement of bearings is called for in the Contract Documents, the design shall take into account the possible difference in bearings size between the new and the original and ensure that the placement of the temporary supports does not interfere with the proper placing of bearings.

The design shall account for the structural work and condition of the structure at the time of jacking, and the stages that may interfere with temporary supports or jacking locations. It shall take into account any deterioration and/or removals prior to and during the duration of the jacking and remedial work. The design of temporary supports shall account for articulation of the superstructure including thermal movements, as well as any potential slip in supports. Jack and support locations shall account for conflicts between structural work and temporary works designed by the contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for determining an appropriate amount of pre-loading to be applied to the jacks prior to the start of displacement controlled jacking. The pre-loading amount shall be no less than 15 per cent of the specified jacking load and shall be sufficient to account for decompression of bearings, gaps between shims (if used) and any other geometric imperfections in the proposed jacking system.

Shims and blocking used to support the jacks shall also be designed for no less than 150 per cent of the jacking loads specified on the Contract Drawings.

4.02 Submission Requirements

4.02.01 Jacking Drawings and Calculations

The Contractor shall submit three sets of the jacking drawings and calculations and a digital PDF format copy shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator seven days prior to the commencement of the jacking operations, for information purposes only. Submissions shall bear the seals and signatures of the jacking design Engineer and a design checking Professional Engineer, licensed in the Province of Ontario. The cost for the services of these two Engineers shall be paid by the contractor and shall be included in the price for this line item.

The jacking drawings and calculations shall include the following:

Jacking methodology and sequence.

Location, number, type, and capacity of the jacks to be used.

Description of the control system, complete with all design, schematics, and equipment to be used.

Location and material to be used for temporary blocking and shimming.

Proposed pre-loading to be applied to jacks.

Schematic showing the configuration of all jacks, stop valves, gauges, manifolds, and hydraulic pumps.

Current calibration certificates for all jacks, gauges, and lifting/lowering controller.

Full details of the temporary support system including forces to be transmitted and method of transferring the loads to the substructure or founding strata, including considerations for thermal expansion and contraction.

Strengthening of the existing structure where necessary.

Restrictions on traffic and construction traffic.

Any required modifications to accommodate the proposed jacking system that may affect the final configuration of the bridge shall be submitted as a written proposal to the Contract Administrator prior to commencing jacking operations.

The Contractor shall have a copy of the signed and sealed jacking drawings at the site during jacking setup and operations.

4.02.02 Revised Submissions

When jacking design considerations or field conditions necessitate amendments to the jacking drawings, revised jacking drawings shall be submitted according to the Jacking Drawings and Calculations subsection.

5.0 Materials

5.01 Structural Steel

All structural steel shall be according to CSA G40.20/G40.21.

5.02 High Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers

High strength bolts shall be according to ASTM F 3125M.

High strength nuts, and hardened washers shall be suitable for use with the types of bolts being specified and shall be according to ASTM A 563M, and ASTM F 436M.

The nuts, bolts, and washers shall be shipped together as an assembly from the manufacturer. The requirements outlined in the Test Reports for Fasteners clause found in OPSS.MUNI 906 shall apply.

5.03 Mechanical and/or Adhesive Anchors

Mechanical and/or adhesive anchors shall be suitable for dynamic loads and shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

5.04 Grout

Cement based non-shrink grout shall be supplied from sources named in the DSM manual.

6.0 Equipment

6.01 Synchronized Jacking System

A synchronized jacking system shall consist of either a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) controlled system or a volumetric controlled system. The system shall be capable of adjusting pressures and hydraulic volumes in order to achieve a uniform lift and/or lowering to a tolerance of not more than 1.0 mm from the leading to lagging cylinders.

6.01.01 Programmable Logic Controlled Jacking System

A PLC controlled system shall include a central unit which continuously monitors the relative and absolute position of each individual jacking point.

6.01.02 Volumetric Controlled Jacking System

A volumetric controlled jacking system shall be fully calibrated and designed to precisely deliver the same volume of hydraulic oil to each individual jack at the same time when the same make and model of jacks are used at all locations.

When different makes and models of jacks are used, the system shall be capable of adjusting for differing amounts of fluid required at different jacks in order to comply with the specified lifting and lowering tolerances.

6.02 Displacement Sensors

The synchronized jacking system shall display real-time data for each jack location showing vertical displacement, hydraulic pressure, and applied force for monitoring purposes during the jacking operation. The data shall be automatically recorded at one second intervals in a data log file for the entire duration of the jacking/lowering operation(s) and stop only after the bridge is firmly on the temporary supports or permanent bearings.

Each jacking location shall have either a digital displacement sensor or linear transducer accurate to 0.1 mm to monitor displacements. The displacement sensors can be either integrated into the jacking system or independently monitored such that displacement sensors, stroke sensors or calibrated volumetric control system is capable of achieving the relative lift/lowering tolerances specified in the Contract Documents. For jacks supported on temporary fixtures (such as jacking corbels), independent displacement sensors shall be used, and measurements shall be made relative to a fixed location on the adjacent bearing seat.

A data log file shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator within seven days of any jacking operation in Microsoft Excel format (or Approved equivalent). Data log file format is to be in a table with individual columns representing each displacement sensor reading in millimetres, hydraulic pressure, and applied force at each jacking location. Individual rows shall represent the time in hour:minutes:seconds format.

7.0 Construction

7.01 Pre-Construction Surveys

Prior to the start of any work related to the jacking operation, the Contractor shall carry out field measurements of all components of the existing structure that might impact the installation of the jacking system and ensure that any necessary adjustments to the jacking drawings and calculations based on these field measurements are made accordingly. The jacking design Engineer and the design checking Engineer shall then determine whether any adjustments to the jacking system based on the field measurements will be required. If adjustments to the jacking drawings and calculations are required, the jacking drawings and calculations shall be resubmitted to the Contract Administrator along with a request for approval.

The Contractor shall take measurements of the underside of deck or girders at bearing locations prior to jacking the structure as part of this detailed survey and shall be relative to an adjacent fixed point on the substructure which will not move during construction. This shall include a minimum of one local fixed marking on the abutment or pier immediately adjacent to each lift point and bearing location. This marking must be located such that it will not be moved or compromised by the construction operations. Measurements to the underside of each girder and lifting point shall be made relative to the corresponding fixed marking, which shall be recorded accurate to 1 mm.

The Contractor shall submit these measurements to the Contract Administrator prior to jacking.

7.01.01 Detailed Survey

Prior to the start of any work related to the jacking operation, the Contractor shall perform a detailed survey to establish geodetic elevations of the existing bridge deck, curb, and crown along deck joints to remain. The survey shall be in addition to the pre-construction survey, and the Contractor shall submit the results to the Contract Administrator prior to jacking.

7.02 Structural Steel

All structural steel fabrication, delivery and erection shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 906.

7.03 Formwork and Falsework

All formwork and falsework shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 919.

7.04 Installation of Bearings

When jacking is required for the installation, replacement or adjustment of bearings, the requirements of OPSS.MUNI 922 shall apply.

7.05 Jacking

7.05.01 General

The Contractor shall ensure that all existing expansion joints are free to move vertically prior to jacking. Bolts securing the handrail posts to the parapet walls, if present, shall be loosened to permit jacking without damaging the handrails.

Upon completion of the fabrication and installation of the components of the temporary works and prior to jacking, the jacking design Engineer shall conduct an inspection to verify that the fabrication and installation of the temporary works has been carried out according to the jacking drawings.

7.05.02 Jacking Points and Loads

Jacks shall only be placed at the jacking points specified in the Contract Documents. Jacks with a rated capacity of no less than 150 per cent of the jacking loads specified on the Contract Drawings shall be used.

At no point shall the applied jacking loads exceed 200 per cent of the jacking loads specified on the Contract Drawings.

7.05.03 Inspection Prior to the Commencement of the Jacking Operation

A Certificate of Conformance shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator prior to commencing each jacking operation.

7.05.04 Jacking Operations

The Contractor shall inform the Contract Administrator in writing at least three days prior to the commencement of the jacking operations.

The lifting or lowering of the entire width of the structure shall be carried out in one uniform and synchronized operation using a synchronized jacking system. At no time during the lifting or lowering of the structure shall the elevation difference between any jacking points exceed 1.0 mm as measured at the centre line of the bearings.

Jacking operations shall be carried out under the direct supervision of the jacking design Engineer. Prior to the commencement of jacking operations, the accuracy of all transducer read-outs, relative to manual measurements shall be demonstrated to the Contract Administrator.

The lift and/or lowering at each jacking point shall be monitored continuously during the jacking operation from a centralized location by remote sensors or calibrated jacking system. The maximum lift for all jacking points shall be sufficient to decompress the bearings and stop 3 mm above the final jacking elevation, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

7.05.05 Temporary Supports

The bridge superstructure shall not be supported on hydraulic jacks for a period longer than permitted on the jacking drawings and in no case longer than 12 hours.

When the required lift for all jacking points has been achieved and the bearings have been released, temporary supports (such as blocking and shimming) shall be placed to support the bridge. The jacks shall then be lowered in one synchronized operation while maintaining the maximum allowable difference between any two jacking points of 1.0 mm.

The jacking loads shall be transferred to the temporary supports and then the jacks released prior to the commencement of bearing removal and bearing seat reconstruction or bearing replacement work.

Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Drawings, temporary supports shall be located at the jacking points.

The superstructure shall not be left on temporary supports for more than 15 days or as specified in the Contract Documents.

7.05.05.01 Post-Jacking Survey

Immediately after the structure has been placed on temporary supports and prior to the bearing seats being reconstructed (if applicable), the underside of the superstructure that will be in contact with the new bearings shall be surveyed. The survey shall include the four corners in contact with the bearings and at least one point in the middle of the bearing area. Data from the survey shall be forwarded to the Contract Administrator to determine if adjustments to the design are required.

7.05.06 Lowering of the Superstructure

Where jacking of the superstructure is accompanied by rehabilitation of bearing seats, the superstructure may be jacked again for the removal of the temporary supports only after the concrete in the bearing seats has reached 75 per cent of its design strength. The jacks shall then be lowered in one synchronized operation, while maintaining the maximum allowable difference between any two jacking points of 1.0 mm, and the superstructure shall be placed onto the bearings.

7.05.06.01 Bearing Contact

The bearings shall have uniform and full contact at top and bottom. The requirements for bearing full contact as specified in OPSS.MUNI 922 shall be met. The jacking system shall remain in place until full contact of bearings is achieved.

7.05.07 Reinstatement of Structure and Components

The bridge deck and girders shall be reinstated to the original elevations unless new elevations are specified in the Contract Documents or as otherwise directed by the Contract Administrator.

A final continuous and smooth riding surface not exceeding 3 mm in difference across all joints, approaches, and adjacent spans where bearings are replaced shall be provided. The pre-jacking elevations, proposed new elevations, new bearing thickness, elastic compression of new bearings from the manufacturer, and any other new components installed shall be assessed as part of the Work in meeting this requirement.

The Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator when any existing conditions or components will affect the ability to meet the above requirement.

Anchor holes shall be filled with non-shrink grout finished flush with the surrounding concrete with matching color; no metal components of the jacking system shall be embedded permanently in concrete with less than 40 mm of cover.

All expansion joint and handrail components removed or loosened to facilitate jacking shall be reinstated.

7.06 Inspection after Completion of the Jacking Operation

A Certificate of Conformance shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator upon completion of each jacking operation.

7.07 Management of Excess Material

Management of excess material shall be according to the Contract Documents.

8.0 Quality Assurance - Not Used

9.0 Measurement for Payment

Management of jacking bridge structure including temporary supports shall be by lump sum.

10.0 Basis of Payment

10.01 Jack bridge structure including temporary supports

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Index 5.928 – Construction specification for structure rehabilitation – concrete removal

Item 5.928.01 – Access to work area, platforms, and scaffolding

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 928

Also include:

Prior to commencement of concrete removals, the Contractor shall install collection systems, platforms, etc. to ensure that concrete, dust, debris, effluent from saw cutting, or other deleterious materials are prevented from falling into the watercourse or banks below.

Provide safe and adequate access, scaffolding, work platforms, containment systems and staging, on and around the structure, in order to carry out all the required work of the Contract in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 928.

Provide safe and adequate access to the Contract Administrator for inspection and measurement of all areas of the structure.

Provide drawings signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario who shall be responsible for design of the protection system for this site. Prevent any debris or material from falling into the watercourse or onto the streambed/embankment

Safely remove and dispose of all access, containment and protection systems, scaffolds, and platforms outside of the right-of-way upon completion of the work.

Typical locations and areas of work are shown on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall provide access and work platforms as required to carry out work in these areas.

The Contractor shall submit to the Contract Administrator for review, a detailed proposal for carrying out demolition and repair for each location of an applicable work Item. Those proposals shall outline removal and restoration techniques, sequence of operations and shall detail and dimension the Contractor’s proposed staging, access, scaffolding, protection, and containment systems.

The Contract Administrator’s approval shall not release the Contractor from liability for any damage or any consequence as a result of inadequate protection design.

Removals shall be undertaken in a safe and controlled manner. Free falling of concrete debris or any material shall not be permitted. If, in the opinion of the Contract Administrator, the removal operations are unsafe and/or dangerous, appropriate measures shall be undertaken by the Contractor at no cost to the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor shall provide containment and protection systems of each work area to contain or collect 100 per cent of material removed, abrasive blast cleaning medium, equipment and other construction debris, with the exception of dust. No material removed shall be dropped below any work location as a means of disposal. No material shall be deposited outside of the work location. No slurry nor effluent from concrete sawcutting operations shall be permitted to run beyond containment systems or discharged directly into the watercourse. Heavy construction grade polyethylene sheeting shall be used to collect such effluent and associated debris.

Six sets of working drawings and documents shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for review of access and protection schemes. Work shall not proceed until the Contract Administrator has reviewed the drawings and provided authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the work.

All Items submitted should bear the seal and signature of a Professional Engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario who shall be responsible for design and inspection of protection system on site and shall certify in writing its compliance with design requirements.

Payment will be made at the rate 80 per cent of the lump sum price bid upon satisfactory erection of the protection and the remaining 20 per cent of the lump sum price bid for removal of the protection system and restoration of the area. Payments will be made on a lump sum basis and such payment shall be full compensation of all design, labour, equipment, and materials, including all access and protection of all repairs, necessary to complete the work.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for access to work area, work platform, and scaffolding shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 5.928.02 – Concrete removal - partial depth - top of deck

Item 5.928.03 – Concrete removal - partial depth - soffit

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 928, Type A

Also include:

Locally sawcut limits of removal and remove deteriorated and/or unsound concrete from precast concrete girder ends, diaphragms, pier diaphragms and other locations directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

In addition to removal of deteriorated and unsound concrete, sound concrete removals may also be required to achieve minimum removal requirements. The Contract Administrator shall identify areas where new reinforcing steel bars are required.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of partial depth concrete removal, top of deck shall be by volume in cubic metres of concrete removed of the depth specified or to the depth approved by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement of partial depth concrete removal, soffit shall be by volume in cubic metres of concrete removed of the depth specified or to the depth approved by the Contract Administrator.

Material removed locally 25 mm around the second layer of reinforcing steel shall not be measured. However, if the Contract Documents specify a uniform removal below the second layer of reinforcing steel, measurement for payment shall be of the volume of concrete removed to the specified depth.

After concrete removal is completed, verification of concrete removal depths shall be completed by the Contract Administrator on a grid system that best describes the profile at the particular area.

Measurement shall be taken by placing a straight edge across the removal area and measuring the distance from the straight edge to the top of the remaining concrete surface, as follows:

A minimum of three measurements for each removal area less than or equal to 1.0 m2.

A minimum of ten measurements for every square metre for each removal area greater that 1.0 m2.

The depths for each removal area shall be measured and averaged to the nearest millimetre.

The total volume shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 m3.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When the Contract does not contain a separate tender item for access to the work area, work platform and scaffolding, the Contract price for the concrete removal items shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to provide access to work area, work platform, and scaffolding.

Payment for the appropriate tender item Concrete Removal - Partial Depth Type A, Concrete Removal - Partial Depth Type B, or Concrete Removal - Partial Depth Type C or any combination of the three shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to remove concrete locally around the second layer of reinforcing steel to provide a minimum 25 mm clearance around the reinforcing steel.

When the replacement of corrosion damaged reinforcing steel is required, such work shall be paid as Extra Work.

Work related defects repaired as remedial work shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner.

Item 5.928.04 – Concrete removal – partial depth – abutments, wingwalls and piers

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 928, Type B

Also include:

Locally sawcut limits of removal and remove deteriorated and/or unsound concrete from precast concrete girder ends, diaphragms, pier diaphragms and other locations directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

In addition to removal of deteriorated and unsound concrete, sound concrete removals may also be required to achieve minimum removal requirements. The Contract Administrator shall identify areas where new reinforcing steel bars are required.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of partial depth concrete removal, abutments, wingwalls and piers shall be of the volume in cubic metres of concrete removed for the depth specified or to the depth approved by the Contract Administrator.

Material removed locally 25 mm around the second layer of reinforcing steel shall not be measured. However, if the Contract Documents specify a uniform removal below the second layer of reinforcing steel, measurement for payment shall be of the volume of concrete removed to the specified depth.

After concrete removal is completed, verification of concrete removal depths shall be completed by the Contract Administrator on a grid system that best describes the profile at the particular area.

Measurement shall be taken by placing a straight edge across the removal area and measuring the distance from the straight edge to the top of the remaining concrete surface, as follows:

A minimum of three measurements for each removal area less than or equal to 1.0 m2.

A minimum of ten measurements for every square metre for each removal area greater that 1.0 m2.

The depths for each removal area shall be measured and averaged to the nearest millimetre.

The total volume shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 m3.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When the Contract does not contain a separate tender item for access to the work area, work platform and scaffolding, the Contract price for the concrete removal items shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to provide access to work area, work platform, and scaffolding.

Payment for the appropriate tender item Concrete Removal - Partial Depth Type A, Concrete Removal - Partial Depth Type B, or Concrete Removal - Partial Depth Type C or any combination of the three shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to remove concrete locally around the second layer of reinforcing steel to provide a minimum 25 mm clearance around the reinforcing steel.

When the replacement of corrosion damaged reinforcing steel is required, such work shall be paid as Extra Work.

Work related defects repaired as remedial work shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner.

Item 5.928.05 – Concrete removal - full depth

Reference:
Contract Drawings
OPSS.MUNI 928, Type C

Also include:

Locally sawcut limits of removal and remove deteriorated and/or unsound concrete from abutment walls, bearing seats and wingwalls (except for full depth removal areas) and other locations as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

In addition to removal of deteriorated and unsound concrete, sound concrete removals may also be required to achieve minimum removal requirements. The Contract Administrator shall identify areas where new reinforcing steel bars are required.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of the full depth concrete removal shall be by volume in cubic metres.

The total volume shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 m3.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When the Contract does not contain a separate tender item for access to the work area, work platform and scaffolding, the Contract price for the concrete removal items shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to provide access to work area, work platform, and scaffolding.

When the replacement of corrosion damaged reinforcing steel is required, such work shall be paid as Extra Work.

Work related defects repaired as remedial work shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner.

Item 5.928.06 – Concrete removal - structural component

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 928

Also include:

Removal of ballast walls, including expansion joint assemblies, and portions of cleats.

Removal of portions of existing wingwalls/curbs, including parapet walls and railings.

Removal of concrete approach slabs and curbs.

Removal of existing ducts, cables, junction boxes, and other embedded elements, including capping elements on the approaches, as required.

Note:

Removal of ancillary elements, including but not limited to joint fillers, foams, elastomers, etc.

Elements to remain shall be protected at all times. Any damage to elements that are to remain shall be fully repaired and rectified to the full satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of concrete structural component removal shall be by volume in cubic metres.

The total volume shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 m3.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When the Contract does not contain a separate tender item for access to the work area, work platform and scaffolding, the Contract price for the concrete removal items shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to provide access to work area, work platform, and scaffolding.

When the replacement of corrosion damaged reinforcing steel is required, such work shall be paid as Extra Work.

Work related defects repaired as remedial work shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner.

Item 5.928.07 – Concrete removal – complete deck

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 928

Also include:

Removal of the entirety of the existing concrete deck, including curb, sidewalk, parapet walls and railings, and deck joint assemblies.

Removal of the top portions of the diaphragms.

Removal of existing deck drains.

Removal of existing ducts, cables, junction boxes, and other embedded elements. This includes the removal of the abandoned Bell Canada ducts and existing Navigation signal ducts.

Removal of ancillary elements, including but not limited to joint fillers, foams, elastomers, etc.

Elements to remain, including but not limited to the precast concrete girders, girder stirrups, portions of the diaphragms, and diaphragm stirrups, shall be protected at all times. Any damage to elements that are to remain shall be fully repaired and rectified to the full satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor shall roughen the surfaces of the existing concrete girders to be in contact with new concrete.

The Contractor shall note the requirements of OPSS MUNI.928 and shall ensure that removals are completed by chipping hammer only within 100mm of the existing precast concrete girders.

The Contractor is responsible to locate the existing power source for the Navigation signals to be removed.

Temporary support / bracing of concrete girders during the work as required and as identified in the Contractor’s Working Drawings submission(s).

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the complete concrete deck removal shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When the Contract does not contain a separate tender item for access to the work area, work platform and scaffolding, the Contract price for the concrete removal items shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to provide access to work area, work platform, and scaffolding.

When the replacement of corrosion damaged reinforcing steel is required, such work shall be paid as Extra Work.

Work related defects repaired as remedial work shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner.

Item 5.928.08 – Concrete removal – deck joint assemblies

Item 5.928.09 – Scarifying

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 928

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

SPEC NOTE: Use the following Clauses (.1 and .2) for Item 5.928.08:

Measurement of concrete deck joint assemblies’ removal shall be by volume in cubic metres.

The total volume shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 m3.

SPEC NOTE: Use the following Clauses (.3, .4, and .5) for Item 5.928.09:

Measurement of scarifying shall be by area in square metres of the structure surface area to be scarified.

Measurement shall not be made of the roughened portions of curb faces, concrete barrier and parapet walls or of areas that require a second scarifying due to the Contractor's method of operation.

The total area shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 m2.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When the Contract does not contain a separate tender item for access to the work area, work platform and scaffolding, the Contract price for the concrete removal items shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to provide access to work area, work platform, and scaffolding.

When the replacement of corrosion damaged reinforcing steel is required, such work shall be paid as Extra Work.

Work related defects repaired as remedial work shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner.

When exposed reinforcing steel necessitates concrete being removed from within the demarcated areas to the depth specified for the adjacent scarifying using chipping hammers, such work shall be paid as Extra Work.

SPEC NOTE:
1. For Item 5.928.08 – Include Basis for Payment Clauses .2 as an additional Clause (to Clauses .1, .3, and .4).
2. For Item 5.928.09 – Include Basis for Payment Clause .5 as an additional Clause (to Clause .1, .3, and .4).

Index 5.929 – Construction specification for abrasive blast cleaning - concrete construction

Item 5.929.01 – Abrasive blast cleaning for overlays

Item 5.929.02 – Abrasive blast cleaning of reinforcing steel

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 929

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for payment shall be of the area of concrete removed in square metres resulting in exposing of reinforcing steel bars. When the removal exposes more than one mat of reinforcing steel, the measured area shall be for each mat of exposed bars that are to remain in place. There shall be no measurement for abrasive blast cleaning of reinforcing steel in volume of concrete that was not designated for concrete removal by the Contract Administrator.

When only one reinforcing steel bar is exposed in the are of concrete removal, the area shall be calculated based on the width of 200 mm by the length of the exposed reinforcing streel bar.

The total area shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 m2.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the Work.

Abrasive blast cleaning of reinforcing steel applies to abrasive blast cleaning of existing reinforcing steel that is either epoxy coated or uncoated reinforcing steel.

When the Contract does not contain a separate tender item for providing access to work, the Contract price for the abrasive blast cleaning items requiring the access shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to provide such access.

Item 5.929.03 – Abrasive blast cleaning of structural steel in contact with concrete

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 929

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for payment shall be of the area of concrete removed in square metres resulting in exposing of reinforcing steel bars. When the removal exposes more than one mat of reinforcing steel, the measured area shall be for each mat of exposed bars that are to remain in place. There shall be no measurement for abrasive blast cleaning of reinforcing steel in volume of concrete that was not designated for concrete removal by the Contract Administrator.

When only one reinforcing steel bar is exposed in the are of concrete removal, the area shall be calculated based on the width of 200 mm by the length of the exposed reinforcing streel bar.

The total area shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 m2.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the Work.

Abrasive blast cleaning of reinforcing steel applies to abrasive blast cleaning of existing reinforcing steel that is either epoxy coated or uncoated reinforcing steel.

When the Contract does not contain a separate tender item for providing access to work, the Contract price for the abrasive blast cleaning items requiring the access shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to provide such access.

Index 5.930 – Construction specification for structure rehabilitation - concrete patches and overlays

Item 5.930.01 – Modification of deck drains

Item 5.930.02 – Drainage tubes in deck

Item 5.930.03 – Place concrete overlay

Item 5.930.04 – Place latex modified concrete overlay

Item 5.930.05 – Finish and cure concrete overlay

Item 5.930.06 – Finish and cure latex modified concrete overlay

Item 5.930.07 – Concrete patches, formed surface

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 930

Also include:

Patching of areas of concrete removals completed as partial depth removals (type B and type C) except on precast concrete girders, as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of deck drains modified.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of drainage tubes placed.

Measurement of concrete overlay shall be of the volume of concrete placed in cubic metres by delivery ticket. When their quantities are included on the delivery ticket, deductions shall be made for concrete produced in excess of that required for the placing operation and for that concrete placed on the deck more than 125 mm from the finished edge after sawcutting of the overlay. The total volume shall be calculated to the nearest cubic metre.

Measurement of latex modified concrete overlay shall be by volume in cubic metres and shall be calculated from the mixing unit meter register ticket and calibration certificate. A copy of the meter register ticket showing the meter reading at the commencement of the yield test and the completion of each placing operation shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.

When their quantities are included on the meter register ticket deductions shall be made for concrete produced in excess of that required for the placing operation and for that concrete placed on the deck more than 125 mm from the finished edge, after saw cutting of the overlay.

The total volume shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 m3.

For all types of overlays there shall be no measurement for the following:

Concrete discharged prior to the yield test.

Concrete produced in excess of that required for the placing operation.

Concrete placed on the deck more than 125 mm from the finished edge, after sawcutting of the overlay.

Quantity of bonding agent.

Measurement of finish and cure concrete overlay shall be by area in square metres.

Measurement of finish and cure latex modified concrete overlay shall be by area in square metres.

Measurement of concrete patches formed surface shall be by volume in cubic metres.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Use additional Measurement for Payment Clauses .4 to .7 for Items 5.930.03/.04/.05/.06/

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 5.930.08 – Concrete patches, unformed surface

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 930

Also include:

Apply Sikatop Armatec 110 EpoCem, or an approved alternate, to exposed reinforcing steel bars and as directed by the Contract Administrator. Product shall used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Priming the concrete surfaces with a neat cement paste prior to placing new concrete in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 930 and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Placing 30 MPa concrete to restore the structure to original dimensions.

Note:

The work shall consist of restoring the spalled and deteriorated concrete surfaces on the existing deck top as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for payment shall be made on the basis of the number of cubic metres of 35 MPa concrete incorporated in the restoration of the concrete surfaces, as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 5.930.09 – Spall repair

Item 5.930.10 – Latex modified mortar patches

Item 5.930.11 – Concrete refacing

Item 5.930.12 – Restoration of concrete girders

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 930

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for payment shall be made on the basis of the number of cubic metres of 35 MPa concrete incorporated in the restoration of the concrete surfaces, as directed by the Contract Administrator. The total area will be calculated to the nearest 0.1 m3. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Clause for Items 5.930.09/.11/.12)

Measurement of latex modified mortar patches shall be by volume in cubic metres. The volume of the in place latex modified mortar shall be calculated to the nearest 0.01 m3.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.931 – Construction specification for structure rehabilitation - shotcrete

Item 5.931.01 – Normal shotcrete

Item 5.931.02 – Silica fume shotcrete

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 931

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement shall be by volume in cubic metres of the concrete removed according to the Measurement for Payment section of OPSS.MUNI 928, except when the existing cover to steel reinforcement is less than 50 mm, the depth used in calculating the volume shall be adjusted by adding the difference between the 50 mm required and the existing cover.

No measurement shall be made for areas of shotcrete that were removed according to the Remedial Work subsection.

No measurement shall be made for shotcrete required to patch areas of concrete removal when the removal was not approved by the Contract Administrator.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour Equipment, and material to do the work, including abrasive blast cleaning of the concrete surfaces.

Payment for the work of abrasive blast cleaning of steel reinforcement shall be according to OPSS.MUNI 929.

When the Contract does not contain a separate tender item for providing access to the work, the Contract price for the shotcrete items requiring the access shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.932 – Construction specification for crack repair – concrete

Item 5.932.01 – Crack injection

Item 5.932.02 – Routing and sealing-hot-poured rubberized joint sealing compound

Item 5.932.03 – Routing and sealing-cold-applied joint sealing compound

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 932

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of crack injection shall be by length in metres of the accepted injected cracks. The total length shall be the sum of individual increments represented by the accepted test cores taken within each increment. Cracks filled to less than 80 per cent of the crack depth shall not be measured for payment.

Measurement of routing and sealing shall be by length in metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

There shall be 100 per cent payment of the Contract price where 90 per cent or more of the crack depth is filled.

There shall be no payment where less than 80 per cent of the crack depth is filled.

There shall be a payment adjustment of the unit Contract price for each ten-metre increment of crack filled to between 80 per cent and 89 per cent of the crack depth.

Pa – (100-(89-D) x 2)/100.

Where:

Pa = payment adjustment factor.

D = percentage of the crack depth filled, rounded to the nearest 0.1 per cent.

89 greater than or equal to D greater than or equal to 80.

SPEC NOTE: For Item 5.932.01, use additional Basis of Payment Clauses .2 to .4 and subclauses.

Index 5.935 – Construction specification for impressed current cathodic protection system for bridge structures

Item 5.935.01 – Cathode connections

Item 5.935.02 – Reference cells

Item 5.935.03 – Cathodic protection cabinets

Item 5.935.04 – Concrete pads for cathodic protection

Item 5.935.05 – Anode mesh

Item 5.935.06 – Extra low voltage cables for cathodic protection

Item 5.935.07 – Cathodic protection rectifiers

Item 5.935.08 – Cathodic protection remote monitoring and control units

Item 5.935.09 – Rigid ducts and junction boxes for cathodic protection

Item 5.935.10 – Acceptance testing for cathodic protection

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.PROV 935
OPSS.MUNI 603 and 604

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of cathode connections supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of reference cells supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of cathodic protection cabinets supplied and installed.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of concrete pads for cathodic protection installed.

Measurement of anode mesh shall be by area in square metres for the full surface of the concrete being treated with no deduction for minor surface areas not covered, such as at corners, cut-outs, and the like, nor any addition for surface areas requiring overlapping mesh.

Measurement for extra low voltage cables for cathodic protection shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct or trench; from centre to centre of poles, pole footings, electrical chambers, junction boxes, sign footings, to the face of bridge structures, and retaining walls, and substation pads. (SPEC NOTE: Choose the applicable appurtenances)

For measurement purpose, a count shall be made of the number of cathodic protection rectifiers supplied and installed.

For measurement purpose, a count shall be made of the number of cathodic protection remote monitoring and control units supplied and installed.

Measurement of rigid ducts for cathodic projection shall be by length in metres horizontally along the longitudinal axis of the duct from centre to centre of junction boxes, sign footings to the face of bridge structures, and retaining walls. This shall include the installation of junction boxes. (SPEC NOTE: Choose the applicable appurtenances)

Payment for acceptance testing for cathodic protection shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.940 – Construction specification for mechanically stabilized earth

Item 5.940.01 – Mechanically stabilized earth, true abutment

Item 5.940.02 – Mechanically stabilized earth, false abutment

Item 5.940.03 – Mechanically stabilized earth, wall/slope, high performance

Item 5.940.04 – Mechanically stabilized earth, wall/slope, medium performance

Item 5.940.05 – Mechanically stabilized earth, wall/slope, low performance

Item 5.940.06 – Mechanically stabilized earth with finishing cap, wall/slope, high performance

Item 5.940.07 – Mechanically stabilized earth with finishing cap, wall/slope, medium performance

Item 5.940.08 – Mechanically stabilized earth, roadbase embankment

Item 5.940.09 – Backfill for mechanically stabilized earth, ultra lightweight

Item 5.940.10 – Backfill for mechanically stabilized earth, lightweight

Item 5.940.11 – Backfill for mechanically stabilized earth, high performance

Item 5.940.12 – Backfill for mechanically stabilized earth, medium performance

Item 5.940.13 – Backfill for mechanically stabilized earth, low performance

Item 5.940.14 – Foundation for mechanically stabilized earth

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 940

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of mechanically stabilized earth, true abutment shall be by area in square metres installed.

Measurement of mechanically stabilized earth, false abutment shall be by area in square metres installed.

Measurement of high performance mechanically stabilized earth, wall/slope shall be by area in square metres installed.

Measurement of medium performance mechanically stabilized earth, wall/slope shall be by area in square metres installed.

Measurement of low performance mechanically stabilized earth, wall/slope shall be by area in square metres installed.

Measurement of high performance mechanically stabilized earth with finishing cap, wall/slope shall be by area in square metres installed.

Measurement of medium performance mechanically stabilized earth with finishing cap, wall/slope shall be by area in square metres installed.

Measurement of mechanically stabilized earth, roadbase embankment shall be by area in square metres installed.

Measurement of backfill for mechanically stabilized earth, ultra lightweight shall be of the mass in tonnes of the material placed within the theoretical lines and grades shown in the stamped Working Drawings. The method of determining the mass shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

Measurement of backfill for mechanically stabilized earth, lightweight shall be of the mass in tonnes of the material placed within the theoretical lines and grades shown in the stamped Working Drawings. The method of determining the mass shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

Measurement of backfill for mechanically stabilized earth, high performance shall be of the mass in tonnes of the material placed within the theoretical lines and grades shown in the stamped Working Drawings. The method of determining the mass shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

Measurement of backfill for mechanically stabilized earth, medium performance shall be of the mass in tonnes of the material placed within the theoretical lines and grades shown in the stamped Working Drawings. The method of determining the mass shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

Measurement of backfill for mechanically stabilized earth, low performance shall be of the mass in tonnes of the material placed within the theoretical lines and grades shown in the stamped Working Drawings. The method of determining the mass shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

Measurement of foundation for mechanically stabilized earth shall be by length in metres installed.

Basis of Payment:

SPEC NOTE: Use the following Clauses for Items 5.940.01 to 5.940.08 and 5.940.14.

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work, including all costs associated with having the manufacturer’s representative on site.

Payment for construction of the foundation for mechanically stabilized earth (MSE) shall be made under the appropriate tender items in the Contract.

No payment shall be made for corrective work, including investigation of deficiencies, design of repairs, site access, traffic staging and removal of existing work, except where the corrective work is required as a result other than an act or fault of the Contractor.

SPEC NOTE: Use the following Clauses for Items 5.940.09 to 5.940.13.

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

When the Contract does not contain a separate tender item for backfill for mechanically stabilized earth (MSE), the contract price for the MSE contract items in which the backfill for MSE is incorporated shall include full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to place and compact the backfill for MSE.

Index 5.942 – Construction specification for prestressed soil and rock anchors

Item 5.942.01 – Pre-production test anchors

Item 5.942.02 – Production anchor

Item 5.942.03 – Post-grouting of bond length

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 942

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender items.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of pre-production test anchors shall be by length in metres along the actual length of the anchor from the anchor plate to the tip.

Measurement of production anchors shall be by length in metres along the actual length of the anchor from the anchor plate to the tip.

Measurement of post-grouting of bond length shall be by mass in kilograms of mixed grout used.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Index 5.950 – Construction specification for glass fibre reinforced polymer reinforcing bar

Item 5.950.01 – xxx diameter mm glass fibre reinforced polymer reinforcing bar

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 950

SPEC NOTE: Designer shall include a specification for the above tender item.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for glass fibre reinforced polymer reinforcing bar shall be by length in metres installed

Basis for Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Rejected glass fibre reinforced polymer lots or bars shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

Landscaping

6.01 – Deciduous trees

Item 6.01.xx – Supply and plant add name of deciduous tree

6.02 – Flowering/ornamental trees

Item 6.02.xx – Supply and plant add name of flowering/ornamental tree

6.03 – Coniferous trees

Item 6.03.xx – Supply and plant add name of coniferous tree

6.04 – Shrub/perennials/ornamental grass

Item 6.04.xx – Supply and plant add name of shrub/perennial/ornamental grass

SPEC NOTE:
1. Keep appropriate subheadings (6.01 – Deciduous trees; 6.02 – Flowering/ornamental trees; 6.03 – Coniferous trees; 6.04 – Shrub/perennials).
2. List each tree/shrub/perennial/ornamental grass separately using items and item numbers in Builterra.

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02930

Note:

All trees planted shall be under warranty for a period of two years commencing upon issuance of substantial completion. All plant materials used as replacement for unacceptable plant material shall be of the same quality and requirements prescribed for original material.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the actual number of deciduous trees supplied and planted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the actual number of flowering/ornamental trees supplied and planted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the actual number of coniferous trees supplied and planted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the actual number of shrubs supplied and planted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the actual number of perennials supplied and planted.

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the actual number of ornamental grasses supplied and planted.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for each tree/shrub/perennial/ornamental grass shall be based on the following:

80 per cent upon preliminary acceptance.

20 per cent upon final acceptance.

Item 6.07.01 – Transplant existing trees and shrubs

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
RMDCS Section 02905
OPSS.MUNI 492 and 510

Also include:

Remove, store, and preserve existing trees to permit construction.

Replant preserved trees at locations specified on site by the Contract Administrator according to good horticultural practise including new “triple mix” planting soil.

Maintain transplanted trees according to RMDCS Section 02905.

Remove and replace all transplanted tress found to be dead, or not in a healthy, satisfactory growing condition at any time during the two-year maintenance period.

Note:

Work specified under this tender item shall be performed by an experienced landscaping contractor.

Notify the Contract Administrator at least one week prior to the scheduled commencement of tree relocations if the Contractor considers that any tree specified for transplanting cannot be successfully transplanted.

Commencement of work to transplant trees shall be deemed as an acceptance by the Contractor that such trees can be successfully transplanted.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of trees successfully transplanted.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work including all maintenance and the replacement of unhealthy transplanted trees.

Maintenance of new plant materials shall be included in the Contract price for Item 6.30.01.

Progress payments for the transplanted trees shall be made as follows:

50 per cent upon transplanting.

50 per cent upon expiry of two-year maintenance period.

SPEC NOTE:
The Riparian seed mix is to be considered for the restoration of natural grass areas instead of the standard roadside mix.

Item 6.08.04 – Upland native seed mix

Reference:
Contract Drawing, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 802
Special Provisions - Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 804
RMDCS Section 02700 and 02905
OPSS.MUNI 802 and 804

Include:

Place 300 mm depth of topsoil from stockpiled excavated stripping material.

SPEC NOTE: Depth to be reviewed and source of topsoil to be reviewed.

Supply and install upland seed mix in areas outside of wetland, marsh, and ditches in accordance with Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator at a rate of xx.x kilogram per hectare (kg/ha).

SPEC NOTE: The cover crop may not be required if seeding is in the spring May or fall September. The rate of seeding may be increased or duplicated at another time if seeding is not at the ultimate time of seeding.

Simultaneously sow cover crop of annual oats for erosion control (rate xx kg/ha).

Note:

Refer to Contract Drawings, x-xx for the upland native seed mix species list.

Subsection 802.07.02 of OPSS.MUNI 802 is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

All work under these items shall be performed by an acceptable specialist Subcontractor using workers experienced in seeding.

Measurement of Payment:

Measurement of upland native seed mix shall be the actual amount applied by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for upland native seed mix shall be made as follows:

50 per cent upon successful supply and placement.

25 per cent upon meeting the 60-Day Performance Measure.

25 per cent upon meeting the 90-Day Performance Measure which will take place after Date.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Date may be the following year May 30th of the following year if the 90th day falls after November 1st.
2. The Wet meadow seed mix is to be considered for the restoration of natural wet meadow areas instead of the standard roadside mix.

Item 6.08.05 – Riparian seed mix

Reference:
Contract Drawing, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – Revisions to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 802
Special Provisions – Revision to Standard Specifications, Clause xx – Revision to OPSS.MUNI 804
RMDCS Section 02700 and 02905
OPSS.MUNI 802 and 804

Include:

Place 300 mm depth of topsoil from stockpiled excavated stripping material.

SPEC NOTE: Depth to be reviewed and source of topsoil to be reviewed. Should consider if the topsoil from a road project is too salt impacted such that its use is not recommended in a wetland area.

Supply and install riparian seed mix in areas of wetland, marsh and ditches in accordance with Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator at a rate of xx.x kg/ha.

SPEC NOTE: The cover crop may not be required if seeding is in the spring May or fall September. The rate of seeding may be increased or duplicated at another time if seeding is not at the ultimate time of seeding.

Simultaneously sow cover crop of annual oats for erosion control (rate xx kg/ha).

Note:

Refer to Contract Drawings, x-xx for the riparian seed mix species list.

Subsection 802.07.02 of OPSS.MUNI 802 is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

All work under these items shall be performed by an acceptable specialist Subcontractor using workers experienced in seeding.

Measurement of Payment:

Measurement of riparian seed mix shall be the actual amount applied by area in square metres.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for seed and mulch shall be made as follows:

50 per cent upon successful supply and placement.

25 per cent upon meeting the 60-Day Performance Measure.

25 per cent upon meeting the 90-Day Performance Measure which will take place after Date.

SPEC NOTE: Date may be the following year May 30th of the following year if the 90th day falls after November 1st.

Item 6.10.03 – Armour stone, including geotextile

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)

Include:

Excavate as required to permit armour stone installation.

Supply and place 1.0 m x 1.0 m x 1.0 m armour stone.

Supply and place Class I, non-woven geotextile filter fabric (Terrafix 270R, Mirafi 140NC, or Armtec 160).

Note:

Armour stone material shall be quarried stone, sound limestone or reviewed equivalent.

All armour stone shall be "hand picked" jointly by the Contract Administrator and the Contractor at the quarry and marked for delivery to the site. The armour stone shall be selected based on their rectangular cleavage (to facilitate assembly in the desired shape), soundness and size.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of armour stone shall be by mass in tonnes.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Payment for the geotextile shall be included in the tender item for armour stone.

Item 6.30.01 – Landscaping maintenance

Reference:
RMDCS Section 02930

Include:

All maintenance, both interim and after preliminary acceptance, of all plant materials except transplanted trees all according to RMDCS Section 02930.

Weed, prune, and re-mulch all trees one year after installation and again prior to final acceptance (two years). The Contractor shall advise the Region of Durham Construction Management Services Division in advance when any maintenance operation is to be undertaken.

Water once per week for first four weeks and then sufficiently thereafter to maintain optimum growing condition.

Keep tree guards and wooden tree stakes in proper repair throughout the warranty period and remove prior to final completion certificate being issued.

Prior to expiration of the plant warranty period, replace any plant material which is deemed by the Contractor Administrator to be in poor health or dead at the earliest opportunity and according to RMDCS Section 02930. Replace with plants of the same quality and according to the same requirements as prescribed for the original planting.

Note:

This tender item shall be used for maintenance of all new planting materials.

All plant material shall be regularly inspected by the Contract Administrator until the end of the maintenance and warranty period. Inspections shall include all original and replacement material. The Contractor shall be notified in writing by the Contract Administrator of all plant material requiring replacement.

The Contract price bid for this tender item shall not be less than 20 per cent of the total of all Contract prices for all new plantings.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for landscaping maintenance shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for landscaping maintenance shall be made as follows:

50 per cent of the lump sum stated in the Tender Form for this Item shall be paid on the after the completion of landscape maintenance in the first year.

50 per cent balance shall be paid after the completion of landscape maintenance in the second year and issue on the Final Acceptance of the plantings.

If the Contractor fails to respond to maintenance and warranty requests, the Contract Administrator may deduct or retain monies owing the Contractor as determined by Clauses GC 3.01, Contract Administrator’s Authority and GC 8.02.04.11, Owner’s Set-off, of the OPSS.MUNI 100 – General Conditions of Contract.

Environmental Measures

SPEC NOTE: Geotextiles specified in this master SP are typically of the non-woven variety. The following cautions are recommended by TC Mirafi:
For gap-graded, cohesionless soils, research has shown that a woven monofilament with a per cent open area (POA) of at least 10 per cent should be favoured. Check the retention criteria to determine AOS requirements.
For soils with a high silt content (greater than 20 per cent) and a low plasticity index (PI less than 5), research has shown that non-woven geotextile may experience clogging or blinding. Consider using a woven monofilament geotextile.
When filtering non-dispersive clay soils (PI less than 5), use a heavy weight non-woven.

Item 7.01.01 – Rip-rap (100 mm to 200 mm diameter), hand placed, including geotextile

Item 7.01.11 – Rip-rap (200 mm to 300 mm diameter), hand placed

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 511 and 1004
OPSD 810.010, Type B

Clause 511.07.02.02 of OPSS.MUNI 511 is amended by the addition of the following:

Rip-rap shall be placed such that the surface of the finished rip-rap shall have a uniform appearance and be without segregation.

Clause 511.09.01.04 of OPSS.MUNI 511 is deleted.

Subsection 511.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 511 is revised by the deletion of “Geotextile – Item”.

The second sentence of Clause 1004.05.05.01 of OPSS.MUNI 1004 is deleted. Reclaimed hydraulic cement concrete shall not be permitted for rip-rap.

Clause 1004.05.05.02 of OPSS.MUNI 1004 is amended by the addition of the following:

Rip-rap shall consist of crushed limestone having a minimum size of 100 mm in the smallest dimension and a maximum size of 200 mm in the largest dimension.

Also include:

Supply and place Class II (heavy-duty), non-woven geotextile filter fabric (Terrafix 360R, Mirafi 160N, or Armtec 200).

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of hand placed rip-rap with geotextile shall be by area of the rip-rap in square metres following the contour of the ground.

Measurement of hand placed rip-rap shall be by area in square metres following the contour of the ground.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

For Item 7.01.01 – Rip-rap (100 mm to 200 mm diameter), hand placed, including geotextile, payment for the geotextile shall be included in the tender item for rip-rap.

Item 7.01.02 – Rip-rap (100 mm to 200 mm diameter), randomly placed

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 511 and 1004
OPSD 810.010, Type B

Clause 511.07.02.02 of OPSS.MUNI 511 is amended by the addition of the following:

Rip-rap shall be placed such that the surface of the finished rip-rap shall have a uniform appearance and be without segregation.

The second sentence of Clause 1004.05.05.01 of OPSS.MUNI 1004 is deleted. Reclaimed hydraulic cement concrete shall not be permitted for rip-rap.

Clause 1004.05.05.02 of OPSS.MUNI 1004 is amended by the addition of the following:

Rip-rap shall consist of crushed limestone having a minimum size of 100 mm in the smallest dimension and a maximum size of 200 mm in the largest dimension.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of randomly placed rip-rap shall be by area in square metres following the contour of the ground.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 7.01.03 – Rock protection (250 mm to 500 mm diameter), including geotextile

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 511 and 1004

Clause 511.07.02.03 of OPSS.MUNI 511 is amended by the addition of the following:

Rock protection shall be placed without free fall. The surface of the finished rock protection shall have a uniform appearance and be without segregation.

Clause 511.09.01.04 of OPSS.MUNI 511 is deleted.

Subsection 511.10.01 of OPSS.MUNI 511 is revised by the deletion of “Geotextile – Item”.

The second sentence of Clause 1004.05.05.01 of OPSS.MUNI 1004 is deleted.

Reclaimed hydraulic cement concrete shall not be permitted for rock protection.

Also include:

Excavate to grade, to firm undisturbed ground for the rock protection including excavation of the storm outlet ditches, regrading of the creek banks and disposal of excess

Supply and place Class II (heavy-duty), non-woven geotextile filter fabric (Terrafix 400R or Armtec 230), including 1.0 m minimum overlapped joints. Protect geotextile from direct sunlight if it will be exposed for more than three days.

Supply and place 900 mm depth of rock protection in areas shown on the Contract Drawings.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of rock protection shall be by volume in cubic metres. The volume is a product of the area of the rock protection measured following the contour of the ground by its depth.

Truck box measurement shall be used when it is not possible to take an in place measurement.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment for the geotextile shall be included in the tender item for rock protection.

Item 7.01.06 – Rounded riverstone (25 mm to 200 mm diameter)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)

Include:

Excavate existing creek bed materials to required grade and dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place 200 mm depth of rounded riverstone.

Note:

Rounded riverstone shall be hard, dense, durable deposit/pit stone (unprocessed), well graded and conform to the following gradation:

At least 90 per cent larger than 25 mm diameter.

At least 50 per cent larger than 100 mm diameter.

At least 10 per cent larger than 150 mm diameter.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of rounded riverstone shall be based on the actual volume of stream-bed replacement with riverstone, in cubic metres with no allowance for any loss of riverstone into the existing underlying stream bed material.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 7.01.07 – Rock vortex weir

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)

Include:

Excavate and shape the creek bed for the installation of a rock vortex weir.

Supply and place rounded riverstone in the configuration and cross section as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as directed by the Contract Administrator. Place riverstone carefully without free fall. Push riverstone into creek bed to provide sufficient burial of the foundation stone.

Note:

Rounded riverstone shall be hard, dense, durable deposit/pit stone (unprocessed) and shall be a minimum of 600 mm in diameter for the foundation stone and 450 mm in diameter for the weir stone.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the rock vortex weirs placed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 7.01.08 – Granite vortex boulders (1000 mm diameter)

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 511

Also include:

Excavate and shape the creek bed for the installation of the boulders and dispose of excess materials off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place granite vortex boulders in the configuration and cross section as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as directed by the Contract Administrator. Place boulders carefully without free fall. Push boulders into creek bed to provide sufficient burial of the stone.

Note:

Boulders shall be hard, dense durable granite boulders (weathered) and shall be a minimum of 1000 mm in diameter.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the granite vortex boulders placed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Item 7.01.09 – Geotextile

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add the optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 511

Also include:

Supply and place geotextile as directed by the Contract Administrator or as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Note:

Acceptable geotextile materials are:

Terrafix 360R-T.

Mirafi 160N.

Armtec 200.

Approved equivalent.

Keep geotextile clean and free from debris.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of geotextile shall be by area in square metres following the contour of the ground, without any allowance made for overlaps.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 7.01.10 – Coconut mat erosion control blanket

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers) OPSS.MUNI 804

Also include:

Check the erosion control blanket (ECB) upon delivery and assure that the proper material has been received.

Prevent excessive mud, wet cement, epoxy and like materials which may affix themselves to the gridwork, from coming into contact with the ECB.

Roll ECB for storage and handling.

Apply seed prior to placing ECB over prepared topsoil. Seed over non-germinated areas through blanket if necessary.

Layout ECB at the proper elevation and orientation as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Unroll ECB down slope or in direction of water flow. Bring ECB down to level area, fold 150 mm under soil and secure with staples prior to termination.

Overlap blanket a minimum of 150 mm along edges. At the end of each roll, fold back 100 mm to 200 mm of the matting. Overlap this 100 mm to 200 mm over the start of the next roll. Staple the two layers to the ground securely.

Secure top of blanket in trench according to Clause 804.07.05.04 of OPSS.MUNI 804 and reinforce with a row of at least five staples, spaced at 300 mm apart prior to covering with soil.

Inspect and maintain ECB weekly and immediately before and after rain events.

Note:

The ECB shall be applied to all surfaces having a finished slope of 2:1 or steeper, wetland areas and all ditches.

The ECB shall be constructed of either 100 per cent woven coconut fibre or a coir (coconut fibre) mat within a geojute netting (top and bottom) with biodegradable thread. Polypropylene netting shall not be used. Minimum weight of coir mat shall be 400 g/m2 (12 oz./yd2).

Approved materials are:

GEOCOIR®/DeKoWe® 400
by Belton Industries
Distributed by Demtec Enterprises
1611 Snyder's Road East, PO Box 102
Petersburg, ON N0B 2H0
Canada
Fax: 519-634-9759
Shop: 519-634-9800

ECC-2B Biodegradable double coconut blanket
by East Coast Erosion Blankets
Distributed by Geosynthetic Systems
3543 Conroy Road
Ottawa, ON K1T 3S6
Phone: 1-866-490-4436
Fax: 613-733-3795

Coir Mat 400
by Terrafix Geosynthetics
455 Horner Avenue
Toronto, ON M8W 4W9
Phone: (416) 674-0363
Fax: (416) 674-1159

Reviewed equivalent.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of coconut mat erosion contract blanket shall be by area in square metres following the contours of the ground without any allowance for overlap.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

SPEC NOTE: Item 7.01.12 is required only if an EASR or C3 PTTW for project.

Item 7.01.12 – Dewatering

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Soils and examination of site
RMDCS Section 01570 and 02240
OPSS.MUNI 517, 518, and 805

Attachments:

SPEC NOTE: List applicable attachments such as the following:

Conservation Authority Permit.

Hydrogeological Report.

Settlement Analysis Report.

Environmental Activity and Sector Registry (EASR) Registration.

This Item shall apply to construction dewatering that is required for open cut sections of construction, including tunnel related shaft excavations. This Specification specifies the requirements for the design, procurement, installation, maintenance, operation, and removal of Dewatering systems. The work shall include all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to control, convey, treat, and dispose of groundwater, surface water, surface runoff, and any other water that may be encountered during construction.

As part of the scope of work, the Contractor will be required to complete the following submittals:

SPEC NOTE: List the applicable submittals such as the following:

Preparation of a Temporary Dewatering and Discharge Plan according to O. Reg. 63/16 for the EASR posting.

Completion of a Baseline Monitoring Program.

Completion of a Building/Structure Monitoring Program.

Preparation of an Erosion Control/Sedimentation Mitigation Plan.

Preparation of a Spill Management Plan.

All submissions shall be completed in accordance with Region of Durham Standards and are to include/follow requirements noted below and in reference materials notes above, notably the Preliminary Hydrogeological Assessment and EASR.

Include:

The Contractor shall supply all pipes, wells, deep wells, well-points, pumps, portable settling tanks, electrical generators and other equipment as required for dewatering in accordance with the requirements of this section. The Contractor shall note that all standby pumps and generators must be equipped with effective muffling devices to keep noise to levels specified by the most recent edition of the jurisdictional the City of Pickering/Town of Ajax, Town of Whitby, City of Oshawa, Municipality of Clarington/Township of Uxbridge/Township of Scugog/Township of Brock’s Noise by-law.

The Contractor shall install all dewatering equipment and dewater to required levels before proceeding to excavate when excavation will be made into the underlying geologic layers. The Contractor shall take corrective measures as necessary to maintain groundwater at necessary levels to meet performance requirements. Design, supply, operate, maintain, and ultimately remove from site any and all systems required to temporary store and treat dewatered effluent as required for discharge to the roadside ditches within the Municipal right-of-way, which ultimately drain to the natural environment.

Dewater prior to and during excavations and pump all excavations to ensure works are constructed in a dry condition to the configurations and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and to stabilize the base/sides of the excavation. Include all materials, equipment, and labour to provide the necessary dewatering (installation, operation and subsequent removal and restoration) required to construct the sanitary sewer, watermain and appurtenances in a stabilized, dry trench condition.

Dewater as required for open cut/microtunnelling works, including but not limited to, installation of the open cut/water-tight microtunnel shafts for sanitary sewer and watermain. Contractor shall ensure shafts remain dry at all times during construction.

The Contractor is responsible for retaining a Subcontractor and/or Subconsultant for the preparation of all pre-construction and post-construction plans, and to complete the required sampling, testing, and monitoring in accordance with the Ministry of Environment, Conservation and Parks (MECP), Regional Municipality of Durham, Toronto Region /Central Lake Ontario/Ganaraska Region/Lake Simcoe Region/Kawartha/Otonabee Conservation Authority, and O. Reg. requirements, as applicable. The retained Subcontractor/Subconsultant shall be a Professional Engineer (P. Eng.) or a Professional Geoscientist (P. Geo.) licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario with demonstrated competence and experience in design, construction, monitoring and maintenance of dewatering and discharging systems for projects of similar size and complexity, entirely at the Contractor's cost for this item.

Note that the Region of Durham has filed an EASR with the MECP to complete dewatering activities at the site for Groundwater and incidental Stormwater that enters the excavations. All work shall be carried out in accordance with the Terms and Conditions of the EASR. The “Permit Holder” obligations shall be passed on and will become the responsibility of the Contractor.

The Contractor shall prepare a Temporary Dewatering and Discharge Plan at least four weeks prior to the start of any construction activities requiring dewatering. The Temporary Dewatering and Discharge Plan shall satisfy the monitoring requirements of the Hydrogeological Assessment Report as well as the MECP. The Temporary Dewatering and Discharge Plan shall include all details of the Contractor’s pre-construction, construction and post-construction monitoring program, including settlement monitoring surface water monitoring, water quality monitoring and discharge volume monitoring.

The Contractor shall install surface water stations at the following locations (refer to Figure xx in the Hydrogeological Report for general area):

(SPEC NOTE: List specific areas such Tributary, upstream/downstream of watercourse)

Stations shall consist of a combination of watercourse bed piezometer and staff gauge to allow monitoring of groundwater-surface water interactions to assess potential impacts during construction. Utility locates will be required prior to installation. Property agreements may also be required if stations within a municipal road allowance or within Region’s property. Refer to Table xx below for monitoring requirements.

The Contractor shall schedule for 10 business days for pre-construction submittal review by the Contract Administrator and/or their Representative. The Contractor shall provide sign-off that they have reviewed and accepted the Temporary Dewatering and Discharge Plan content before the Contract Administrator will accept for review. Plans without this sign-off, and without sealing by a Professional Engineer or Geoscientist will not be accepted by the Contract Administrator.

No dewatering work shall commence until the Contract Administrator has filed the Contractor’s approved submittals against the EASR. The Contractor shall assume that the Contract Administrator will require 10 business days following approval of the Temporary Dewatering and Discharge Plan to file the information to support the existing EASR with the MECP.

The method of dewatering shall be determined by the Contractor and must be approved by the Contract Administrator prior to the start of Construction in conjunction with the Hydrogeological Assessment and will likely involve sump pumping. Seasonal fluctuation in groundwater levels should be anticipated.

The Contract Administrator may require the Contractor to revise their method of dewatering if, in their opinion, the Contractor's method is insufficient. Note: The use of stone below pipe bedding shall not be permitted to replace proper dewatering procedures.

Keep accurate and up-to-date records of groundwater levels, quantity of water being pumped and number of pumps operating on a daily basis, and any other information required in accordance with the MECP and in accordance with the conditions in the EASR and as prescribed by the Hydrogeological Report. Copies of these records are to be provided to the Contract Administrator at regular project meetings, or upon request, as may be required. The Contractor is encouraged to use flow-meters which record data automatically. Monthly Progress Payments for this item will not be made if construction phase submittals are not up to date.

Works must comply with all local, Provincial and Federal Regulations pertinent to the Work and in particular, requirements of the latest versions of the Ontario Water Resources Act, Ministry of Labour, Immigration, Training and Skills of Ontario, Construction Safety Act of Ontario, and Trench Excavator's Protection Act.

The Contractor shall include all filtration, filter bags, check dams, and all other materials/equipment required for filtration and sediment settling at discharge locations located at least 30 m from watercourses or wetlands in a stable, vegetated area. Discharge locations shall be focused away from direct piped conduits (e.g. culverts or sewers) to watercourses and away from topographic lows. The Contractor shall discharge all dewatering to sediment control filter bags (as indicated on Contract Drawing, x-xx). The water discharging from the approved sediment removal system shall be allowed to disperse over vegetated surfaces and enter the watercourse away from the work area. The Contractor may also elect to utilize the existing xx mm diameter sanitary sewer on (SPEC NOTE: add street/road name) for discharge. The Contractor shall coordinate and obtain the necessary sewer-use permits. If conditions of the approved dewatering discharge location cannot be achieved, the Contractor shall consult with the Contract Administrator to determine an appropriate alternative.

Care for and maintain pumping equipment to prevent improper functionality due to cold weather conditions and freezing, including but not limited to use of antifreeze, de-icing fluids, use of heated enclosures, regular draining, flushing/cleaning with compressed air, regular assembly/disassembly/handling, and storage within a heated facility.

A xx mm (xx inch) diameter PVC monitoring well is to be installed between SPEC NOTE: add location, such as between two roads and monitored on a monthly basis to monitor the potential mobilization of toluene, prior to the start of any construction on SPEC NOTE: add street/road name. The suggested location is shown in Figure xx of the Hydrogeological Assessment and is referred to as Sentry Well. The well can be constructed either with an upright lockable protective casing or with a flush mounted casing depending on the specific chosen location. Utility locates shall be cleared prior to installation of this well.

Prior to construction, the Contractor shall undertake a Baseline Monitoring Program to establish the background conditions within the Study Area. The Baseline Monitoring Program shall also include one round of monitoring of surface water features that are to be monitored as determined in the Hydrogeological Assessment and as outlined above. The Contractor is to coordinate with Contract Administrator prior to contacting adjacent property/well owners whom will be impacted by the proposed dewatering operations. The Baseline Monitoring Program will also include monitoring of groundwater levels in accessible monitoring wells that may still be available.

The Contractor shall undertake a settlement monitoring program as indicated in the Settlement Analysis Report included with this Contract. This includes the installation, maintenance and removal of markers and instruments in order to monitor the horizontal and vertical movements of existing buildings/structures and areas identified as at risk of settlement. The monitoring of the devices shall be as follows (also indicated in the Settlement Analysis Report - Table x on Figure x):

Contractor shall take three readings prior to construction, and at least seven days prior to start of construction.

During dewatering/construction, monitoring shall be done daily.

Once instruments are more than 40 m from excavation and dewatering, they shall be monitored weekly for three weeks.

A weekly monitoring report (or whenever requested) summarizing all measurements shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator. The Contractor shall take all measures to prevent damage to existing structures. Repair damage to structures, pipeline, utilities, or other works damaged due to dewatering, or inadequate dewatering at no additional cost. All settlement monitoring shall be undertaken by a licensed Ontario Land Surveyor (OLS) with The Association of Ontario Land Surveyors (AOLS) and shall be reported to an established geodetic elevation benchmark and with northing and easting coordinates consistent with the project's design file (UTM NAD 83 Zone 17). The Contractor shall note that the review level is 3 mm and the alert level is 5 mm for the monitoring devices, also indicated in Figure x-Table x. The Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator if the settlement is at the review level and proceed with caution for construction/dewatering. If alert level is reached, construction shall be stopped immediately, and the Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator immediately. The Contract Administrator (or their designate) will provide direction on how to proceed. All instruments shall be removed (and disposed of) upon completion of work. Permanently restored disturbed areas to existing condition or better.

In the event that discharge water is conveyed overland and enters a watercourse, the Contractor shall ensure that the water at a point immediately upgradient of where the flow enters the watercourse contains less than 25 mg/L Total Suspended Solids (TSS) and/or a Turbidity Level of 8 NTU as demonstrated by water quality samples, for which the Contractor will complete all required testing. Monitoring shall be as per the Hydrogeological Report, Table x (also listed below). Results shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator, at the same frequency, within 24 hours of the monitoring.

Table xx

Hydrological Report

(Add Street/ Road name)	Construction Monitoring (less than 50,000 L/day)	During Dewatering (greater than 50,000 L/day)	Post Construction
Groundwater Levels	At least one additional measurement	Seasonally	Weekly	Monthly
Surface Water Stations	Three occasions prior to construction, with one measurement within 24 hours of a rainfall of at least 15 mm	Seasonally	Weekly	Monthly
Water Quality (TSS)	Five times to develop relationship between TSS and Turbidity	Turbidity measurements twice daily	Turbidity measurements twice daily	None
At least five visual checks throughout the day	At least five visual checks throughout the day
Water Quality (Potential Sources of Contamination)	Once prior to discharge	Monthly during discharge	Monthly during discharge	Once
1737 Baseline Road (Toluene)	Once prior to construction	Monthly during discharge	Monthly during discharge	Once
Sentry Well (Toluene)	Once prior to discharge	Monthly during discharge	Monthly during discharge	Once
Dewatering Volumes	Not Applicable	Daily	Daily	Not Applicable
Environmental Site Inspections	Not Applicable	Weekly	Weekly	Not Applicable

If a test sample or subsequent monitoring indicates sediment is exceeding acceptable levels of TSS or turbidity, dewatering activities shall be suspended, and the filtration arrangement shall be replaced and/or augmented prior to the re-commencement of pumping operations to ensure that discharge criteria is met. If the filtration arrangement does not sufficiently remove sediment, the filter system will need to be upgraded. The Contractor shall repeat steps of this plan, until the dewatering methodology performs such that TSS and Turbidity Level is accepted by the Contract administrator.

Settling basins or filtration bags shall be maintained to ensure they remain fully operative for the duration of the Contract. The material obtained from any cleaning-out procedure shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of outside the limits of the Contract and at the Contractor's expense and in accordance with the MECP Guidelines and Regulations and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

SPEC NOTE: For below Clause .22, the Designer shall customize the private well monitoring program based on project specific needs in consultation with Region’s Project Manager.

The Contractor shall note that (SPEC NOTE: add Consultant name if applicable) will be completing the private well monitoring program during the construction duration. The Contractor shall provide access to the site for (SPEC NOTE: add Consultant name if applicable) personnel to complete any monitoring activities at all times. The Contract Administrator shall provide details on private well monitoring throughout the duration of construction.

The Contractor shall complete environmental site inspection at a minimum frequency of once a week. The environmental inspection includes the following (but not limited to):

Determination of any changes to baseline conditions.

Inspection of groundwater management is in compliance with terms and conditions of the EASR or PTTW.

Determine if erosion is occurring at the discharge locations. If erosion is occurring, the discharge point shall be rectified immediately to the approval of the Contract Administrator at no extra cost.

The Contractor shall also note and review the Hydrogeological Investigation Report and all terms and conditions of the EASR or PTTW for additional requirements on dewatering and monitoring for the project.

Any erosion resulting from dewatering activities shall be restored to original condition and to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor shall have available, and deploy as necessary, sufficient number of pumps to maintain a dry work area.

The Contractor shall not dewater more than xxx,xxx L/day.

Dewatering volumes are to be recorded by the Contractor on a daily basis for the entirety of the project. Volumes and turbidity monitoring shall be reported to the Contract Administrator on a daily basis.

Note:

Place all pipe in dry conditions. Dewater to 1.0 metre below pipe invert, with the exception of the (SPEC NOTE list the exception including Street/Road name and/or station limits).

Trench sump pumping of all groundwater in excavations shall be included and tracked as part of this item.

Any products considered flammable or corrosive or hazardous, or which may contain chemicals that could contaminate a drinking water source are to be stored, used, and disposed of properly.

The Contractor shall note that decommissioning of existing monitoring wells is under Item 1.03.24. The decommissioning of any additional wells installed for dewatering are to be part of this Item for Dewatering and will not be paid under Item 1.03.24. Removal and decommissioning of Contractor installed wells shall be as per MECP requirements.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for dewatering shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract Price shall be compensation in full for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Include in price bid cost of all labour, plant, and materials necessary for design, supply, installation, maintenance, and removal of dewatering scheme including pumping wells/sumps, groundwater monitors, treatment systems and ground settlement monitoring.

Progress payments for dewatering shall be made as follows:

25 per cent of the lump sump cost will be disbursed following approval of all pre-construction submittals.

60 per cent will be disbursed based on successful installation of the sanitary sewer/watermain measured by linear length and pro-rated considering the total length of sanitary sewer/watermain to be installed by open cut for the project.

Remaining 15 per cent of dewatering items disbursed when post-construction submittals are completed and accepted by the Contract Administrator.

Pro-rated monthly disbursements will be held back by the Contract Administrator in the advent that the required monthly reporting is not satisfactorily submitted.

SPEC NOTE: Straw bale flow check dams (Item 7.02.01) are not a preferred erosion and sediment control device. The use of this item will be determined on a project-by-project basis.

Item 7.02.01 – Straw bale flow check dam

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Section 01570
OPSS.MUNI 805
OPSD 219.180

Also include:

Supply materials and construct straw bale flow check dams as per OPSD 219.180 as shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Maintain straw bale flow check dams.

Replace straw bale flow check dams every 45 days or as directed by the Contract Administrator. (SPEC NOTE: If project duration will exceed 45 days then use entire Clause, if not, the Use only “Replace straw bale flow check dams as directed by the Contract Administrator.”)

Replace any straw bale flow check dams in poor condition.

Inspect and maintain silt fence weekly and immediately before and after rain events.

Inspect and maintain silt fence weekly and immediately before and after rain events.

Restore disturbed areas as per Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx.

Note:

Straw bale flow check dams shall be installed prior to any construction commencement and at locations shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Contractor shall ensure each straw bale flow check dam is cleaned and is in good condition prior to any forecasted heavy rain or snow events. Remove accumulated sediment and silt from straw bale flow check dams as directed by the Contract Administrator

The straw bale flow check dams shall not be removed until the restored grassed ditch bottoms and slopes have successfully taken root as determined by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the straw bale flow check dams constructed, maintained, and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for straw bale flow check dams shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

Item 7.02.02 – Rock flow check dam

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Section 01570
OPSS.MUNI 805
OPSD 219.210 or 219.211

Also include:

Supply materials and construct rock flow check dams as per OPSD 219.210/219.211 as shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Replace rock flow check dams in poor condition and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Inspect and maintain rock flow check dams weekly and immediately before and after rain events.

Remove rock flow check dam and restore disturbed areas as per Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x.

Note:

Rock flow check dams shall be installed prior to any construction commencement and at locations shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

The rock flow check dams shall not be removed until the restored grassed ditch bottoms and slopes have successfully taken root as determined by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the rock flow check dams constructed, maintained, and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for rock flow check dams shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

Item 7.02.03 – Light-duty silt fence barrier

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Section 01570
OPSS.MUNI 805
OPSD 219.110

Also include:

Supply materials and construct light-duty silt fence as per OPSD 219.110 as shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Remove sediment from silt fence and dispose as required in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Replace any silt fence in poor condition and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Inspect and maintain silt fence weekly and immediately before and after rain events.

Restore disturbed areas as per Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x.

Note:

Silt fence shall be installed prior to any construction commencement and at locations shown on the Contract Drawings.

The silt fence shall not be removed until the restored grassed areas have successfully taken root as determined by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of light-duty silt fence barriers shall be in the length in lineal metres from end to end of the barrier constructed, maintained, and removed, following the contours of the ground.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for light-duty silt fence barriers shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

Item 7.02.04 – Gabion baskets, including geotextile

Reference:
Contract Drawing, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
OPSS.MUNI 512

Also include:

Supply and place Class II (heavy-duty), non-woven geotextile filter fabric (Terrafix 360R, Mirafi 160N, or Armtec 200).

Supply and place gabion basket as per detail on Contract Drawing, x-xx.

Supply and place 100 mm to 300 mm depth of gabion stone.

Permanently restore all disturbed areas as per Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx.

Note:

Placing gabion stone shall be done in such a manner that the surface of the finished stone placement shall have a uniform appearance and be without segregation.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of gabion baskets shall be by volume in cubic metres based on the nominal dimensions of the gabions used. When the gabion excavation overlaps excavation required for other work, the measurement shall be made as specified with no deduction for overlaps.

Payment for the geotextile shall be included in the tender item for gabion baskets.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Any costs associated with any unauthorized over-excavation shall be the Contractor’s responsibility and at no additional cost to the Owner.

Item 7.02.05 – Sediment trap in ditch

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 805
OPSD 219.220

Also include:

Excavate basin as per OPSD 219.220.

Dispose of any excess material off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply material and construct rock flow check dam as shown per OPSD 219.220.

Perform any required maintenance as required and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Contractor shall ensure each excavated sediment trap is cleaned and is in good condition prior to any forecasted heavy rain or snow events. Perform any required maintenance or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of sediments trap in ditch constructed, maintained, and removed. Component parts shall not be counted separately for payment.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for sediment traps in ditch shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

Item 7.02.07 – Temporary diversion channel

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSD 221.030

Include:

Excavate and dispose of excess material in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and place rounded riverstone and geotextile to stabilize the diversion channel according to the Contract Documents and as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Maintain earth plugs at each end until the temporary channel is complete.

After watercourse flows are diverted into the temporary channel and as water recedes from the old watercourse area, transfer any living animals to the watercourse downstream with the assistance of the Region’s biologist.

Maintain the temporary diversion channel including replacement of any washed out material as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Remove and regrade the temporary diversion channel area upon approval by the Contract Administrator.

Remove and dispose of rounded riverstone and geotextile as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Use only approved earth fill material for backfilling.

Employ construction methods which will to minimize any disturbance and release of sediments to the watercourse.

Note:

Approval-in-principle has been obtained from the Ministry of Natural Resources and Forestry (MNRF) for this temporary diversion channel.

Work under this item includes the construction of the temporary diversion channel to divert the watercourse flows from the working area for the watercourse realignment. Construct as per OPSD 221.030 as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Prior to commencing with any of the watercourse work, the temporary diversion channel shall be constructed in the dry.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for a temporary diversion channel shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

No additional payment or claim shall be made, for any additional work, materials, or damages that may result from the watercourse flows or methods used for the stream control, diversion of watercourse flows and/or dewatering.

Item 7.02.10 – Safety fence barrier

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers) Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration

Include:

Supply and install orange polypropylene temporary safety fence and heavy-duty metal T-shaped fence posts. When installed in a high pedestrian traffic area, a safety type post is required.

Maintain fencing during construction.

Remove temporary fencing materials upon completion of work.

Permanently restore all disturbed surface as per Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x.

Measurement for Payment

Measurement of safety fence shall be based on the actual length, in metres, of safety fence installed, maintained, and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract prices for the above item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for safety fence barriers shall be based on the following percentage of the Contract price:

30 per cent for initial installation.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal and satisfactory restoration.

Item 7.02.11 – Barrier for tree protection

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
OPSS.MUNI 801
OPSD 220.010

Also include:

Supply and install orange polypropylene temporary snow fence and heavy-duty metal T-shaped fence posts. When installed in a high pedestrian traffic area, a safety type post is required.

Maintain the tree protection during construction.

Remove the barrier for tree protection as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Temporary tree protection barrier material shall be erected around the dripline of trees designated by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of barrier for tree protection shall be in linear metres measured along the length of the barrier. Overlaps shall not be measured.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work.

Progress payments for barriers for tree protection shall be based on the following percentage of the Contract price:

60 per cent for supply and installation.

25 per cent for maintenance.

15 per cent for removal.

Item 7.02.12 – Heavy-duty silt fence barrier

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Section 01570
OPSS.MUNI 805
OPSD 219.130

Also include:

Supply materials and construct heavy-duty silt fence as per OPSD 219.130 as shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Remove sediment from silt fence and dispose as required in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Replace any silt fence in poor condition and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Inspect and maintain silt fence weekly and immediately before and after rain events.

Restore disturbed areas as per Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x.

Note:

Silt fence shall be installed prior to any construction commencement and at locations shown on the Contract Drawings.

The silt fence shall not be removed until the restored grassed areas have successfully taken root as determined by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of heavy-duty silt fence barrier shall be the length in lineal metres from end to end of the barrier constructed, maintained, and removed, following the contours of the ground.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work.

Progress payments for heavy-duty silt fence barriers shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

Item 7.02.20 – Splash pad

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Watercourse/fisheries protection RMDCS Section 01570 and 02240

Include:

Supply and place four 0.6 m x 0.6 m concrete patio slabs.

Place splash pad 30 m from edge of waterbody.

Remove splash pad upon removal of dewatering system.

Permanently restore all disturbed surface as per Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x.

Note:

Concrete splash pad will be subject to (SPEC NOTE: Insert name of applicable Conservation Authority) Conservation Authority approval.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of splash pads placed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for splash pads shall be based on the following percentage of the Contract price:

60 per cent upon installation.

40 per cent upon removal and satisfactory restoration.

SPEC NOTE: For catch basin erosion and sediment control, use either Item 7.02.21 or 7.02.26. The Designer shall discuss which item to be used on a project-by-project basis with Regional Construction staff prior to finalizing which item to use.

Item 7.02.21 – Catch basin siltation trap

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)

Also Include:

Supply and install 16-gauge, 10 mm wire mesh overlain with Terrafix 420R, Mirafi 170N, or Armtec 230 geotextile filter fabric extending a minimum of 200 mm beyond all sides of the catch basin.

Supply and install 200 mm thickness of 20 mm diameter Clear Limestone.

Replace any catch basin sediment traps in poor condition and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Inspect and maintain silt fence weekly and immediately before and after rain events.

Remove each control measure at the completion of work.

Maintain each control measure during construction, including removal and disposal of accumulated sediment.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of catch basin siltation traps installed, maintained, and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work.

Progress payments for catch basin siltation traps shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

Item 7.02.22 – xxx mm diameter light-duty fibre roll barrier

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Section 01570
OPSS.MUNI 805
OPSD 219.120

Include:

The fibre roll barrier shall be installed at the locations as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 805 and OPSD 219.120. The Contractor is advised that the location or alignment of the fibre roll barrier may be modified as deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator to provide effective sediment control. Additional fibre roll barrier may be required.

The Contractor shall supply, install, and maintain the fibre roll barrier for the duration of the Contract and until the site is deemed stable and the fibre roll barrier is deemed unnecessary by the Contract Administrator, in writing.

Maintenance of the fibre roll is of paramount importance, the inspection of which shall be performed daily and immediately before and after rain events. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the barrier. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, daily addressing all deficiencies in the installation, the operation, and the condition of such control measures. Any deficiencies shall be promptly addressed.

Also include:

Maintain fibre roll barrier and remove sediment and dispose as required in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Restore disturbed areas as per Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x.

Note:

Fibre roll barrier shall be installed prior to any construction commencement, at locations shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

The fibre roll barrier shall not be removed until the restored grassed areas have successfully taken root as determined by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of light-duty fibre roll barriers shall be the length in lineal metres from end to end of the barrier constructed, maintained, and removed, following the contours of the ground.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item(s) shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for light-duty fibre roll barriers shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

Item 7.02.23 – xxx mm diameter fibre roll flow check dam

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
RMDCS Section 01570
OPSS.MUNI 805
OPSD 219.191

Include:

The fibre roll flow check dam shall be installed at locations as shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 805 and OPSD 219.191. The Contractor is advised that the location or alignment of the fibre roll barrier may be modified as deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator to provide effective sediment control. Additional fibre roll flow check dam may be required.

The Contractor shall supply, install, and maintain the fibre roll flow check dam for the duration of the Contract and until the site is deemed stable and the fibre roll flow check dam is deemed unnecessary by the Contract Administrator, in writing.

Maintenance of the fibre roll is of paramount importance, the inspection of which shall be performed daily and immediately before and after rain events. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the barrier. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, daily addressing all deficiencies in the installation, the operation, and the condition of such control measures. Any deficiencies to be promptly addressed.

Also include:

Maintain fibre roll flow check dam and remove sediment and dispose as required in compliance with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Restore disturbed areas as per Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x.

Note:

Fibre roll flow check dam shall be installed prior to any stage of construction and at the limits of grading at locations shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

The fibre roll flow check dam shall not be removed until the restored grassed areas have successfully taken root as determined by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the fibre roll flow check dams constructed, maintained, and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item(s) shall be full compensation for all Labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for fibre roll flow check dams shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

Item 7.02.24 – Turbidity curtain

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration
OPSS.MUNI 805
OPSD 219.260 and 219.261

Include:

Supply and install materials to construct turbidity curtain.

Maintain and reinstate turbidity curtain as required during construction or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Restoration of disturbed areas as per Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x.

Remove and dispose of all material related to the above work upon successful restoration as determined by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Turbidity curtain shall be installed prior to any stage of construction at the location shown on the Contract Drawings, and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of turbidity curtain shall be made in lineal metres along its length from end to end between tie-downs for each turbidity curtain installed, maintained, and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

Progress payments for turbidity curtains shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

Item 7.02.25 – Qualified person services for excess soil management (cash allowance)

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and Excess Soil Management

Also Include:

The Contractor shall retain a Qualified Person (QP), as defined by O.Reg. 153/04 and O.Reg. 406/19 (both as amended) to assist in:

Overseeing the Contractor’s sampling and testing program for excess soil management for compliance with Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and Excess Soil Management and O.Reg. 406/19.

Assessing excavated soils along the alignment for any visual and/or olfactory indications of chemical impact and evaluate the need for soil quality testing in order to verify potential areas of contaminated soils that would then need to be segregated, excavated, and disposed of off-site.

The QP shall assist the Contractor in segregating contaminated soils from non-contaminated soils.

The QP shall maintain detailed records of supervision of all works, including works in areas of known contamination, along with any sampling or testing work done and provide to the Contractor Administrator for review on a weekly basis, as required.

The QP shall be employed by the same firm retained to prepare the Contractor’s Excavation, Tracking and Hauling Plan submittal. The Contractor may not substitute QP without prior approval of the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor’s QP, or their representative, shall complete visual inspections on a daily basis for all excavation work within (SPEC NOTE: indicate the location if applicable).

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and materials to do the work.

A cash allowance of $60,000 (excluding HST) has been set by the Contract Administrator for this item. Progress payments shall be supported by time and material invoices from the Contractor’s QP and shall carry a 10 per cent markup of the time and material invoices for Contractor overhead and profit. At the outset of work, the Contractor shall provide documentation to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator that at least three competitive bids were solicited by the Contractor for QP services by qualified firms with home offices within 100 km of the project site for this specific Contract. QP invoices shall be itemized on a time and material basis and shall not include charges for overtime, mileage, vehicle rentals, meals, accommodations, or other expenses associated with travel to and from the site. All travel costs are to be embedded in the hourly billing rates of the QP’s staff.

Item 7.02.26 – Catch basin filter bag

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add applicable Drawing Numbers)

Also Include:

Supply and install reusable catch basin filter bags. These shall be Silt Sacks® or an approved equivalent.

Remove grate and place the filter bag in the opening as per manufacturer’s installation instructions.

Hold approximately 150 mm of the filter bag outside of the frame, this area is for the lifting straps.

Replace grate to hold the filter bag in place.

Inspect and maintain catch basin filter bag weekly and immediately before and after rain events. Maintain each catch basin filter bag during construction, including removal and disposal of accumulated sediment.

Once the restraint cord is no longer visible, the filter bag is full and requires to be emptied. To empty the sediment, following the below steps:

Supply and install two 25 mm diameter rebar and place through the lifting loops on each side of the filter bag to facilitate the lifting of the filter bag.

Lift the filter bag from the bottom (using the rebars).

Empty the contents in an area approved by the Contract Administrator.

Excess materials shall be disposed off-site in compliance with O.Reg. 416.19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Clean and rinse the filter bag.

Ensure to return the filter bag to its original shape and then reinstall in the catch basin.

Remove each filter sack at the completion of work or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

The sack shall be stored clean, dry, and out of direct sunlight until they are required to be installed.

The sacks shall be installed prior to any construction commencement, at locations shown on the Contract Drawings, or as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of catch basin filter bags installed, maintained, and removed.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material required to do the work.

Progress payments for catch basin filter bags shall be made as follows:

30 per cent for initial construction.

50 per cent for maintenance.

20 per cent for removal.

SPEC NOTE: Use Item 7.02.41 for typical sanitary sewer and watermain projects where there are not Roadworks items.

Item 7.02.41 – Excavation, hauling, and tracking plan

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – On-site and excess soil management
Excess Soil Transportation Monthly Summary Report Example

Include:

Preparation of the pre-construction submittal ‘Excavating, Hauling and Tracking Plan’ as prescribed by the Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x by the Contractor’s Qualified Person (QP).

Note:

The Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan needs to be reviewed, approved, and signed by the Contractor’s QP. It shall also be submitted to the Contract Administrator (CA) and reviewed by the CA and CA QP.

Potential reuse sites are to be discussed with the Region during the development of the Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan to assess whether there are Region sites that can be accessed as a reuse site.

Potential soil source sites are to be discussed with the Region during the development of the Excavation, Hauling and Tracking Plan to assess whether there are Region sites that can be accessed as a soil source.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the excavation, hauling, and tracking plan shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for the excavation, hauling, and tracking plan shall be based on the following percentage of the Contract price:

60 per cent upon satisfactory submission to CA and review by the CA QP.

40 per cent of the lump sum stated in the Tender Form for this item shall be paid on a pro-rated basis as work progress.

General Items

Item 8.01.01/02 – Supply and maintain field office (25 m2 or 15 m2)

Reference:
RMDCS Section 01520

SPEC NOTE: Always use the larger Field Office (Item 8.01.02) except where space requirements prohibit placement of the larger trailer.

Include:

Supply and set-up a 25 m2 (approx. 9 feet x 30 feet) OR 15 m2 (9 feet x 18 feet) field office trailer and contents according to RMDCS Section 01520 for the use of and as required by the Contract Administrator.

Remove field office trailer and restore disturbed areas to a condition equivalent to that which existed prior to installation.

Supply a dual tray colour printer/scanner capable of printing legal sized documents.

Note:

The sanitary washroom facility requirements in RMDCS Section 01520 have changed as of April 2021.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of months (and part months at a pro-rated amount) during which the field office is in use by the Contract Administrator. No payment shall be made for months in which the Contractor is not actively working on-site.

Payment shall begin only upon full compliance with the specifications. No payment shall be made for the field office until all requirements for the field office have been met, regardless of whether the Contract Administrator has begun to use the field office prior to full compliance.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 8.02 – Contract documentation

The sum of prices bid for Items 8.02.01.A, 8.02.01.B, 8.02.02 and 8.02.03 shall not exceed two per cent (three per cent for contracts estimated at < $250,000) of the Total Sum Tendered Price.

Item 8.02.01.A – Performance bond

Item 8.02.01.B – Labour and material payment bond

Reference:
Supplementary General Conditions of Contract
OPSS.MUNI 100 – General Conditions of Contract

Include:

Provide 50 per cent performance bond.

Provide 50 per cent labour and material payment bond.

Note:

Payment of this item shall be made on the first Progress Payment Certificate.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the performance bond shall be by lump sum.

Payment for the labour and material payment bond shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract prices for the above tender items shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 8.02.02 – Insurance

Reference:
Supplementary General Conditions of Contract
OPSS.MUNI 100 – General Conditions of Contract

Include:

Provide Liability Insurance as per Special Provisions, Information for Bidders, Supplementary General Conditions of Contract and General Conditions of Contract. Note that for General Liability Insurance, the Regional Municipality of Durham, the (SPEC NOTE add applicable lower tier municipalities) and (SPEC NOTE add consultant’s name if applicable) shall be added as additional insureds under this policy.

Note:

Payment of this item shall be made on the first Progress Payment Certificate.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for insurance shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 8.02.03 – Warranty security holdback financing

Reference:
Supplementary General Conditions of Contract, Item 35 - GC 8.02.04.14

Include:

Cost of financing for Warranty Security Holdback. Maximum amount of Warranty Security Holdback shall be $xxx. (SPEC NOTE: This value will be entered by RMD Construction Tendering Staff)

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for warranty security holdback financing shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for the warranty security holdback financing shall be made as follows:

25 per cent on the first Progress Payment Certificate.

25 per cent on the Substantial Performance Payment Certificate.

50 per cent on the Final Acceptance Payment Certificate, together with the release of the Warranty Security Holdback at the end of the Warranty Period, as may be extended according to the Contract Documents.

Item 8.02.04 – Extension of warranty period to 24 months

Reference:
Supplementary General Conditions of Contract

Include:

All costs to extend the Warranty Period from 12 months to 24 months according to the Supplementary General Conditions of Contract.

Note:

This is not a provisional item.

Payment of this item shall be made on the Substantial Performance Payment Certificate.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for the extension of warranty period to 24 months shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 8.03.01 – Mobilization and demobilization

Reference:
RMDCS Section 01725

Also include:

Provide and apply water as required to control dust until project is completed.

Road occupancy permits as required by the Region and local municipalities.

Noise by-law exemptions by local municipalities as required.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for mobilization and demobilization shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for mobilization and demobilization shall be made as follows:

50 per cent of the lump sum stated in the Tender Form for this Item shall be paid on the first Progress Payment Certificate.

The 50 per cent balance shall be paid on the issuance of the Completion Payment Certificate.

Item 8.03.03 – Traffic convoy (pilot vehicle)

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 304
Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7 – Latest edition

Also include:

Supply all necessary flag personnel, signs, pilot vehicles with operators, and all other labour, equipment, and material required to convoy traffic through or around the work zone.

Note:

The maximum speed of the convoy shall be 30 km/h.

Measurement for Payment:

The measurement of traffic convoy shall be in hours based on the number of hours that the pilot vehicle is convoying traffic.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation of all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 8.03.04 – Traffic control and signing

Reference:
Contract Drawings, x-xx (SPEC NOTE: Add optional applicable Drawing Numbers) Detour Route Map
Special Provisions - General Requirements, Clause xx – Traffic control and safety
Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7 – Latest edition
OPSS.MUNI 706
Occupational Health and Safety Act – O.Reg. 213/91, Sections 65 through 69.1

For purpose of this contract and specification the definition of the “Traffic Control Plan” means and shall include a Traffic Protection Plan (as per Occupational Health and Safety Act – O.Reg. 213/91, Sections 65 through 69.1) a Detour Plan and a Construction Staging Plan (as per Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7 – latest edition).

Also include:

Supply and maintain traffic control and signing as specified in the Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx and the Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7 – latest edition, as well as the provisions of Ontario Regulation 213/91, Sections 67, 68, 69, and 69.1.

Engage the services of a specialist subcontractor to design, install, operate, and maintain the Traffic Control and Staging Plan for work on xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) as outlined in the General Requirement, Clause x until the completion of the project.

Submit detailed Traffic Control and Staging Plan no later than two weeks prior to the commencement of construction activities and material deliveries.

Supply, install, maintain, and relocate (when required) all traffic control devices and signage in accordance with the Traffic Control Plan and General Requirements, Clause x. Including removal at the completion of the project.

Including but limited to:

Advance Notice Signs (TC-1, TC-5, TC-64).

Detour Designation Signs.

Pedestrian Signage.

Road Closed Signs.

Lane Restrictions, Closure, and Designation Signs.

All devices outline in Reg 213/91 Section 67(2).

TC-12 Flashing Arrow.

TC-54 Barrels.

Advance Notice Signs shall be supplied and placed two weeks in advance of construction work. Signs shall be placed at the beginning and the end of all construction zones including side streets and roads abutting the construction zone. They shall also be placed in advance of all road and lane closures located at key locations throughout the detour routes and intersecting streets to advise motorists/pedestrians of the upcoming work, closures, and detours.

Paid Duty Police and Portable Variable Message Signs will be paid under a separate pay items.

Remove and reinstall or dispose, as applicable, existing roadway signage according to Subsection 706.07.02 of OPSS.MUNI 706. All reinstalled signs shall be installed on new posts of same kind unless approval is granted by the Contract Administrator to reuse the existing post. New posts shall be paid under items 1.38.01, 1.38.02, 1.38.03, 1.38.04, 1.38.05, and 1.38.10.

SPEC NOTE:

1. Clause .7 is to be used for road rehab/watermain/sanitary sewer projects where the sign is only being removed to facilitate construction and reinstalled in its original location. Ensure new post items are included in the Contract.

2. Where signs are to be removed and reinstalled at a new location, it shall be covered under item 1.38.22 and Clause .7 will not be applicable.

Coordinate and communicate with abutting property owners to minimize impacts on use of and access to these properties.

SPEC NOTE: Where it is anticipated that a police officer will be required at signalized intersections, use the separate tender Item 8.03.05.

Note:

Where an existing sign is proposed to be replaced with a new sign (sign blanks shall be supplied by the Owner) installation of the new sign shall be paid under Item 1.38.20 or 1.38.21.

Signs mounted on traffic signal or street lighting poles must be removed and reinstalled by a licensed electrician under Item 4.10.06.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for traffic control and signing shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for traffic control and signing shall be made as follows:

50 per cent of the lump sum price shall be paid upon the supply and installation of the complete initial traffic control plan.

50 per cent of the lump sum price upon the removal of Traffic Control Plan components at the completion of the project.

Item 8.03.05 – Paid duty police officer for intersections

Include:

Contractor shall coordinate with Durham Regional Police Services (DRPS) to supply paid duty Police Officer(s) and police cruiser(s) at the following intersections, as directed by the Contract Administrator:

xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) at xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx).

xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) at xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx).

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of paid duty police officers shall be by actual on-site working time in hours, per officer.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 8.03.06 – Portable variable message sign (PVMS)

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 706

706.01 Scope

Section 706.01 of OPSS.MUNI 706 is amended by the addition of the following:

This specification also covers the requirements for the use of Portable Variable Message Signs (PVMS).

706.05.04 – Portable Variable Message Signs

Subsection 706.05.04 of OPSS.MUNI 706 is amended by the addition of the following:

All PVMS shall be from approved manufacturers listed in this document and shall have operating characteristics according to the Contract Documents.

706.07 - Construction

Section 706.07.04 of OPSS.MUNI 706 is deleted and replaced by the following Subsection:

706.07.04 - Portable Variable Message Sign

Provide PVMS for the duration of the road closure or work on xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) and at other times as directed by the Contract Administrator. Install, operate, relocate, and remove all PVMS as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Set up and place signs properly so that the messages are unobstructed and legible to approaching motorists for at least 300 m. Ensure that signs do not obstruct any existing signs. Install and level signs such that the bottom of the sign display is at least 1.5 m above the adjacent edge of pavement elevation. Maintain and set signs at proper angle to traffic so that they can be viewed at the highest possible luminance value. Adjust message brightness to ambient light conditions as determined by the Contract Administrator. Keep sign blank and turn away from traffic while not in use for more than 24 hours.

The Contractor is not required to create messages. The use of any messages other than those provided by designated Traffic Engineering staff is prohibited. The Contractor shall provide a cellular connection to a NTCIP compatible PVMS with a public static Internet Protocol (IP) address and login credentials to connect to the Region of Durham’s Roadway Event Management System (REMS) for designated Traffic Engineering staff to input, monitor and adjust customized messages as required. The following information is also required to help in the connection of the PVMS to the Region’s systems:

Contractor must provide sign manufacturer name and model number.

Contractor must provide cell modem manufacturer name, model number and login credentials.

Login credentials and configuration settings used with 3rd party sign management software will need to be provided when requested.

If a PVMS/Communications failure occurs, the Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator and take immediate action to correct the problem.

706.09 - Measurement for payment

Section 7.06.09.01.03 of OPSS.MUNI 706 is deleted and replaced by the following Section:

706.09.01.03 - Portable Variable Message Sign (Temporary)

Measurement shall be made of the number of months (and part months at a pro-rated amount) for each PVMS supplied. The tender quantity shown in the Form of Tender is based on supplying xx PVMS signs for xx months each for a total quantity of xx months (xx PVMS signs x xx months = xx months).

Approved Manufacturers and Products

The approved manufacturers listed below have demonstrated in the past their ability to produce PVMS in accordance with the specifications. However, the Owner does not warrant that these sources will produce acceptable or sufficient signs for any contract. The Contractor shall make such independent investigation and examination as they deem necessary, to be satisfied as to the quality and quantity of the signs available from these sources, and to ensure that all signs supplied by them satisfy the requirements of the specification.

Approved Manufacturer	Approved Model
ADDCO 240 Arlington Avenue East St. Paul, Minnesota 55117 USA Phone number 651-488-8600 Fax number 651-558-3600 Website: https://addco.com/	DH1000-ALS
Solar Technology Inc. 7620 Cetronia Road Allentown, Pennsylvania 18106 USA Phone number 610-391-8600 Fax number 610-391-8601 Website: https://solartechnology.com/	Silent Messenger
Ver-Mac Inc. 1781 Rue Bresse Québec, QC G2G 2V2 Phone number 888-488-7446 Fax number 418-654-0517 Website: https://www.ver-mac.com/en	PCMS-1210, PCMS-1500LP; and PCMS-1500C
Wanco Inc. 5870 Tennyson Street Arvada, Colorado 80003 USA Phone number 800-972-0755 Fax number 303-427-5725 Website: https://www.wanco.com/	WTLMB

Operating Characteristics

The Portable Variable Message Signs shall exhibit the following operating characteristics while in use:

Light emitting diode (LED) technology or hybrid LED/Flip Disk Technology

Antiglare polycarbonate sheeting.

Solar powered.

Capable of operating for seven consecutive days on battery power supply with solar panels disconnected.

Shall include all hardware and software necessary to facilitate reliable local and remote sign control.

Programmable (25 message sequence for a one week duration).

Shall have the complete instruction manual kept with the console.

Equipped with full keyboard or touch-screen console.

Capable of displaying a multiphase message with variable dwell times for each phase.

Capable of displaying message text in narrow or bold font.

Text of message shall not scroll or travel horizontally or vertically across the face of the sign.

Capable of displaying three lines of eight characters, each character being approximately 457 mm high.

Each character matrix comprised of 35 pixels, five wide by seven high.

Message visible from 500 m away in all ambient light conditions.

Message legible from 50 m to 300 m away in all ambient light conditions.

Ability to raise the bottom of the display board a minimum of 1.5 m above ground level.

Flat black background on the display area when the pixels are in the off position.

Trailer painted orange or yellow.

Capability to accurately level the sign and aim it towards oncoming traffic.

Photosensor array to enable the luminance of the sign to be controlled both automatically and manually in relation to ambient light levels.

Locking device to prevent rotation of the sign in winds up to 100 km/h, while the sign is in display mode.

Trailer Mounting

The maximum dimensions of the Portable Variable Message Sign and trailer assembly while in display mode shall be as follows:

Maximum overall height = 4.5 m.

Maximum overall width = 3.75 m.

Maximum overall length = 5.5 m.

Maximum gross unit weight = 2,500 kg.

Conspicuity Markings

PVMS trailer assemblies shall have high reflectivity micro-prismatic florescent sheeting tape (or equivalent) (e.g., diamond grade or Type VII) meeting ATSM standard E991 and ASTM E1247 for florescent materials. The reflectorized tape shall be of alternating, uniform white and orange or white and yellow sections. Sections of reflectorized tape shall be placed around the trailer frame, tongue, or other outermost dimension, at uniform height and width such to reflect the light from the headlights of a vehicle approaching from any direction.

PVMS sign assemblies shall have high reflectivity micro-prismatic florescent sheeting tape (or equivalent) (e.g., diamond grade or Type VII) meeting ATSM standard E991 and ASTM E1247 for florescent materials. The reflectorized tape shall be construction orange in colour, and 13 mm in width. The tape shall surround the outside of the sign assembly on all sides and be a uniform distance from the outmost pixels.

For continuing approval, the manufacturer shall not change material or product type or source, production methods, or design of unit without the prior written authorization of the Owner.

Contractor Owned/Rented PVMS Deployment

Responsibilities of Durham Region Designated Traffic Engineering Staff

Once a request is received from the Contractor along with the construction staging information and proposed PVMS location(s), the designated Durham Region Traffic Engineering staff will ensure that at least one of the application guidelines are satisfied and that the proposed location information is feasible.

Ensure that the proposed PVMS messages are in line with the message guidelines.

The Durham Region designated Traffic Engineering staff will review and grant approval for the deployment and placement of the PVMS as well as the proposed messages.

Add the PVMS into the Region’s Roadway Event Management System (REMS)

Changes to any proposed PVMS messages should be sent to the Contractor for their information.

The selected PVMS message should be posted via REMS.

Ensure that the messages are updated and removed when needed by monitoring the PVMS message and roadway conditions.

Responsibilities of Contractors

Provide at least two days notice before PVMS is installed, removed, or relocated.

Ensure signs are installed and functional at least 72 hours before mobilization on the site.

Provide construction staging information, proposed PVMS location(s) and the timeline for completion of work for approval by designated Traffic Engineering staff.

Provide IP information and login credentials for the PVMS(s) to establish communications.

Verify that the sign and cellular communication is in good working condition.

Trailer must come with a Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna and logic built into the trailer software. This enables the Traffic Management and ITS (TM and ITS) to know the location of all PVMS in use within the Region at any given time and will reduce the chances of erroneous messages being sent to a PVMS due to misunderstanding of their actual location.

Contractor shall transport, place, maintain, and inspect the PVMS. Ensure PVMS is placed at the correct location as approved by the designated Traffic Engineering staff and is placed according to the operational guidelines as set out in the above the ”Operating Characteristics” subsection.

Test communications between the PVMS and REMS to ensure that the sign can be remotely controlled from the TM and ITS prior to start of construction.

Relocate the PVMS for various construction stages as approved by designated Traffic Engineering staff.

Maintain continuous operation of the PVMS during construction.

Inform designated TM and ITS staff if any malfunction or communication failures occur on site.

Contractor is not authorized to create or change PVMS messages.

If the PVMS is required for more than a week, check battery life on a weekly basis.

Item 8.03.20 – Winter shutdown

Reference:
RMDCS Section 01725

Include:

Demobilization for winter shutdown and mobilization following the completion of the winter shutdown from December 1 to May 1 the following year.

Note:

The construction schedule for this contract will require a winter shutdown period. During the winter shutdown period, employ necessary procedures and perform necessary temporary work, to the satisfaction of the Region, in order to provide a safe roadway for motorists and pedestrians and to accommodate Regional and municipal maintenance operations during this period. The Contractor shall submit a detailed Winter Shutdown Plan, no later than three weeks prior to the commencement of the Winter Shutdown.

Prior to winter shutdown, ensure that binder asphalt is placed on all stages constructed prior to the winter shutdown and that all permanent/temporary line markings are in place.

Field Review:

Prior to winter shutdown, conduct a comprehensive field review with the Contract Administrator, the Owner, a (SPEC NOTE: add local municipality) representative, and the Contractor’s representative(s). This review is intended to identify problem areas that exist, or areas which may become problems over the winter shutdown period, and to clarify areas of responsibility for maintenance of the roadway during the winter shutdown period. The review shall be documented by the Contract Administrator who will provide copies to all participants for better coordination. The procedures outlined herein do not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities as defined under OPSS.MUNI 100 – General Conditions and the Region’s Supplementary General Conditions of Contract.

As a minimum, the review shall include the following topics:

Pavement Surfaces:

Do not leave a centerline drop-off over the winter.

Do not leave extensive lengths of cold milled surfaces open to traffic over the winter.

If butt joints have to be left over the winter, extend the approach taper to a minimum length of 3 m per 10 mm of thickness.

Do not leave steel plates on the roadway over the winter.

Review pavement patches to see if they are relatively flush with the adjacent pavement. If necessary, mill off or fill. If deteriorated areas of the pavement cannot be permanently patched, remove loose material, and fill with a bituminous sand mix and compact by mechanical means or wheel rolling.

Ensure that all maintenance hole, water valve and gas valve covers are flush with the adjacent pavement. All of these are potential hazards to snowplows. Provide adequate tapers around exposed castings.

Roadway:

Check for high shoulder areas that could pond water on traffic lanes. Remove high areas by milling or other approved methods to ensure positive pavement drainage.

Eliminate pavement/shoulder drop-offs by grading material up to the edge of pavement or edge of shoulder, as appropriate, and compacting to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Remove all construction debris, such as broken concrete, bituminous material, piles of sand, etc., from within the clear zone.

Remove all equipment and construction materials from the roadway over the winter shutdown including but not limited to idle traffic control devices such as message boards, arrow boards and construction speed limit sign trailers. Also ensure that any equipment stored behind concrete barriers is far enough away as to not become a hazard when the barrier shifts if hit.

All materials shall be removed from the shoulder and out of the clear zone before the winter shutdown.

Erosion Control:

Install all temporary erosion control features and any permanent features that can be incorporated before the winter shutdown. Contractor shall conduct periodic inspections and maintenance during the winter shutdown and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Drainage:

Check to see that ditches are not impaired and that culverts are clean. Remove any impairment to stormwater flows.

Ensure that closed drainage systems are secured to prevent access by children.

On multilane urban sections, the outside travel lane must be left at the same elevation as the inside lane(s) to ensure that water is not trapped between lanes.

Signs and Pavement Markings:

Install all regulatory signs (Stop, Yield, No Passing, Speed Limit, etc.) at the proper locations and heights in accordance with OTM Book 5 and 6 (latest edition). Locations shall be approved by the Owner prior to placement.

Work zone signing shall be reviewed. Remove all temporary sign supports. Provide permanent supports for all signs to be left in place over the winter shutdown period. Remove or completely cover any signs that are not applicable to conditions left during the winter shut down period. Examples of acceptable sign face coverings are as follows:

Plywood.

Dark canvas material.

Thick gauge opaque plastic material of a dark color. (plastic garbage bags are not acceptable).

Another sign, the exact same size with the backside facing toward traffic.

Remove or cover all “Construction Ahead” (TC-1) signs if no unusual conditions will exist over the winter shutdown period or if the current Stage work is completed. Such signs shall not be used to identify the limits of a project that will resume at some future date; however, they should be displayed if any one of the following conditions occurs over the winter:

Active construction.

Detours.

Inadequate striping.

Inactive stage construction.

Crossovers.

Other conditions (e.g., special conditions, emergency work, construction maintenance work).

Place pavement markings as early as possible to avoid poor weather conditions, specification cut-off dates, and scheduling problems that can and do occur late in the year.

For all stop bars left over the winter shutdown, the Contractor shall utilize durable markings.

Miscellaneous Considerations:

Review the condition of all entrances, side roads and mailbox turnouts before the winter shutdown. If they are not in an acceptable condition, place enough temporary aggregate or bituminous material to keep them passable for the winter period.

Review road surface conditions and repair any problem areas.

Check all traffic control items such as signals, arrow boards, signs, barricades, barrier walls, etc. to see that they are properly placed and in good working order throughout the winter. Leave as much width as possible for the open traffic lanes over the winter.

The cost of all labour, equipment, and materials necessary to comply with these provisions shall be deemed to be included with the Contract price for the various tender items in the contract. If the Contractor fails to respond to requests by the Owner to repair deficiencies during the winter shutdown period, the Owner may, with five days written notice to the Contractor, except in the case of an emergency, complete repair of such deficiencies using its own or other forces and charge back all costs to the Contractor.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for winter shutdown shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Progress payments for winter shutdown shall be made as follows:

50 per cent of the lump sum stated in the Tender Form for this Item shall be paid on the first Progress Payment Certificate following the commencement of the winter shutdown.

50 per cent of the lump sum stated in the Tender Form for this Item shall be paid on the first Progress Payment Certificate following the completion of the winter shutdown.

Item 8.05.01 – Pre-construction condition surveys

Reference:
Clause 539.04.02.03 of OPSS.MUNI 539

SPEC. NOTE: Requirement for precondition surveys to be based on soil conditions, type of construction, age of structure and proximity of structure to the construction area. If the structure is in close proximity to the construction area or is an older structure, a precondition survey should be completed prior to construction.

Also include:

Contact the property owner and, if applicable, the tenant to arrange for an appointment, at a time convenient to the owner/tenant, to conduct the survey of the structure(s) on each property. This may require that surveys be performed in evenings or on weekends.

Conduct a physical inspection of both the interior and exterior of adjacent buildings and all on-site structures which may be affected by vibratory compaction equipment prior to commencement of construction activities which may impact such structures. As a minimum, all structures at municipal addresses xxxx, xxxx, and xxxx Street/Road (Regional Road/Highway xx) shall be inspected.

Submit two printed copies, and one copy on USB flash drive in PDF format, of a detailed written report complete with both field records and colour photographs identifying the existing condition of all buildings and structures within the area specified. Submit report to the Contract Administrator within 14 calendar days of completing the last inspection. No excavation or other work that may impact adjacent structures shall be commenced until an acceptable written report has been submitted.

Note:

This work shall be performed by a qualified Subcontractor who is a recognized expert in this field and who shall be acceptable to the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor shall submit the name and experience details of their proposed Subcontractor for this work at least one week in advance of commencing work under this item. The Subcontractor for this work shall be accepted by the Contract Administrator prior to commencing work under this item.

Measurement for Payment:

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the actual number of properties surveyed regardless of the number of structures on each property.

For properties which the property owner will not permit an inspection of either the interior or exterior of dwellings/structures on the property, payment shall be made at 50 per cent of the unit price for such properties provided the submitted report fully complies with the requirements of this Special Provision with respect to the portion of the dwelling(s)\structure(s) which the Contractor was permitted by the property owner to inspect.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

No additional payment shall be made for repeated attempts to contact property owners or tenants.

No additional payment shall be made for visits to the site to attempt to conduct inspections.

No additional payment shall be made for a second visit to complete an inspection.

No additional payment shall be made for conducting physical inspections during evenings or on weekends.

No additional payment shall be made for multiple structures or dwellings on a single property.

Item 8.05.02 – Vibration monitoring (provisional)

Also include:

Retain the services of an independent subcontractor that specializes in vibration control, analysis, and soil movement to undertake vibration monitoring.

Provide access to and protect monitoring instruments from damage during execution of the work.

Supply, installation, monitoring, reporting and ultimate removal of battery-operated seismograph(s) capable of measuring vibrations in three orthogonal directions to a limit of 200 millimetre per second (mm/s) at a frequency greater than 10 Hertz (Hz). Seismograph shall also include 24/7 live monitoring and real time transmission of events via email or hosted on a secure server.

Seismograph locations and the number of units required shall be as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Construction vibration levels shall not exceed the following peak particle velocities:

Frequency of Vibration (Hz)	Peak Particle Velocity (mm/s)
Less than 4	8
Between 4 and 10	15
Greater than 10	25

Immediately notify the Contract Administrator and cease construction operations when Peak Particle Velocity (PPV) levels exceed the values noted in the table above. The Contractor shall bear all costs associated with work stoppage. Meet with Contract Administrator and develop a vibration mitigation plan to ensure vibration remains in compliance with the terms of the Contract prior to resuming construction operations.

The seismograph(s) shall be relocated as the work progresses. All costs associated with vibration monitoring equipment relocations are the responsibility of the Contractor.

Obtain baseline vibration readings for at least two weeks prior to construction at a location (or locations) agreed with the Contract Administrator within the project site.

Submit electronic copy of monthly monitoring report within seven days after the end of the month or when requested by the Contract Administrator.

Note:

Seismographs shall be installed and operated by a qualified and trained individual complying with recommended practices as outlined in the International Society of Explosive Engineers’ (ISEE) Field Practice Guidelines for Blasting Seismographs (latest version).

Seismographs shall be physically secured using a mechanical locking mechanism tied to infrastructure such as light poles or hydro poles.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement for payment shall be based on the number of months (and part months at a pro-rated amount) for each Seismograph supplied. The tender quantity shown in the Form of Tender is based on supplying xx Seismographs for xxx weeks each for a total quantity of xxx weeks (xx Seismographs x xxx weeks = xxx weeks).

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

SPEC NOTE: Use Item 8.05.10 only when Regional forces are not completing the construction layout. As-built surveying shall be borne by the Contractor.

Item 8.05.10 – Construction survey

Reference:
OPSS.MUNI 100 General Conditions of Contract, Clause GC 7.02

The second sentence of Paragraph .08 of GC 7.02 shall be deleted and replaced by the following:

Supply one copy of all alignment and grade sheets to the Contract Administrator a minimum of two days in advance of the installation or construction requiring such alignment and grade sheets.

Note:

The Contract Administrator shall provide the Contractor coordinates in NAD83 datum for UTM Zone 17, grade sheets and other design data required to perform construction layout.

The Contractor shall provide notice to the Region of any control points removed and any new control points set-up.

The Contractor shall provide copies of the layout sheets to the Contract Administrator prior to a section of infrastructure being constructed.

The Contractor shall provide access to the site to allow the Region’s surveyors to complete quality assurance checking if desired.

The Contractor shall perform “as-built” surveying in accordance with RMDCS, Design Specifications for Engineering Submissions, Section 11.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for construction surveying shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Item 8.05.11 – Re-establish survey monument

Reference:
Contract Drawings

Include:

Retain an Ontario Land Surveyor (OLS) licenced by the Association of Land Surveyors (AOLS) to supply and install legal survey monuments prior to commencing construction.

Note:

The Region shall determine which survey monuments are to be re-established, under the direction of the OLS.

These survey monuments are for the use of the layout surveyor and the Contract Administrator for checking the installation offsets of both the sanitary sewer and watermain.

This item shall not to be used for the reinstatement or replacement of horizontal and vertical control monumentation owned by the Region of Durham, the City of Pickering/Town of Ajax/Town of Whitby/City of Oshawa/Municipality of Clarington/Township of Uxbridge/Township of Scugog/Township of Brock, the MTO, or other agencies.

Measurement for Payment

For measurement purposes, a count shall be made of the number of survey monuments installed by an OLS.

Basis of Payment

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to complete the work.

The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of all property bars during construction. If any survey monuments are removed or disturbed during construction, they shall be replaced/restored at the Contractor’s expense.

SPEC NOTE: Use the following item for railway flagging and locate requirements for non-microtunnelling projects.

Item 8.40.01 – Canadian Pacific Kansas City (CPKC)/Canadian National (CN) Rail flagging and locates

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx, Work within the Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway (CPKC)/Canadian National Railway (CN) right-of-way
OPSS.MUNI 539
Attachments: (SPEC NOTE: Designer to list out the applicable CPKC/CN Rail construction documentation)

xxxx.

xxxx.

xxxx.

xxxx.

xxxx.

Include:

Coordinate, complete and submit, with all insurance applications for locates and/or flagging for any and all work related to the trenchless sewer/watermain crossings of the CPKC/CN Rail tracks. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Clause for sewer and watermain projects and choose either “sewer” or “watermain”)

Coordinate, complete and submit, with all insurance applications for locates and/or flagging for any and all work related to the Work being performed within or adjacent to the CPKC/CN Rail corridor. (SPEC NOTE: Use this Clause for structural or road reconstruction projects)

Note:

Payment for CPKC/CN Rail flagging shall be by time in hours and payment shall be made directly to CPKC/CN Rail from the Regional Municipality of Durham.

Payment for CPKC/CN Rail locates shall be by time in hours and payment shall be made directly to CPKC/CN Rail from the Regional Municipality of Durham.

Measurement of Payment:

Payment for Contractor coordination of CPKC/CN Railway flagging and locate shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment shall be pro-rated by the Contract Administrator based on the progress of work:

50 per cent of this item is attributed to the sewer crossing of the CPKC/CN tracks.

50 per cent of this item is attributed to the watermain crossing of the CPKC/CN tracks.

SPEC NOTE:

1. Use Basis of Payment Clause .2 and subclauses .2.1 and .2.2 for sewer and watermain projects only. Otherwise remove.

2. Designer to choose the applicable Basis of Payment subclause (.2.1 or .2.2) for sewer and watermain projects.

Microtunnelling

Definitions:

Carrier Pipe: The pipe inside the Product pipe, which carries the product such as water or wastewater. For the purpose of this contract, shall mean the watermain pipe or sewer pipe inside the Product pipe.

Casing Spacers: Casing Spacers center the Carrier pipe inside the Product pipe and maintains the Carrier pipe to correct line and grade.

Conditioning Agents: Bentonite slurry, polymers, surfactants, foam and soda ash, or other additives used as an aid in performing the microtunnelling excavation.

Contractor’s Professional Engineer: Means the Professional Engineer retained by the Contractor who produces the Contractor's Design and Working Drawings. The Contractor’s Engineer shall be licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario.

Engineer: The Contract Administrator or its authorized representative(s).

Earth Pressure Balance Shield: A shield on a microtunnel boring machine that uses the excavated soil to provide continuous face support that counteracts the soil and groundwater pressure at the tunnel face.

Excavation: Excavation shall include removal of natural soil, large boulders, cobbles and fill regardless of means/methods necessary including break up of materials into a manageable size for removal.

External Annular Space: The void outside of the Product pipe within the surrounding soil.

External Annular Space Grouting: Grouting of the external annular space to mitigate settlement and reduce long-term embedment loads on the pipe.

Environmentally Sensitive Area (ESA): Areas adjacent to construction that are off limits to the Contractor as specified elsewhere in the Contract.

Fill: Man-made mixture of previously placed/handled materials such as sand, clay, silt, gravel, boulders, broken rock, stone masonry, concrete, construction, other debris, and other manufactured materials placed in an excavation or other area to raise the surface elevation.

Geotechnical Report: Geotechnical Report which is included in the Contract Documents. The Geotechnical Report provides information on the known geotechnical subsurface conditions.

SPEC NOTE:
Designer to include definitions and distinguish between Geotechnical Baseline Report and Geotechnical Data Report, if these reports are included in the Contract Documents.

Grouting: Injection of grout into the annular spaces (internal or external).

Ground Improvement: Means application of various geotechnical techniques that are used to re-engineer existing soils to improve their engineering characteristics. Some of the Ground Improvement techniques may include jet grouting, soil stabilisation, vibro stone columns, etc.

Hydrogeological Report: Hydrogeological Report which is included in the Contract Documents. The Hydrogeological Report assesses the subsurface hydrogeologic and geologic condition of the area and provides developmental suitability and constraints.

Intermediate Jacking Stations (IJS): Series of hydraulic jacks spaced around the pipe circumference and temporarily installed between two pipe segments. The jacks are installed inside a steel casing fabricated to the same outside diameter as the pipe. The stations are used to distribute the thrusting force along the pipe string by dividing the string into independent reaches. Each intermediate jacking station pushes the reach of pipe segments located between that station and the next station forward in the direction of the drive.

Internal Annular Space: The void inside of the Product pipe and between the Carrier pipe and the Product pipe.

Internal Annular Space Grouting: Grouting of the inside of the Product pipe to refusal.

Lubricant: A mixture of water and additives, such as bentonite, polymers, surfactants, and polymers designed to block the pore space on a bore wall and reduce friction in the bore.

Microtunnelling: A method of installing the Product Pipe by jacking the pipe behind a microtunnel boring machine, which is connected to and moved forward by the pipe being installed, generally precluding man entry. Support to the tunnel face is provided by a pressurized earth pressure balance shield or a slurry shield.

Microtunnel Boring Machine (MTBM): Mechanized excavating equipment that provides for pressurized tunnel face support and is remotely controlled, steerable, guided and articulated, connected to, and shoved forward by the Product Pipe being installed, usually precluding man entry.

Microtunnelling Methodology: A written description, together with supporting documentation that defines the Contractor's plans and procedures for microtunnelling operations.

OHSA: Occupational Health and Safety Act of Ontario.

SPEC NOTE:
Indicate the pipe specifications in the Product Pipe definition that is to be jacked directly behind the MTBM.

Product Pipe: The pipe installed by jacking directly behind the MTBM and which the Carrier pipe is installed inside.

Rock: (as per O.Reg 406/19) means a naturally occurring aggregation of one or more naturally occurring mineral that is two millimetres or larger in size or that does not pass the US number 10 sieve.

Shaft: Vertically sided excavation used as entry and/or exit points from which the trenchless pipe installation operation is initiated or directed.

Slurry: A mixture of soil and/or rock cuttings, lubricant, and conditioning agents.

Slurry Shield: A shield with a full-face cutterhead attached to a microtunnel boring machine. Face support is provided by pressurizing slurry inside the cutterhead chamber.

Soil: (as per O.Reg 406/19) means unconsolidated naturally occurring mineral particles and other naturally occurring materials resulting from the natural breakdown of rock or organic matter by physical, chemical or biological processes that are similar than two millimetres in size or that pass the US number 10 sieve.

Tunnelling: For the purpose of this contract, shall mean the same as Microtunnelling.

Work: The total construction and related services required by the Contract Documents.

General Requirements:

Pressurized, closed face, remotely operated microtunnelling equipment shall be used for all microtunnelling work described.

Microtunnelling equipment selected for the project shall be, as a minimum, compatible with the geologic conditions described in the Geotechnical Report, Geotechnical Data Report, Geotechnical Baseline Report.

The Trenchless Contractor or their Engineer, including Project Superintendent and Grouting Supervisor, shall each have a minimum of three similar project experience having similar size, scope, and complexity completed within the last 10 years. (SPEC NOTE: Designer shall indicate the minimum number of similar projects and years of experience for the Contractor specific to each project with microtunnelling component.)

The thrust block for tunnelling equipment shall be constructed perpendicular to the proposed pipe alignment and shall be designed to withstand the maximum jacking pressure to be used, with a factor of safety of at least 2.5, without excessive deflection or displacement.

When crossing beneath Provincial highways/Railways/Regional roadways/local roadways (SPEC NOTE: Identify the type of corridor or location that the microtunnelling will be crossing), trenchless operations shall be carried out continuously (24 hours per day) from the start until the crossing is complete.

Consideration should be given to stabilising the face (using thick slurry for example or other methods) at all times and as soon as possible when the forward motion of the product pipe is halted. The Contractor is solely responsible to maintain stability of the face and to prevent the formation of voids around the product pipe.

At all times, the Contractor must ensure safe access to the site, equipment, control station, and working compound for the Contract Administrator and/or their representatives.

All work must be performed in accordance with Ontario Health Safety Act, Ministry of Labour, Immigration, Training and Skills Development and all applicable Provincial Regulations.

SPEC NOTE:
Designer to provide requirements, if any, for:
1. Anti-floatation specifics when grouting of the internal annular space (around carrier pipe) is completed.
2. Water circulation requirements should PVC be encased in grout to mitigate effect of heat of hydration on plastic pipe products.

Submittals:

All Contractor submittals shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario and stamped as approved by the General Contractor.

Submittals without a seal and stamp will be returned as rejected immediately. The Contractor will not be permitted to start work until all pre-construction submittals are submitted and approved.

Name and experience resumé of the microtunnelling superintendent and MTBM operators, including the Contractor’s notification procedure to the Contract Administrator for substituting or supplementing staff.

Microtunnelling methodology, including a detailed description of the MTBM, its equipment and procedures to be employed, laser/theodolite system, site plan, dewatering plans, and contingency plans for obstructions and other items.

Provide manufacturer’s literature describing, in detail, the microtunnelling system to be used including machine type, spoil removal system, guidance system, and provisions for injecting pipe lubricants. Describe machine capabilities and procedures for exerting a stabilizing pressure at the tunnel heading and minimizing loss of ground. Indicate range of face pressures anticipated to be required to stabilize the heading, and the methods and equipment to be used to monitor and control pressures. Provide descriptions of minimum of three projects within the last 10 years on which this system has been successfully used including names, addresses, and telephone numbers of owner’s representatives for these projects as well as length, diameter, and pipe material used.

Shop drawings and calculations of Shaft designs, including details of the shaft construction methodology, shaft sealing methodology, shaft eye seals (entry/exit seals), and details of ground improvement.

Shop drawings of the product pipe, carrier pipe, lubrication pipes, pipe support/bracing, intermediate jacking stations, joint packer material and dimensions, pipe joint seals, casing spacer system, installation procedure of spacer system, and details of pipe/MTBM interface, pipe/intermediate jacking station interface, joint packer material and dimensions, joint type and dimensions, and fabrication tolerances.

Shop drawings detailing how the vertical drop section of the pipe within the shaft footprint will be braced and supported both during pipe commissioning (e.g., filling, pressure testing, disinfection, and flushing) and during shaft backfilling.

SPEC NOTE: Delete Clause .6 in its entirety if there is no vertical drop section at the shaft footprint.

A description of the alignment control and steering systems. Provide manufacturer’s literature, drawings showing set-up and support provisions, and other details for laser. Submit a description of surveying methods to set laser positions and a description of procedures to check laser and reset or realign laser during construction. Confirm that these systems can achieve the required pipeline line and grade within the specified tolerances. Submit name and resumé of surveyor who will be responsible for setting survey control and laser for pipe installation.

A description of capacity, number, and arrangement of main jacks. Provide details of thrust ring, jacking controls, and pressure gauges. Provide an estimate of the maximum jacking force expected to be required to complete each drive.

Thrust block and jacking frame design and details. Submit calculations demonstrating that the thrust block can transfer the maximum planned forces developed by the mains jacks to the ground without excessive movements.

Details of MTBM slurry design, spoil and slurry handling, separation, spoil treatment, transport, and disposal equipment and procedures including details of the slurry additives, slurry separation plant equipment and its operation, and the location of slurry and spoil disposal sites. Provide written documentation from the disposal site(s) indicating that they will accept the spoil or slurry and are in compliance with Provincial regulations.

Submit shop drawings that include the soil management plan for temporary storage of soil material, estimated tunnel spoil volumes calculated to determine expected soil disposal volumes (with clear and detailed calculations), expected number of trucks entering and leaving the site, and location(s) where soil will be disposed.

Submit the proposed grout and lubricant mix design, description of the lubricant to be used for lubricating the Product Pipe, and procedure for grouting to be used for filling of internal and external annular spaces. The submission shall also detail the following:

Proposed grout type and designation, grout mix and constituents and proportions, weight and volume, initial set time of grout and compressive strength. Parging grout shall consist of a mixture of one part Portland cement conforming to the requirements of CAN/CSA A5-93 and two parts mortar sand conforming to OPSS.MUNI 1004 wetted with only sufficient water to make the mixture plastic.

Description of grouting equipment and layout of equipment during grouting operations.

Calibration certificates for gauges, flow meters, and regulators.

Anticipated maximum applied pressure and estimated volume of grout per pipe or casing segment, both for internal and external annular space, shall be calculated and provided as part of the submittal.

Procedure to fill the external annular space to mitigate settlement and reduce long-term embedment loads on the pipe. The procedure shall include a schematic, equipment, layout, injection pressures, and accompanying design calculations.

Number of required grout pumps, location and size of grout port(s), location of breather port(s), locations where sample are taken, and details of watertight bulkheads.

Material Safety Data Sheets for grout mix additives.

Estimated injection volumes and pressures, supported by calculations, for the anticipated soil conditions as wells as control measures to prevent damage to the pipe or casing.

A record confirming the grout mix used, applied grout pressures, volumes used, up-to-date calibration certificated records, and any other quality data.

A detailed description of all the pipe welding processes that will be involved in the microtunnelling operation including the welding strength and procedures to be employed. Qualifications and years of experience of personnel completing welding of the product pipe. Submittal shall also include the company and personnel who will be completing quality control inspection of welds, complete with relevant qualifications. The company and personnel performing the welding work shall be certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau under requirements of CSA W47.1.

Schedule for microtunnelling work identifying all major construction activities as independent items. The schedule shall include, as a minimum, the following activities: mobilization, ground improvement, permeation grouting, jet grouting etc., shaft excavation method and excavation support; jacking equipment set-up, microtunnelling for each drive, site restoration, cleanup, and demobilization. The schedule shall also include the working hours for each activity, and a written description of the construction methods and equipment, to be employed in completing each of the work activities shown on the schedule. The schedule shall be reviewed with the Engineer and be updated and resubmitted by the Contractor on a monthly basis.

Details of site security and safety equipment/ barricades, lighting, ventilation, and electrical systems.

A safety plan for the microtunnelling operations including provisions for lighting, ventilation, and electrical system safeguards. Provide name of the site safety representative responsible for implementing safety program.

Provide a Contractor’s work plan including the Geotechnical aspects identifying all hazards and methods proposed to mitigate interference to the roadway / highway corridor / railway corridor, such as heave, settlement, obstructions, and changes of alignment/profile. The work plan shall also include a contingent plan for frac-out, heave, settlement, etc., and a provision for compensation grouting around and over the tunnel and for grouting around the outside of any temporary or permanent ground support systems as required.

Provide an emergency response plan outlining steps to be implemented in the event of failure of tunnelling, in scenarios, including but not limited to: excessive ground loss, settlement, collapse, heave, obstructions, mechanical failure of the MTBM, inability of the machine to advance. The response plan shall also include Contractor contacts, notification protocol, and response procedure when corridors owned by railway / highway / other road authorities that are impacted.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to list additional submittal requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

Submittal Schedule:

All Contractor pre-construction submittals listed under Clause 3, Submittals shall be submitted for Contract Administrator’s review and approval a minimum of four weeks prior to commencing any work related to microtunnelling operations. The documentation must be detailed, precise, and clearly oriented to demonstrate that the designs, specifications, and methods of operation will meet the requirements of the contract.

Submittals without a seal and stamp will be returned as rejected immediately. The Contractor will not be permitted to start work until all pre-construction submittals are submitted and approved.

Any incomplete submission or failure to submit the documents within the time limit will result in the start of tunnelling operation to delay until supplied at the Contractor’s sole expense.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to provide the time frame for the Contractor’s submittals prior to start of microtunnelling.

The following submittal schedules shall be followed:

Table 4.1 Submittal Schedule Summary

Pre-Construction Submittals

Submittal Summary	Schedule
Name and experience resume of the microtunnelling superintendent and MTBM operators. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Microtunnelling methodology, including a detailed description of the MTBM, its equipment and procedure, laser/theodolite system, etc. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Manufacture’s literature describing the microtunnelling system; describe machine capabilities and procedures for exerting a stabilizing pressure; description of past projects on which this system has been successfully used. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Shop drawings and calculations of Shaft designs, including details of shaft construction, shaft sealing methodologies, etc. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Shop drawings of the product pipe, carrier pipe, lubrication pipes, casing spacer system, installation procedure of spacer system, joint type and dimensions, etc. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Shop drawings detailing how the vertical drop section of the pipe within the shaft footprint will be braced and supported. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Description of the alignment control and steering systems; description of procedures to check laser and reset or realign laser during construction; name and resume of surveyor responsible for setting survey control and laser for pipe installation, etc. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Description of main jacks, details of thrust ring, jacking control, etc. Estimate of the maximum jacking force anticipated to complete the drive. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Thrust block and jacking frame design and details. Calculations of the transferring of maximum planned forces to the ground without excessive movements. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Details of MTBM slurry design, slurry separation plant, disposal, etc. Written documentation from the disposal site(s) that is accepting the spoil or slurry. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Shop drawings that include the soil management plan for temporary storage of soil material, expected tunnel spoil volumes calculated to determine expected soil disposal volumes (with clear and detailed calculations), expected number of trucks entering and leaving the site, and location(s) where soil will be disposed. Refer to Soil Management section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Details of proposed grout and designation, lubrication mix design, grouting equipment, procedure for grouting annular spaces, anticipated maximum applied pressure, estimated volumes of grout per pipe or casing segment, etc. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Details of all the pipe welding processes involved in the microtunnelling operation. Qualification and years of experience of personnel responsible for welding of the product pipe. Name of the company and personnel completing quality control inspection of welds, complete with relevant qualifications. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Schedule for microtunnelling work identifying all major activities as independent items. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Details of site security and safety equipment/barricades, lighting, ventilation, and electrical systems. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
A safety plan for the microtunnelling operations including provisions for lighting, ventilation, and electrical system safeguards. Name of the site safety representative. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
Contractor’s work plan identifying all hazards and methods to mitigate, such as heave, settlement, etc. Include a contingent plan for frac-out, heave, settlement, etc., and a provision for compensation grouting. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation
An emergency response plan outlining steps to be implemented in the event of failure of tunnelling including all the contact information, notification protocols, etc. Refer to Submittals section for details	Four weeks prior to commencing any works for microtunnelling operation

During-Construction Submittals

Submittal Summary	Schedule
The MTBM data including but not limited to: thrust force, slurry face pressure, cutterhead torque, rate of advance, line and grade deviation, roll, inclination, steering adjustments, and other pertinent information. Refer to MTBM Requirements section for details	Daily within 24 hours of the work. Weekly report at the end of every work week.
Daily soil management records including determining actual tunnel spoil volumes and comparing it to the theoretical volume, records of trucks removing material off-site, estimated volume of material leaving the site, etc. Refer to Soil Management section for details	Daily within 24 hours of the work.
The jacking pressure data. Refer to Pipe Jacking Equipment Requirements section for details	Daily within 24 hours of the work. Weekly report at the end of every work week.
A Comparison Report comparing the volume of external annular space grout anticipated in the pre-construction submittal versus the actual grout volume injected. Refer to Grouting Requirements section for details	Within 24 hours of completion of the external annular space grouting.
A Comparison Report comparing the volume of internal annular space grouting anticipated in the pre-construction submittal versus the actual grout volume injected. Refer to Grouting Requirements section for details	Within 24 hours of completion of the external annular space grouting.
A weld inspection report. Refer to Welding Requirements details for details	Within five business days of weld inspection by the third party certified inspector.
A daily report including progress of tunnelling for the day, actual and theoretical tunnel spoil volumes for the day including the tunnel boring data, volume of soil disposed off-site, completed with number of trucks and final disposal location(s), etc. Refer to Quality Assurance and Quality Control section for details	Daily within 24 hours of the work.

Post-Construction Submittals

Submittal Summary	Schedule
An as-built survey utilizing closed traverse to establish accurate line, elevation, and stationing, and shall include horizontal offsets from theoretical centreline, vertical offsets to crown and invert measured from theoretical centreline. Refer to As-Built Requirements section for details	Within four weeks of completion of the microtunnelling operation.

Microtunnel Boring Machine (MTBM) Requirements:

The tunnel excavation systems utilized shall be capable of handling the various anticipated ground conditions. The MTBM shall include the following features as a minimum:

MTBM shall be capable of balancing earth and ground water pressures achieved by the use of slurry pressures or by maintaining a pressurized mass of excavated soil against the microtunnel face. The system shall be capable of any adjustment required to maintain face stability for anticipated soil conditions. The earth and groundwater pressure at the face shall be controlled by the use of variable flow slurry pumping system, pressure control valves and a minimum of two flow meters, one on the supply side and one on the return side.

Capability to fully support the face during periods of excavation and periods of shutdown to maintain face stability, control of ground water and prevent uncontrolled ground loss ahead of and around the machine. The MTBM shall have the capability of measuring and controlling the earth pressure at the face to maintain face stability for the anticipated site ground conditions, and shall monitor and continuously balance the soil and groundwater pressure to prevent loss of slurry or uncontrolled soil and groundwater inflow.

Sufficient torque and speed for efficient operation through the anticipated ground conditions and shall be capable of being rotated clockwise and counter-clockwise to adjust for rolling effects.

The MTBM shall have full directional guidance capabilities to maintain line and grade.

A laser/theodolite system and a roll indicator capable of accurately monitoring the location, attitude, and orientation of the MTBM to permit continuous control, monitoring, and setting of line and grade.

MTBM shall be equipped with monitoring and recording equipment for documentation of jacking and intermediate jacking loads and thrust forces, start and stop times, rate of advance, position (heading station and MTBM orientation), line and grade deviation, cutting head torque and speed, steering cylinder pressures and locations, pressure and volume and location of lubricant pumped, pressure of the slurry and earth pressure balance at the face, and slurry flow rates, generalized description of excavated muck, any obstruction encountered, computed muck volume, ventilation and atmosphere data, and any other pertinent information for each pipe advance.

Submittal: The MTBM data including but not limited to thrust force, slurry face pressure, cutterhead torque, rate of advance, line and grade deviation, roll, inclination, steering adjustments, and other pertinent information shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator within 24 hours of the work and a daily/weekly summary of the work. (SPEC NOTE: Designer to provide the time frame of the MTBM submittal to the Contract Administration during Construction) Failure to provide this data will require the operation of tunnelling to cease until supplied.

The Contractor is alerted that cobbles and boulders are anticipated in the soil deposits at the site. Accordingly, the Contractor shall address the removal of cobbles and boulders in the proposed method of construction. Removal of cobbles shall be expected to be routine and will not be considered cause for obstruction. The Contractor shall immediately inform the Contract Administrator of any obstruction encountered.

MTBM shall be designed to sustain all ground and hydrostatic loads that may be imposed upon it as well as loads imposed by the thrust jacks, steering mechanisms, and other appurtenances.

A watertight seal between the MTBM and the first pipe to prevent ground and groundwater infiltration.

Provide a pipe lubrication system to inject a project specific mixture of bentonite, polymer, and water at MTBM and pipe locations and in quantities as required to minimize pipe friction and jacking forces.

Full capability of meeting the construction needs of the project.

The Contractor is responsible for providing all services and utilities required to complete the works, including hydroelectric supply and/or generators.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to list additional MTBM requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

Soil Management:

Prior to the start of any microtunnel activities, estimated tunnel spoil volumes shall be calculated to determine expected soil disposal volumes. The expected volumes shall be broken-up on a spacing of 25 m intervals along the tunnel alignment with references to the chainage on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall refer to the Geotechnical Report for soil conditions at the microtunnel locations.

Pre-Construction Submittal: Shop drawings that include the soil management plan for temporary storage of soil material, expected volumes (with clear and detailed calculations), expected number of trucks entering and leaving the site, and location(s) where soil will be disposed.

The Contractor shall maintain detailed and accurate soil management records for the entire duration of the project. This will include determining actual tunnel spoil volumes and comparing it to the theoretical volume. Any substantial discrepancy shall be immediately reported to the Contract Administrator. Additionally, the Contractor shall keep daily records of trucks removing material off-site which shall include the time the truck leaves the site, estimated volume of material leaving the site and final disposal location. No material shall be removed off-site, without approval from the Contract Administrator.

During-Construction Submittal: Daily such soil management records including records of trucks removing material off-site.

MTBM Slurry and Slurry Separation Requirements:

The Contractor shall supply all slurry components, including water. The MTBM slurry and slurry separation shall include the following features as a minimum:

Slurry shall be a project specific mixture of bentonite, polymer, and water designed for the ground conditions at the site.

Water for use in slurry, lubricant, and grouting shall be potable water. Contractor shall obtain and pay for water from a suitable potable water source.

Slurry shall be non-toxic and not contaminate the groundwater.

Slurry condition and viscosity shall be monitored and adjusted throughout the microtunnelling operation as required to allow for efficient tunnel excavation. Slurry composition is to be monitored to maintain the slurry weight and viscosity limits required.

Viscosity test shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the Contract Administrator each shift and each reoccurring change made to the viscosity of the slurry mix. Contractor not to continue drilling until recommended viscosity has been achieved.

Contractor shall maintain all records of slurry conditions and viscosity during each drilling shift. Contractor shall immediately notify Contract Administrator of any changes to the slurry viscosity.

The slurry separation plant shall be equipped with mechanical shakers, screens, centrifuges, hydrocyclones, and settling tanks for efficient removal of muck from the slurry at a rate compatible with the anticipated MTBM advance rate.

The slurry separation process employed shall be suited to the size of microtunnel being constructed, the soil type being excavated, rate of excavation advance, and spoil removal, and the workspace available at each work area for operating the plant. Spoil shall be appropriately contained at the site prior to disposal.

Pipe Jacking Equipment Requirements:

The jacking frame and pipe jacking thrust reaction structure shall be designed and constructed by the Contractor. The pipe jacking equipment shall include the following features as a minimum:

A jacking frame with suitable hydraulic jacks capable of successively pushing a string of connected pipes following microtunnel excavation equipment through the ground to the Reception Shaft shall be provided for developing a uniform distribution of jacking forces around the perimeter of the pipe.

The jacking frame shall react against a pipe jacking thrust reaction structure, the thrust reaction face of which shall be vertically and horizontally perpendicular to the pipeline alignment.

Contractor shall ensure, through a detailed survey, that the jacking pipe guide rails are set to the required design alignment. Contractor shall survey guide rails and push ring of the hydraulic jacking system with the hydraulic rams retracted and extending to ensure the hydraulic jacking system is properly aligned and functioning.

The jacking frame and pipe jacking thrust reaction structure shall be designed for capacity equal to the maximum anticipated jacking loads to push the MTBM, continuous pipe string, and ancillary equipment through the ground to the receiving shaft. The jacks shall have pressure limiting devices such that the capacity of the pipe cannot be exceeded.

Submittal: The jacking pressure data shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator within 24 hours of the work and a daily/weekly summary of the work for review. Failure to provide this data will require the operation of tunnelling to cease until supplied.

Intermediate Jacking Stations Requirements:

The Contractor shall install intermediate jacking stations as required to prevent damage to the pipe and jacking/thrust block system and to prevent the MTBM and pipe string from becoming stuck due to side friction. The intermediate jacking station shall include the following features as a minimum:

Intermediate jacking systems shall be of the type that allows jacks to be removed and the pipe to be fully closed within the casing of the intermediate jacking system, or of the type that leaves a steel flange between pipes.

Casing for intermediate jacking stations shall be equipped with seals to prevent soil and groundwater intrusion into the tunnel.

Casing for intermediate jacking stations shall provide corrosion protection that is at least equal to that provided by pipe sleeves.

The outside diameter of the intermediate jacking station shall be as small as possible and less than the MTBM diameter.

Any modifications to the jacking pipe required to accommodate an intermediate jacking station shall be in accordance with approved details.

Shaft Design and Construction Requirements:

The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and construction of all required tunnel launch (entry) and tunnel retrieval (exit) shafts. The shafts design and construction shall include the following features as a minimum:

The shafts shall be constructed such that they are watertight and sized to accommodate all work related to microtunnelling.

Shafts shall be constructed at least 300 mm above surrounding ground to eliminate surface runoff and silt laden water from entering the shafts. Contractor to decide if additional height is required for site safety/fall protection purposes.

Shafts shall be designed and constructed to withstand all loads and forces to be encountered, including but not limited to soil/earth loads, hydrostatic and hydraulic loads, jacking forces, etc.

Shaft supports and shaft watertightness shall not be impaired by pipe jacking operations.

Shaft eye design shall incorporate seals to prevent the ingress of soil, water, slurry and/or pipe lubrications into the shafts during microtunnelling operations.

Upon completion of construction, shafts shall be backfilled from the base of the shaft to a minimum depth of 2.0 m below grade (or as specified on the Contract Drawings) with native backfill/unshrinkable fill/20 MPa concrete. The top 2.0 metres of the shaft structure shall be removed and shall be backfilled with select native backfill/imported granulars and/or topsoil as specified on the Contract Drawings.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Designer to provide the encasing material for the vertical section of the pipe, if present, or MH chamber surround; 20 MPa Concrete, U-Fill, select native backfill, etc.
2. Designer to provide the termination depth of the Unshrinkable Fill (U-Fill) that is to be placed between the encased vertical section material and below the grade.
.3 Designer to provide the backfill material above the U-Fill, as recommended by the Geotech Engineer.
4. Designer to list additional shaft requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

Product Pipe Requirements:

The product pipe shall include the following features as a minimum:

The pipe shall be circular reinforced concrete microtunnel jacking pipe, in accordance with CAN/CSA A257, strength classification 140-D.

SPEC NOTE: List the material and the type of Product Pipe, include any requirements for embedded steel liner, with thickness or pressure rating.

Pipe shall be designed by the manufacturer specifically for this project, for the MTBM proposed, for the anticipated maximum jacking forces to be encountered, and for the soil conditions of the project area.

Pipe joints shall be fully gasketed and sealed and fitted with compression joints suitable for the anticipated forces including groundwater pressures at a minimum of 20 metres of head.

SPEC NOTE: Delete number .4 below in its entirety if Internal Steel Liner is not being used with the product pipe.

Internal Steel Liner of the product pipe shall have a seal, full circumferential weld at each joint, following installation.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to list additional product pipe requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

Grouting Requirements:

Upon completion of the microtunnelling drive, the external annular space between the product pipe and surrounding soil shall be grouted. The external grouting shall include the following features as a minimum:

Notify the Contract Administrator a minimum of 24 hours in advance of grouting operations.

The Contractor shall ensure that the pressures generated during pumping of the grout does not disturb surrounding soil to result in heave or cause settlement.

Pipe to be secured at required grade prior to grouting to prevent movement during the grouting process.

External annular space to be filled with Low-Density closed cell cementitious grout all around (28 day specified strength: max. 1.2 MPa, min. 0.3 MPa). Grouting details to be approved by the pipe manufacturer.

SPEC NOTE: Clarify the grouting type to be used in the Clause (.4) above.

Grout line pressure shall be continuously monitored to confirm maximum pressure is not exceeded.

The Contractor shall provide access to the Contract Administrator and/or their representatives during contact grouting operations to record the pressure gauges, volumetric gauge, and position of the shut-off valve.

The grout shall be pumped into the external annular space using the same ports that were used in the bentonite lubrication process. The size of grout holes shall be minimum of 75 mm diameter at nine o’clock, 12 o’clock, and three o’clock.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to clarify the grout holes size and location in the Clause (.7) above.

Upon completion of the grouting, the holes shall be permanently plugged and finished with concrete to cover the hole.

Submittal: Within 24 hours of completion of the external annular space grouting, the Contractor shall provide a Comparison Report to the Contract Administrator comparing the volume of grout anticipated in the pre-construction submittal versus the actual grout volume injected. Any anomaly must be justified to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Upon installation of the carrier pipe and only after the successful pressure testing completion of the carrier pipe, shall the internal annular space between the product pipe and the carrier pipe be grouted. The grouting shall include the following features as a minimum:

SPEC NOTE: Delete the pressure testing requirement if the carrier pipe is not being tested in the above paragraph.

Internal annular space to be grouted with Low-Density closed cell cementitious grout all around (28 day specified strength: maximum 1.2 MPa, minimum 0.3 MPa). Grouting details to be approved by the pipe manufacturer.

SPEC NOTE: Clarify the grouting type to be used.

Submittal: Within 24 hours of completion of the internal annular space grouting, the Contractor shall provide a Comparison Report to the Contract Administrator comparing the volume of grout anticipated in the pre-construction submittal versus the actual grout volume injected. Any anomaly must be justified to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Welding Requirements:

Upon completion of microtunnel of the product pipe, all joints shall be welded as per pipe manufacturer’s guidelines and recommendations. The welding shall include the following features as a minimum:

The Contractor shall hire a third party certified inspector to complete Quality Assurance and Quality Control on all the pipe welding involved in the microtunnelling work.

SPEC NOTE: If the welding inspection is to be performed by the Region or Region’s Consultant/third party, delete Clause .1 in its entirety.

The certified weld inspector shall have a minimum of two years experience on projects with similar scope and complexity.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Minimum number of years experience for the Weld Inspector to be indicated in the above paragraph.
2. Indicate the need for confined space certification for the Weld Inspector in the above paragraph.

Perform welding in accordance with CSA W59 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

The Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator five working days prior to start of welding.

Submittal: A weld inspection report shall be completed and submitted to the Contract Administrator within five business days of inspection for review.

The inspection report shall confirm whether each weld is acceptable or if there are deficiencies. If there are deficiencies, the report shall outline recommendations on rectifying the deficiencies, which shall be completed by the Contractor. This additional work to rectify any deficiencies shall be reinspected by the third party welding inspector for final approval.

The Contractor shall allow the Contract Administrator (or their designate) access to the site whenever requested to complete their own welding inspection. Upon completion of any rectifications, the Contractor shall either provide confirmation of completion, or provide the Contract Administrator (or their designate) access to the site for further confirmation.

Carrier Pipe Requirements:

SPEC NOTE:
1. Designer to note the type of carrier pipe for the microtunnelling operation is “watermain” and/or “sewer” pipe. and rectify the below Carrier Pipe requirements based on the type of its use. If both watermain and sewer are to be installed via microtunnelling, the designer must separate the carrier pipe spec for each of them.

2. When there is no vertical drop section at the shaft footprint, then remove the below Clauses 2, 4, and 5 in their entirety.

3. Designer to list additional carrier pipe requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPR, MTO, etc.

The carrier pipe installation shall only commence upon acceptance of weld inspection report of the product pipe and after any deficiencies noted have been rectified to the approval of the third party weld inspector. The carrier pipe shall include the following features as a minimum:

All carrier piping within the product pipe shall be supplied with testable restrained joints.

The piping for the vertical drop section, at the shaft footprint, shall be assembled into one unit as part of the manufacturing process with all joints welded.

Pressure testing of the microtunnelled length in accordance with Contractor’s means and methods and pipe manufacturer’s recommended procedures after all pipes are installed and prior to grouting of the internal annular space and/or shaft backfilling.

Pressure testing of the vertical drop section, at the shaft footprint, in accordance with Contractor’s means and methods and pipe manufacturer’s recommended procedures after the vertical drop section is installed and prior to shaft backfilling.

The vertical drop section, at the shaft footprint, shall be braced vertically and horizontally within the shaft prior to backfilling.
As required in the “Submittals” section, the Contractor shall submit a shop drawing, sealed and signed by a Professional Engineer, detailing how the piping within the shaft will be braced and support both during pipe commissioning (e.g., filling, pressure testing, disinfection and flushing) and during shaft infilling.

Microtunnelling Work Execution Requirements:

Contractor is solely responsible for MTBM operations throughout the duration of the project. The Contractor shall be responsible to engage all resources to ensure successful tunnelling operation, including but not limited to, all engineers, technicians, mechanics, and MTBM operators. The Contractor shall provide MTBM operators, accredited by the MTBM manufacturer to provide assistance in all phases of tunnelling (shaft construction and ground improvement, site services, MTBM site assemble, commissioning, mining and tunnel support, installation, grouting, muck removal, MTBM maintenance and repairs, MTBM extraction and relaunching or disassembly after work completion).

Maintain a record of each pipe segment including time, jacking force, and drive length. Inspect each pipe for damage prior to installation. Pipe ends must be undamaged and without any signs of chipping. Defective packing and sealing rings shall be discarded and removed from the site by the Contractor. Joint sleeves shall not show dents, damage, or distortion. Notify the Contract Administrator immediately if any section of pipe is damaged during jacking operations, or at any other time prior to continuing jacking. The damaged pipe shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator at the Contractor’s sole expense.

Ensure that the pressure applied at the tunnel face is maintained at all times between a minimum equal to the sum of groundwater pressure and estimated active earth pressure and a maximum pressure that prevents ground heave and slurry frac-out.

The Contractor shall note that glacial till contains cobbles and boulders. The Contractor is advised to make provisions to allocate risks associated with time and costs to remove or penetrate drilling obstructions, when encountered during drilling operations. This includes but not limited to, the face of the drill and at any point behind the face of the drill.

The Contractor shall conduct Vibration Monitoring at each of the construction shafts during excavation activities at the closest structure to the shaft, or at 30 m from the shaft. Vibrations are to be monitored to ensure that limits are not exceeded that will cause damage to adjacent structure during execution of the work.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Delete the above paragraph in its entirety if vibration monitoring is not required.
2. If vibration monitoring is required, then use Item 8.05.02 in the “General Items” section.

The Contractor shall ensure that all noise generated during any construction related to microtunnelling activities adheres to the City of Pickering, Town of Ajax, Town of Whitby, City of Oshawa, Municipality of Clarington, Township of Uxbridge, Township of Brock, Township of Scugog’s Noise by-law levels. If necessary, the Contractor shall implement noise barriers, insulate equipment(s), or other approved methods to satisfy the requirement. All equipment shall be maintained in an operating condition that prevents unnecessary noise, including but not limited to proper muffler systems, properly secured components, and the lubrication of all moving parts. Idling of equipment shall be restricted to the minimum necessary for the proper performance of the specified work.

The Contractor is also required to conduct Noise Monitoring at each of the construction shafts during excavation activities at the closest structure to the shaft, or at 30 m from the shaft.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Delete the above paragraph in its entirety if noise monitoring is not required.
2. If noise monitoring is required, Designer may add a separate tender item and list requirements and qualification of monitoring company.

No gasoline powered equipment shall be permitted in the shafts. Diesel, electric, hydraulic, and air powered equipment is acceptable, subject to applicable Municipal, Regional, and Provincial regulations.

Conduct all operations such that trucks and other construction vehicles do not create a dust nuisance in the streets and adjacent properties. The Contractor shall promptly cleanup, remove, and dispose off any spoil and slurry spillage.

As-Built Requirements:

Within four weeks (SPEC NOTE: Designer to provide the as-built survey submission timeframe) of completion of the microtunnelling operation, the Contractor shall provide an as-built survey utilizing closed traverse to establish accurate line, elevation, and stationing, and shall include horizontal offsets from theoretical centreline, vertical offsets to crown and invert measured from theoretical centerline. Refer to the RMDCS, Design Specifications for Engineering Submission, Section 11 for additional as-built requirements.

Quality Assurance and Quality Control:

Tolerance: The position of the internal face of any part of the tunnel shall not deviate from that detailed in the Contract Drawings by more than 75 mm horizontally, and 50 mm vertically.

Water shall be free draining between any two points at the pipe invert. No reverse grades will be allowed. (SPEC NOTE: For sewer pipe installation, Designer shall identify the tolerance(s).

Contractor shall provide safe access to every part of the site and at all times to observe Contractor’s equipment by the Contract Administrator and/or by their representatives upon request.

Contractor shall provide the Contract Administrator a daily report which includes the following items:

Progress of tunnelling for the day.

Actual and theoretical tunnel spoil volumes for the day including the tunnel boring data.

Any unusual variance in excavated material to be reported and documented immediately.

Volume of soil disposed off-site, complete with number of trucks and final disposal location(s). The Region’s inspector must be present to measure removals from site. No material shall be removed without prior approval of the Contract Administrator.

Outlining any deviations from approved plans with rationale for the taking measures out of compliance.

Encountered any unexpected ground conditions or other issues that arise.

Confirmation that proposed tunnelling is proceeding as per approved plans and is expected to continue. If this is not the case, the Contractor shall provide information and details of proposed tunnelling methodology.

Any pertinent photographs.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to list additional QA/QC requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

Settlement Monitoring:

Refer also to the paid Item 9.03.01 – Settlement monitoring within this document.

Definitions:

Existing Surface Monitoring Points: Instrumentation previously installed shall be used to monitor vertical deformation at or near an existing utility.

Deep Settlement Point: Used to monitor vertical deformations at depths below two metres from the surface. The deep settlement point is anchored at a predefined depth with either a mechanical anchor or concrete with the upper portion of the instrument sleeved so that it may move freely.

Shallow Monitoring Point: Used to monitor vertical deformations within two metres of ground surface. A shallow settlement point can be similar to the deep settlement point or may be a driven rod.

Surface Monitoring Array: Used to monitor vertical and horizontal deformation at or near the ground surface. Surface Monitoring Arrays shall consist of a combination of Surface Monitoring Points crossing the tunnel alignment. Protection and identification shall be consistent with the requirements for Surface Monitoring Points.

Surface Monitoring Point: Used to monitor vertical deformation at the ground surface. Lockable traffic box covers when located in streets, sidewalks or other locations where public access is likely, shall protect surface monitoring points. Locations shall be clearly identified.

Review Level: Level of instrumentation reading(s) at which the Consultant and the Contractor assess the necessity of modifying the method, rate, or sequence of construction.

Alert Level: Alert Level represents the maximum permissible ground and structure movement due to activities associated with the Construction of the Work.

General Requirements:

All surveying to be completed under the supervision of a practicing Ontario Land Surveyor (OLS) retained by the Contractor, with survey monitored in UTM NAD 83 Zone 17 geodetic coordinates for site layout.

The Contractor shall install and maintain the instruments at locations as shown on the Contract Drawings and to the satisfaction to the Contract Administrator. Adjustments to instrument locations must be approved, in advance by the Contract Administrator.

Contractor shall only use the materials for settlement monitoring as approved by the Contract Administrator.

Materials: Cement grout (35 MPa at 28 Days).

The Contractor shall maintain and protect new and existing instrumentation.

Damaged or non-functional instruments shall be replaced within 48 hours to ensure uninterrupted reading schedules. Each replacement instrument must be baselined. Baselining begins immediately after replacement.

All products remaining in contact with the ground shall be non-hazardous and either inert or biodegradable.

All instruments shall be abandoned by the Contractor and left in place upon completion of the Microtunnelling Work.

The Contractor shall provide access to the Contract Administrator and/or their representatives to perform monitoring at the instrumentation locations at all times during Construction.

Baseline Measurements:

The Contractor shall install the settlement monitoring points and take baseline measurements before commencing any work related to microtunnelling on the site. The measurement readings shall be taken at least three times on three separate days. The Contractor shall submit a Quality Control Report confirming that the monitoring instruments are installed within the specified tolerance, refer to the Quality Assurance and Quality Control section for details. The baseline measurements shall be completed at the timing described in Table 4.2 below:

Table 4.2 Pre-Crossing Settlement Monitoring Installation
and Baseline Measurements

Measurement	Schedule
Installation of Settlement Monitoring Points	14 days prior to commencing any work related to Microtunnelling.
Baseline Measurements	Five Working Days prior to installation of settlement monitoring points.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to clarify the minimum baseline measurements frequency and schedule within Table 4.2.

Submittals:

Pre-Tunnelling Submittal:

The Contractor shall provide the following listed submittals prior to commencing any work related to Microtunnelling.

All Contractor submittals shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario and stamped as approved by the General Contractor. Submittals without a seal and stamp will be returned as rejected.

Name and experience resume of the Contractor’s instrumentation installer responsible for furnishing, installing, and maintaining all instrumentation as required.

Qualification: The actual installer of the instrumentation shall have installed similar number and types of instruments as those specified herein, on a minimum of two similar projects.

Name and experience resume of the Ontario Land Surveyor (OLS) retained by the Contractor responsible for supervising the survey of settlement monitoring points.

Qualification: The OLS responsible for oversight of the work shall be a registered with The Association of Ontario Land Surveyors (AOLS) and have a minimum of two similar projects survey supervising experience.

Emergency Response Plan (Traffic) detailing how the traffic control will be implemented during the installation and removal of monitoring points.

The name and experience of the traffic control company for the installation of settlement monitoring points retained by the Contractor.

Qualification: the traffic control company shall have a minimum of two similar projects, shall be a traffic specialist/subject matter expert (SME) or employee of trained by “Infrastructure Health and Safety Association with “Traffic Control – Temporary Work Zones or equivalent training.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Designer to modify the submittals based on site specific requirements.
2. Designer to list additional submittal requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

During Tunnelling Submittal:

As soon as the tunnelling activity begins, the Contractor shall survey all monitoring points two times per shift, including during shutdown periods and weekends, however, more frequent monitoring (up to every four hours) may be required by the Contract Administrator should visual or machine observations dictate. This monitoring routine shall continue until the tunnelling activity has completed.

The Contractor shall provide the following submittal daily/weekly:

Survey Results, including a graphical representation of survey results relative to specified Review/Alert Level.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Designer to clarify the associated frequencies (above) related to monitoring.

2.Designer to list additional During Tunnelling Submittal requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

Post-Tunnelling Submittal:

Contractor to submit a complete report of all the settlement readings at the end of the project. This report shall also include a map illustrating the locations of all settlement monitoring points.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Designer to list post tunnelling settlement monitoring survey requirements and submittals.
2. Designer to list additional Post-Tunnelling Submittal requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKCKC MTO, etc.

Submittal Schedule:

All Contractor submittals listed under the “Submittals” section shall be submitted for Contract Administrator’s review and approval as per the following schedule:

Table 4.3 Pre-Tunnelling Submittal Schedule

Submittal	Timeframe
Qualification of the Contractor’s instrumentation installer	20 working days prior to installation of settlement monitoring points.
Emergency Response Plan (Traffic)	20 working days prior to installation of settlement monitoring points.
Qualification of the Traffic Control Company	20 working days prior to installation of settlement monitoring points.
Quality Control Report confirming the location of Monitoring Points are installed within the specified tolerance	Within one working day upon installing the Monitoring Points
Baseline Measurement Readings	Within one working day upon taking the baseline measurements

Table 4.4 During Tunnelling Submittal Schedule

Submittal	Timeframe
Survey Results, including a graphical representation of survey results relative to specified Review/Alert Level	Within 24 hours (or sooner) of surveying.
Survey Results if the Review/Alert Level is exceeded	Within two hours.

Post-Tunnelling Submittal Schedule:

A complete report of all the settlement readings shall be submitted within five Working Days after completion of the microtunnelling operation.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Designer to update Table 4.3 as required.

2.Designer to provide post-tunnelling settlement monitoring survey submittal schedule.

Surface Preparation and Drilling for Settlement Monitoring Instruments:

Prepare specific areas for instrumentation by chipping with pneumatic hammer, cleaning with an air water jet, as required, or other means acceptable to the Contract Administrator.

Final finish in roadways, sidewalks, or areas directed by the Contract Administrator shall be completed by applying neat cement paste, grout, or other materials as directed by the Region’s Consultant.

Drill holes in concrete, asphalt, and soil, as required, for installation of instruments.

Holes which according to the Contract Administrator are unsatisfactory due to misalignment or other irregularities shall be redrilled as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Abandoned holes shall be backfilled with cement grout to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Prior to installing any monitoring point (instrument) through drill casing or augers, flush holes to remove all cuttings, debris, and all material adhering to inside of casing or augers.

Whenever withdrawing drill casing or augers during instrument installation in a borehole, care shall be taken to minimize the length of unsupported borehole and the rate of casing or auger withdrawal. Withdraw the casing or auger without rotation.

Casing or auger may be omitted, if accepted by the Contract Administrator, only where it can be shown that instrument installation without casing or auger will not cause collapse of borehole or in any way adversely affect instrument installation.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to list additional Surface Preparation and Drilling requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

Installation of Settlement Monitoring Points:

The Contractor shall not begin excavation and or tunnelling until the pre-tunnelling submittals are reviewed/approved and without written direction from the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor is required to place the monitoring points within 0.100 m from centerline of the tunnel alignment left or right.

Station to be determined in the field with the Contract Administrator based on the wheel path, etc.

The Contractor shall only install the following monitoring instrumentation:

Surface Monitoring Points:

Surface monitoring points shall be installed at locations and in accordance with the details indicated on the Contract Drawings.

Grout anchors with the cement grout in accordance with the details shown on the Contract Drawings. Backfill boreholes as specified on the Contract Drawings.

Install protective lockable traffic covers as specified on the Contract Drawings.

Shallow Monitoring Points:

Shallow monitoring points shall be installed at locations shown and in accordance with the Contract Drawings.

Deep Settlement Points:

Deep Monitoring Points shall be installed at locations shown and in accordance with the Contract Drawings.

Contractor shall be aware of and record the presence of cobbles and high groundwater levels during the installation of deep settlement point.

Monitoring:

Survey data shall be retrieved by a registered Ontario Land Surveyor (OLS) with the AOLS and submitted to the Consultant for review and evaluation within 24 hours, or immediately within two hours when movement meets or exceeds the Review/Alert limits for any point.

The review and alert levels are as follows:

Review Level = 10 mm.

Alert level = 15 mm.

If monitoring instrumentation indicates that ground movement reaches the review levels specified, the Contract Administrator will inform the Contractor to immediately:

Adjust excavation methods to reduce the loss of ground using such acceptable methods as are applicable for the tunnel method used, including adjustments to face pressure, foam and conditioner reproportioning, progress rates, segment erection methods, backfill grout operations, and any other operational measures required.

Meet with the Contract Administrator to discuss the effectiveness of adjustments made to the excavation process and operation.

Submit a formal plan that states actions that will be implemented to ensure that the Alert Level is not reached.

For critical structures, furnish, and install additional monitoring instrumentation as required and instructed by the Contract Administrator.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to list additional monitoring requirements if review level is achieved that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

The Contract Administrator may instruct the Contractor to stop tunnel excavation and make the site secure.

Inspect affected facilities and structures and perform corrective and restorative measures acceptable to the Contract Administrator.

Institute corrective action(s) to reduce ground movement to below alert level.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to list additional monitoring requirements if alert level is achieved that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

Damage to Existing Utilities/Structures:

The Contractor shall obtain the necessary drawings and perform any necessary subsurface investigations in order to determine the exact number and location of all existing utility services, structures, underground pipes, cables, and other similar items.

The Contractor shall take the necessary steps to ensure that no damage is caused to existing structures, buildings, foundations, roads, sidewalks, property, utility services, and other similar items during the progress of the work.

If any damage is caused, the Contractor shall repair and make good such damage at the Contractor’s own expense within a reasonable time (as determined by the Contract Administrator and to the complete satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Decommissioning Settlement Points:

The Contractor is responsible for decommissioning settlement monitoring points following the establishment of stable ground conditions.

The inground settlement points shall be decommissioned by removing the buried steel bar and associated protective cover, fully grouting (cement/bentonite grout) the buried PVC sleeve and repairing/patching the surface to original conditions.

Quality Assurance and Quality Control:

Tolerance: The monitoring instruments shall be placed within 0.100 m from centerline of the tunnel alignment left or right.

The Contractor shall provide a Quality Control Report confirming that the monitoring instruments are installed within the specified tolerance from the centerline and identify if/where deviances are noted. If any of the settlement monitoring points is not within the specified tolerance of 0.100 m from the centerline, the Contract Administrator reserves the right to order the Contractor to rectify, re-establish baseline monitoring readings (three separate days) for those points and resubmit to the Contract Administrator for review.

The Contractor shall not begin excavation and or tunnelling until the pre-tunnelling submittals are reviewed/approved and without written direction from the Contract Administrator.

Quality Control shall be completed by the Contractor for settlement monitoring scope. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the settlement monitoring points installed along tunnel alignment are within the tolerance range provided.

Locations and types of geotechnical instruments shown on the Contract Drawings represent the minimum instrumentation required to be installed as part of the work. The Contractor shall determine if the minimum program of instrumentation is sufficient to ensure the safety of personnel and the work.

All monitoring points shown on the Contract Drawings shall be considered approximate and shall be confirmed in the field prior to installation and construction.

The Contract Administrator may perform additional measurements. The Contractor shall provide all access and logistics required for measurements undertaken by the Contract Administrator at the time that the Contractor’s measurements are performed.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to list additional QA/QC requirements that may be required by the third party(ies) such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

Microtunnelling Items

SPEC NOTE:
1. Designer to add separate items for site preparation and/or restoration of tunnelling laydown/working areas beyond open cut trenching limits, as appropriate for the Contract.
2. Designer to add specific separate items as may be required, such as, Railway Flagging, Over/Extra Traffic Control, etc.

Reference:

Construct all pipes and appurtenances according to Regional Municipality of Durham Construction Specifications for Regional Services - Revised April 202x.

RMDCS Section 02240 – Dewatering.

Contract Drawings and Standard Details for Contract D202x-xx.

Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – General.

Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause x – Surface restoration.

OPSS.MUNI 415 Construction Specification for Pipeline Installation by Tunnelling.

OPSS.MUNI 1004 Material Specification for Aggregates – Miscellaneous.

Canadian Standards Association Standards:

CAN/CSA A5-93 Portland Cement.

CSA W47.1 Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures.

CSA W48 Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding.

CSA W59 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)

American Society of Civil Engineers:

ASCE 27-00 Standard Practice for Direct Design of Precast Concrete Pipe for Jacking in Trenchless Construction.

Cl/ASCE 36-01 Standard Construction Guidelines for Microtunnelling.

Item 9.01.01 – Shaft design and construction – proposed tunnel launch shaft

Item 9.01.02 – Shaft design and construction – proposed tunnel retrieval shaft

SPEC NOTE: When multiple launch and retrieval shafts are proposed, then use separate tender item for each shaft. For example, Item 9.01.01.A, 9.01.01.B, 9.02.A, 9.01.02.B, etc.

Also include:

Contractor to install hoarding or fast fence complete with silt fence, and/or any other requirements as per the Contract Drawings to enclose the Shaft Working Area.

Contractor to provide hydro electric supply and/or generator or obtain power drop and all other required equipment to support shaft installation, maintenance, and decommissioning operations.

Mobilization and demobilization of all materials to and from the site.

Excavation and removal of soil, boulders, and shale bedrock as required.

Supply and maintain all additional equipment as required, including but not limited to Flood Lights, to facilitate continuous 24 hour construction operation.

Demolition, removal of excess soil/rock material and disposal off-site of shafts below grade as prescribed by Contract Documents. Contractor to arrange disposal of excess excavated soil and rock material. Contractor to remove and dispose all excess excavated materials off-site in compliance with with O.Reg. 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to clarify if contaminated soil is expected at the shaft construction site and include a separate payment item.

Topsoil shall be stored within the working area.

Damaged or removed trees must be replaced at the sole expense of the Contractor. Replace trees with similar size and species or as approved by Contract Administrator.

Permanently restore all areas impacted by the installation of the shafts in accordance with Special Provisions, Clause x and as directed by the Contract Administrator.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for each shaft design and construction shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The Contract Administrator reserves the right to withhold portion or all of payment for this item if the Contractor’s submittals are not current, during and/or post-construction phase.

Progress payments for each individual shaft shall be made as follows:

10 per cent upon submission and approval of all the Submittals.

70 per cent on installation.

20 per cent upon decommissioning, backfilling, and permanent restoration of all affected areas.

Item 9.02.xx – xxx mm diameter product pipe

Also include:

Contractor shall provide hydro-electric supply and/or generator and all other required equipment to support microtunnelling operations.

Contractor shall procure the necessary MTBM equipment and deliver it on-site.

Contractor shall arrange for sampling, testing of excavation spoils from tunnel work, and disposal of excess excavated soil and rock material in accordance with O.Reg 406/19, Reg. 347, and the Soil Rules.

Supply and install xxx mm diameter Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) with xxx mm diameter internal steel liner. (SPEC NOTE: Ensure to add the applicable pipe diameter and type)

All pipe welding. Steel liner to have a sealed, full circumferential weld at each joint, following installation.

Third party certified welding inspector to complete quality assurance and quality control on every weld.

Grouting of all overcut and inside of product pipe (between product and carrier pipe) to refusal with low-density closed cell cementitious grout (28 day specified strength: maximum 1.2 MPa, minimum 0.3 MPa. (SPEC NOTE: Clarify the grouting type to be used) Grouting details to be approved by the pipe manufacturer.

Note:

Rectifying of the welding deficiency and re-inspection of the rectification by the third party welding inspector for final approval shall be at no extra cost to the Owner.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of the product pipe shall be by length of meters, measured horizontally along the centreline of the pipe between shafts.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The Contract Administrator reserves the right to withhold portion or all of payment for this item if the Contractor’s submittals, during and/or post-construction phase, are not up-to-date.

Progress payments for the product pipe shall be made as follows:

10 per cent of its length upon submission and approval of all the Submittals related to the product pipe.

70 per cent of its length upon installation.

10 per cent following the completion of the liner exterior annular space grouting.

The final 10 per cent upon completion and approval of the liner welding by the Contract Administrator.

Item 9.02.xx – xxxx mm diameter carrier pipe

SPEC NOTE:
1. Designer to review the highlighted sections in the below specification to ensure they apply to this project.

2. If both Watermain and Sewer carrier pipes are being constructed under the same contract, then the carrier pipe tender item descriptions shall indicate this. For example: Item 9.02.01 – 1500 mm diameter carrier pipe (watermain); Item 9.02.02 – 900 mm diameter carrier pipe (sanitary sewer).

Reference:
RMDCS Section 02511 and 02530

Also include:

Carrier Pipe: xxxx mm in diameter, C-xxx, Class xx, Concrete Pressure Pipe (CPP). (SPEC NOTE: Specify the size, class, type, and material of the carrier pipe. If different carrier pipes are being constructed, then each pipe will need its own Clause)

Supply and install temporary xx mm diameter bulkheads with 150 mm flanged outlet.

Remove temporary bulkhead after pressure testing, etc. prior to closure piece installation.

Restrain joints in all fill sections.

Provide 19 mm diameter IPT outlets at maximum 366 m intervals for obtaining water samples. Sampling points shall be paid under item 3.06.10.

SPEC NOTE: If the carrier pipe is sanitary sewer (and not watermain), delete Clause.2 to Clause .5 in their entirety.

Casing spacers (minimum three per pipe length) to maintain pipe to correct line and grade during grouting.

Cathodic protection and tracer wire as per RMDCS 201.030 and S-220.010.

Measurement for Payment:

Measurement of the carrier pipe shall be by length of meters, measured horizontally along the centerline of the pipe between shafts.

SPEC NOTE:
Designer to clarify if the carrier pipe inside the footprints of the shafts will be paid from the applicable Watermain/Sanitary Sewer tender item OR from the carrier pipe tender item.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The Contract Administrator reserves the right to withhold portion or all of payment for this item if the Contractor’s submittals, during and/or post-construction phase, are not up-to-date.

SPEC NOTE: If the Carrier Pipe is a Watermain, then use the following. Designer is responsible to indicate the percentages:

Progress payments for the watermain carrier pipe shall be made as follows:

xx per cent of its length upon installation.

xx per cent following passing of pressure test.

The final xx per cent following completion of grouting of internal annular space within the tunnel.

SPEC NOTE: If the Carrier Pipe is a Sanitary Sewer, then use the following. Designer is responsible to indicate the percentages:

Progress payments for the sanitary sewer carrier pipe shall be made as follows:

xx per cent of its length upon installation.

xx per cent following passing of pressure test. (SPEC NOTE: This Clause is for forcemains only)

The final xx per cent following completion of grouting of internal annular space within the tunnel.

Item 9.03.01 – Settlement monitoring

Reference:
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx, Work within the Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway (CPKC)/Canadian National Railway (CN) right-of-way

Also include:

Supplying, installing, and maintaining instrumentation necessary to conduct monitoring of surface and subsurface conditions and earth, utility, and structure movements during tunnel and shaft construction.

Monitoring of settlement points.

Coordination with the third party(ies) for the tunnel crossing that may be required such as coordination with CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc.

Adhering to all of the conditions described in the third party’s(s’) permit.

Applying for a separate permit that may be required by the third party for installing and monitoring settlement points.

Preparing an Emergency Response Plan (traffic), retaining a traffic control company for the installation of settlement monitoring points, and deploying the same company, if required, due to an issue during construction.

SPEC NOTE:
1. Clarify if the tunnelling site requires, coordination, permit, etc from a third party such as CNR, CPKC, MTO, etc. If not, Designer shall delete Clauses .3, .4, and .5 in their entirety.
2. Clarify if an Emergency Response Plan (traffic) and retaining a traffic control company is required for the construction site. If not, Designer shall delete Clause .6 in its entirety.

The Contractor shall provide all necessary traffic control measures as applicable in order to carry out the monitoring.

Decommissioning of settlement points.

Note:

Rectifying drill holes for installation of instruments and backfilling abandoned holes with concrete grout to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

In case where Alert Level is reached for any point, the Contractor must bear all the cost associated with the necessary remedial work, and the construction delays until the Contract Administrator is satisfied that pipe installation can proceed without endangering the travelling public.

Measurement for Payment:

Payment for settlement monitoring shall be lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

The Contract Administrator reserves the right to withhold portion or all of payment for this item if the Contractor’s submittals, during and/or post-construction phase, are not up-to-date.

Progress payments for the settlement monitoring shall be made as follows:

10 per cent upon submission and approval of all the Submittals related to the pre-tunnelling submittals.

20 per cent upon installation and baselining.

50 per cent pro-rated for the duration of tunnelling.

The final 20 per cent upon decommissioning of the instrumentations to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Item 9.04.01 – Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway (CPKC)/Canadian National Railway (CN) flagging and locates

Reference:
Contract Drawings
Special Provisions – General Requirements, Clause xx – Work within the Canadian Pacific Kansas City Railway (CPKC)/Canadian National Railway (CN) right-of-way
OPSS.MUNI 539
Attachments: (SPEC NOTE: Designer to list out the applicable CPKC/CN Rail construction documentation)

xxxx.

xxxx.

xxxx.

xxxx.

xxxx.

Include:

Coordinate, complete and submit, with all insurance applications for locates and/or flagging for any and all work related to the trenchless sewer/watermain crossings of the CPKC/CN Rail tracks.

Note:

Payment for CPKC/CN Rail flagging shall be by time in hours and payment shall be made directly to CPKC/CN Rail from the Regional Municipality of Durham.

Payment for CPKC/CN Rail locates shall be by time in hours and payment shall be made directly to CPKC/CN Rail from the Regional Municipality of Durham.

Measurement of Payment:

Payment for Contractor coordination of CPKC/CN Railway flagging and locate shall be by lump sum.

Basis of Payment:

Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to do the work.

Payment shall be pro-rated by the Contract Administrator based on the progress of work:

50 per cent of this item is attributed to the sewer crossing of the CPKC/CN tracks.

50 per cent of this item is attributed to the watermain crossing of the CPKC/CN tracks.

SPEC NOTE: Designer to choose the applicable Basis of Payment subclause.

Attachment 6: Excess Soil Transportation Monthly Summary Report

Contract Number: _____________________

Week of: ___________________________

Hauling Date (yyyy-mm-dd)	Truck Plate Number	Hauling Company	Load Quantity (m3 or metric Tonnes Circle One)	Material Destination (address)	Soil Deposit Date (yyyy-mm-dd)	Excess Soil Transportation Hauler Form Appended? (y/n)**	Dry Soil or Liquid Soil

.1	Append additional report pages, as needed.

.2	If forms are missing, provide a detailed rationale.

Attachment 7: Property Owner’s Release Form for Accepting Excess Soil for Beneficial Reuse (In place of OPSF 180-2)

Contract or Project Number:
Work description:
Reuse Site Address:
Estimated quantity of excess soil to be deposited at the reuse site:
Is the soil to be deposited considered dry soil or liquid soil? If liquid soil, attach instrument allowing deposit (further details required below).
Excess Soil Quality Standards (ESQS), or other site- specific excess soil quality standards, applicable to the reuse site:
Property use of the reuse site for the undertaking for which the excess soil is required:
Beneficial use for which the excess soil is being received:
Expected dates for excess soil receipt:
Characteristics associated with the reuse site or nearby properties that may affect the excess soil quality standards or site-specific excess soil quality standards that apply to the site (e.g., presence of a potable water well, proximity to a water body, wetland or environmentally sensitive area, or presence of shallow bedrock):
If the site is or will be governed by a site-specific instrument, indicate the instrument or public body responsible for issuing the instrument, and any other information relevant to the receipt of excess soil at that site:
Is the instrument attached to this form? If not, explain:
Have any soil management or fill management plans been developed for the reuse site? If yes, please provide details:

I/We __________ being the owner(s) of Lot, ______________________, Concession ___, Township/ Town/ City/ Municipality of _______, and County/Region/District of ______________, confirm my/our acceptance of Excess Soil from the above-noted contract with the above noted quality for placement on my/our property with my/our permission. Soil to be placed at this property shall meet the above-noted ESQS and/or Property-Specific Standards, and will be placed and managed in accordance with the requirements of O.Reg. 406.

Where materials are to be managed for beneficial reuse, I/we agree to be responsible for any subsequent relocation and management of the material so placed.

Where materials are to be managed on a temporary basis, I/we agree that the stockpiles will be removed by (insert date) to (insert final receiving site municipal address or legal description). A copy of the Completed Property Owner’s Release Form for the final receiving site is attached.

I/We hereby release the Owner, Owner’s agents, and the Contractor in respect of activities of the Contractor carried out in accordance with this release.

Reuse Property Owner’s Name (print):
________________________________________

Reuse Property Owner’s Signature:
________________________________________

Contractor’s Name and Field Representative Name (print):
________________________________________

Contractor’s Field Representative Signature:
________________________________________